DIVISION 15 - Amazon S3€¦ · CWS ROCK CREEK OPERATIONS BID SET & MAINTENANCE FACILITY BASIC...

DIVISION 15

CWS ROCK CREEK OPERATIONS BID SET

& MAINTENANCE FACILITY

BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS SECTION 15010 - 1 of 20

SECTION 15010 - BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS

15010-01 GENERAL

A. SECTION INCLUDES

1. Work included in 15010 applies to Division 15 work to provide materials, labor,

tools, permits, incidentals, and other services to provide and make ready for Owner's

use of plumbing systems for proposed project.

2. Contract Documents include, but are not limited to, Specifications including

Division 0, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 1, General

Requirements, Drawings, Addenda, Owner/Architect Agreement, and

Owner/Contractor Agreement. Confirm requirements before commencement of

work.

3. Definitions:

a. Provide: To furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.

b. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unpacking, assembly

and installation.

c. Install: Includes unloading, unpacking, assembling, erecting, installation,

applying, finishing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations at project site as

required to complete items of work furnished.

d. Approved or Approved Equivalent: To possess the same performance

qualities and characteristics and fulfill the utilitarian function without any

decrease in quality, durability or longevity. For equipment/products defined by

the Contractor as "equivalent", substitution requests must be submitted to

Engineer for consideration, in accordance with Division 1 requirements, and

approved by the Engineer prior to submitting bids for substituted items.

e. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): Indicates reviewing authorities,

including local fire marshal, Owner's insurance underwriter, Owner's

representative, and other reviewing entity whose approval is required to obtain

systems acceptance.

B. RELATED SECTIONS:

1. Contents of Section applies to Division 15 Contract Documents.




2. Related Work:

a. Additional conditions apply to this Division including, but not limited to:

1. Specifications including Division 0, Procurement and Contracting

Requirements and Division 1, General Requirements.

2. Drawings

3. Addenda

4. Owner/Architect Agreement

5. Owner/Contractor Agreement

6. Codes, Standards, Public Ordinances and Permits

3. Related products/systems located in Division 15:

a. Section 15191 - Facility Natural Gas Systems

C. REFERENCES AND STANDARDS

1. References and Standards per Division 0, Procurement and Contracting

Requirements, Division 1, General Requirements, individual Division 15 Sections

and those listed in this section.

2. Codes to include latest adopted editions, including current amendments,

supplements and local jurisdiction requirements in effect as of the date of the

Contract Documents, of/from:

a. State of Oregon:

1. OAR Oregon Administrative Rules

2. OESC Oregon Electrical Specialty Code

3. OFC Oregon Fire Code

4. OMSC Oregon Mechanical Specialty Code

5. OPSC Oregon Plumbing Specialty Code

6. OSSC Oregon Structural Specialty Code

7. Oregon Elevator Specialty Code




3. General: Reference standards and guidelines include but are not limited to the

latest adopted editions from:

a. ADA Americans with Disabilities Act

b. AHRI Air-Conditioning Heating & Refrigeration Institute

c. ANSI American National Standards Institute

d. ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers

e. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning

Engineers

f. ASHRAE Guideline 0, the Commissioning Process

g. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

h. ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers

i. ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering

j. ASTM ASTM International

k. AWWA American Water Works Association

l. CFR Code of Federal Regulations

m. CGA Canadian Gas Association

n. CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute

o. CSA CSA International

p. ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories

q. EPA Environmental Protection Agency

r. FDA Food & Drug Administration

s. FM FM Global

t. IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials

u. GAMA Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association

v. HI Hydraulic Institute Standards

w. ISO International Organization for Standardization




x. LEED Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design

y. MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society

z. NEC National Electric Code

aa. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

bb. NFGC National Fuel Gas Code

cc. NFPA National Fire Protection Association

dd. NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association

ee. NSF National Sanitation Foundation

ff. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration

gg. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National

Association, Inc.

hh. TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association

ii. TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association

jj. UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

kk. USDA United States Department of Agriculture

4. See Division 15 individual sections for additional references.

5. Where code requirements are at variance with Contract Documents, meet code

requirements as a minimum requirement and include costs necessary to meet these in

Contract. Machinery and equipment are to comply with OSHA requirements, as

currently revised and interpreted for equipment manufacturer requirements. Install

equipment provided per manufacturer recommendations.

6. Whenever this Specification calls for material, workmanship, arrangement or

construction of higher quality and/or capacity than that required by governing codes,

higher quality and/or capacity take precedence.

7. Piping Insulation products to contain less than 0.1 percent by weight PBDE in all

insulating materials across the board.




D. SUBMITTALS

1. See Division 1, General Requirements for Submittal Procedures as well as

specific individual Division 15 sections.

2. Provide product submittals and shop drawings inelectronic format only.

Electronic format must be submitted viazip file via e-mail. For electronic format,

provide one zip file per specification division containing a separate file for each

specification section. Individual submittals sent piecemeal in a per Specification

Section method will be returned without review or comment. Copy Architect on all

transmissions/submissions.

3. Product Data: Provide Manufacturer's descriptive literature for products specified

in Division 15 sections.

4. Identify/mark each submittal in detail. Note what differences, if any, exist

between the submitted item and the specified item. Failure to identify the differences

will be considered cause for disapproval. If differences are not identified and/or not

discovered during the submittal review process, Contractor remains responsible for

providing equipment and materials that meet the Specifications and Drawings.

a. Label submittal to match numbering/references as shown in Contract

Documents and schedules. Highlight and label applicable information to

individual equipment or cross out/remove extraneous data not applicable to

submitted model. Clearly note options and accessories to be provided, including

field installed items. Highlight connections by/to other trades.

b. Include technical data, installation instructions and dimensioned drawings for

products, fixtures, equipment and devices installed, furnished or provided.

Reference Division 15 Specification sections for specific items required in

product data submittal outside of these requirements.

c. Provide pump curves, operation characteristics, capacities, ambient noise

criteria, etc. for equipment.

d. For vibration isolation of equipment, list make and model selected with

operating load and deflection. Indicate frame type where required. Submit

manufacturer's product data.

e. See Division 15 sections for additional submittal requirements outside of these

requirements.

f. Maximum of two reviews of complete submittal package. Arrange for

additional reviews and/or early review of long-lead items; Bear costs of additional

reviews at Engineer's hourly rates. Incomplete submittal packages/submittals will

be returned to contractor without review.




5. Structural/Seismic: Provide weights, dimensions, mounting requirements and like

information required for mounting, seismic bracing, and support. Indicate

manufacturer's installation and support requirements to meet Section 15071. Provide

engineered seismic drawings and equipment seismic certification. Building

Occupancy Category II, Seismic Design Category D. Equipment Importance Factor

of 1.0.

6. Insert equipment/list equipment with importance factor greater than 1 and the

importance factor.

7. Trade Coordination: Include physical characteristics, electrical characteristics,

device layout plans, wiring diagrams, and connections as required per Division 15

Coordination Documents. For equipment with electrical connections, furnish copy of

approved submittal for inclusion in Division 16 submittals.

8. Make provisions for openings in building for admittance of equipment prior to

start of construction or ordering of equipment.

9. Substitutions and Variation from Basis-of-Design:

a. Basis-of-Design system components and controls for equipment are selected

and sized based on the equipment specified as the first-named manufacturer,

model number and supplemental additional options as indicated in the Contract

Documents. If substitutions and/or equivalent equipment/products are being

proposed, it is the responsibility of parties concerned, involved in, and furnishing

the substitute and/or equivalent equipment to verify and compare the

characteristics and requirements of that furnished to that specified and/or shown.

If greater capacity and/or more materials and/or more labor is required for the

rough-in, circuitry or connections than for the item specified and provided for,

then provide compensation for additional charges required for the proper rough-

in, circuitry and connections for the equipment being furnished. No additional

charges above the Base Bid will be allowed for such revisions. Coordinate with

the requirements of "Submittals". For any product marked "or approved

equivalent", a substitution request must be submitted to Engineer for approval

prior to purchase, delivery or installation.

10. Shop Drawings: Provide coordinated Shop Drawings which include physical

characteristics of all systems, equipment and piping layout plans, and control wiring

diagrams. Reference individual Division 15 sections for additional requirements for

Shop Drawings outside of these requirements.

a. Provide Shop Drawings indicating sanitary cleanout locations and type to

Architect for approval prior to installation.

b. Provide Shop Drawings indicating access panel locations, size and elevation

for approval prior to installation.




11. Samples: Provide samples when requested by individual sections.

12. Resubmission Requirements:

a. Make any corrections or change in submittals when required. Provide

submittals as specified. The engineer will not be required to edit and/or interpret

the Contractor's submittals. Indicate changes for the resubmittal in a cover letter

with reference to page(s) changed and reference response to comment. Cloud

changes in the submittals.

1. Resubmit for review until review indicates no exceptions taken or make

"corrections as noted".

2. When submitting drawings for Engineers re-review, clearly indicate

changes on drawings and "cloud" any revisions. Submit a list describing each

change.

13. Operation and Maintenance Manuals, Owners Instructions:

a. Submit, at one time, 3 bound copies of manufacturer's operation and

maintenance instruction manuals and parts lists for equipment or items requiring

servicing. Include valve charts. Submit data when work is substantially complete

and in same order format as submittals. Include name and location of source parts

and service for each piece of equipment.

1. Include copy of approved submittal data along with submittal review

letters received from Engineer. Data to clearly indicate installed equipment

model numbers. Delete or cross out data pertaining to other equipment not

specific to this project.

2. Include copy of manufacturer's standard Operations and Maintenance for

equipment. At front of each tab, provide routine maintenance documentation

for scheduled equipment. Include manufacturer's recommended maintenance

schedule and highlight maintenance required to maintain warranty. Furnish

list of routine maintenance parts, including part numbers, sizes, quantities,

relevant to each piece of equipment: belts, motors, lubricants, and filters.

3. Include copy of complete parts list for equipment. Include available

exploded views of assemblies and sub assemblies.

4. Include copy of startup and test reports specific to each piece of

equipment.

5. Include copy of final water systems balancing log along with pump

operating data.

6. Include commissioning reports.




7. Include copy of pressure, flow, leakage and purity test data, as applicable,

of air systems. Include copy of third-party and state and local jurisdiction

inspection reports.

8. Include copy of valve charts/schedules.

9. Include Warranty per Division 0 and Division 1, Section 15010 and

individual Division 15 sections.

10. Include product certificates of warranties and guarantees.

11. Engineer will return incomplete documentation without review. Engineer

will provide one set of review comments in Submittal Review format.

Contractor must arrange for additional reviews; Contractor to bear costs for

additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates.

b. Thoroughly instruct Owner in proper operation of equipment and systems.

Where noted in individual sections, training will include classroom instruction

with applicable training aids and systems demonstrations. Field instruction per

Section 15010 article titled "Demonstration".

c. Copies of certificates of code authority inspections, acceptance, code required

acceptance tests, letter of conformance and other special guarantees, certificates

of warranties, specified elsewhere or indicated on Drawings.

14. Record Drawings:

a. Maintain at site at least one set of drawings for recording “As-constructed”

conditions. Indicate on Drawings changes to original documents by referencing

revision document, and include buried elements, location of cleanouts, and

location of concealed mechanical items. Include items changed by field orders,

supplemental instructions, and constructed conditions.

b. Record Drawings are to include equipment and fixture/connection schedules

that accurately reflect "as constructed or installed" for project.

c. At completion of project, input changes to original project on CAD Drawings

and make one set of black-line drawings created from CAD Files in

version/release equal to contract drawings. Submit CAD disk and drawings upon

substantial completion.

d. Invert elevations and dimensioned locations for water services, building

waste, and storm drainage piping below grade extending to 5-feet outside building

line.

e. See Division 15 individual sections for additional items to include in record

drawings.




E. QUALITY ASSURANCE

1. Regulatory Requirements: Work and materials installed to conform with all local,

State, Federal and other applicable laws and regulations.

2. Drawings are intended to be diagrammatic and reflect the Basis-of-Design

manufacturers equipment. They are not intended to show every item in its exact

dimensions, or details of equipment or proposed systems layout. Verify actual

dimensions of systems (i.e., piping) and equipment proposed to assure that systems

and equipment will fit in available space. Contractor is responsible for design and

construction costs incurred for equipment other than Basis-of-Design, including, but

not limited to, architectural, structural, electrical, HVAC, fire sprinkler, and plumbing

systems.

3. Manufacturer's Instructions: Follow manufacturer's written instructions. If in

conflict with Contract Documents, obtain clarification. Notify Engineer/Architect, in

writing, before starting work.

4. Items shown on Drawings are not necessarily included in Specifications or vice

versa. Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents.

5. UL and CSA Compliance: Provide products which are UL and CSA listed

6. ASME Compliance: ASME listed water heaters and boilers with an input of

200,000 BTUH and higher, hot water storage tanks which exceed 120 gallons, and

hot water expansion tanks which are connected to ASME rated equipment or required

by code or local jurisdiction.

7. Provide safety controls required by National Boiler Code (ASME CSD 1) for

boilers and water heaters with an input of 400,000 BTUH and higher.

F. WARRANTY

1. Provide written warranty covering the work for a period of one year from date of

Substantial Completion in accordance with Division 1, Section 15010 and individual

Division 15 sections.

2. Sections under this Division can require additional and/or extended warranties

that apply beyond basic warranty in Division 1 and the General Conditions. Confirm

requirements in all Contract Documents.




G. COORDINATION DOCUMENTS

1. Prior to construction, coordinate installation and location of HVAC equipment,

ductwork, grilles, diffusers, piping, plumbing equipment/fixtures, fire sprinklers,

plumbing, cable trays, lights, and electrical services with architectural and structural

requirements, and other trades (including ceiling suspension, and tile systems), and

provide maintenance access requirements. Coordinate with submitted architectural

systems (i.e. roofing, ceiling, finishes) and structural systems as submitted, including

footings and foundation. Identify zone of influence from footings and ensure systems

are not routed within the zone of influence.

2. Advise Architect in the event a conflict occurs in location or connection of

equipment. Bear costs resulting from failure to properly coordinate installation or

failure to advise Architect of conflict.

3. Verify in field exact size, location, invert, and clearances regarding existing

material, equipment and apparatus, and advise Architect of discrepancies between

that indicated on Drawings and that existing in field prior to installation related

thereto.

4. Submit final Coordination Drawings with changes as Record Drawings at

completion of project.

15010-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

a. Provide like items from one manufacturer, including but not limited to

fixtures, pumps, drains and equipment.

B. MATERIALS

1. Base contract upon furnishing materials as specified. Materials, equipment, and

fixtures used for construction are to be new, latest products as listed in manufacturer's

printed catalog data and are to be UL or ETL approved or have adequate approval or

be acceptable by State, County, and City authorities.

2. Articles, fixtures, and equipment of a kind to be standard product of one

manufacturer.

3. Names and manufacturer's names denote character and quality of equipment

desired and are not to be construed as limiting competition.




4. Hazardous Materials:

a. Comply with local, State of Oregon, and Federal regulations relating to

hazardous materials.

b. Comply with Division 0, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and

Division 1, General Requirements for this project relating to hazardous materials.

c. Do not use any materials containing a hazardous substance. If hazardous

materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Owner and

Architect. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under separate

contract.

C. ACCESS PANELS

1. See Division 1, General Requirements and Division 8 for products and installation

requirements.

2. Confirm Access Panel requirements in Division 1, Division 8 and individual

Division 15 sections. In the absence of specific requirements, comply with the

following:

a. Provide flush mounting access panels for service of systems and individual

components requiring maintenance or inspection. Where access panels are

located in fire-rated assemblies of building, rate access panels accordingly.

1. Ceiling access panels to be minimum 24-inch by 24-inch required and

approved size.

2. Wall access panels to be minimum of 12-inch by 12-inch required and

approved size.

3. Provide screwdriver operated catch provided.

a) Drywall: Karp KDW.

b) Plaster: Karp DSC-214PL.

c) Masonry: Karp DSC-214M.

d) 2 hour rated: Karp KPF-350FR.

e) Milcor, Elmdor, Acudor, or approved equivalent.




15010-03 EXECUTION

A. ACCESSIBILITY AND INSTALLATION

1. Confirm Accessibility and Installation requirements in Division 0, Division 1,

Section 15010 and individual Division 15 sections.

2. Install equipment requiring access (i.e., drain pans, drains, control operators,

valves, motors, cleanouts and water heaters) so that they may be serviced, reset,

replaced or recalibrated by service people with normal service tools and equipment.

Do not install equipment in obvious passageways, doorways, scuttles or crawlspaces

which would impede or block intended usage.

3. Install equipment and products complete as directed by manufacturer's installation

instructions. Obtain installation instructions from manufacturer prior to rough-in of

equipment and examine instructions thoroughly. When requirements of installation

instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect

prior to proceeding with installation. This includes proper installation methods,

sequencing, and coordination with other trades and disciplines.

4. Earthwork:

a. Confirm Earthwork requirements in Contract Documents. In absence of

specific requirements, comply with individual Division 15 Sections and the

following:

1. Perform excavation, dewatering, shoring, bedding, and backfill required

for installation of work in this Division in accordance with the provisions of

related earthwork sections/divisions. Contact utilities and locate existing

utilities prior to excavation. Repair any work damaged during excavation or

backfilling.

2. Excavation: Do not excavate under footings, foundation bases, or retaining

walls.

3. Provide protection of underground systems. Review the project

Geotechnical Report for references to corrosive or deleterious soils which will

reduce the performance or service life of underground systems materials.




5. Firestopping:

a. Confirm Firestopping requirements in Division 7. In absence of specific

requirements, comply with individual Division 15 Sections and the following:

1. Coordinate location and protection level of fire and/or smoke rated walls,

ceilings, and floors. When these assemblies are penetrated, seal around

piping, ductwork and equipment with approved firestopping material. Install

firestopping material complete as directed by manufacturer's installation

instructions. Meet requirements of ASTM E814, Standard Test Method for

Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.

6. Pipe Installation:

a. Coordinate work to account for expansion and contraction of piping materials

and building as well as anticipated settlement or shrinkage of building. Install

work to prevent damage to piping, equipment, and building and its contents.

Provide piping offsets, loops, expansion joints, sleeves, anchors or other means to

control pipe movement and minimize forces on piping. Verify anticipated

settlement and/or shrinkage of building. Verify construction phasing, type of

building construction products and rating for coordinating installation of piping

systems.

b. Include provisions for servicing and removal of equipment without

dismantling piping.

7. Plenums:

a. Provide plenum rated materials that meet the requirements to be installed in

plenums. Immediately notify Architect/Engineer of discrepancy.

B. SEISMIC CONTROL

1. Confirm Seismic Control requirements in Division 1, Section 15010 and


2. General:

a. Seismic Design Category: D Soils.

b. Building Category: II.

c. Importance Factor (l-p): Equipment importance factor of 1.0.

d. Earthquake resistant designs for Plumbing (Division 15) equipment and

distribution, i.e. motors, plumbing systems, piping, equipment, water heaters,

boilers, etc. conform to regulations of jurisdiction having authority.




e. Restraints which are used to prevent disruption of function of piece of

equipment because of application of horizontal force to be such that forces are

carried to frame of structure in such a way that frame will not be deflected when

apparatus is attached to a mounting base and equipment pad, or to structure in

normal way, utilizing attachments provided. Secure equipment and distribution

systems to withstand a force in direction equal to value defined by jurisdiction

having authority.

f. Provide stamped Shop Drawings from licensed Structural Engineer of seismic

bracing and seismic movement assemblies for piping equipment and water

heaters. Submit Shop Drawings along with equipment submittals.

g. Provide stamped Shop Drawings from licensed Structural Engineer of seismic

flexible joints for piping and crossing building expansion or seismic joints.

Submit Shop Drawings along with seismic bracing details. Coordinate exact

design requirements with project Structural Engineer.

3. Piping:

a. Per "Seismic Restraints Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems" latest

edition published by SMACNA or local requirements.

4. Equipment:

a. Provide means to prohibit excessive motion of plumbing equipment during

earthquake.

C. REVIEW AND OBSERVATION

1. Confirm Review and Observation requirements in Division 0, Division 1, Section

15010 and individual Division 15 Sections.

2. Notify Architect, in writing, at following stages of construction so that Architect

may, at their option, visit site for review and construction observation:

a. Underground piping installation prior to backfilling.

b. Prior to covering walls.

c. Prior to ceiling cover/installation.

d. When main systems, or portions of, are being tested and ready for inspection

by AHJ.




3. Bear responsibility and cost to make piping accessible, to expose concealed lines,

or to demonstrate acceptability of the system. If Contractor fails to notify Architect at

times prescribed above, costs incurred by removal of such work are the responsibility

of the Contractor.

4. Final Punch:

a. Costs incurred by additional trips required due to incomplete systems will be

the responsibility of the Contractor.

D. CONTINUITY OF SERVICE

1. Confirm requirements in Division 0 and Division 1. In absence of specific

requirements, comply with individual Division 15 sections and the following:

a. During remodeling or addition to existing structures, while existing structure

is occupied, current services to remain intact until new construction, facilities or

equipment is installed.

b. Prior to changing over to new service, verify that every item is thoroughly

prepared. Install new piping, and wiring to point of connection.

c. Coordinate transfer time to new service with Owner. If required, perform

transfer during off peak hours. Once changeover is started, pursue to its

completion to keep interference to a minimum.

1. If overtime is necessary, there will be no allowance made by Owner for

extra expense for such overtime or shift work.

d. Organize work to minimize duration of power interruption.

E. CUTTING AND PATCHING

1. Confirm Cutting and Patching requirements in Division 1. In absence of specific


a. Proposed floor cutting/core drilling/sleeve locations to be approved by Project

Structural Engineer. Submit proposed locations to Architect/Project Structural

Engineer. Where slabs are of post tension construction, perform x-ray scan of

proposed penetration locations and submit scan results including proposed

penetration locations to Project Structural Engineer/Architect for approval.

Where slabs are of waffle type construction, show column cap extent and cell

locations relative to proposed penetration(s).




b. Cutting, patching and repairing for work specified in this Division including

plastering, masonry work, concrete work, carpentry work, and painting included

under this Section and will be performed by skilled craftsmen of each respective

trade in conformance with appropriate Division of Work.

c. Additional openings required in building construction to be made by drilling

or cutting. Use of jack hammer is specifically prohibited. Patch openings in and

through concrete and masonry with grout.

d. Restore new or existing work that is cut and/or damaged to original condition.

Where alterations disturb lawns, paving, and walks, surfaces to be repaired,

refinished and left in condition matching existing prior to commencement of

work.

e. Additional work required by lack of proper coordination will be provided at

no additional cost to the Owner.

F. EQUIPMENT SELECTION AND SERVICEABILITY

1. Replace or reposition equipment which is too large or located incorrectly to

permit servicing, at no additional cost to Owner.

G. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING


requirements, comply with individual Division 15 Sections and the following:

a. Handle materials delivered to project site with care to avoid damage. Store

materials on site inside building or protected from weather, dirt and construction

dust. Insulation and lining that becomes wet from improper storage and handling

to be replaced before installation. Products and/or materials that become

damaged due to water, dirt and/or dust as a result of improper storage to be

replaced before installation.

b. Protect equipment and pipe to avoid damage. Close pipe openings with caps

or plugs. Keep motors and bearings in watertight and dustproof covers during

entire course of installation.

c. Protect bright finished shafts, bearing housings and similar items until in

service.

H. DEMONSTRATION

1. Confirm Demonstration requirements in Division 0, Division 1, Section 15010

and individual Division 15 sections.




2. Upon completion of work and adjustment of equipment and test systems,

demonstrate to Owner's Representative, Architect and Engineer that equipment

furnished and installed or connected under provisions of these Specifications

functions in manner required. Provide field instruction to Owner's Maintenance Staff

as specified in Division 1, Section 15010 and individual Division 15 sections.

3. Manufacturer's Field Services: Furnish services of a qualified person at time

approved by Owner, to instruct maintenance personnel, correct defects or

deficiencies, and demonstrate to satisfaction of Owner that entire system is operating

in satisfactory manner and complies with requirements of other trades that may be

required to complete work. Complete instruction and demonstration prior to final job

site observations.

4. Training and Demonstration per Section 01810, General Commissioning

Requirements and 15945, Commissioning of HVAC and Plumbing Systems.

I. CLEANING

1. Confirm cleaning requirements in Division 1, Section 15010 and individual


2. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean exposed portions of equipment,

removing temporary labels and traces of foreign substances. Throughout work,

remove construction debris and surplus materials accumulated during work.

J. INSTALLATION

1. Confirm installation requirements in Division 0, Division 1, Section 15010 and


2. Install equipment and fixtures in accordance with manufacturer's installation

instructions, plumb and level and firmly anchored to vibration isolators. Maintain

manufacturer's recommended clearances.

3. Start up equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, and

in presence of manufacturer's representative. Test controls and demonstrate

compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

a. Do not place equipment in sustained operation prior to initial balancing of

plumbing systems.

b. Provide pump impellers to obtain Basis-of-Design design capacities.

4. Provide miscellaneous supports/metals required for installation of equipment,

piping and ductwork.




K. PAINTING



a. Ferrous Metal: After completion of plumbing work, thoroughly clean and

paint exposed supports constructed of ferrous metal surfaces, i.e., hangers, hanger

rods, equipment stands, with one coat of black enamel suitable for hot surfaces.

b. In a mechanical room, on roof or other exposed areas, machinery and

equipment not painted with enamel to receive two coats of primer and one coat of

rustproof enamel, colors as selected by Architect.

c. See individual equipment Specifications for other painting.

d. Structural Steel: Repair damage to structural steel finishes or finishes of other

materials damaged by cutting, welding or patching to match original.

e. Piping: Clean, primer coat and paint exposed piping on roof or at other

exterior locations with two coats paint suitable for metallic surfaces and exterior

exposures. Color selected by Architect.

f. Covers: Covers such as manholes, cleanouts and the like will be furnished

with finishes which resist corrosion and rust.

L. ACCESS PANELS

1. Confirm Access Panel requirements in Division 1. In absence of specific

requirements in Division 1, comply with individual Division 15 sections and the

following:

a. Coordinate locations/sizes of access panels with Architect prior to work.

Label access panels with engraved nameplates indicating function of panel.

M. DEMOLITION

1. Confirm Demolition requirements in Division 0 and Division 1. In absence of

specific requirements, comply with individual sections in Division 15 and the

following:

a. Scope:

1. It is the intent of these documents to provide necessary information and

adjustments to plumbing system required to meet code, and accommodate

installation of new work.




2. Coordinate with Owner so that work can be scheduled not to interrupt

operations, normal activities, building access or access to different areas.

3. Existing Conditions: Determine exact location of existing utilities and

equipment before commencing work, compensate Owner for damages caused

by failure to exactly locate and preserve underground utilities. Replace

damaged items with new material to match existing. Promptly notify Owner

if utilities are found which are not shown on Drawings.

b. Equipment: Unless otherwise directed, equipment, fixtures, or fittings being

removed as part of demolition process are Owner's property. Remove other items

not scheduled to be reused or relocated from job site as directed by Owner.

c. Unless specifically indicated on Drawings, remove exposed, unused piping to

behind finished surfaces (floor, walls, ceilings, etc.). Cap piping and patch

surfaces to match surrounding finish.

d. Unless specifically indicated on Drawings, remove unused equipment,

fixtures, fittings, rough-ins, and connectors. Removal is to be to a point behind

finished surfaces (floors, walls, and ceilings).

N. ACCEPTANCE


requirements, comply with individual sections in Division 15 and the following:

a. System cannot be considered for acceptance until work is completed and

demonstrated to Architect that installation is in strict compliance with

Specifications, Drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions, particularly

in reference to following:

1. Testing and Balancing Reports

2. Cleaning

3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals

4. Training of Operating Personnel

5. Record Drawings

6. Warranty and Guaranty Certificates

7. Start-up/Test Document and Commissioning Reports




O. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

1. Confirm Field Quality Control requirements in Division 0, Division 1,

Section 15010 and individual Division 15 Sections.

2. Tests:

a. Conduct tests of equipment and systems to demonstrate compliance with

requirements specified. Reference individual Specification Sections for required

tests. Document tests and include in operation and maintenance manuals.

b. During site evaluations by Architect or Engineer, provide an electrician with

tools to remove and replace trims, covers, and devices so that proper evaluation of

installation can be performed.

P. LETTER OF CONFORMANCE

1. Provide Letter of Conformance and copies of manufacturers' warranties and

extended warranties with a statement that fire suppression items were installed in

accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, UL listings and FM Global

approvals. Include Letter of Conformance and copies of manufacturers' warranties

and extended warranties in Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

2. Warranties to begin at date of substantial completion.

Q. ELECTRICAL INTERLOCKS

1. Where equipment motors are to be electrically interlocked with other equipment

for simultaneous operation, utilize plumbing equipment wiring diagrams to

coordinate with electrical systems so that proper wiring of equipment involved is

affected.

END OF SECTION



BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS SECTION 15020 - 1 of 20

SECTION 15020 - BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS

15020-01 GENERAL

A. SECTION INCLUDES

1. Work included in 15020 applies to Division 15 work to provide materials, labor,

tools, permits, incidentals, and other services to provide and make ready for Owner's

use of heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems for proposed project.

2. Contract Documents include, but are not limited to, Specifications including

Division 0, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 1, General

Requirements, Drawings, Addenda, Owner/Architect Agreement, and

Owner/Contractor Agreement. Confirm requirements before commencement of

work.

3. Definitions:

a. Provide: To furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.

b. Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unpacking, assembly

and installation.

c. Install: Includes unloading, unpacking, assembling, erecting, installation,

applying, finishing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations at project site as

required to complete items of work provided.

d. Approved or Approved Equivalent: To possess the same performance

qualities and characteristics and fulfill the utilitarian function without any

decrease in quality, durability or longevity. For equipment/products defined by

the Contractor as "equivalent", substitution requests must be submitted to

Engineer for consideration, in accordance with Division 1 requirements, and

approved by the Engineer prior to submitting bids for substituted items.

e. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): Indicates reviewing authorities,

including local fire marshal, Owner's insurance underwriter, Owner's

representative, and other reviewing entity whose approval is required to obtain

systems acceptance.

B. RELATED SECTIONS:

1. Contents of Section applies to Division 15 Contract Documents.




2. Related Work:

a. Additional conditions apply to this Division including, but not limited to:

1. Specifications including Division 0, Procurement and Contracting

Requirements and Division 1, General Requirements.

2. Drawings

3. Addenda

4. Owner/Architect Agreement

5. Owner/Contractor Agreement

6. Codes, Standards, Public Ordinances and Permits


1. References and Standards per Division 1, General Requirements, individual

Division 15 Sections and those listed in this section.

2. Codes to include latest adopted editions, including current amendments,

supplements and local jurisdiction requirements in effect as of the date of the

Contract Documents, of/from:

a. State of Oregon:

1. OAR Oregon Administrative Rules

2. OESC Oregon Electrical Specialty Code

3. OFC Oregon Fire Code

4. OMSC Oregon Mechanical Specialty Code

5. OPSC Oregon Plumbing Specialty Code

6. OSSC Oregon Structural Specialty Code

7. OEESC Oregon Energy Efficiency Specialty Code

8. Oregon Elevator Specialty Code

3. General: Reference standards and guidelines include but are not limited to the

latest adopted editions from:

a. ADA Americans with Disabilities Act




b. AHRI Air-Conditioning Heating & Refrigeration Institute

c. AMCA Air Movement and Control Association

d. ANSI American National Standards Institute

e. ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers

f. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-

Conditioning Engineers

g. ASHRAE Guideline, The Commissioning Process

h. ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers

i. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

j. ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers

k. ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering

l. ASTM ASTM International

m. AWWA American Water Works Association

n. CFR Code of Federal Regulations

o. CGA Canadian Gas Association

p. CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute

q. CSA CSA International

r. EPA Environmental Protection Agency

s. ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories

t. FDA Food and Drug Administration

u. FM FM Global

v. GAMA Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association

w. HI Hydraulic Institute Standards

x. IAPMO International Association of Plumbing & Mechanical

Officials

y. ISO International Organization for Standardization




z. LEED Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design

aa. MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society

bb. NEC National Electric Code

cc. NEMA National Electrical Manufactures Association

dd. NFPA National Fire Protection Association

ee. NFGC National Fuel Gas Code

ff. NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association

gg. NSF National Sanitation Foundation

hh. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration

ii. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National

Association, Inc.

jj. TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufactures Association

kk. TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufactures Association

ll. UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

mm. USDA United States Department of Agriculture

4. See Division 15 individual sections for additional references.

5. Where code requirements are at variance with Contract Documents, meet code

requirements as a minimum requirement and include costs necessary to meet these in

Contract. Machinery and equipment are to comply with OSHA requirements, as

currently revised and interpreted for equipment manufacturer requirements. Install

equipment provided per manufacturer recommendations.

6. Whenever this Specification calls for material, workmanship, arrangement or

construction of higher quality and/or capacity than that required by governing codes,

higher quality and/or capacity take precedence.

7. Piping and duct insulation products to contain less than 0.1 percent by weight

PBDE in all insulating materials across the board.




D. SUBMITTALS

1. See Division 1, General Requirements for Submittal Procedures as well as

specific individual Division 15 sections.

2. Provide product submittals and shop drawings in electronic format only.

Electronic format must be submitted via zip file via e-mail. For electronic format,

provide one zip file per specification division containing a separate file for each

specification section. Individual submittals sent piecemeal in a per Specification

Section method will be returned without review or comment. Copy Architect on all

transmissions/submissions.

3. Product Data: Provide Manufacturer's descriptive literature for products specified

in Division 15 sections.

4. Identify/mark each submittal in detail. Note what differences, if any, exist

between the submitted item and the specified item. Failure to identify the differences

will be considered cause for disapproval. If differences are not identified and/or not

discovered during the submittal review process, Contractor remains responsible for

providing equipment and materials that meet the Specifications and Drawings.

a. Label submittal to match numbering/references as shown in Contract

Documents. Highlight and label applicable information to individual equipment

or cross out/remove extraneous data not applicable to submitted model. Clearly

note options and accessories to be provided, including field installed items.

Highlight connections by/to other trades.

b. Include technical data, installation instructions and dimensioned drawings for

products, fixtures, equipment and devices installed, furnished or provided.

Reference individual Division 15 Specification sections for specific items

required in product data submittal outside of these requirements.

c. Provide pump curves, operation characteristics, capacities, ambient noise

criteria, etc. for equipment.

d. For vibration isolation of equipment, list make and model selected with

operating load and deflection.

e. See Division 15 individual sections for additional submittal requirements.

5. Maximum of two reviews of submittal package. Arrange for additional reviews

and/or early review of long-lead items; Bear costs of these additional reviews at

Engineer's hourly rates. Incomplete submittal packages/submittals will be returned to

contractor without review.




6. Structural/Seismic: Provide weights, dimensions, mounting requirements and like

information required for mounting, seismic bracing, and support. Indicate

manufacturer's installation and support requirements to meet Section 15072. Provide

engineered seismic drawings and equipment seismic certification. Building

Occupancy Category II. Seismic Design Category D. Equipment Importance Factor

of 1.0

7. Trade Coordination: Include physical characteristics, electrical characteristics,

device layout plans, wiring diagrams, and connections as required by Division 15

Coordination Documents. For equipment with electrical connections, furnish copy of

approved submittal for inclusion in Division 16 submittals.

8. Make provisions for openings in building for admittance of equipment prior to

start of construction or ordering of equipment.

9. Substitutions and Variation from Basis-of-Design: Basis-of-Design systems,

components and controls for equipment are selected and sized based on the

equipment specified as the first-named, model number and supplemental additional

options as indicated in the Contract Documents. If substitutions and/or equivalent

equipment/products proposed, it is the responsibility of parties concerned, involved

in, and furnishing the substitute and/or equivalent equipment to verify and compare

the characteristics and requirements of that furnished to that specified and/or shown.

If greater capacity and/or more materials and/or more labor is required for the rough-

in, circuitry or connections than for the item specified and provided for, then provide

compensation for additional charges required for the proper rough-in, circuitry and

connections for the equipment being furnished. No additional charges above the Base

Bid will be allowed for such revisions. Coordinate with the requirements of

"Submittals". For any product marked "or approved equivalent", a substitution

request must be submitted to Engineer for approval prior to purchase, delivery or

installation.

10. Shop Drawings: Provide coordinated shop drawings which include physical

characteristics of all systems, equipment, ductwork and piping layout plans, and

control wiring diagrams. Reference individual Division 15 Specification sections for

additional requirements for shop drawings outside of these requirements. Provide

Shop Drawings indicating access panel locations for items that require Code or

maintenance access, size and elevation for approval prior to installation.

11. Samples: Provide samples when requested by individual sections.

12. Resubmission Requirements:

a. Make any corrections or change in submittals when required. Provide

submittals as specified. The engineer will not be required to edit and/or interpret

the Contractor's submittals. Indicate changes for the resubmittal in a cover letter

with reference to page(s) changed and reference response to comment. Cloud

changes in the submittals.




1. Resubmit for review until review indicates no exceptions taken or make

"corrections as noted".

2. When submitting drawings for Engineers re-review, clearly indicate

changes on drawings and "cloud" any revisions. Submit a list describing each

change.

13. Operation and Maintenance Manuals, Owners Instructions:

a. Submit, at one time, 3 bound copies of manufacturer's operation and

maintenance instruction manuals and parts lists for equipment or items requiring

servicing. Include valve charts. Submit data when work is substantially complete

and in same order format as submittals. Include name and location of source parts

and service for each piece of equipment.

1. Include copy of approved submittal data along with submittal review

letters received from Engineer. Data to clearly indicate installed equipment

model numbers. Delete or cross out data pertaining to other equipment not

specific to this project.

2. Include copy of manufacturer's standard Operations and Maintenance for

equipment. At front of each tab, provide routine maintenance documentation

for scheduled equipment. Include manufacturer's recommended maintenance

schedule and highlight maintenance required to maintain warranty. Furnish

list of routine maintenance parts, including part numbers, sizes, quantities,

relevant to each piece of equipment: belts, motors, lubricants, and filters.

3. Include Warranty per Division 0 and Division 1, Section 15020 and

individual sections.

4. Include product certificates of warranties and guarantees.

5. Include copy of complete parts list for equipment. Include available

exploded views of assemblies and sub assemblies.

6. Include copy of startup and test reports specific to each piece of

equipment.

7. Include copy of final air and water systems balancing log along with

pump, fan and distribution system operating data.

8. Include commissioning reports.

9. Include copy of valve charts/schedules.




10. Engineer will return incomplete documentation without review. Engineer

will provide one set of review comments in Submittal Review format.

Contractor must arrange for additional reviews; Contractor to bear costs for

additional reviews at Engineer's hourly rates.

b. Thoroughly instruct Owner in proper operation of equipment and systems.

Where noted in individual sections, training will include classroom instruction

with applicable training aids and systems demonstrations. Field instruction per

Section 15020 Article titled "Demonstration".

c. Copies of certificates of code authority inspections, acceptance, code required

acceptance tests, letter of conformance and other special guarantees, certificates

of warranties, specified elsewhere or indicated on Drawings.

14. Record Drawings:

a. Maintain at site at least one set of drawings for recording “As-constructed”

conditions. Indicate on drawings changes to original documents by referencing

revision document, and include buried elements, location of cleanouts, and

location of concealed mechanical items. Include items changed by field orders,

supplemental instructions, and constructed conditions.

b. Record Drawings are to include equipment and fixture/connection schedules,

control dampers, fire smoke dampers, fire dampers, valves, bottom of pipe, duct

and equipment elevations and dimensioned locations for all distribution systems

(hydronic and air). Invert elevations and dimensioned locations for underground

systems below grade to 5-feet outside building that accurately reflect "as

constructed or installed" for project.

c. At completion of project, input changes to original project CAD Drawings and

make one set of black-line drawings created from CAD Files in version/release

equal to contract drawings. Submit CAD disk and drawings upon substantial

completion.

d. See Division 15 individual sections for additional items to include in record

drawings.


1. Regulatory Requirements: Work and materials installed to conform with all local,

State, Federal and other applicable laws and regulations.




2. Drawings are intended to be diagrammatic and reflect the Basis-of-Design

manufacturer's equipment. They are not intended to show every item in its exact

dimensions, or details of equipment or proposed systems layout. Verify actual

dimensions of systems (i.e., piping) and equipment proposed to assure that systems

and equipment will fit in available space. Contractor is responsible for design and

construction costs incurred for equipment other than Basis-of-Design, including, but

not limited to, architectural, structural, electrical, HVAC, fire sprinkler, and plumbing

systems.

3. Manufacturer's Instructions: Follow manufacturer's written instructions. If in

conflict with Contract Documents, obtain clarification. Notify Engineer/Architect, in

writing, before starting work.

4. Items shown on Drawings are not necessarily included in Specifications or vice

versa. Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents.

5. UL and CSA Compliance: Provide products which are UL and CSA listed.

6. ASME Compliance: ASME listed, hot water storage tanks which exceed 120

gallons, and hot water expansion tanks which are connected to ASME rated

equipment or required by code or local jurisdiction.

F. WARRANTY

1. Provide written warranty covering the work for a period of one year from date of

Substantial Completion in accordance with Division 1, Section 15020 and individual


2. Sections under this Division can require additional and/or extended warranties

that apply beyond basic warranty under Division 1 and the General Conditions.

Confirm requirements in all Contract Documents.

G. COORDINATION DOCUMENTS

1. Prior to construction, coordinate installation and location of HVAC equipment,

ductwork, grilles, diffusers, piping, equipment, fire sprinklers, plumbing, cable trays,

lights, and electrical services with architectural and structural requirements, and other

trades (including ceiling suspension, and tile systems), and provide maintenance

access requirements. Coordinate with submitted architectural systems (i.e. roofing,

ceiling, finishes) and structural systems as submitted, including footings and

foundation. Identify zone of influence from footings and ensure systems are not

routed within the zone of influence.




2. Advise Architect in event a conflict occurs in location or connection of

equipment. Bear costs resulting from failure to properly coordinate installation or

failure to advise Architect of conflict.

3. Verify in field exact size, location, invert, and clearances regarding existing

material, equipment and apparatus, and advise Architect of discrepancies between

that indicated on Drawings and that existing in field prior to installation related

thereto.

4. Submit final Coordination Drawings with changes as Record Drawings at

completion of project.

15020-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Provide like items from one manufacturer, including but not limited to pumps,

fans, valves, control devices, air handlers, vibration isolation devices, etc.

B. MATERIALS

1. Base contract upon furnishing materials as specified. Materials, equipment, and

fixtures used for construction are to be new, latest products as listed in manufacturer's

printed catalog data and are to be UL or ETL approved or have adequate approval or

be acceptable by State, County, and City authorities.

2. Articles, fixtures, and equipment of a kind to be standard product of one

manufacturer.

3. Names and manufacturer's names denote character and quality of equipment

desired and are not to be construed as limiting competition.

4. Hazardous Materials:

a. Comply with local, State of Oregon, and Federal regulations relating to

hazardous materials.

b. Comply with Division 0, Procurement and Contracting Requirements and

Division 1, General Requirements for this project relating to hazardous materials.

c. Do not use any materials containing a hazardous substance. If hazardous

materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Owner and

Architect. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under separate

contract.




C. ACCESS PANELS

1. See Division 1, General Requirements and Division 8 for products and installation

requirements.

2. Confirm Access Panel requirements in Division 1, Division 8 and individual

Division 15 sections. In absence of specific requirements in Division 1, comply with

the following:

a. Provide flush mounting access panels for service of systems and individual

components requiring maintenance or inspection. Where access panels are

located in fire-rated assemblies of building, rate access panels accordingly.

Ceiling access panels to be minimum of 24 x 24 or as required and approved size.

Wall access panels to be minimum of 12 x 12 or as required and approved size.

1. Ceiling access panels to be minimum of 24-inch by 24-inch or as required

and approved size.

2. Wall access panels to be minimum of 12-inch by 12-inch or as required

and approved size.

3. Provide two keys for each set of screwdriver operated catch.

a) Drywall: Karp KDW.

b) Plaster: Karp DSC-214PL.

c) Masonry: Karp DSC-214M.

d) 2 hour rated: Karp KPF-350FR.

e) Manufacturers: Milcor, Elmdor, Acudor or approved equivalent.

15020-03 EXECUTION

A. ACCESSIBILITY AND INSTALLATION

1. Confirm Accessibility and Installation requirements in Division 0 and Division 1,

Section 15020 and individual Division 15 sections.

2. Install equipment having components requiring access (i.e., drain pans, drains,

control operators, valves, motors and vibration isolation devices) so that they may be

serviced, reset, replaced or recalibrated by service people with normal service tools

and equipment. Do not install equipment in obvious passageways, doorways, scuttles

or crawlspaces which would impede or block intended usage.




3. Install equipment and products complete as directed by manufacturer's installation

instructions including all appurtenances recommended in manufacturer's installation

instructions, at no additional charge to Owner. Obtain installation instructions from

manufacturer prior to rough-in of equipment and examine instructions thoroughly.

When requirements of installation instructions conflict with Contract Documents,

request clarification from Architect prior to proceeding with installation. This

includes proper installation methods, sequencing and coordination with other trades

and disciplines.

4. Confirm Earthwork requirements in Contract Documents. In absence of specific


a. Earthwork:

1. Perform excavation, dewatering, shoring, bedding, and backfill required

for installation of work in this Division in accordance with related earthwork

sections. Contact utilities and locate existing utilities prior to excavation.

Repair any work damaged during excavation or backfilling.

2. Excavation: Do not excavate under footings, foundation bases, or retaining

walls.

3. Provide protection of underground systems. Review the project

Geotechnical Report for references to corrosive or deleterious soils which will

reduce the performance or service life of underground systems materials.

5. Confirm Firestopping requirements in Division 7. In absence of specific


Firestopping: Coordinate location and protection level of fire and/or smoke rated

walls, ceilings, and floors. When these assemblies are penetrated, seal around piping,

ductwork and equipment with approved firestopping material. Install firestopping

material complete as directed by manufacturer's installation instructions. Meet

requirements of ASTM E814, Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-

Penetration Fire Stops.

6. Pipe Installation:

a. Coordinate work to account for expansion and contraction of piping materials

and building, as well as anticipated settlement or shrinkage of building. Install

work to prevent damage to piping, equipment, and building and its contents.

Provide piping offsets, loops, seismic flexible joints, expansion joints, sleeves,

anchors or other means to control pipe movement and minimize forces on piping.

Verify anticipated settlement and/or shrinkage of building. Verify construction

phasing, type of building construction products and rating for coordinating

installation of piping systems.




b. Include provisions for servicing and removal of equipment without

dismantling piping.

7. Plenums: In plenums, provide plenum rated materials that meet the requirements

to be installed in plenums. Immediately notify Architect/Engineer of discrepancy.

B. SEISMIC CONTROL

1. Confirm Seismic Control requirements in Division 1, Section 15020 and


2. General:

a. Seismic Design Category: D Soils.

b. Building Category: II.

c. Importance Factor (l-p): Equipment importance factor of 1.0.

d. Earthquake resistant designs for HVAC (Division 15) equipment and

distribution, i.e. motors, ductwork, piping, equipment, etc. conform to regulations

of jurisdiction having authority.

e. Restraints which are used to prevent disruption of function of piece of

equipment because of application of horizontal force to be such that forces are

carried to frame of structure in such a way that frame will not be deflected when

apparatus is attached to a mounting base and equipment pad, or to structure in

normal way, utilizing attachments provided. Secure equipment and distribution

systems to withstand a force in direction equal to value defined by jurisdiction

having authority.

f. Provide stamped shop drawings from licensed structural engineer of seismic

bracing and seismic movement assemblies for piping, ductwork, equipment, and

system appurtenances. Submit shop drawings along with equipment submittals.

g. Provide stamped shop drawings from licensed Structural Engineer of seismic

flexible joints for system crossing building expansion or seismic joints. Submit

shop drawings along with seismic bracing details. Coordinate exact design

requirements with project Structural Engineer.

3. Piping and Ductwork: Per "Seismic Restraints Manual Guidelines for Mechanical

Systems" latest edition published by SMACNA or local requirements.

4. Equipment: Provide means to prohibit excessive motion of equipment during

earthquake.




C. REVIEW AND OBSERVATION

1. Confirm Review and Observation requirements in Division 0, Division 1, Section

15020 and individual Division 15 Sections.

2. Notify Architect, in writing, at following stages of construction so that Architect

may, at their option, visit site for review and construction observation:

a. Underground system installation prior to backfilling.

b. Prior to covering walls.

c. Prior to ceiling cover/installation.

d. After major equipment is installed.

e. When main systems, or portions of, are being tested and ready for inspection

by AHJ.

f. Final Punch: Costs incurred by additional trips required due to incomplete

systems will be the responsibility of the Contractor.

D. CONTINUITY OF SERVICE



a. During remodeling or addition to existing structures, while existing structure

is occupied, current services to remain intact until new construction, facilities or

equipment is installed.

b. Prior to changing over to new service, verify that every item is thoroughly

prepared. Install new piping and ductwork, and wiring to point of connection.

Where existing systems are being utilized, clean existing distribution systems

(ductwork, piping, fans, air handlers) prior to connecting new ductwork or piping.

c. Coordinate transfer time to new service with Owner. If required, perform

transfer during off peak hours. Once changeover is started, pursue to its

completion to keep interference to a minimum. If overtime is necessary, there will

be no allowance made by Owner for extra expense for such overtime or shift

work.

d. Organize work to minimize duration of power interruption.




E. CUTTING AND PATCHING

1. Confirm Cutting and Patching requirements in Division 0 and Division 1. In

absence of specific requirements, comply with individual Division 15 sections and the

following:

a. Proposed floor cutting/core drilling/sleeve locations to be approved by project

Structural Engineer. Submit proposed locations to Architect/Project Structural

Engineer. Where slabs are of post tension construction, perform x-ray scan of

proposed penetration locations and submit scan results including proposed

penetration locations to project Structural Engineer/Architect for approval.

Where slabs are of waffle type construction, show column cap extent and cell

locations relative to proposed penetration(s).

b. Cutting, patching and repairing for work specified in this Division including

plastering, masonry work, concrete work, carpentry work, and painting included

under this Section and will be performed by skilled craftsmen of each respective

trade in conformance with appropriate Division of Work.

c. Additional openings required in building construction to be made by drilling

or cutting. Use of jack hammer is specifically prohibited. Patch openings in and

through concrete and masonry with grout.

d. Restore new or existing work that is cut and/or damaged to original condition.

Where alterations disturb lawns, paving, and walks, surfaces to be repaired,

refinished and left in condition matching existing prior to commencement of

work.

e. Additional work required by lack of proper coordination will be provided at

no additional cost to the Owner.

F. EQUIPMENT SELECTION AND SERVICEABILITY

1. Replace or reposition equipment which is too large or located incorrectly to

permit servicing, at no additional cost to Owner.

2. Maintain design intent where equipment other than as shown as Basis-of-Design

in Contract Documents is provided. Where equipment requires ductwork or piping

arrangement, controls/control diagrams, or sequencing different from that indicated in

Contract Documents, provide at no additional cost to Owner.




G. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING



a. Handle materials delivered to project site with care to avoid damage. Store

materials on site inside building or protected from weather, dirt and construction

dust. Insulation and lining that becomes wet from improper storage and handling

to be replaced before installation. Products and/or materials that become

damaged due to water, dirt, and/or dust as a result of improper storage to be

replaced before installation.

b. Protect equipment and pipe to avoid damage. Close pipe openings with caps

or plugs. Keep motors and bearings in watertight and dustproof covers during

entire course of installation. Provide dustproof covers over exposed ends of ducts

during construction while waiting to complete system.

c. Protect bright finished shafts, bearing housings and similar items until in

service.

H. DEMONSTRATION

1. Confirm Demonstration requirements in Division 0 and Division 1, Section 15020

and individual Division 15 Sections.

2. Upon completion of work and adjustment of equipment and test systems,

demonstrate to Owner's Representative, Architect and Engineer and Commissioning

Agent that equipment furnished and installed or connected under provisions of these

Specifications functions in manner required. Provide field instruction to Owner's

Maintenance Staff as specified in Division 1, Section 15020 and individual Division

15 sections.

3. Manufacturer's Field Services: Furnish services of a qualified person at time

approved by Owner, to instruct maintenance personnel, correct defects or

deficiencies, and demonstrate to satisfaction of Owner that entire system is operating

in satisfactory manner and complies with requirements of other trades that may be

required to complete work. Complete instruction and demonstration prior to final job

site observations.

4. Training and Demonstration per Section 01810, General Commissioning

Requirements and Section 15945, Commissioning of HVAC.




I. CLEANING

1. Confirm Cleaning requirements in Division 1, Section 15020 and individual


2. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean exposed portions of equipment,

removing temporary labels and traces of foreign substances. Throughout work,

remove construction debris and surplus materials accumulated during work.

J. INSTALLATION

1. Confirm Installation requirements in Division 0, Division 1, Section 15020 and


2. Install equipment and fixtures in accordance with manufacturer's installation

instructions, plumb and level and firmly anchored to vibration isolators. Maintain


3. Start up equipment, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, and

in presence of manufacturer's representative. Test controls and demonstrate

compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and

equipment. Do not place equipment in sustained operation prior to initial balancing of

HVAC systems.

4. Provide miscellaneous supports/metals required for installation of equipment,

piping and ductwork.

K. PAINTING

1. Confirm Painting requirements in Division 1 and Division 9. In absence of

specific requirements, comply with individual Division 15 sections and the following:

a. Ferrous Metal: After completion of work, thoroughly clean and paint exposed

supports constructed of ferrous metal surfaces in mechanical rooms, i.e., hangers,

hanger rods, equipment stands, with one coat of black enamel suitable for hot

surfaces.

b. After acceptance by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), In a mechanical

room, on roof or other exposed areas, machinery and equipment not painted with

enamel to receive two coats of primer and one coat of rustproof enamel, colors as

selected by Architect.

c. See individual equipment Specifications for other painting.

d. Structural Steel: Repair damage to structural steel finishes or finishes of other

materials damaged by cutting, welding or patching to match original.




e. Piping and Ductwork: Clean, primer coat and paint exposed piping and

ductwork on roof or at other exterior locations with two coats paint suitable for

metallic surfaces and exterior exposures. Color selected by Architect.

f. Covers: Covers such as manholes, cleanouts and the like will be furnished

with finishes which resist corrosion and rust.

L. ACCESS PANELS

1. Confirm Access Panel requirements in Division 1. In absence of specific


Coordinate locations/sizes of access panels with Architect prior to work.

M. DEMOLITION



a. Scope:

1. It is the intent of these documents to provide necessary information and

adjustments to the HVAC system required to meet code, and accommodate

installation of new work.

2. Coordinate with Owner so that work can be scheduled not to interrupt

operations, normal activities, building access or access to different areas.

3. Existing Conditions: Determine exact location of existing utilities and

equipment before commencing work, compensate Owner for damages caused

by failure to exactly locate and preserve utilities. Replace damaged items

with new material to match existing. Promptly notify Owner if utilities are

found which are not shown on Drawings.

b. Equipment: Unless otherwise directed, equipment, fixtures, or fittings being

removed as part of demolition process are Owner's property. Remove other items

not scheduled to be reused or relocated from job site as directed by Owner.

c. Unless specifically indicated on Drawings, remove exposed, unused ductwork

and piping to behind finished surfaces (floor, walls, ceilings, etc.). Cap and patch

surfaces to match surrounding finish.

d. Unless specifically indicated on Drawings, remove unused equipment,

fixtures, fittings, rough-ins, and connectors. Removal is to be to a point behind

finished surfaces (floors, walls, and ceilings).




N. ACCEPTANCE



a. System cannot be considered for acceptance until work is completed and

demonstrated to Architect that installation is in strict compliance with

Specifications, Drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions, particularly

in reference to following:

1. Testing and Balancing Reports

2. Cleaning

3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals

4. Training of Operating Personnel

5. Record Drawings

6. Warranty and Guaranty Certificates

7. Start-up/Test Document

8. Commissioning Reports

O. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

1. Confirm Field Quality Control requirements in Division 1, Section 15020 and


2. Tests:

a. Conduct tests of equipment and systems to demonstrate compliance with

requirements specified. Reference individual Specification sections for required

tests. Document tests and include in Operation & Maintenance Manuals.

b. During site evaluations by Architect or Engineer, provide an electrician with

tools to remove and replace trims, covers, and devices so that proper evaluation of

installation can be performed.




P. LETTER OF CONFORMANCE

1. Provide Letter of Conformance and copies of manufacturers' warranties and

extended warranties with a statement that fire suppression items were installed in

accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, UL listings and FM Global

approvals. Include Letter of Conformance and copies of manufacturers' warranties

and extended warranties in Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

Q. ELECTRICAL INTERLOCKS


for simultaneous operation, utilize equipment wiring diagrams to coordinate with

electrical systems so that proper wiring of equipment involved is affected.

END OF SECTION



EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING SECTION 15035- 1 of 6

SECTION 15035 - EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC

PIPING

15035-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY

1. Work included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of:

a. Flexible Pipe Connectors, Steel Piping

b. Flexible Pipe Connectors, Copper Piping

c. Flexible Expansion Loop (For Thermal and Seismic Applications), Steel

Piping

d. Flexible Expansion Loop (For Thermal and Seismic Applications), Copper

Piping

e. Accessories.

B. RELATED SECTIONS

1. Contents of Division 15 and Division 1, General Requirements, apply to this

section.


1. References and Standards as required by Section 15020 and Division 1, General

Requirements.

D. SUBMITTALS

1. Submittals as required by Section 15020 and Division 1, General Requirements.

2. In addition, provide:

a. Design Data: Indicate selection calculations.

b. Expansion Joints: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, and

maximum expansion compensation.




c. Project Record Documents: Record installed locations of flexible pipe

connectors, expansion joints, anchors, and guides.


1. Quality assurance as required by Section 15020 and Division 1, General

Requirements.

F. WARRANTY

1. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by Section 15020 and

Division 1, General Requirements.

15035-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Mercer Rubber Company

2. Metraflex Company

3. Mason

4. Hyspan

5. Advanced Thermal Systems Inc.

6. Or approved equivalent.

B. FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS - STEEL PIPING

1. 304 stainless steel, close pitch, annular corrugated hose.

2. Exterior Sleeve: Single Braided braided 304 stainless steel.

3. Pressure Rating: 125 psi at 70 degrees F for 12-inch pipe (single braid) with a 4

to 1 safety factor.

4. Joint: ANSI Class 150 carbon steel flanges.

5. Size: Use pipe sized units.

6. Maximum offset: 3/4-inch on each side of installed center line.




7. Basis-of-Design: Metraflex Model MLP.

C. FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS - COPPER PIPING

1. Inner Hose: Bronze, close pitch, annular corrugated hose.

2. Exterior Sleeve: Braided bronze (for piping over 2-inches, to be 3 pound braided

stainless steel).

3. Pressure Rating: 125 PSI at 70 degrees F with a 4 to 1 safety factor.

4. Joint: Sweat ends.



7. Basis-of-Design: Metraflex Model BBS.

D. FLEXIBLE EXPANSION LOOP (FOR THERMAL AND SEISMIC

APPLICATIONS) - STEEL PIPING

1. Construction: Two flexible sections of hose and braid, two 90 degree elbows and

a 180 degree return designed so piping does not change direction, but maintains

course along a single axis. Use Vee Loop where space is limited. No thrust loads to

be imported to system support anchors or building structure.

2. Inner Hose: 304 stainless steel, close pitch, annular corrugated hose.

3. Exterior Sleeve: Single braided, 304 stainless steel.


5. Joint: ANSI Class 150 carbon steel flanges.


7. Support: Center support at bottom of 180 degree return.

8. Drain/Air Release: At bottom of 180 degree return.

9. For Natural Gas: Approved by the CSA and complying with UL536.

10. Basis-of-Design: Metraflex Metraloop, for Vee configuration Mason-Mercer

VFL.




E. FLEXIBLE EXPANSION LOOP (FOR THERMAL AND SEISMIC

APPLICATIONS) - COPPER PIPING

1. Construction: Two flexible sections of hose and braid, two 90 degree elbows and

a 180 degree return designed so piping does not change direction, but maintains

course along a single axis. Use Vee Loop where space is limited. No thrust loads to

be imported to system support anchors or building structure.


3. Exterior Sleeve: Braided bronze.




7. Support: Center support at bottom of 180 degree return.

8. Basis-of-Design: Metraflex Metraloop, for Vee configuration Mason-Mercer

VCPSB.

F. ACCESSORIES

1. Stainless Steel Pipe: ASTM A 269.

2. Pipe Alignment Guides:

a. Two piece welded steel with enamel paint, bolted, with spider to fit standard

pipe, frame with four mounting holes, clearance for minimum 1-inch thick

insulation, minimum 3-inches travel.

15035-03 EXECUTION

A. EXPANSION FITTING INSTALLATION

1. Install expansion fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Install expansion fittings in sizes matching pipe size in which they are installed.

3. Align expansion fittings to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.

4. Install in accordance with EJMA (Expansion Joint Manufacturer's Association)

Standards.




B. PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION

1. Install pipe bends and loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to

partly absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in

temperature.

2. Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors.

a. Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX, "Welding and Brazing

Qualifications."

b. Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's

written instructions.

C. SWING CONNECTIONS

1. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings,

including tee in main.

2. Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe

fittings, including tee in riser.

3. Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe

fittings, including tee in main.

D. GUIDE INSTALLATION

1. Install guides on piping adjoining expansion fittings and loops.

2. Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure.

E. ANCHOR INSTALLATION

1. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by

ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

2. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to

piping and to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1.

3. Construct concrete anchors of poured-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated

and include embedded fasteners.

4. Install pipe anchors according to expansion fitting manufacturer's written

instructions if expansion fittings are indicated.




5. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and anchors

installed on or in concrete.

F. PAINTING

1. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed

areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used

for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA1 requirements for touching up field-

painted surfaces. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film

thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).

2. Galvanized surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and

apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.

END OF SECTION



MOTORS AND COMMON ELECTRICAL WORK FOR SECTION 15055- 1 of 9

PLUMBING SYSTEMS

SECTION 15055 - MOTORS AND COMMON ELECTRICAL WORK

FOR PLUMBING SYSTEMS

15055-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY

1. Work Included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of:

a. General

b. General Motor Construction and Requirements

c. Low Voltage Control Wiring

B. RELATED SECTIONS

1. Contents of Division 15 and Division 1, General Requirements apply to this

section.


1. References and Standards as required by Division 1, General Requirements and

Section 15010.

2. In addition, meet the following:

a. NEMA Premium Efficiency.

b. Energy Policy Act (EPACT), latest applicable version(s) for minimum motor

efficiencies.

c. IEEE112, Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and

Generators.

d. IEEE Standard 519, Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic

Control in Electrical Power Systems.

e. UL 508, Industrial Control Equipment.

f. NEMA: ICS 6, Enclosures.

g. IEC, International Electrotechnical Commission.




PLUMBING SYSTEMS

D. SUBMITTALS




Requirements apply to this section.


a. Field Installed Motors: Installed motors to be of single type, from one source

and from a single manufacturer.

b. Variable Frequency Drives: Materials and installation for a complete

adjustable frequency motor drive consisting of a pulse width modulated (PWM)

inverter for use on a standard NEMA Design B induction motor. Design drive

specifically for variable torque applications. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)

provided by Controls Section or equipment manufacturer.

1. A firm engaged in the production of this type of equipment for a minimum

of 10 years.

2. Testing: Test printed circuit boards and burned in before being assembled

into the completed VFD. Subject VFD to a preliminary functional test,

minimum 8-hour burn-in, and computerized final test at 104 degrees F at full

rated load.

3. Qualifications:

a) UL Listed.

b) C-UL listed or CSA approved.

c) Warranty: 12 months from the date of certified start-up. Include parts,

labor, travel time, and expenses.

F. WARRANTY




a. For motors 50 HP and Larger: Provide five year manufacturer's limited

warranty from date of substantial completion.




PLUMBING SYSTEMS

15055-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Motors:

a. Lincoln Motors

b. A.O. Smith Electrical Products

c. Baldor Electric (Reliance Electric)

d. General Electric

e. Toshiba

f. Exceptions: Motors integral to equipment efficiency listing (EER, COP, etc.)

per listing agency.

g. Or approved equivalent.

2. Low Voltage Control Wiring:

a. General Electric

b. Anaconda

c. Rome

d. Or approved equivalent.

B. GENERAL

1. Electrical components and materials to be UL to ETL listed/labeled as suitable for

location and use.

2. Wiring installed in conduit.

C. GENERAL MOTOR CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS

1. Electrical Service: Power wiring from source to motor termination under

Division 16. Coordinate location of disconnect and starter or motor controller.

Combination starter/disconnects may be used in lieu of separate items.




PLUMBING SYSTEMS

2. Electrical Service - Unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents, the

following voltage and phase characteristics apply to motors:

a. Motors 1/2 HP and Under: 120 volt, 1 phase.

b. Motors 3/4 HP and Over: 208 volt, 3 phase.

c. Motors 3/4 HP and Over: 480 volt, 3 phase

3. Construction:

a. Open drip-proof type except where specifically noted otherwise.

b. Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment.

c. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for

insulation class, service factor, and motor enclosure type.

d. Built-in thermal overload protection or externally protected with separate

over-load with low-voltage release or lock-out. Quick trip device on hermetically

sealed motors.

e. Service Factor: 1.15 for poly-phase motors. 1.25 for motors associated with

shaft pressurization system fans. 1.35 for single phase motors.

f. Noise Rating: Quiet.

g. Efficiency: Provide premium efficiency motors.

h. Motors used in Conjunction with Variable Speed Drives: Variable torque type

matched for the full operating range of the variable frequency drive. As a

minimum, motors to have Class F insulation, winding insulation rated for 1000

volts and insulated bearings to prevent high frequency ground path. Loads not-to-

exceed 80 percent of nameplate rating

4. Explosion-Proof Motors: UL approved and labelled for hazard classification with

over temperature protection.

5. Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM,

full load amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model

number, service factor, power factor, efficiency.

6. Wiring Terminations:

a. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and

materials indicated. Coordinate conductor sizes with Division 16. Enclose

terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70, threaded for conduit.




PLUMBING SYSTEMS

b. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide

conduit connection in end frame.

7. Provide inverter ready motors per NEMA MG1-30 for variable speed drive or

soft-start starter use. Provide shaft grounding for motors over 2 HP serving variable

speed drives. Provide shaft grounding and insulated bearings on motors 25 HP and

larger serving variable speed drives. Shielded cable required for power wiring from

variable speed drive to motor connection.

8. Unless otherwise indicated, motors 1-HP and larger to meet/exceed NEMA

Premium Efficiency and latest EPACT.

9. Vertical in-line pump motors per NEMA MG1, Motors and Generators.

D. LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL WIRING

1. General 60 Hz Control Circuiting: 600 volts insulated 14 gauge, Type THHN,

color coded, installed in conduit in mechanical rooms and exposed locations. Other

areas plenum rated cable is allowed. Reference Division 16 Specifications for details

of wiring and conduit.

15055-03 EXECUTION

A. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

1. Contractor to Provide the Following Where Applicable:

a. Motors

b. Starters and disconnects if they are integral parts of mechanical equipment as

shown on the equipment schedules. Reference Drawings and subsequent

Sections.

c. Low Voltage and Electronic Control Devices

d. Low Voltage Transformers

e. Low Voltage Conduit and Wire and Connecting Devices

f. Conduit and wire for electronic devices, except for line voltage wiring.

g. Heat Tracing Devices




PLUMBING SYSTEMS

2. Electrical work listed above performed by a licensed electrical contractor or by

the control manufacturer, but provided for and coordinated under Division 15 work.

In addition, controls work supervised and subsequently approved in writing by the

control manufacturer.

3. Contractor to furnish the following to the Electrical Contractor where applicable:

Line voltage control equipment, including switches (except disconnects), time

switches, transformers, relays, etc. (except those part of MCC).

4. Include the Following Items under Division 16 Work:

a. Line voltage wire and conduit system.

b. Starters and disconnects not provided with equipment.

c. Installation of line voltage control equipment furnished under Paragraph A3

above.

B. CONTROL CABLE INSTALLATION

1. Install low voltage control cable exposed in areas without suspended ceilings,

buried in room partition walls and hidden above suspended ceilings. Exposed wiring

installed in a neat manner with wiring runs laid out parallel to building walls and

horizontal runs supported to eliminate sagging loops between support rings and clips.

Tie cable running parallel to electrical conduit to the electrical conduit with nylon

cable ties where conduit is nearby. In areas where conduit is not available, attach

cable to the concrete structure with bridle rings or cable clips attached with mastic.

Above suspended ceilings support the cable with bridle rings hung from ceiling

support wires with caddy attachment. Each change in direction of exposed cable

installed with a single 90 degree angle turn.

C. ELECTRICAL INTERLOCKS


for simultaneous operation, utilize mechanical equipment wiring diagrams to

coordinate with the electrical systems so that proper wiring of the equipment involved

is affected.

D. MOTOR INSTALLATION

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Coordinate with starter or

variable speed controller with control sequence to provide necessary starter

accessories.




PLUMBING SYSTEMS

2. Variable Speed Controller Connection:

a. Coordinate wiring length/type to meet controller manufacturer requirements.

Grounding per manufacturer wiring diagram.

b. Shaft Grounding:

1. Provide shaft grounding assembly on motors controlled by variable

frequency drive. Shaft grounding device to be in the form of brush that

resides on the motor shaft. Brush assembly capable of tolerating

misalignment and maintaining rotating contact throughout the motor's life.

2. Material: Material used in the grounding assembly stable material

commonly used within industry that is not believed to constitute a hazardous

material under Office of Safety and Health Act (OSHA regulations).

3. Brushes: Specifically developed carbon compounds of sustained

performance with seal life expectancy of 3 years minimum.

4. Seals: Sealed type to keep contaminants from entering the shaft

grounding system in wet or severe environment applications.

5. Shaft Grounding Assembly: For clean room air handling systems, use the

type that contains the wear products within a special enclosure within the shaft

grounding system.

6. Shaft grounding assembly installation not to affect the motor manufacturer

warranty. Where the severe environment conditions require application of the

shaft grounding types that are screwed into the motor shaft, the installation of

the shaft grounding system performed either by the motor manufacturer or by

the motor manufacturer authorized facility.

7. Manufacturer: Shaft Grounding Inc. Aegis, or approved.

8. Bond the brush to the closest ground point using code sized green

insulated stranded copper conductor per manufacturer instructions.

9. Test and verify the performance of the assembly to ensure that under no

conditions the shaft exceeds 3 volts.

3. Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in any

position.

4. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate.

5. Verify motor rotation.




PLUMBING SYSTEMS

E. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

1. Prepare for Acceptance Tests as Follows:

a. Run each motor with its controller. Demonstrate correct rotation, alignment,

and speed at motor design load.

b. Test interlocks and control features for proper operation.

c. Verify that current in each phase is within nameplate rating.

2. Testing: Perform the Following Field Quality-Control Testing:

a. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in

NETA ATS, Section 7.15.1. Certify compliance with test parameters.

b. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to

demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative

to perform the following:

a. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and

electrical connections for compliance with requirements.

b. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.

c. Verify bearing lubrication.

d. Verify proper motor rotation.

e. Test Reports:

1. Prepare a written report to record the following test procedures used:

a) Test results that comply with requirements.

b) Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action

taken to achieve compliance.

F. CONTROLLERS

1. Install enclosed controllers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.




PLUMBING SYSTEMS

2. Coordinate disconnect requirements and location with Division 16 if not integral

to controller. If controller is installed out of line of sight of motor, provide additional

disconnect at motor per Code.

3. Provide NEMA housing appropriate to installation location.

4. Provide supports and install securely, in neat and workmanlike manner, as

specified in NECA 1.

5. Meet mounting height and accessible location requirements per local code.

6. Provide fuses for fusible switches.

7. Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed

motor characteristics.

8. Provide engraved plastic nameplates.

9. Provide neatly typed label inside each motor controller door identifying motor

served, nameplate.

10. Single Phase 120 Volt Starter: If not furnished as single packaged

controller/disconnect, provide contactors, relays, wiring and devices necessary to

match sequence of operation for equipment.

G. ADJUSTING

1. Align motors, bases, shafts, pulleys and belts. Tension belts according to

manufacturer's written instructions.

H. CLEANING

1. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint

splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original

finish.

2. Clean motors, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

END OF SECTION



MOTORS AND COMMON ELECTRICAL WORK FOR HVAC SYSTEMS SECTION 15056- 1 of 12

SECTION 15056 - MOTORS AND COMMON ELECTRICAL WORK

FOR HVAC SYSTEMS

15056-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. General

b. General Motor Construction and Requirements

c. Low Voltage Control Wiring

d. Applications

e. Single Phase Power - Split Phase Motors

f. Single Phase Power - Permanent-Split Capacitor Motors

g. Single Phase Power - Capacitor Start Motors

h. Three Phase Power - Squirrel Cage Motors

i. Starters

j. Shaft Grounding

k. Disconnects

B. RELATED SECTIONS


section.



Requirements.

a. NEMA Premium Efficiency.

b. Energy Policy Act (EPACT), latest applicable version(s) for minimum motor

efficiencies.




D. SUBMITTALS




Requirements.

2. In addition, meet the following: Field Installed Motors: Installed motors to be of

single type, from one source and from a single manufacturer.

F. WARRANTY



15056-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Motors:

a. Lincoln Motor

b. A.m. Smith Electrical Products

c. Baldur Electric

d. General Electric

e. Toshiba

f. Exception: Motors integral to equipment efficiency listing (EER, COP, etc.)

per listing agency.


2. Low Voltage Control Wiring:

a. General Electric

b. Anaconda

c. Rome





e. Shaft Grounding:

f. Shaft Grounding Inc.

g. Aegis

h. Or approved equivalent.

B. GENERAL

1. Electrical components and materials to be UL to ETL listed/labeled as suitable for

location and use.

2. Wiring installed in conduit.

C. GENERAL MOTOR CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS

1. Electrical Service: power wiring from source to motor termination under Division

16. Coordinate location of disconnect and starter or motor controller. Combination

starter/disconnects may be used in lieu of separate items.

2. Electrical Service - Unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents, the

following voltage and phase characteristics apply to motors:

a. Motors 1/2 HP and Under: 120 volt, 1 phase.

b. Motors 3/4 HP and Over: 208 volt, 3 phase.

c. Motors 3/4 HP and Over: 480 volt, 3 phase

3. Construction:

a. Open drip-proof type except where specifically noted otherwise.

b. Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment.

c. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for

insulation class, service factor, and motor enclosure type.

d. Built-in thermal overload protection or externally protected with separate

over-load with low-voltage release or lock-out. Quick trip device on hermetically

sealed motors.




e. Service Factor: 1.15 for poly-phase motors except 1.25 for motors associated

with shaft pressurization system fans and 1.35 for single phase motors.

f. Noise Rating: Quiet.

g. Efficiency: Provide Premium Efficiency motors.

h. Motors used in conjunction with variable speed drives: Variable torque type

matched for the full operating range of the variable frequency drive. As a

minimum, motors to have Class F insulation, winding insulation rated for 1000

Volts and insulated bearings to prevent high frequency ground path. Loads not-

to-exceed 80 percent of nameplate rating

4. Explosion-Proof Motors: UL approved and labelled for hazard classification,

with over temperature protection.

5. Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM,

full load amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model

number, service factor, power factor, efficiency.

6. Wiring Terminations:

a. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and

materials indicated. Coordinate conductor sizes with Division 16. Enclose

terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70, threaded for conduit.

b. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide

conduit connection in end frame.

7. Provide inverter ready motors per NEMA MG1-30 for variable speed drive or

soft-start starter use. Provide shaft grounding for motors over 2 HP serving variable

speed drives. Provide shaft grounding and insulated bearings on motors 25 HP and

larger serving variable speed drives. Shielded cable required for power wiring from

variable speed drive to motor connection.

8. Unless otherwise indicated, motors 1-HP and larger to meet/exceed NEMA

Premium Efficiency and latest EPACT.

9. Vertical in-line pump motors per NEMA MG1 vertical motor requirements.

10. Motor Manufacturers Exceptions: Motors integral to equipment, efficiency listing

(EER, COP, etc) per listing agency.




D. LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL WIRING

1. General 60 Hz Control Circuiting: 600 volts insulated 14 gauge Type THHN,

color coded, installed in conduit in mechanical rooms and exposed locations. Other

areas plenum rated cable is allowed. Reference Division 16 Specifications for details

of wiring and conduit.

E. APPLICATIONS

1. Exception: Motors less than 250 watts, for intermittent service, motors furnished

with equipment manufacturer's standard package equipment need not conform to

these specifications.

2. Single phase motors for air compressors and pumps: Capacitor start type.

F. SINGLE PHASE POWER - SPLIT PHASE MOTORS

1. Starting Torque: Less than 150 percent of full load torque.

2. Starting Current: Up to seven times full load current.

3. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 200 percent of full load torque.

4. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA

Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings.

5. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service

Factor, prelubricated ball bearings.

G. SINGLE PHASE POWER - PERMANENT-SPLIT CAPACITOR MOTORS

1. Starting Torque: Exceeding one fourth of full load torque.

2. Starting Current: Up to six times full load current.

3. Multiple Speed: Through tapped windings.

4. Open Drip-proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C

temperature rise) insulation, minimum 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball

bearings, automatic reset overload protector.

H. SINGLE PHASE POWER - CAPACITOR START MOTORS

1. Starting Torque: Three times full load torque.




2. Starting Current: Less than five times full load current.

3. Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque.

4. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque.

5. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor-

start/capacitor-run motors with two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor

remaining in circuit at operating speeds.

6. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA

Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve bearings.

7. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service

Factor, prelubricated ball bearings.

I. THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS

1. Starting Torque: Between 1 and 1-1/2 times full load torque.

2. Starting Current: Six times full load current.

3. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA

Design B characteristics.

4. Design, Construction, Testing, and Performance: Conform to NEMA MG 1 for

Design B motors.

5. Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better.

6. Testing Procedure: In accordance with IEEE 112. Load test motors to determine

free from electrical or mechanical defects in compliance with performance data.

7. Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with

end brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts.

8. Thermistor System (Motor Frame Sizes 254T and Larger): Three PTC

thermistors imbedded in motor windings and epoxy encapsulated solid state control

relay for wiring into motor starter.

9. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped

with plugged provision for relubrication, rated for minimum ABMA STD 9, L-10 life

of 200,000 hours. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with

belt center line at end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on

nameplate.

10. Sound Power Levels: To NEMA MG 1.




11. Part Winding Start Above 254T Frame Size: Use part of winding to reduce

locked rotor starting current to approximately 60 percent of full winding locked rotor

current while providing approximately 50 percent of full winding locked rotor torque.

12. Nominal Efficiency: Meet or exceed NEMA Premium Efficiency rating when

tested in accordance with IEEE 112.

13. Nominal Power Factor: Minimum at full load and rated voltage when tested in

accordance with IEEE 112.

J. STARTERS

1. Single-Phase Motors:

a. Manual across-the-line starting switch having toggle-operated switch pilot

running light and built-in thermal overload device with heating element rated not

more than 115 percent motor full load current indicated on name plate of motor to

be protected. Surface mount starters. Provide NEMA-1 enclosure.

b. Overload relays to be melting alloy type with a replaceable control circuit

module. Thermal units to be interchangeable. Starter to be non operative if

thermal unit is removed.

c. Single-phase motors with automatic controls. Provide motor-rated relay with

coils rated for control voltage.

2. Starters up to Size 8 to be suitable for the addition of a minimum of three external

auxiliary contacts (normally open or normally closed). Contactor, coils, and relays to

perform the control functions of the associated equipment and control sequence.

3. 3 Phase Motors up to and Including 15 HP:

a. Provide enclosed type magnetic across-the-line starter with thermal overload

and undervoltage protection.

b. Operator: "Start-Stop" pushbutton, except where automatic control is

indicated on Drawings or specified. Then provide "Hand-Off-Auto" selector

switch.

c. Starters for 3-phase motors to have overload protection in each of the three

legs, with external manual reset.

d. Unless indicated on Drawings or in Specifications, furnish motor starters with

a neon pilot light. Neon lights are required for exhaust fan switches.

e. Equip starters with integral transformer and coil for control circuit.

Coordinate coil voltage with control voltage.




4. For 3 phase motors greater than 15 HP:

a. Provide combination starter and fused safety disconnect integral in the same

enclosure. Utilize Type 'RK' or 'L' fuses. Provide fuse block with rejection type

fuse holders. Size fuses per motor manufacturer's recommendations.

b. Provide a solid-state reduced voltage starter, consisting of power section, one-

piece removable printed circuit logic board and field wiring interface terminals.

Logic board uses quick disconnect plug-in connectors for current transformers

inputs, line-and-load voltage inputs, SCR gate firing output circuits and status

panel. 3-phase current sensing via current transformers. Class 10 electronic

overload protection.

c. Motor starters to include the following protections:

1. Inverse time running overcurrent protection.

2. 250 percent to 500 percent current limit adjustment.

3. Minimum and maximum voltage adjustments.

4. Voltage stability adjustment.

5. Single-phase protection with built-in short-time delay.

6. Undervoltage protection with built-in short time delay.

7. MOV surge suppression protection of SCRs rated 10 percent above the

rated voltage.

8. Phase sequence protection.

d. Display: Door-mounted status LCD alphanumeric or LED display indicating

run, undervoltage, phase loss, phase current unbalance, overcurrent trip,

overtemperature, current limit, end of ramp, and incorrect phase rotation.

e. Enclosure: NEMA 12. Operator: "Start-Stop" pushbutton, except where

automatic control is indicated on Drawings or specified, then provide "Hand-Off-

Auto" selector switch

f. Input/Output Relays: Provide relays as required to provide the control

sequence.

g. UL 508 listed.




K. DISCONNECTS

1. Provided by Division 16 unless specifically specified otherwise.

15056-03 EXECUTION

A. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

1. Provide the following where applicable:

a. Motors.

b. Starters and disconnects if they are integral parts of mechanical equipment as

shown on the equipment schedules. Reference Drawings and subsequent

Sections.

c. Low voltage and electronic control devices.

d. Low voltage transformers.

e. Low voltage conduit and wire and connecting devices.

f. Conduit and wire for electronic devices, except for line voltage wiring.

g. Heat tracing devices.

2. Electrical work listed above performed by a licensed electrical contractor or by

the control manufacturer, but provided for and coordinated under Division 15 work.

In addition, controls work supervised and subsequently approved in writing by the

control manufacturer.

3. Furnish the following to the Electrical Contractor where applicable: Line voltage

control equipment, including switches (except disconnects), time switches,

transformers, relays, etc..

4. Include the following items under Division 16 work:

a. Line voltage wire and conduit system.

b. Starters and disconnects not provided with equipment.

c. Installation of line voltage control equipment furnished under Paragraph

3.01.C.above.




B. ELECTRICAL INTERLOCKS


for simultaneous operation, utilize mechanical equipment wiring diagrams to

coordinate with the electrical systems so that proper wiring of the equipment involved

is affected.

C. MOTOR INSTALLATION

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Coordinate with starter or

variable speed controller with control sequence to provide necessary starter

accessories.

2. Variable speed controller connection: Coordinate wiring length/type to meet

controller manufacturer requirements. Grounding per manufacturer wiring diagram.

3. Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in any

position.

4. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate.

5. Verify motor rotation.

D. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

1. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

a. Run each motor with its controller. Demonstrate correct rotation, alignment,

and speed at motor design load.

b. Test interlocks and control features for proper operation.

c. Verify that current in each phase is within nameplate rating.

2. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:

a. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in

NETA ATS, Section 7.15.1. Certify compliance with test parameters.

b. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to

demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.





to perform the following:

a. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and

electrical connections for compliance with requirements.

b. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning


c. Verify bearing lubrication.

d. Verify proper motor rotation.

e. Test Reports:

1. Prepare a written report to record the following test procedures used:

a) Test results that comply with requirements.

b) Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action

taken to achieve compliance.

E. CONTROLLERS

1. Install enclosed controllers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. Coordinate disconnect requirements and location with Division 16 if not integral

to controller. If controller is installed out of line of sight of motor, provide additional

disconnect at motor per code.

3. Provide NEMA housing appropriate to installation location.

4. Provide supports and install securely, in neat and workmanlike manner, as

specified in NECA 1.

5. Meet mounting height and accessible location requirements per local code.

6. Provide fuses for fusible switches.



8. Provide engraved plastic nameplates.

9. Single phase 120 Volt starter: if not furnished as single packaged

controller/disconnect, provide contactors, relays, wiring and devices necessary to

match sequence of operation for equipment.




F. ADJUSTING

1. Align motors, bases, shafts, pulleys and belts. Tension belts according to

manufacturer's written instructions.

G. CLEANING

1. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint

splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original

finish.

2. Clean motors, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

END OF SECTION



EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15058 - 1 of 4

SECTION 15058 - EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR

PLUMBING PIPING

15058-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Flexible Pipe Connectors, Copper Piping

B. RELATED SECTIONS


section.



Requirements.

D. SUBMITTALS



a. Design Data: Indicate selection calculations.

b. Expansion Joints: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, and

maximum expansion compensation.

c. Project Record Documents: Record installed locations of flexible pipe

connectors, expansion joints, anchors, and guides.

d. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in

maintenance of project.

1. Extra Packing for Packed Expansion Joints: One set for each joint.






Requirements.

F. WARRANTY



15058-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Mercer Rubber Company

2. Metraflex Company

3. Mason

4. Hyspan

5. Advanced Thermal Systems Inc.


B. FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS - COPPER PIPING


2. Exterior Sleeve: Braided bronze (piping over 2-inches to be 3 pound braided

stainless steel).





7. Basis-of-Design: Metraflex Model BBS.




15058-03 EXECUTION

A. EXPANSION FITTING INSTALLATION

1. Install expansion fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Install expansion fittings in sizes matching pipe size in which they are installed.

3. Align expansion fittings to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.

4. Install in accordance with EJMA (Expansion Joint Manufacturer's Association)

Standards.

B. PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION

1. Install pipe bends and loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to

partly absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in

temperature.

2. Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors.

a. Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX, "Welding and Brazing

Qualifications."

b. Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's

written instructions.

C. SWING CONNECTIONS

1. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings,

including tee in main.

2. Connect mains, risers and branch connections to equipment with at least four pipe

fittings, including tee in riser.

D. GUIDE INSTALLATION

1. Install guides on piping adjoining expansion fittings and loops.

2. Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure.




E. ANCHOR INSTALLATION

1. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by

ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

2. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to

piping and to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1.

3. Construct concrete anchors of poured-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated

and include embedded fasteners.

4. Install pipe anchors according to expansion fitting manufacturer's written

instructions if expansion fittings are indicated.

5. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and anchors

installed on or in concrete.

F. PAINTING

1. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed

areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used

for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA1 requirements for touching up field-

painted surfaces.

a. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0

mils.

2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and

apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.

END OF SECTION



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15060- 1 of 18

AND EQUIPMENT

SECTION 15060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING

PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

15060-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Piping Hangers and Supports

b. Flashing

c. Miscellaneous Materials

B. RELATED SECTIONS


section.



Requirements.


a. Hanger spacing installation and attachment to meet all manufacturers

requirements and Code requirements or MSS SP-69/MSS SP-89.

D. SUBMITTALS




Requirements.


a. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."




AND EQUIPMENT

b. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and

calculations for each multiple pipe support, trapeze, equipment hangers/supports,

and seismic restraint by a qualified Structural Professional Engineer.

1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is

legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is

experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated.

Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of

hangers and supports that are similar to those indicated for this Project in

material, design, and extent.

c. Manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of bolted metal framing

support systems whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service

for not less than 10 years.

d. Support systems to be supplied by a single manufacturer.

F. WARRANTY



G. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

1. General - Provide pipe and equipment hangers and supports in accordance with

the following:

a. When supports, anchorages, and seismic restraints for equipment, and

supports, anchorages, and seismic restraints for conduit, piping, and cutwork are

not shown on the Drawings, the contractor is responsible for their design.

b. Connections to structural framing not to introduce twisting, torsion, or lateral

bending in the framing members. Provide supplementary steel as required.

2. Engineered Support Systems:

a. Support frames such as pipe racks or stanchions for piping and equipment

which provide support from below.

b. Equipment and piping support frame anchorage to supporting slab or

structure.

3. Provide channel support systems, for piping to support multiple pipes capable of

supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.




AND EQUIPMENT

4. Provide heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of


5. Provide seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment. See

Section 15071.

6. Obtain approval from AHJ for seismic restraint hanger and support system to be

installed for piping and equipment. See Section 15071.

15060-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Pipe Hangers/Supports:

a. B-Line Systems, Inc.

b. Anvil Corp.

c. Erico Co., Inc.


2. Pipe Guides:

a. Flexonics

b. Mason Industries

c. Amber-Bush

d. Metraflex

e. Pipe Shields

f. Swebco

g. Flex-Weld

h. Advanced Thermal Systems

i. Or approved equivalent.

3. Channel Support Systems:





AND EQUIPMENT

b. Anvil Corp., Power-Strut Unit.

c. Erico Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div.

d. Unistrut Corp.

e. Or approved equivalent.

4. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts:

a. Erico Hanger Co., Inc.

b. Pipe Shields, Inc.

c. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.


5. Powder-Actuated Fastener Systems:

a. Gunnebo Fastening Corp.

b. Hilti, Inc.

c. ITW Ramset/Red Head.

d. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.


6. Freestanding Roof Supports:


b. Nelson-Olsen Inc.

c. Or approved equivalent.

7. Pipe Alignment and Secondary Supports:

a. HoldRite

b. Starquick


8. Below Grade Pipe Sleeves:

a. Thunderline Corporation "Link Seal".




AND EQUIPMENT

b. Or approved equivalent.

B. PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

1. Horizontal Piping Hangers and Supports - Horizontal and Vertical Piping, and

Hanger Rod Attachments:

a. Factory fabricated horizontal piping hangers and supports to suit piping

systems, in accordance manufacturer's published product information.

b. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service.

c. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and

to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping.

d. Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for uninsulated copper piping

systems.

e. Provide padded pipe hangers, clamps and supports for thermoplastic piping

system.

2. Pipe Hangers, Slides and Clamps:

a. Hanger Rods: Hanger rods continuously threaded or threaded ends only in

concealed spaces and threaded ends only in exposed spaces; finish electro-

galvanized or cadmium-plated in concealed spaces and prime painted in exposed

spaces; sizes per MSS.

b. Hanger Rod Couplings: Malleable iron rod coupling with elongated center

sight gap for visual inspection; to have same finish as hanger rods.

c. Pipe Rings for Hanger Rods: Pipe sizes 2-inch and smaller, MSS SP Type 6 or

Type 10, or approved equivalent. Pipe sizes 2-1/2-inches and larger, clevis type

hangers with adjustable nuts on rod. MSS SP Type 1. Pipe rings to have same

finish as hanger rods.

d. Pipe Slides: Type 35 reinforced teflon slide material (3/32-inch minimum

thickness) bonded to steel; highly finished steel or stainless steel contact surfaces

to resists corrosion; 60-80 PSI maximum active contact surface loading; steel

parts 3/16-inch minimum thickness; attachment to pipe and framing by welding.




AND EQUIPMENT

e. Pipe Guides:

1. Furnish and install pipe guides on continuous runs where pipe alignment

must be maintained. Minimum two on each side of expansion joints, spaced

per manufacturer's recommendations for pipe size. Fasten guides securely to

pipe and structure. Contact with chilled water pipe not to permit heat to be

transferred in sufficient quantity to cause condensation on any surface.

2. Furnish and install guides approximately 4 pipe diameters (first guide) and

14 diameters (second guide) away from each end of expansion joints. Guides

are not to be sued as supports and are in addition to other pipe hangers and

supports.

f. Channel Type Pipe Hanging System: Framing members No. 12 gauge formed

steel channels, 1-5/8-inch square, conforming to ASTM A570 GR90, one side of

channel to have a continuous slot with in turned lips; framing nut with grooves

and spring 1/2-inch size, conforming to ASTM 675 GR60; screws conforming to

ASTM A307; fittings conforming to ASTM A575; parts electro-galvanized.

Provide protective end caps on exposed end of channel.

3. Building Attachments:

a. Factory fabricated attachments to suit building substructure conditions and in

accordance with manufacturer's published product information.

b. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods.

4. Saddles and Shields:

a. Factory fabricated saddles or shields under piping hangers and supports for

insulated piping.

b. Size saddles and shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation. 1/2 round,

18 gauge, minimum 12-inches in length (4-inch pipe and larger to be three times

longer than pipe diameter).

5. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-PSI (690-kPa) minimum compressive

strength insulation, encased in sheet metal shield.

a. Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C533, Type I

calcium silicate with vapor barrier.

b. Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated ASTM C533, Type 1 calcium

silicate.

c. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference

of pipe.




AND EQUIPMENT

d. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

e. Insert Length: Extend 2-inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating

below ambient air temperature.

6. Roller Hangers:

a. Adjustable roller hanger. Black steel yoke, cast iron roller. MSS Type 41.

7. Concrete Inserts:

a. Malleable iron body, hot tipped galvanized finish. Lateral adjustment. MSS

Type 18.

8. Continuous Concrete Insert:

a. Steel construction, minimum 12 gauge. Electrogalvanized finish. Pipe

clamps and insert nuts to match.

9. Beam Clamps:

a. MSS type 19 and 23, wide throat, with retaining clip.

b. Universal Side Beam Clamp: MSS Type 20.

10. Belowgound:

a. Pipe Hangers: Adjustable Clevis type, Federal Specification WW-H-171

(Type 1), UL listed, stainless steel Type 304. MSS Type 1.

b. Rod: 5/8-inch stainless steel Type 18-8.

c. Eyebolt: Stainless steel Type 18-8.

d. Nuts and Washers: Stainless steel Type 18-8.

11. Hangers for Pipe Size 2-inches and Smaller:

a. Adjustable swivel ring hanger, UL listed, Type 6 or Type 10.

12. Hangers for Pipe Size 2-1/2-inches and Larger:

a. Adjustable clevis type, UL listed, Type 1.

13. Riser Clamps:

a. Steel, UL listed. MSS Type 8.




AND EQUIPMENT

14. Plumbers Tape:

a. Not permitted as pipe hangers or pipe straps.

15. Pipe Alignment and Secondary Support Systems:

a. Secondary Pipe supports for general applications (Non-Acoustical).

1. Supports will be manufactured in compliance with IAPMO Product

Standard PS 42-96. All products provided will be listed by IAPMO for

secondary pipe support.

2. Supports may be used when sound and/or vibration transfer is not a

concern.

b. Secondary pipe supports for sound and vibration attenuation (Acoustical).

1. Supports will be manufactured in compliance with IAPMO Product

Standard PS 42-96. All products provided will be listed by IAPMO for

secondary pipe support.

2. Acoustical pipe supports will be manufactured and installed in compliance

with International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 3822-1 with current

amendments.

3. Supports will be used when sound and/or vibration transfer is a concern.

Locations where acoustical supports will be provided include but are not

limited to partition walls between living units, tenant spaces, retail units,

mechanical rooms, and lobbies.

4. Support products:

a) Support to Wall Brace and Wall Stud Penetrations: HoldRite 261, 262,

263, and 264, or approved equivalent.

b) Pipe Wrap for Pipe Clamps and Channel-Mounted Pipe Clamps:

HoldRite 270, or approved equivalent.

c) Pipe Wrap for Pipe Hangers: HoldRite 271, 272-2, and 272-4, or

approved equivalent.

d) Drop-Ear Fitting Support: HoldRite 265, or approved equivalent.

e) Floor Riser Isolation Pads: HoldRite 275-T, or approved equivalent.

f) Floor Isolation Pads (General Applications): HoldRite 274, 275, 276,

and 278, or approved equivalent.




AND EQUIPMENT

C. FLASHING

1. Steel Flashing: 26 gauge galvanized steel.

2. Safes: 8 mil thick neoprene.

3. Caps: Steel, 22 gauge minimum, 16 gauge at fire-resistant structures.

D. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

1. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder actuated type, drive pin

attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and

building materials where used.

2. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear

capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3. Grout: ASTM C1107, Grade B, factory mixed and packaged, nonshrink and

nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

a. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both

interior and exterior applications.

b. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and non gaseous.

c. Design Mix: 5000-PSI (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

4. Provide galvanized components for items exposed to weather.

15060-03 EXECUTION

A. EXAMINATION

1. Verify building materials to have hangers and attachments affixed in accordance

with hangers to be used. Provide supporting calculations.

B. PREPARATION

1. Examine Drawings and coordinate for verification of exact locations of fire and

smoke rated walls, partitions, floors and other assemblies. Indicate, by shading and

labeling on Record Drawings such locations and label as "1-Hour Wall," "2-Hour

Fire/Smoke Barrier," and the like. Determine proper locations for piping

penetrations. Set sleeves in place in new floors, walls or roofs prior to concrete pour

or grouting.




AND EQUIPMENT

2. Install hangers, supports, anchors and sleeves after required building structural

work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Coordinate

proper placement of inserts, anchors and other building structural attachments.

C. FABRICATION - MISCELLANEOUS METALS

1. General: Verify dimensions prior to fabrication. Form metal items to accurate

sizes and configurations as indicated on Drawings and otherwise required for proper

installation; make with lines straight and angles sharp, clean and true; drill,

countersink, tap, and otherwise prepare items for connections with work of other

trades, as required. Fabricate to detail of structural shapes, plates and bars; weld

joints where practicable; provide bolts and other connection devices required.

Include anchorages; clip angles, sleeves, anchor plates, and similar devices. Hot

dipped galvanize after fabrication items installed in exterior locations. Set accurately

in position as required and anchor securely to building construction. Construct items

with joints formed for strength and rigidity, accurately machining for proper fit;

where exposed to weather, form to exclude water.

2. Finishes:

a. Ferrous Metal: After fabrication, but before erection, clean surfaces by

mechanical or chemical methods to remove rust, scale, oil, corrosion, or other

substances detrimental to bonding of subsequently applied protective coatings.

For metal items exposed to weather or moisture, galvanize in manner to obtain

G90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A123. Provide other non-galvanized

ferrous metal with 1 coat of approved rust-resisting paint primer, in manner to

obtain not less than 1.0 mil dry film thickness. Touch-up damaged areas in

primer with same material, before installation. Apply zinc coatings and paint

primers uniformly and smoothly; leave ready for finish painting as specified

elsewhere.

b. Metal in contact with Concrete, Masonry and Other Dissimilar Materials:

1. Where metal items are to be erected in contact with dissimilar materials,

provide contact surfaces with coating of an approved zinc-chromate primer in

manner to obtain not less than 1.0 mil dry film thickness, in addition to other

coatings specified in these specifications.

c. For Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded

areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.




AND EQUIPMENT

D. INSTALLATION


a. Install within concrete or on structural steel or wood. Attachment to Wood

Structure: Provide MSS Type 34 for attachment to wooden beam or approved

attachment for a wood structure.

b. Install additional building attachments where support is required for additional

concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints,

and at changes in direction of piping.

c. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert secure to forms.

Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 PSI is indicated, install

reinforcing bars through openings at top in inserts.

2. Hangers and Supports:

a. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Install hangers, supports, clamps, and

attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. For

horizontally hung grooved-end piping, provide a minimum of 2 hangers per pipe

section.

b. Pipe Ring Diameters:

1. Uninsulated and Insulated Pipe, except where oversized pipe rings are

specified: Ring inner diameter to suit pipe outer diameter.

2. Insulated Piping Where Oversized Pipe Rings are Specified and Vibration

Isolating Sleeves: Ring inner diameter to suit outer diameter of insulation or

sleeve.

c. Oversize Pipe Rings: Provide oversize pipe rings of 2-inch and larger size.

d. Pipe Support Brackets: Support pipe with pipe slides.

e. Steel Backing in Walls: Provide steel backing in walls to support fixtures and

piping hung from steel stud walls.

f. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of

piping and support together on field-assembled channel systems.

1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.




AND EQUIPMENT

g. Pipe Guides:

1. Install on continuous runs where pipe alignment must be maintained.

Minimum two on each side of expansion joints, spaced per manufacturer's

recommendations for pipe size. Fasten guides to pipe structure. Contact with

chilled water pipe does not permit heat to be transferred in sufficient quantity

to cause condensation on any surface.

2. Install approximately 4 pipe diameters (first guide) and 14 diameters

(second guide) away from each end of expansion joints. Do not use as

supports. Provide in addition to other required pipe hangers and supports.

h. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs

of horizontal piping and support together on field -fabricated, heavy-duty

trapezes.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest

pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as

specified above for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads

being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1

i. Group parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze-

type hangers.

j. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers,

space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller

diameter pipe.

k. Do not support piping from other piping.

l. Fire protection piping will be supported independently of other piping.

m. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and

supports which are copper plated.

n. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel.

Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges

guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping.

Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install

reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

o. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed

and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool

manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's

operating manual.




AND EQUIPMENT

p. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and

completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

q. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts ,

washers, and other accessories.

r. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic

movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe

anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion

bends, and similar units.

s. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead

loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected

equipment.

t. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and

so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services

Piping" is not exceeded.

u. Insulated Piping: (comply with the following)

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a) Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project

through insulation.

b) Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-

hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c) Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor

barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining

insulation.

a) Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel

weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN100) and larger if pipe is

installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor

barrier. Shields to span arc of 180 degrees.







AND EQUIPMENT

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe, not less than the following:

a) NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN8 to DN 90): 12-inches long and 0.048-inch

thick.

b) NPS 4 (DN100): 12-inches long and 0.06-inch thick.

c) NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN125 and DN150): 18-inches long and 0.06-inch

thick.

d) NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN200 to DN350): 24-inches long and 0.075-inch

thick.

e) NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN400 to DN600): 24-inches long and 0.105-inch

thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 (DN200) and Larger: Include wood inserts.

6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.

7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping

insulation.

v. Equipment Clearances: Do not route piping through electrical rooms,

transformer vaults, elevator equipment rooms, IT rooms, MPOE rooms, and other

electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures, operating rooms,

procedure rooms, MRI room, CT Scan rooms and the like. Within equipment

rooms, provide minimum 3-feet lateral clearance from all sides of electric

switchgear panels. Do not route piping above any electric power or lighting

panel, switchgear, or similar electric device. Coordinate with Electrical and

coordinate exact pipe routing to provide proper clearance with such items.

w. Hanger Spacing to meet all manufacturers requirements.

3. Bolting:

a. General: Provide bored, drilled or reamed holes for bolting to miscellaneous

structural metals, frames or for mounts or supports. Flame cut, punched or hand

sawn holes will not be accepted.

4. Anchor Bolts:

a. General: Install anchor bolts for mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork

as required. Tightly fit and clamp base-supported equipment anchor bolts at

equipment support points. Provide locknuts where equipment, piping and

ductwork are hung.




AND EQUIPMENT

b. Anchor bolts (Cast-In-Place): Embed anchor bolts in new cast-in-place

concrete to anchor equipment. Install a pipe sleeve around the anchor bolt for

adjustment of the top 1/3 of the bolt embedment; sizes and patterns to suit the

installation conditions of the equipment to be anchored.

5. Pipe Anchors:

a. General: Provide anchors to fasten piping which is subject to expansion and

contraction, and adjacent to equipment to prevent loading high forces onto the

equipment.

6. Pipe Curb Assemblies:

a. Provide prefabricated units for roof membrane and insulation penetrations

related to equipment. Coordinate with roofing system. Set supports on the

structural deck. Do not set supports on insulation or roofing. Provide level

supports by prefabricated pitch built into the curb.

b. Pipe Curb Assemblies: Provide for piping and electrical conduit which

penetrates the structural roof deck to service equipment above the roof level (i.e.,

piping, electrical power and control wiring). Meet requirements of roof warranty.

c. Piping above roof to be supported with freestanding roof pipe supports unless

detailed otherwise.

7. Escutcheon Plates: Install around horizontal and vertical piping at visible

penetrations through walls, partitions, floors, or ceilings, including penetrations

through closets, through below ceiling corridor walls, and through equipment room

walls and floors.

8. "Link-Seal" Pipe Sleeves: Install at floor/below grade piping penetrations.

Provide manufacturer's sleeve appropriate to seal type for pre-cast penetrations

(except for DWV piping at slab on grade). Provide manufacturer's sleeve appropriate

to seal type for pre-cast penetrations.

9. Fabricated Pipe Sleeves:

a. Provide either steel or sheet metal pipe sleeves accurately centered around

pipe routes. Size such that piping and insulation, if any, will have free movement

within the sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion. Sleeve diameter to

be determined by local seismic clearance requirements, and by waterproofing

requirements.

b. Length: Equal to thickness of construction penetrated, except extend floor

sleeves 1-inch above floor finish.




AND EQUIPMENT

c. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement in concrete and other

work around sleeves. Provide temporary end closures to prevent concrete and

other materials from entering pipe sleeves.

d. Seal each end airtight with a resilient nonhardening sealer, UL listed, fire

rated ASTM 814.

10. Installation of metallic or plastic piping penetrations through non fire-rated walls

and partitions and through smoke-rated walls and partitions:

a. Install fabricated pipe sleeve.

b. After installation of sleeve and piping, tightly pack entire annular void

between piping or piping insulation and sleeve I.D. with specified material.

c. Seal each end airtight with a resilient non-hardening UL listed fire resistant

ASTM 814.

11. Piping penetrations through fire-rated (1 to 3 hour) assemblies:

a. Select and install pre-engineered pipe penetration system in accordance with

the UL listing and manufacturer's recommendation.

b. Provide proper sizing when providing sleeves or core-drilled holes to

accommodate the penetration. Firestop voids between sleeve or core-drilled hole

and pipe passing through to meet the requirements of ASTM E814.

12. Vertical Piping:

a. Support with U-clamps fastened to wall to hold piping away from wall unless

otherwise approved.

b. Riser clamps to be directly under fitting or welded to pipe.

c. Riser to be supported at each floor of penetration.

d. Provide structural steel supports at the base of pipe risers. Size supports to

carry forces exerted by piping system when in operation.

E. MISCELLANEOUS METALS

1. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates,

instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts,

sleeves, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to

be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items

to project site.




AND EQUIPMENT

2. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners

where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place

construction; including, threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle

bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors as required. Avoid

cutting concrete reinforcing when drilling for inserts. Reference structural drawings

and reinforcing shop drawings and determine locations of stirrups prior to drilling

into concrete.

3. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for

installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set work accurately in location,

alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from

established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for

items, which are to be built into concrete masonry or similar construction.

4. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded

metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in

correcting welding work.

5. Setting Loose Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of any bond

reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface

of bearing plates.

a. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other adjustable devices.

After the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor

bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut-off flush with edge

of the bearing plate before packing with grout. Use metallic non-shrink grout in

concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use non-metallic non-shrink

grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids

remain.

F. ADJUSTING AND PAINTING

1. Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments. Provide grout

under supports to bring piping and equipment to proper level and elevations.

2. Prime paint ferrous nongalvanized hangers, accessories, and supplementary steel

which are not factory painted.

G. FLASHING

1. Flash and counterflash where equipment passes through weather or waterproofed

walls, floors, and roofs.




AND EQUIPMENT

2. Flash vent soil pipes with flashings per Division 1 requirements.

3. Flash floor drains over finished areas and roof drains, 10-inches clear on sides,

minimum 36-inches x 36-inches sheet size. See Division 1. Fasten flashing to drain

with clamping device.

4. Install built up fixtures (mop sinks, shower stalls, shower floors) with water

sealing systems/membranes to meet Code and as prescribed by Division 1 and

Section 15010 General Plumbing Requirements. Meet all Code testing requirements.

Provide drainage devices with appropriate flanges, clamps, etc. to meet these

installation requirements and ensure a water tight installation.

H. METAL FABRICATION

1. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes

and equipment supports.

2. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections

that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.

3. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc

welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding

work, and with the following:

a. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and

corrosion resistance of base metals.

b. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

c. Remove welding flux immediately.

d. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing

and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

I. TESTING

1. Powder-Actuated Inserts: Test powder-actuated insert attachments with a

minimum load of 100 pounds.

END OF SECTION



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK SECTION 15065 - 1 of 19

AND EQUIPMENT

SECTION 15065 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING,

DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT

15065-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Piping and Ductwork Hangers and Supports

b. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts

c. Channel Support Systems

d. Wall and Floor Sleeves

e. Anchors

f. Flashing

g. Miscellaneous Metal

h. Miscellaneous Materials

B. RELATED SECTIONS


section.



Requirements.


a. ASME 7-05, Chapter 13.

b. In the State of California for OSHPD projects, use approved OPA numbers.

c. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90 "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe

Hangers and Supports".

d. Install ductwork per SMACNA's requirements.




AND EQUIPMENT

D. SUBMITTALS




Requirements.


a. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

b. Engineering Responsibility: Design and preparation of Shop Drawings and

calculations for each multiple pipe support, trapeze, duct support equipment

hangers/supports, and seismic restraint by a qualified Structural Professional

Engineer.

1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is

legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is

experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated.

Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of

hangers and supports that are similar to those indicated for this Project in

material, design, and extent.

c. Manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of bolted metal framing

support systems, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service

for not less than 10 years.

d. Support systems to be supplied by a single manufacturer.

F. WARRANTY




1. General - Provide pipe, ductwork and equipment hangers and supports in

accordance with the following:

a. When supports, anchorages, and seismic restraints for equipment, and

supports, anchorages, and seismic restraints for conduit, piping, and ductwork are

not shown on the Drawings, the contractor is responsible for their design.




AND EQUIPMENT

b. Connections to structural framing not to introduce twisting, torsion, or lateral

bending in the framing members. Provide supplementary steel as required.

2. Engineered Support Systems:

a. Support frames such as pipe racks or stanchions for piping,ductwork and

equipment which provide support from below.

b. Equipment, ductwork and piping support frame anchorage to supporting slab

or structure.

3. Provide channel support systems, for piping to support multiple pipes capable of


4. Provide heavy-duty steel trapezes for piping to support multiple pipes capable of


5. Provide seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping, ductwork and

equipment. See Section 15072.

6. Obtain approval from AHJ for seismic restraint hanger and support system to be

installed for piping and equipment. See Section 15072.

15065-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Pipe and Ductwork Hangers and Supports:


b. Anvil Corp.

c. Erico Co., Inc.

2. Channel Support Systems:


b. Anvil Corp., Power-Strut Unit.

c. Erico Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div.

d. Unistrut Corp.




AND EQUIPMENT

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts:


b. Pipe Shields, Inc.

c. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.

4. Powder-Actuated Fastener Systems:

a. Gunnebo Fastening Corp.

b. Hilti, Inc.

c. ITW Ramset/Red Head.

d. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.

5. Freestanding Roof Supports:


b. Nelson-Olsen Inc.

6. Below Grade Pipe Sleeves: Thunderline Corporation "Link Seal".

B. PIPING AND DUCTWORK HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

1. Horizontal Piping Hangers and Supports - Horizontal and Vertical Piping, and

Hanger Rod Attachments:

a. Factory fabricated horizontal piping hangers and supports complying with

MSS SP-58, to suit piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and

manufacturer's published product information.

b. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping service.

c. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for bare piping, and

to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping.

d. Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for uninsulated copper piping

systems.




AND EQUIPMENT

2. Pipe Hangers, Slides and Clamps:

a. Hanger Rods: Hanger rods continuously threaded or threaded ends only in

concealed spaces and threaded ends only in exposed spaces; finish electro-

galvanized or cadmium-plated in concealed spaces and prime painted in exposed

spaces; sizes per NSS.

b. Hanger Rod Couplings: Anvil Figure 136, B-Line Figure B3220, or approved

equivalent; malleable iron rod coupling with elongated center sight gap for visual

inspection; to have same finish as hanger rods.

c. Pipe Rings for Hanger Rods: Pipe sizes 2-inch and smaller, Anvil Figures 69

or 104, or equivalent of Erico Hanger or approved equivalent. Pipe sizes 2-1/2-

inches and larger, clevis type hangers with adjustable nuts on rod. Anvil figure

260. Pipe rings to have same finish as hanger rods.

d. Pipe Slides: Anvil mfr, reinforced teflon slide material (3/32-inch minimum

thickness) bonded to steel; highly finished steel or stainless steel contact surfaces

to resists corrosion; 60-80 PSI maximum active contact surface loading; steel

parts 3/16-inch minimum thickness; attachment to pipe and framing by welding.

e. Pipe Guides:

1. Furnish and install pipe guides on continuous runs where pipe alignment

must be maintained. Minimum two on each side of expansion joints, spaced

per manufacturer's recommendations for pipe size. Fasten guides securely to

pipe and structure. Contact with chilled water pipe not to permit heat to be

transferred in sufficient quantity to cause condensation on any surface.

2. Furnish and install guides approximately 4 pipe diameters (first guide) and

14 diameters (second guide) away from each end of expansion joints. Guides

are not to be sued as supports and are in addition to other pipe hangers and

supports.

f. Channel Type Pipe Hanging System: Framing members No. 12 gauge formed

steel channels, 1-5/8-inch square, conforming to ASTM A570 GR33, one side of

channel to have a continuous slot with in turned lips; framing nut with grooves

and spring 1/2-inch size, conforming to ASTM 675 GR60; screws conforming to

ASTM A307; fittings conforming to ASTM A575; parts enamel painted or

electro-galvanized. Provide protective end caps on exposed ends of channel.


a. Factory fabricated attachments complying with MSS SP-58, selected to suit

building substructure conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and

manufacturer's published product information.




AND EQUIPMENT

b. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods.

4. Saddles and Shields:

a. Factory fabricated saddles or shields under piping hangers and supports for

insulated piping.

b. Size saddles and shields for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation. 1/2 round,

18 gauge, minimum 12-inches in length (4-inch pipe and larger to be three times

longer than pipe diameter).

5. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-PSI (690-kPa) minimum compressive

strength insulation, encased in sheet metal shield.




silicate.


of pipe.




6. Roller Hangers: Adjustable roller hanger. Black steel yoke, cast iron roller. MSS

Type 41.

7. Beam Clamps:

a. MSS type 19 and 23, wide throat, with retaining clip.

b. Universal Side Beam Clamp: MSS Type 20.

8. Pipe Hangers Size 2-inches and Smaller: Adjustable swivel ring hanger, UL

listed. Erico 100 or 101.

9. Pipe Hangers Size 2-1/2-inches and Larger: Adjustable clevis type, UL listed.

Erico 400.

10. Riser Clamps: Steel, UL listed. MSS Type 8. Erico 510 or 511. Copper coated;

Erico 368.

11. Plumbers Tape: Not permitted as pipe hangers or pipe straps.




AND EQUIPMENT

12. Freestanding Roof Pipe Supports:

a. Polyethylene high-density UV resistant quick "pipe" block with foam pad.

b. Recommended installation is for pipe blocks to be freestanding.

c. Piping 3-inches and larger mounted on type supports.

C. THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

1. 100-PSI (690-kPa) minimum compressive strength insulation, encased in sheet

metal shield.




silicate.


of pipe.




D. CHANNEL SUPPORT SYSTEMS

1. Concrete Inserts: Malleable iron body, hot dipped galvanized finish. Lateral

adjustment. MSS Type 18.

2. Continuous Concrete Insert: Steel construction, minimum 12 gauge.

Electrogalvanized finish. Pipe clamps and insert nuts to match. Provide protective

end caps on exposed ends.

E. WALL AND FLOOR SLEEVES

1. Below Grade or High Water Table Areas: "Link-Seal" Pipe Sleeves: Neoprene

gasket links bolted together around an interior sleeve forming a watertight seal.

Provide Type S unless otherwise noted. Thunderline Corporation, or approved

equivalent.




AND EQUIPMENT

2. Pre-Engineered Firestop Pipe Penetration Systems: UL listed assemblies for

maintaining fire rating of piping penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply

with ASTM E814.

3. Fabricated Accessories:

a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: Fabricate from Schedule 40 black or galvanized steel

pipe. Remove end burrs by grinding.

b. Sheet Metal Pipe Sleeves: Fabricate from G-90 galvanized sheets closed with

lock-seam joints. Provide the following minimum gauges for the sizes indicated:

1. Sleeve Size 4-inches in Diameter and Smaller: 18 gauge.

2. Sleeve Sizes 5-6-inches: 16 gauge.

3. Sleeve Sizes 7-inches and Larger: 14 gauge.

4. Fire-Rated Safing Material.

a) Rockwool Insulation: Complying with FS-HH-I-558, Form A, Class

IV, 6 lbs./cu.ft. density with melting point of 1985F and K value of 0.24 at

75F.

b) Calcium Silicate Insulation: Noncombustible, complying with FS-

HH-I-523, Type II, suitable for 100F to 1200F service with K value of

0.40 at 150F.

F. ANCHORS

1. General: Anchor supports to existing masonry, block and tile walls per anchoring

system manufacturer's recommendations or as modified by project structural

engineer.

2. Anchor Bolts:

a. Anchor Bolts (Cast-In-Place): Steel bolts, ASTM A307. Nuts to conform to

ASTM A194. Design values for shear and tension not more than 80 percent of

the allowable listed loads.

b. Anchor (Expansion) Bolts: Carbon steel to ASTM A307; nut to conform to

ASTM A194; drilled-in type. Design values for shear and tension not more than

80 percent of the allowable listed loads.

c. Anchor (Adhesive) Bolts: Consisting of two-part adhesive cartridge and zinc-

plated Type A307 steel anchor bolt rod assembly with ASTM A194 nut.




AND EQUIPMENT

3. Manufacturers: Anchor-It, Hilti Hit System, Epcon System, or Power Fast

System.

G. FLASHING

1. Steel Flashing: 26 gauge galvanized steel.

2. Safes: 8 mil thick neoprene.

3. Caps: Steel, 22 gauge minimum, 16 gauge at fire-resistant structures.

H. MISCELLANEOUS METAL

1. Miscellaneous Metal: Provide miscellaneous metal items specified hereunder,

including materials, fabrication, fastenings and accessories required for finished

installation, where indicated on drawings or otherwise not shown on drawings that are

necessary for completion of the project. The Contractor is responsible for their

design.

a. Fabricate miscellaneous units to size shapes and profiles indicated or, if not

indicated, of required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by

framing. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural steel shapes and

plates and steel bars, of welded construction using mitered joints for field

connection. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items.

2. Structural Shapes: Where miscellaneous metal items are needed to be fabricated

from structural steel shapes and plates, provide members constructed of steel

conforming with requirements of ASTM A36 or approved equivalent.

3. Steel Pipe: Provide seamless steel pipe conforming to requirements of ASTM

A53, Type S, Grade A, or Grade B. Weight and size required as specified.

4. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of types as required for assembly and installation of

fabricated items; surface-applied fasteners are specified elsewhere.

5. Bolts: Low carbon steel externally and internally threaded fasteners conforming

with requirements of ASTM A307; include necessary nuts and plain hardened

washers. For structural steel elements supporting mechanical material or equipment

from building structural members or connection thereto, use fasteners conforming to

ASTM A325.

6. Miscellaneous Materials: Provide incidental accessory materials, tools, methods,

and equipment required for fabrication.




AND EQUIPMENT

7. Provide hot dipped galvanized components for items exposed to weather. Use

materials compatible with system being supported (i.e. aluminum for aluminum

ductwork, stainless steel for stainless steel ductwork).

8. Use straps, threshold rods and wire with sizes required by SMACNA to support

ductwork.

I. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

1. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder actuated type, drive pin

attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and

building materials where used.

2. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear

capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3. Grout: ASTM C1107, Grade B, factory mixed and packaged, nonshrink and

nonmetallic, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

a. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both

interior and exterior applications.

b. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and non gaseous.

c. Design Mix: 5000-PSI (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

4. Provide galvanized components for items exposed to weather.

15065-03 EXECUTION

A. EXAMINATION

1. Verify building materials to have hangers and attachments affixed in accordance

with hangers to be used. Provide supporting calculations.

B. PREPARATION

1. Examine Drawings and coordinate for verification of exact locations of fire and

smoke rated walls, partitions, floors and other assemblies. Indicate, by shading and

labeling on Record Drawings such locations and label as "1-Hour Wall," "2-Hour

Fire/Smoke Barrier," and the like. Determine proper locations for piping

penetrations. Set sleeves in place in new floors, walls or roofs prior to concrete pour

or grouting.




AND EQUIPMENT

2. Install hangers, supports, anchors and sleeves after required building structural

work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Coordinate

proper placement of inserts, anchors and other building structural attachments.

C. FABRICATION - MISCELLANEOUS METALS

1. General: Verify dimensions prior to fabrication. Form metal items to accurate

sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings and otherwise required for proper

installation; make with lines straight and angles sharp, clean and true; drill,

countersink, tap, and otherwise prepare items for connections with work of other

trades, as required. Fabricate to detail of structural shapes, plates and bars; weld

joints where practicable; provide bolts and other connection devices required.

Include anchorages; clip angles, sleeves, anchor plates, and similar devices. Hot

dipped galvanize after fabrication items installed in exterior locations. Set accurately

in position as required and anchor securely to building construction. Construct items

with joints formed for strength and rigidity, accurately machining for proper fit;

where exposed to weather, form to exclude water.

2. Finishes:

a. Ferrous Metal: After fabrication, but before erection, clean surfaces by

mechanical or chemical methods to remove rust, scale, oil, corrosion, or other

substances detrimental to bonding of subsequently applied protective coatings.

For metal items exposed to weather or moisture, galvanize in manner to obtain

G90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A123. Provide other non-galvanized

ferrous metal with 1 coat of approved rust-resisting paint primer, in manner to

obtain not less than 1.0 mil dry film thickness. Touch-up damaged areas in

primer with same material, before installation. Apply zinc coatings and paint

primers uniformly and smoothly; leave ready for finish painting as specified

elsewhere.

b. Metal in contact with Concrete, Masonry and Other Dissimilar Materials:

Where metal items are to be erected in contact with dissimilar materials, provide

contact surfaces with coating of an approved zinc-chromate primer in manner to

obtain not less than 1.0 mil dry film thickness, in addition to other coatings

specified in these specifications.

c. For Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded

areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.




AND EQUIPMENT

D. INSTALLATION


a. Install within concrete or on structural steel or wood. Attachment to Wood

Structure: Anvil side beam bracket Figure 202 for attachment to wooden beam or

approved attachment for a wood structure.

b. Install additional building attachments where support is required for additional

concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints,

and at changes in direction of piping.

c. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert secure to forms.

Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500 PSI is indicated, install

reinforcing bars through openings at top in inserts.

2. Hangers and Supports:

a. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-

89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly

support piping from building structure. For horizontally hung grooved-end

piping, provide a minimum of 2 hangers per pipe section.

b. Pipe Ring Diameters:

1. Uninsulated and Insulated Pipe, except where oversized pipe rings are

specified: Ring inner diameter to suit pipe outer diameter.

2. Insulated Piping Where Oversized Pipe Rings are Specified and Vibration

Isolating Sleeves: Ring inner diameter to suit outer diameter of insulation or

sleeve.

c. Oversize Pipe Rings: Provide oversize pipe rings of 2-inch and larger size.

d. Pipe Support Brackets: Support pipe with pipe slides.

e. Steel Backing in Walls: Provide steel backing in walls to support fixtures and

piping hung from steel stud walls.

f. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of

piping and support together on field-assembled channel systems. Field assemble

and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.




AND EQUIPMENT

g. Pipe Guides:

1. Install on continuous runs where pipe alignment must be maintained.

Minimum two on each side of expansion joints, spaced epr manufacturer's

recommendations for pipe size. Fasten guides to pipe structure. Contact with

chilled water pipe does not permit heat to be transferred in sufficient quantity

to cause condensation on any surface.

2. Install approximately 4 pipe diameters (first guide) and 14 diameters

(second guide) away from each end of expansion joints. Do not use as

supports. Provide in addition to other required pipe hangers and supports.

h. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapeze Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs

of horizontal piping and support together on field -fabricated, heavy-duty

trapezes.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest

pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as

specified above for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads

being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1

i. Group parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze-

type hangers. Maximum spacings: MSS SP-69.

j. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together by trapeze hangers,

space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller

diameter pipe.

k. Do not support piping from other piping.

l. Fire protection piping will be supported independently of other piping.

m. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and

supports which are copper plated.

n. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel.

Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69.

Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges

guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping.

Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install

reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.




AND EQUIPMENT

o. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed

and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool

manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's

operating manual.

p. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and

completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

q. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts ,

washers, and other accessories.

r. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic

movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe

anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion

bends, and similar units.

s. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead

loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected

equipment.

t. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and

so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services

Piping" is not exceeded.

u. Insulated Piping: (comply with the following)

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a) Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project

through insulation.

b) Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-

hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c) Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor

barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining

insulation.







AND EQUIPMENT

3. Install MSS SP-58, type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor

barrier. Shields to span arc of 180 degrees.




4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe, not less than the following:

a) NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN8 to DN 90): 12-inches long and 0.048-inch

thick.

b) NPS 4 (DN100): 12-inches long and 0.06-inch thick.

c) NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN125 and DN150): 18-inches long and 0.06-inch

thick.

d) NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN200 to DN350): 24-inches long and 0.075-inch

thick.

e) NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN400 to DN600): 24-inches long and 0.105-inch

thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 (DN200) and Larger: Include wood inserts.

6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.

7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping

insulation.

v. Equipment Clearances: Do not route ductwork, equipment, or piping through

electrical rooms, elevator equipment rooms, IT rooms, or other electrical or

electronic equipment spaces and enclosures and the like. Within equipment

rooms, provide minimum 3-feet lateral clearance from all sides of electric

switchgear panels. Do not route ductwork, equipment, or piping above any

electric power or lighting panel, switchgear, or similar electric device.

Coordinate with Electrical and coordinate exact ductwork, equipment or pipe

routing to provide proper clearance with such items.

w. Hanger Spacing per more stringent of Code requirements.

x. See Section 15810, HVAC Ducts and Casings for additional hanging and

support requirements for ductwork.




AND EQUIPMENT

3. Bolting:

a. General: Provide bored, drilled or reamed holes for bolting to miscellaneous

structural metals, frames or for mounts or supports. Flame cut, punched or hand

sawn holes will not be accepted.

4. Anchor Bolts:

a. General: Install anchor bolts for mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork

as required. Tightly fit and clamp base-supported equipment anchor bolts at

equipment support points. Provide locknuts where equipment, piping and

ductwork are hung.

b. Anchor bolts (Cast-In-Place): Embed anchor bolts in new cast-in-place

concrete to anchor equipment. Install a pipe sleeve around the anchor bolt for

adjustment of the top 1/3 of the bolt embedment; sizes and patterns to suit the

installation conditions of the equipment to be anchored.

5. Pipe Anchors:

a. General: Provide anchors to fasten piping which is subject to expansion and

contraction, and adjacent to equipment to prevent loading high forces onto the

equipment.

6. Pipe Curb Assemblies:

a. Provide prefabricated units for roof membrane and insulation penetrations

related to equipment. Coordinate with roofing system. Set supports on the

structural deck. Do not set supports on insulation or roofing. Provide level

supports by prefabricated pitch built into the curb.

b. Pipe Curb Assemblies: Provide for piping and electrical conduit which

penetrates the structural roof deck to service equipment above the roof level (i.e.,

piping, electrical power and control wiring). Meet requirements of roof warranty.

c. Piping above roof to be supported with freestanding roof pipe supports unless

detailed otherwise.

7. Escutcheon Plates: Install around horizontal and vertical piping at visible

penetrations through walls, partitions, floors, or ceilings, including penetrations

through closets, through below ceiling corridor walls, and through equipment room

walls and floors.

8. "Link-Seal" Pipe Sleeves: Install at floor/below grade piping penetrations.

Provide manufacturer's sleeve appropriate to seal type for pre-cast penetrations.




AND EQUIPMENT

9. Fabricated Pipe Sleeves:

a. Provide either steel or sheet metal pipe sleeves accurately centered around

pipe routes. Size such that piping and insulation, if any, will have free movement

within the sleeve, including allowance for thermal expansion. Sleeve diameter to

be determined by local seismic clearance requirements, and by waterproofing

requirements.

b. Length: Equal to thickness of construction penetrated, except extend floor

sleeves 1-inch above floor finish.

c. Provide temporary support of sleeves during placement in concrete and other

work around sleeves. Provide temporary end closures to prevent concrete and

other materials from entering pipe sleeves.

d. Seal each end airtight with a resilient nonhardening sealer, UL listed, fire

rated ASTM 814..





between piping or piping insulation and sleeve I.D. with specified material.

c. Seal each end airtight with a resilient nonhardening UL listed fire resistant

ASTM 814.



the UL listing and manufacturer's recommendation.

b. Provide proper sizing when providing sleeves or core-drilled holes to

accommodate the penetration. Firestop voids between sleeve or core-drilled hole

and pipe passing through to meet the requirements of ASTM E814.

E. MISCELLANEOUS METALS

1. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates,

instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts,

sleeves, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to

be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items

to project site.




AND EQUIPMENT

2. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners

where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place

construction; including, threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle

bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors as required. Avoid

cutting concrete reinforcing when drilling for inserts. Reference structural drawings

and reinforcing shop drawings and determine locations of stirrups prior to drilling

into concrete.

3. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for

installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set work accurately in location,

alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from

established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for

items, which are to be built into concrete masonry or similar construction.

4. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded

metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in

correcting welding work.

5. Setting Loose Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of any bond

reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface

of bearing plates.

a. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other adjustable devices.

After the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor

bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut-off flush with edge

of the bearing plate before packing with grout. Use metallic non-shrink grout in

concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use non-metallic non-shrink

grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids

remain.

F. ADJUSTING AND PAINTING

1. Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments. Provide grout

under supports to bring piping, ductwork and equipment to proper level and

elevations.

2. Prime paint ferrous nongalvanized hangers, accessories, and supplementary steel

which are not factory painted.

G. FLASHING

1. Flash and counterflash where piping, ductwork and equipment passes through

weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.




AND EQUIPMENT

2. Provide 12-inches minimum height curbs for roof-mounted mechanical

equipment. Flash and counter flash with galvanized steel, soldered and waterproofed.

H. METAL FABRICATION

1. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes

and equipment supports.

2. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections

that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.

3. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc

welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding

work, and with the following:

a. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and

corrosion resistance of base metals.

b. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

c. Remove welding flux immediately.

d. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing

and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

I. TESTING

1. Powder-Actuated Inserts: Test powder-actuated insert attachments with a

minimum load of 100 pounds.

END OF SECTION



VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING SECTION 15071 - 1 of 8

SECTION 15071 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR

PLUMBING

15071-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Seismic - Bracing/Restraint Devices / Systems for Equipment and Piping

B. RELATED SECTIONS


Section.

a. Section 15060 - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Pipe and Equipment.

b. Section 15210 - General Services Compressed-Air Systems.

c. Section 15400 - Plumbing Equipment.


1. References and standards as required by Section 15010 and Division 1, General

Requirements.

D. SUBMITTALS



a. Vibration Isolation:

1. Product Data: Provide catalog data indicating size, type, load and

deflection of each isolator; and percent of vibration transmitted based on

lowest disturbing frequency of equipment.

2. Shop Drawings: Showing complete details of construction for steel and

concrete bases including:

a) Equipment mounting holes.




b) Dimensions.

c) Isolation selected for each support point.

d) Details of mounting brackets for isolator.

e) Weight distribution for each isolator.

f) Details of seismic snubbers.

g) Code number assigned to each isolator.

b. Seismic Restraint:

1. Shop Drawings: Show compliance with requirements of Quality

Assurance article of this section. Shop Drawings will be stamped by

professional structural engineer licensed in state of Oregon.

2. Calculations: Submit seismic calculations indicating restraint loadings

resulting from design seismic forces. Include anchorage details. Calculations

will be certified by professional structural engineer licensed in the state of

Oregon.

3. Certifications: For restraining devices submit pre-approval certification

number from government agency. Where pre-approval is not available,

submit testing performed by independent laboratory or calculations sealed by

professional structural engineer licensed in state ofOregon certifying isolators

and restraints will withstand seismic forces encountered.



Requirements.


a. Vibration Isolation

1. Except for packaged equipment with integral isolators, single

manufacturer will select and furnish isolation required.

2. Deflections indicated will be minimum actual static deflections for

specific equipment supported.




3. Isolator Stability:

a) Size springs of sufficient diameter to maintain stability of equipment

being supported with minimum horizontal to vertical stiffness ratio not

less than 1:1. Spring diameters will be not less than 0.8 of the compressed

height at rated load.

b) Springs will have minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50

percent of the rated defection.

c) Springs will support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed,

without deformation or failure.

4. Maximum Allowable Vibration Levels: Peak vibration velocities not to

exceed 0.08 in/sec. correct equipment operating at vibration velocities that

exceed this criteria.

b. Seismic Restraint

1. Seismic restraint and anchorage of permanent equipment and associated

systems listed below to building structure will be designed to resist total

design seismic force prescribed in local building code:

a) Floor- or roof-mounted equipment weighing 400 pounds or greater.

b) Suspended, wall-mounted or vibration isolated equipment weighing 20

pounds or greater.

c) Housekeeping slabs: provide reinforcement and anchorage to building

structure.

2. Where required, seismic sway bracing of suspended piping will meet

following:

a) Pipe runs requiring seismic bracing will have minimum of two traverse

braces and one longitudinal brace. Longitudinal (or traverse) brace at 90

degree change in direction may act as traverse (or longitudinal) brace if

located within 2-feet of change in direction.

b) Seismic bracing may not pass through seismic separation joint. Pipe

runs that pass through seismic separation joint must be restrained within 5-

feet of both sides of separation.

c) Seismic brace assembly spacing will not exceed 40-feet transverse and

80-feet longitudinal.




3. Seismic sway bracing of suspended piping will be performed for

following:

a) Piping 8-inches nominal diameter and larger and trapezed systems

where total area of pipe exceeds 28 square inches.

b) Piping 2-1/2-inches nominal diameter and larger and trapezed systems

where total area of pipe exceeds 3 square inches.

c) piping 4-inches nominal diameter and larger, all cast iron and PVC

piping and trapezed systems with total aggregate weight of 10

pounds/foot or greater.

d) piping 1-1/4-inches nominal diameter and larger and trapezed systems

with total aggregate weight of 10 pounds/foot or greater.

4. Seismic restraints may be omitted from suspended piping if following

conditions are satisfied:

a) For piping supported by individual rod hangers 12-inches or less in

length from top of pipe to bottom of structural support. Top connections

to structure will have swivel joints, eye bolts, or vibration isolation

hangers for the entire length of the system run.

b) Lateral motion of the system will not cause damaging impact with

surrounding systems or cause loss of system vertical support.

c) System must be welded steel pipe, brazed copper pipe, or similar

ductile material with ductile connections.

c. Seismic restraints, including anchors to building structure, will be designed by

registered professional structural engineer licensed in state of Oregon. Design

will include:

1. Number, size, capacity, and location of anchors for floor- or roof-mounted

equipment. For curb-mounted equipment, provide design of attachment of

both unit to curb and curb to structure.

2. Number, size, capacity, and location of seismic restraint devices and

anchors for vibration-isolation and suspended equipment. Provide

calculations, test data, or approval number verifying the horizontal and

vertical ratings of the seismic restraint devices.

3. Number, size, capacity, and location of braces and anchors for suspended

piping and ductwork on as-built plan drawings.




4. Maximum seismic loads will be indicated on Drawings at each brace

location. Drawings will bear stamp and signature of registered professional

structural engineer who designed layout of braces.

F. WARRANTY



15071-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Seismic - Bracing / Restraint Devices / Systems for Equipment and Piping:

a. Amber-Booth.

b. California Dynamics Corporation.

c. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

d. Hilti, Inc.

e. Mason Industries, Inc.

f. Kinetics Noise Control.

g. Unistrut.

h. ISAT, Inc.

i. Or approved equivalent.

B. SEISMIC-BRACING/RESTRAINT DEVICES/SYSTEMS FOR EQUIPMENT AND

PIPING

1. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and

applications will be as defined in reports by agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.

2. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force

of components will be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they

will be subjected.




3. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete will be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-

wedge or female-wedge type.

4. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.

5. Maximum 1/4-inch air gap, and minimum 1/4-inch thick resilient cushion.

15071-03 EXECUTION

A. INSTALLATION

1. General:

a. Vibration isolators and seismic restraint systems must be installed in strict

accordance with manufacturers written instructions and certified submittal data.

b. Set floor-mounted equipment with steel base rails on 4-inch-high concrete

housekeeping pads. Extend pad 6-inches beyond footprint of equipment in each

direction.

c. Provide mounts for equipment installed outdoors for wind loads of 30 lbs. psf

applied to any exposed surface of isolated equipment.

d. Do not install equipment or pipe which makes rigid contact with building

slabs, beams, studs, walls, etc.

e. Anchor baseplate to floor or structure. Provide rubber grommets and washers

to isolate bolt from base plate. Under no circumstances will isolation efficiency

be destroyed when bolting the isolators to floor.

f. Vibration isolators must not cause change of position of equipment or piping

which would stress piping connections or misalignment shafts or bearings.

g. Building Penetrations: Isolate water piping penetrating wall, ceilings, floors

or shafts from the structure by piping isolator or by 3/8-inch thick foamed rubber

insulation. Install units flush with finished structure face, using one for each side

as required. Cut units to length if longer than structure thickness. Caulk around

pipe at equipment room wall.

h. Pipe Hangers in Equipment Rooms: Support water and gas piping connected

to rotating equipment within equipment rooms on spring and neoprene hangers.

The first three hangers from a piece of vibrating equipment are to have minimum

of 1/2 static deflection of that of equipment isolators. Other isolators should have

a minimum of 1/4 static deflection of that of equipment.




B. VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

1. Install isolation as indicated on Drawings by type and location and where

indicated below.

2. Isolation Mounts:

a. Position vibration isolation hanger elements as high as possible in hanger rod

assembly but not in contact with building structure. Install hangers so that hanger

housing may rotate full 360 degrees about rod axis without contacting any object.

b. Where parallel running pipes are hung together on trapeze which is isolated

from building, provide isolator deflections for largest determined by provisions

for pipe isolation. Do not mix isolated and non-isolated pipes in the same trapeze.

c. Install Type 3 and 4 isolators such that installed and operating heights of

vibration isolated equipment is identical. Install limit stops so that they are out of

contact during normal operation.

d. Adjust leveling bolts and hanger rod bolts so isolated equipment is level and

in proper alignment with connecting pipes.

3. Isolating Pipe Hangers:

a. Install on compressed air and water piping in mechanical room connected to

rotating equipment. Provide isolating hanger supports for each piece of isolated

equipment outside of mechanical room and where indicated.

b. Isolated equipment items include base mounted pumps and line mounted

pumps.

4. Pump Inertia Bases:

a. Fill with concrete to provide base weight equal to 2 times combined pump,

motor, pipe, and water weight.

b. Provide minimum operating clearance of 1-inch between structural steel

frames and concrete housekeeping pad or floor beneath equipment.

c. Support heels of suction and discharge elbows from base.

d. Secure pump and heel supports with inserts and grout.

5. Other Inertia Bases: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a minimum operating

clearance of 1-inch between structural steel frames and the concrete housekeeping

pad or floor beneath equipment. Position isolator mounting brackets so that the

required clearance is maintained.




6. Anchorage: Adequately anchor or brace mechanical equipment and piping to

resist displacement due to seismic action, include snubbers on equipment mounted on

spring isolators, chiller, pump, cooling tower, and the like.

C. SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

1. General:

a. Install and adjust seismic restraints so that equipment and piping supports are

not degraded by restraints.

b. Restraints must not short circuit vibration isolation systems or transmit

objectionable vibration or noise.

2. Supported Equipment: Each vibration isolation frame for supported equipment

will have minimum of four seismic snubbers mounted as close as possible to

vibration isolators and/or frame extremities.

3. Bracing of Pipes: Branch lines may not be used to brace main lines.

4. Suspended Equipment and Piping Cable Method:

a. Cables will be adjusted to degree of slackness approved by Structural

Engineer of Record.

b. Uplift and downward restraint nuts and washers for Type 5 spring hangers

will be adjusted so that there is minimum 1/4-inch clearance.

END OF SECTION



VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC SECTION 15072- 1 of 14

SECTION 15072 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR

HVAC

15072-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Vibration Isolation

b. Seismic Restraint Devices

c. Seismic-Bracing/Restraint Devices/Systems for Equipment, Piping, and

Ductwork

B. RELATED SECTIONS


Section.



Requirements.

D. SUBMITTALS




1. Product data: Provide catalog data indicating size, type, load and

deflection of each isolator; and percent of vibration transmitted based on

lowest disturbing frequency of equipment.




2. Shop Drawings: Showing complete details of construction for steel and

concrete bases including:

a) Fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to

supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, base

weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component

misalignment, and cantilever loads.

b) Equipment mounting holes.

c) Dimensions.

d) Size and location of concrete and steel bases and curbs.

e) Isolation selected for each support point.

f) Details of mounting brackets for isolator.

g) Weight distribution for each isolator.

h) Details of seismic snubbers.

i) Code number assigned to each isolator.

3. Design calculations: Provide calculations for selecting vibration isolators

and for designing vibration isolation bases.

b. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated

expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on

building structure, spring deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include

certification that riser system has been examined for excessive stress and that

none will exist.

c. Seismic Restraint:

1. Shop Drawings: Show compliance with requirements of Quality

Assurance article of this section. Shop drawings to be stamped by a

professional structural engineer licensed in State of Oregon.

2. Calculations: Submit seismic calculations indicating restraint loadings

resulting from design seismic forces. Include anchorage details and indicate

quantity, diameter, and depth of penetration of anchors. Calculations certified

by professional structural engineer licensed in State of Oregon.

d. Seismic Restraint Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of seismic

restraints and snubbers. Show anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter,

and depth of penetration of anchors.




e. Submittals for Interlocking Snubbers: Include load deflection curves up to

1/2-inch deflection in x, y and z planes.

f. Welding certificates.



Requirements.



1. Except for packaged equipment with integral isolators, single

manufacturer selects and furnishes isolation required.

2. Deflections indicated on drawings are minimum actual static deflections

for specific equipment supported.

3. Isolator Stability:

a) Size springs of sufficient diameter to maintain stability of equipment

being supported. Spring diameters not less than 0.8 of compressed height

at rated load.

b) Springs have minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of

rated defection.

c) Springs support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

4. Maximum Allowable Vibration Levels: Peak vibration velocities not

exceed 0.08 in/sec. Correct equipment operating at vibration velocities that

exceed this criteria.

b. Seismic Restraint:

1. Code and Standard Requirements:

a) Seismic restraint of equipment, piping, and ductwork to be in

accordance with latest enacted version of OSSC Chapter 16.




b) Seismic restraint of equipment, piping, and ductwork to be in

accordance with Office of Statewide Health Planning & Development

(OSHPD) requirements for Sate of California including Code Application

Notices (CAN) and policy Intent Notices (PIN). Specifically adhere to

CAN 2-1708A.5, CBC Sections 1708A.2, 1708A.5, 1702A and 1707A.9.

2. Occupancy Category:

a) Reference Architectural plans and specifications for Building

occupancy category for mechanical equipment and systems.

b) Building occupancy category for mechanical equipment and system is

Category II.

3. Seismic restraint and anchorage of permanent equipment and associated

systems listed below to building structure be designed to resist total design

seismic force prescribed in local building code:

a) Floor- or roof-mounted equipment weighing 400 pounds or greater.

b) Suspended, wall-mounted or vibration isolated equipment weighing 20

pounds or greater.

c) In-line duct devices connected to ductwork weighing 75 pounds or

greater.

d) Housekeeping slabs: provide reinforcement and anchorage to building

structure.

4. Where required, seismic sway bracing of suspended duct and piping meet

following:

a) Pipe and duct runs requiring seismic bracing have minimum of two

traverse braces and one longitudinal brace. Longitudinal (or traverse)

brace at 90 degree change in direction may act as traverse (or longitudinal)

brace if located within 2-feet of change in direction.

b) Seismic bracing may not pass through seismic separation joint. Pipe

or duct runs that pass through seismic separation joint must be restrained

within 5-feet of both sides of separation.

c) Seismic brace assembly spacing not to exceed 40-feet transverse and

80-feet longitudinal.




5. Seismic restraints may be omitted from suspended piping and duct if

following conditions are satisfied:

a) For piping or ducts supported by rod hangers 12-inches or less in

length from top of duct to bottom of structural support. Top connections

to structure have swivel joints, eye bolts, or vibration isolation hangers for

entire length of system run.

b) Lateral motion of system will not cause damaging impact with

surrounding systems or cause loss of system vertical support.

c) System must be welded steel pipe, brazed copper pipe, sheet metal

duct or similar ductile material with ductile connections.

3. Seismic restraints, including anchors to building structure, be designed by

registered professional structural engineer licensed in State of Oregon. Design

includes:

a. Number, size, capacity, and location of anchors for floor- or roof-mounted

equipment. For curb-mounted equipment, provide design of attachment of both

unit to curb and curb to structure.

b. Number, size, capacity, and location of seismic restraint devices and anchors

for vibration-isolation and suspended equipment. Provide calculations, test data,

verifying horizontal and vertical ratings of seismic restraint devices.

c. Number, size, capacity, and location of braces and anchors for suspended

piping and ductwork on as-built plan drawings.

d. Maximum seismic loads to be indicated on drawings at each brace location.

Drawings bear stamp and signature of registered professional structural engineer

who designed layout of braces.

F. WARRANTY



G. EXTRA MATERIALS

1. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing

contents.

2. Seismic Snubber Units: Furnish replacement neoprene inserts for snubbers.




15072-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Vibration Isolation:

a. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.

b. B-Line Systems, Inc.

c. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.

d. Mason Industries Inc.

e. M.W. Sausse - Vibrex.

f. Where Mason numbers are specified, equivalent products by listed

manufacturers are acceptable.


2. Seismic Restraint Devices:

a. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.

b. B-Line Systems, Inc.

c. Hilti, Inc.

d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.


f. California Dynamics Corporation

g. TOLCO Incorporated.

h. Unistrut Diversified Products Co.; Wayne Manufacturing Division.

i. M.W. Sausse - Vibrex

j. Or approved equivalent.

3. Seismic-Bracing/Restraint Devices/Systems for Equipment, Piping and

Ductwork:

a. Amber-Booth




b. California Dynamics Corporation

c. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

d. Hilti, Inc.


f. Kinetics Noise Control.

g. Unistrut

h. ISAT, Inc.

i. Where Mason numbers are specified, equivalent products by listed

manufacturers are acceptable.


B. VIBRATION ISOLATION

1. Type 1 - Neoprene Pad: Natural rubber waffle pads, arranged in single or

multiple layers, 3/4-inch thick per layer with pattern repeating on ½-inch centers; 50

durometer hardness; maximum loading 60 PSI. 1/4-inch thick steel load distribution

plate between layers and between pad and equipment, factory cut to sizes matching

requirements of supported equipment. Molded bridge with neoprene anchor bolt

bushing and flat washer face to prevent metal to metal contact. Number of layers

required for equipment scheduled. Mason Type Super WMH.

2. Type 2 - Neoprene Mount: Double-deflection type, with ductile-iron housing

containing two separate and opposing, oil-resistant natural rubber or bridge bearing

neoprene elements, factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment

and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Neoprene elements to prevent metal to

metal contact during normal operation. Minimum static deflection of 0.20-inches.

Mason Type BR.

3. Type 3 - Spring: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.

a. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of

spring at rated load.

b. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load.

c. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

d. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed,





e. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch-

thick, natural rubber or bridge bearing neoprene isolator pad attached to baseplate

underside. Baseplates limit floor load to 100 PSIG (690 kPa).

f. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and

cap screw to fasten and level equipment.

g. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard bracket, utilize height saving brackets to

accommodate height restrictions.

h. Mason Type SLFH.

4. Type 4a - Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators

with seismic restraint.

a. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops (out of contact during normal

operation) to prevent spring extension due to wind loads or if weight is removed;

factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch thick, natural rubber or bridge

bearing neoprene isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable

equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

Restraining bolts have large rubber grommets to provide cushioning in vertical

and horizontal directions. A minimum clearance of 3/8-inch maintained around

restraining bolts so as not to interfere with spring action.

b. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of


c. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load.

d. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

e. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed,


f. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard bracket, utilize height saving brackets to


g. Mason Type SLRSO.

5. Type 4b - Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic

snubbers.

a. Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic

restraint with neoprene acoustical cup, spring inspection ports and rebound

adjustment ports.

b. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure.




c. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch travel before

contacting a resilient collar.

d. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard bracket, utilize height saving brackets to


e. Mason Type SSLFH.

6. Type 5a - Restrained Elastomeric Hangers: Double-deflection type, with molded,

oil-resistant natural rubber or bridge bearing neoprene isolator elements bonded to

steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-code or otherwise

identify to indicate capacity range. Seismic rebound steel and bonded LDS rubber

washer to limit upward seismic movement. Mason Type RWHD.

7. Type 5b- Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger

with spring and insert in compression.

a. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow

for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without

binding or reducing isolation efficiency.







f. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-

washer-reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of

frame.

g. Mason Type 30N.

8. Type 5c - Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and

elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-

limit stop.

a. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow

for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without

binding or reducing isolation efficiency.










f. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.

g. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on

lower threaded rod.

h. Mason Type RW30N.

9. Type FC-1, Flexible Duct Connectors: Specified in Section 15820 Air Duct

Accessories.

10. Type FC-2, Flexible Pipe Connectors: Specified in Section 15035 Expansion

Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping.

C. SEISMIC RESTRAINT DEVICES

1. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: 1-piece, molded, bridge-bearing

neoprene complying with AASHTO M 251 and having a durometer of 50, plus or

minus 5, with a flat washer face.

2. Restraining Cables: Galvanized steel aircraft cables with end connections made

of steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle and utilize two clamping

bolts for cable engagement. Mason Type SCB.

3. Anchor Bolts: Seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type.

Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to

ASTM E 488/E 488M.

D. SEISMIC-BRACING/RESTRAINT DEVICES/SYSTEMS FOR EQUIPMENT,

PIPING, AND DUCTWORK

1. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and

applications be as defined in reports by agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.

2. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force

of components be at least four times maximum seismic forces to which they will be

subjected.




3. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete to be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-

wedge or female-wedge type.

4. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.

5. Maximum 1/4-inch air gap, and minimum 1/4-inch thick resilient cushion.

15072-03 EXECUTION

A. EXAMINATION

1. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control

devices for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other

conditions affecting performance.

2. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual

locations before installation.

3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. INSTALLATION

1. General:

a. Vibration isolators and seismic restraint systems must be installed in strict

accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and certified submittal data.

b. Set floor-mounted equipment with steel base rails on 4-inch-high concrete

housekeeping pads. Extend pad 6-inches beyond footprint of equipment in each

direction.

c. Do not install equipment or pipe which makes rigid contact with building

slabs, beams, studs, walls, etc.

d. Anchor baseplate to floor or structure. Provide rubber grommets and washers

to isolate bolt from base plate. Under no circumstances is isolation efficiency to

be destroyed when bolting isolators to floor.

e. Building Penetrations: Isolate water piping and ductwork penetrating wall,

ceilings, floors or shafts from structure by piping isolator or by 3/8-inch thick

foamed rubber insulation. Install units flush with finished structure face, using

one for each side as required. Cut units to length if longer than structure

thickness. Caulk around pipe or duct at equipment room wall.




f. Provide roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Work to

maintain roof warranty. Coordinate location, size, structural

connections/requirements and flashing prior to installation.

g. Install type 6 horizontal thrust restraints at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on

either side of equipment.

h. Vibration isolators must not cause change of position of equipment or piping

which would stress piping connections or misalignment shafts or bearings.

Isolated equipment is to be level and in proper alignment with connecting ducts

and pipes.

C. VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

1. Install isolation as indicated on drawings by type and location and where

indicated below.

2. Isolation Mounts:

a. Install minimum of four seismic snubbers on isolated equipment. Locate

snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and

supporting structure.

b. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts.

c. Provide flexible piping connection and flexible ductwork connection to

equipment with isolation mounts or bases.

3. Isolating Hangers:

a. Support piping and ductwork connected to isolated equipment within

equipment rooms on isolating hangers as scheduled on drawings. Unless

otherwise noted, first three hangers from isolated equipment to have a minimum

of 1/2 static deflection of equipment isolators. Other isolating hangers to have a

minimum of 1/4 static deflection of equipment isolators.

b. Position isolating hanger elements as high as possible in hanger rod assembly,

but not in contact with building structure. Install hangers so that hanger housing

may rotate full 360 degrees about rod axis without contacting any object.

c. Unless otherwise noted, air supply units with internally isolated fans do not

require isolating hangers for connecting pipes and ductwork.

d. Where parallel running pipes are hung together on an isolated trapeze, provide

isolator deflections for largest determined by provisions for pipe isolation. Do not

mix isolated and non-isolated pipes in same trapeze.




e. Install limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

4. Equipment Bases:

a. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to supported

equipment manufacturer's written instructions for seismic codes at Project site.

b. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless

otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of

base.

c. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through

concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

d. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use Setting Drawings, templates,

diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

e. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported

equipment.

f. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written

instructions.

D. SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

1. General:

a. Install and adjust seismic restraints so that equipment, piping, and ductwork

supports are not degraded by restraints.

b. Restraints must not short circuit vibration isolation systems or transmit

objectionable vibration or noise.

c. Install restraining cables at each trapeze and individual pipe hanger. At

trapeze anchor locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Install cables so they do not

bend across sharp edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

d. Install steel angles or channel, sized to prevent buckling, clamped with

ductile-iron clamps to hanger rods for trapeze and individual pipe hangers. At

trapeze anchor locations, shackle piping to trapeze. Requirements apply equally

to hanging equipment. Do not weld angles to rods.

E. ADJUSTING

1. Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at

operating weight.




2. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal

operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they

are out of contact during normal operation.

3. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

4. Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal

mode of operation.

5. Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's written

recommendations to resist seismic forces.

F. CLEANING

1. After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation and seismic-

control devices. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.

G. DEMONSTRATION

1. Engage factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-mounting systems. Reference Division

01.

END OF SECTION



IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 15075 - 1 of 6

SECTION 15075 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING

AND EQUIPMENT

15075-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Plastic Nameplates

b. Tags

c. Stencils

d. Pipe Markers

B. RELATED SECTIONS


section.



Requirements.

D. SUBMITTALS

1. Submittals as required by Section 15010 and Division 1. General Requirements.


a. Schedules:

1. Submit valve schedule for each piping system, in tabular format using

Microsoft Word or Excel software. Tabulate valve number, piping system,

system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and

variations for identification (if any). Mark valves which are intended for

emergency shutoff and similar special uses by special "flags" in margin of

schedule. In addition to mounted copies, furnish extra copies for maintenance

manuals.




2. For renovations or expansions of existing systems, coordinate with Owner

and develop valve schedule on existing schedule naming and format.



Requirements.


a. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of

identification devices of types and sizes required.

b. Codes and Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of

color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices unless otherwise

indicated.

F. WARRANTY



15075-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. General: Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for

each application as referenced in other Division 15 sections. Where more than a

single type is specified for application, provide single selection for each product

category.

2. Manufacturers:

a. Brady Corporation.

b. Champion America, Inc.

c. Seton Identification Products.

d. Craftmark.

e. Brimer.




B. PLASTIC NAMEPLATES

1. Description: Engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, Federal Specification L-

P-387, in the size and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter

style of the sizes and wording indicated, black with white core (letter color), punched

for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of

substrate. Provide one-eighth-inch thick material.

a. Letter Color: White.

b. Letter Height: 1/2 inch (13 mm).

c. Background Color: Black.

d. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent

adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.

e. Access Panel Markers: Manufacturer's standard 1/16-inch thick engraved

plastic laminate access panel markers, with abbreviations and numbers

corresponding to concealed valve or devices/equipment. Include center hole to

allow attachment.

C. TAGS

1. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light

contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2-inch diameter.

2. Metal Tags: Polished Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2-inch

diameter with smooth edges. Valve designations to be coordinated with existing

valve identifications to ensure no repetitive designations are utilized.

3. Valve designations to be coordinated with existing valve identifications to ensure

no repetitive designations are utilized.

4. Chart/Schedules: Valve Schedule Frames. For each page of a valve schedule,

provide glazed display frame with removable mounting as appropriate for wall

construction upon which frame is to be mounted. Provide frames of finished

hardwood or extruded aluminum, with SSB-grade sheet glass.

5. Valve Tag Fasteners: Solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass

S-hooks.

6. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags; of

plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

a. Size: Approximately 4 by 7-inches.




b. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.

c. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or

DO NOT OPERATE.

d. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

D. STENCILS

1. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:

a. 3/4 to 1-1/4-inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8-inch long color

field, 1/2-inch high letters.

b. 1-1/2 to 2-inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8-inch long color

field, 3/4-inch high letters.

c. 2-1/2 to 6-inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 12-inch long color

field, 1-1/4-inch high letters.

d. 8 to 10-inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 24-inch long color field,

2-1/2-inch high letters.

e. Over 10-inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 32-inch long color

field, 3-1/2-inch high letters.

f. Equipment: 2-1/2-inch high letters.

g. Equipment: 2-1/2-inch high letters.

h. Direction Arrows: Show flow direction.

2. Stencil Paint: As specified in Division 9, Finishes, semi-gloss enamel, colors

conforming to ASME A13.1.

E. PIPE MARKERS

1. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1 and ANSI Z535.1.

2. Plastic Pipe Markers (for external diameters of 6-inches and larger including

insulation): Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around

pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and

identification of fluid being conveyed.




3. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers (for external diameters less than 6-inches including

insulation): Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and

printed markings. Minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and


4. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic

ribbon tape, minimum wide by thick, manufactured for direct burial service.

Minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid

being conveyed.

15075-03 EXECUTION

A. PREPARATION

1. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

2. Prepare surfaces for stencil painting.

B. INSTALLATION

1. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require

insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished

mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting.

Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable

concealment.

2. Coordinate with the facility maintenance personnel to insure consistency with the

existing tagging system.

3. Tag balancing valves with balanced GPM or CFM indicated after balancing is

completed and accepted.

4. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners.

5. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.

6. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

7. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions.

8. For exterior underground piping installations, Install underground plastic pipe

markers with tracer wire 6 to 8-inches below finished grade, directly above buried

pipe.




9. Identify pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices with

plastic nameplates riveted to equipment body. Small devices, such as in-line pumps,

may be identified with tags.

10. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic

nameplates riveted to equipment body.

11. Identify valves in main and branch piping with metal tags. Indicate valve

function and the normally open or closed positions on the valve tag.

12. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic tape pipe markers. Use metal

tags on piping 3/4-inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and

pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not

to exceed 20-feet (reduced to 10-feet in congested areas and mechanical equipment

rooms) on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at

each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. Locate

near branches, valves, control devices, equipment connections, access doors,

floor/wall penetrations.

13. Access Doors: Provide markers or stenciled signs on each access door and

housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment) and other maintenance

and operating instructions.

14. Provide ceiling tags to locate valves or equipment above accessible ceilings.

Locate in corner of ceiling tee grid closest to equipment.

15. Install valve schedule at each mechanical room.

END OF SECTION



IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING, DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 15076- 1 of 7

SECTION 15076 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING,

DUCTWORK AND EQUIPMENT

15076-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Plastic Nameplates

b. Tags

c. Pipe Markers

d. Ceiling Tags

e. Lettering and Graphics

B. RELATED SECTIONS


section.



Requirements.

D. SUBMITTALS


2. In addition, provide Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system, in

tabular format using Microsoft Word or Excel software. Tabulate valve number,

piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or

space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves which are intended for

emergency shutoff and similar special uses by special "flags" in margin of schedule.

In addition to mounted copies, furnish extra copies for maintenance manuals.






Requirements.


a. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of

identification devices of types and sizes required.

b. Codes and Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of

color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices unless otherwise

indicated.

F. WARRANTY



15076-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. General: Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for

each application as referenced in other Division 15 sections. Where more than a

single type is specified for application, provide single selection for each product

category.

2. Manufacturers:

a. Brady Corporation

b. Champion America, Inc.

c. Seton Identification Products

d. Craftmark

e. Brimer

f. Or approved equivalent.




B. PLASTIC NAMEPLATES

1. Description: Engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, Federal Specification L-

P-387, in the size and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter

style of the sizes and wording indicated, black with white core (letter color), punched

for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of

substrate. Provide 1/8-inch thick material.

a. Letter Color: White.

b. Letter Height: 1/2-inch.

c. Background Color: Black.

d. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent

adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.

e. Access Panel Markers: Manufacturer's standard 1/16-inch thick engraved

plastic laminate access panel markers, with abbreviations and numbers

corresponding to concealed valve or devices/equipment. Include center hole to

allow attachment.

C. TAGS

1. Metal Tags: Polished Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2-inch

diameter with smooth edges.

2. Valve designations to be coordinated with existing valve identifications to ensure

no repetitive designations are utilized.

3. Chart/Schedules: Valve Schedule Frames. For each page of a valve schedule,

provide glazed display frame with removable mounting as appropriate for wall

construction upon which frame is to be mounted. Provide frames of finished

hardwood or extruded aluminum, with SSB-grade sheet glass.

4. Valve Tag Fasteners: Solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass

S-hooks.

5. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags; of

plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

a. Size: Approximately 4 by 7-inches.

b. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.

c. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as DANGER, CAUTION, or

DO NOT OPERATE.




d. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

D. PIPE MARKERS

1. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1 and ANSI Z535.1.

2. Plastic Pipe Markers (for external diameters of 6-inches and larger including

insulation): Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around

pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and


3. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers (for external diameters less than 6-inches including

insulation): Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and

printed markings. Minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and


4. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic

ribbon tape, minimum wide by thick, manufactured for direct burial service.

Minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid

being conveyed.

E. CEILING TAGS

1. Description: Steel with 3/4-inch diameter color coded head.

2. Color code as follows:

a. Yellow - HVAC equipment.

b. Red - Fire dampers/smoke dampers.

c. Blue - Heating/cooling valves.

d. Ceiling tile labels, machine generated, adhesive backed tape labels with black

letters, clear tape.

F. LETTERING AND GRAPHICS

1. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in

mechanical identification work with corresponding designations shown, specified or

scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise

indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification

and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.




2. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and

specified, provide identification which indicates individual system number as well as

service (as examples: Chiller No. 3, Air Handling Unit No. 42, Standpipe F12, and

the like).

15076-03 EXECUTION

A. PREPARATION

1. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

2. Prepare surfaces for stencil painting.

B. INSTALLATION

1. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require

insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished

mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting.

Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable

concealment.

2. Coordinate with the facility maintenance personnel to insure consistency with the

existing tagging system.

3. Tag balancing valves and major dampers with balanced GPM or CFM indicated

after balancing is completed and accepted.

4. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners.

5. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.

6. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

7. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with


8. For exterior underground piping installations, Install underground plastic pipe

markers with tracer wire 6-inches to 8-inches below finished grade, directly above

buried pipe.

9. Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water

treatment devices with plastic nameplates riveted to equipment body. Small devices,

such as in-line pumps, may be identified with tags.




10. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic

nameplates riveted to equipment body.

11. Identify thermostats relating to terminal boxes or valves with nameplates.

12. Identify valves in main and branch piping with metal tags. Indicate valve

function and the normally open or closed positions on the valve tag.

13. Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered plastic tags.

14. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic.

15. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic tape pipe markers. Use metal

tags on piping diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure.

Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed

20-feet (reduced to 10-feet in congested areas and mechanical equipment rooms) on

straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side

of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. Locate near

branches, valves, control devices, equipment connections, access doors, floor/wall

penetrations.

16. Identify ductwork with plastic ductmarkers. Identify air supply, return, exhaust,

isolation room exhaust, and outside air intake ductwork with duct markers, showing

ductwork service and direction of flow, in black or white (whichever provides most

contrast with ductwork identification color). Identify with air handling unit

identification number and area served. Locate identification at air handling unit, in

mechanical rooms, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, at each

obstruction, and within view of access doors/panels. In each space where ductwork is

exposed, locate signs near points where ductwork originates or continues into

concealed enclosures (shaft, underground or similar concealment) and at 50 foot

spacing along exposed runs. Where noted on plans, identify ductwork in

exposed/public locations.

17. Access Doors: Provide duct markers or stenciled signs on each access door in

ductwork and housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment) and other

maintenance and operating instructions.

18. Isolation Rooms and Anteroom: Identify exhaust ducts by labeling with the words

"Caution Airborne Infection Isolation Rooms Exhaust." Provide labeling in a manner

which is not readily removable and appears on the exhaust duct at intervals of not

more than 20-feet and at least once near each room and each story traversed by the

exhaust system.

19. Provide ceiling tags to locate valves and dampers above accessible ceilings.

Locate in corner of ceiling tee grid closest to equipment.

20. Install valve schedule at each mechanical room.




21. Manual Balancing Dampers: Provide orange 12-inch plenum-rated marker ribbon

to end of balancing damper handle.

END OF SECTION



PLUMBING INSULATION SECTION 15081 - 1 of 10

SECTION 15081 - PLUMBING INSULATION

15081-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Type 1, Fiberglass Pipe Insulation

b. Type 2, Flexible Elastomeric Insulation

c. Type 5, Fiberglas Equipment Insulation

d. Type 7, ADA Accessible Lavatory/Sink Insulation Kit

e. Jacketing

f. Accessories

g. Pipe Fitting Insulation Covers

B. RELATED SECTIONS


section.



Requirements.


a. Piping insulation products to contain less than 0.1 percent by weight PBDE in

all insulating materials across the board.

D. SUBMITTALS






a. Installer qualifications.

b. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both

factory and field applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.

c. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results

for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets

with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.

d. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers

comply with requirements.

e. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.





a. Installer to have minimum 5 years experience in the same business.

F. WARRANTY



G. FIRE HAZARD CLASSIFICATION

1. Maximum fire hazard classification of composite insulation construction as

installed to be not more than a flame spread of 25, fuel contributed of 50 and smoke

developed of 50 as tested by ASTM E84 (NFPA 255) method.

2. Test pipe insulation in accordance with requirements of UL "Pipe and Equipment

Coverings".




15081-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. General:

a. Armacell LLC Armaflex

b. Certainteed

c. Johns Manville

d. Knauf

e. Owens-Corning

f. PPG


2. Type 2, Flexible Elastomeric Insulation:

a. Glue:

1. Armacell LLC Armaflex Low VOC Adhesive

2. Halstead


b. Paint:

1. Armacell LLC Armaflex

2. Halstead


3. Type 7, ADA Accessible Lavatory/Sink Insulation Kit:

a. Truebro Inc. Model 102

b. McGuire

c. Pro-Wrap

d. Brocar Trap Wrap





B. TYPE 1 FIBERGLASS PIPE INSULATION

1. Glass Fiber: ASTM C547; rigid molded, noncombustible.

a. Thermal Conductivity Value: 0.27 BTU*in/(hr*sf*F) at 75 degrees F.

b. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F.

c. Vapor Retarder Jacket: White Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber and

bonded to aluminum foil, with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips or

vapor barrier mastic.

C. TYPE 2 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

1. Elastomeric Foam: ASTM C534; flexible, cellular elastomeric, molded or sheet.


b. Maximum Service Temperature of 220 degrees F.

c. Maximum Flame Spread: 25.

d. Maximum Smoke Developed: 50 (3/4-inch thick and below).

e. Connection: Waterproof vapor retarder adhesive as needed.

f. UV Protection: UV outdoor protective coating per manufacturers

requirements.

2. Glue: Contact adhesive specifically manufactured for cementing flexible

elastomeric foam.

3. Paint: Non-hardening high elasticity type, specifically manufactured as a

protective covering of flexible elastomeric foam insulation for prevention of

degradation due to exposure to sunlight and weather.

D. TYPE 5, FIBERGLASS EQUIPMENT INSULATION

1. Flexible Fiberglass Blanket: ASTM C612; flexible.






E. TYPE 7, ADA ACCESSIBLE LAVATORY/SINK INSULATION KIT

1. P-traps, hot water and cold water insulating guards. Molded closed cell vinyl

with nylon fasteners, paintable. Thermal conductivity; K = 1.17 (BTU*in/(hr*sf*F)

at 75 degrees F mean temperature. Provide accessories as required for complete

installation. Color white.

F. JACKETING

1. Canvas Jacket: UL listed fabric, 6 oz/sq.yd., plain weave cotton treated with

dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive.

2. Aluminum Jacket: 0.016-inch-thick sheet, (smooth/embossed) finish, with

longitudinal slip joints and 2-inch laps, die-shaped fitting covers with factory attached

protective liner. ASTM B 209.

3. Stainless Steel Jacket: Type 304 stainless steel, 0.010-inch, (smooth/corrugated)

finish. ASTM A 666

G. ACCESSORIES

1. Equipment Insulation Jacketing: Presized glass cloth, not less than 7.8

ounces/sq.yd., except as otherwise indicated. Coat with gypsum based cement.

2. Equipment Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives, cement, sealers, mastics

and protective finishes as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications

indicated.

3. General: Provide staples, bands, wire, wire netting, tape corner angles, anchors,

stud pins and metal covers as recommended by insulation manufacturer for

applications indicated. Accessories, i.e., adhesives, mastics, cements and tape to have

same flame and smoke component ratings as insulation materials with which they are

used. Shipping cartons to bear a label indicating that flame and smoke ratings do not

exceed those listed above. Provide permanent treatment of jackets or facings to

impart flame and smoke safety. Provide nonwater soluble treatments. Provide UV

protection recommended by manufacturer for outdoor installation.

H. PIPE FITTING INSULATION COVERS

1. PVC Plastic Fitting Covers: Schuller Zeston 2000 or approved equivalent. One-

piece molded type fitting covers and jacketing material, gloss white. Connections:

Tacks; pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape.




15081-03 EXECUTION

A. VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS

1. Do not apply insulation until pressure testing of piping has been completed. Do

not apply insulation over heat tracing temperature maintenance until system tested.

Do not apply insulation until piping has been inspected.

2. Examine areas and conditions under which insulation will be installed. Do not

proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. PREPARATION

1. Clean and dry surfaces to be insulated.

C. INSTALLATION

1. Insulation: Continuous through walls, floors, partitions except where noted

otherwise.

2. Piping and Equipment:

a. Install insulation over clean, dry surfaces with adjoining sections firmly butted

together and covering surfaces. Fill voids and holes. Seal raw edges. Install

insulation in a manner such that insulation may be split, removed, and reinstalled

with vapor barrier tape on strainer caps and unions. Do not install insulation until

piping has been leak tested and has passed such tests. Do not insulate manholes,

equipment manufacturer's nameplates, handholes, and ASME stamps. Provide

beveled edge at such insulation interruptions. Repair voids or tears.

b. Cover insulation on pipes above ground, outside of building, with aluminum

jacketing. Position seam on bottom of pipe.

D. PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT

1. Protect installed insulation during construction. Replace damaged insulation

which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and

moisture saturated units.




E. FIBERGLASS INSULATION

1. Lap seal insulation with waterproof adhesive. Do not use staples or other

methods of attachment which would penetrate vapor barrier. Apply fitting covers

with seated tacks and vapor barrier tape.

2. Apply insulation to pipe and seal with self-sealing lap. Use self-sealing butt strips

to seal butt joints. Insulate fittings, valves and unions with single or multiple layers

of insulation and cover to match pipe or use preformed PVC molded insulation

covers.

F. LABELING AND MARKING

1. Provide labels, arrows and color coding on piping and ductwork. Attach labels

and flow direction arrows to jacketing per Section 15110.

G. PIPING SURFACES TO BE INSULATED

Item to be

Insulated

System Insulation

Type

Pipe Size Insulation

Thickness

Hot Water Piping

Above Grade

1 Runouts up to 2-

inch

Mains=<2-inch

Mains >2-inch

1-inch

1-inch

1-inch

Hot Water

Circulation Piping

Above Grade

1 Runouts, up to 2-

inch

Mains =<2-inch

Mains >2-inch

1-inch

1-inch

1-inch

Domestic Cold

Water Except

Minor Branch

Piping Within

Walls Serving

Fixtures

1 =<2-inch 1/2-inch

Hot Water Piping

Below Grade

2 =<2-inch

> 2-inch

1-inch

1-1/2-inch

Hot Water

Circulation Piping

Below Grade

2 =<2-inch

> 2-inch

1-inch

1-1/2-inch

Domestic Water

Piping Exposed to

Weather

1, 2, 4 All 1-1/2-inch

Piping with Heat

Tracing

1, 2, 4 =<2-inch

> 2-inch

1-inch

1-1/2-inch




Item to be

Insulated

System Insulation

Type


Thickness

Rain Conductors

Above Grade

Horizontal Piping

1 All 1/2-inch

Roof Drain

Underbodies

5 N/A 1-inch

Overflow Roof

Drain Underbodies

5 N/A 1-inch

ADA Accessible

Lavatory/Sink

7 All As Listed

Storage Tanks 5 All 2-inch

Condensate Drain

Piping

1, 2 All 1/2-inch

Aboveground

Refrigerated Water

Systems

1, 2 All 1-inch

H. FIBERGLASS INSULATION

1. Lap seal insulation with waterproof adhesive. Do not use staples or other

methods of attachment which would penetrate vapor barrier. Apply fitting covers

with seated tacks and vapor barrier tape.


to seal butt joints. Insulate fittings, valves and unions with single or multiple layers

of insulation and cover to match pipe or use preformed PVC molded insulation

covers.

I. ROOF DRAIN/OVERFLOW DRAIN UNDERBODIES AND PIPING

1. Above grade, cover all roof drains and overflow drain piping with sectional pipe

covering. Cover underside of drain body with insulation; attached with adhesive and

supported externally with 26-gauge galvanized flat strapping anchored to structure.

J. ADA ACCESSIBLE LAVATORIES/SINKS

1. Provide lavatory/sink insulation kit. Install per manufacturers requirements.




K. INSULATED PIPE EXPOSED TO WEATHER

1. Where piping is exposed to weather, cover insulation with aluminum jacket. Seal

watertight jacket per manufacturer's recommendations. Provide heat tracing on

piping subject to freezing.

L. FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC PLASTIC PIPE INSULATION

1. Slip insulation on pipe prior to connection. Butt joints sealed with manufacturer's

adhesive. Insulate fitting with miter-cut pieces. Cover insulation exposed to weather

and undergrade with two coats of finish as recommended by manufacturer.

M. FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC TUBING

1. Slip insulation over piping or if piping is already installed, it should be slit and

snapped over piping. Joints and butt ends must be adhered with 520 adhesive.

N. CALCIUM SILICATE PIPE INSULATION

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Seal canvas jacket tight to

insulation at lap joints. Continuous insulation over pipe, fittings and supports or

hangers. No holidays or gaps permitted.

O. FOAMGLASS INSULATION

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for below grade installation.

P. STORAGE TANKS

1. Cover with hydrous calcium silicate, 2-inches thick. Finish with canvas jacket

and adhesive. Overlap joints minimum of 4-inches. Apply two coats latex paint;

color selected by Architect.

Q. INSULATION SHIELDS

1. Provide full size diameter hangers and shields (18 gauge minimum) for cold

piping. Hot water piping hangers may penetrate insulation to contact pipe directly.

Provide 18-inch long, noncompressible insulation section at insulation shields for

lines 1 1/2-inches and larger (hot and cold piping).

2. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for below grade installation.




R. FOAMED PLASTIC EQUIPMENT INSULATION

1. Apply insulation and accessories to roof drain underbodies per manufacturer's

recommendations.

END OF SECTION



HVAC INSULATION SECTION 15082 - 1 of 11

SECTION 15082 - HVAC INSULATION

15082-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Type A, Flexible Fiberglass Blanket

b. Type B, Duct Liner

c. Type 1, Fiberglass Pipe Insulation

d. Type 2, Flexible Elastomeric Insulation

e. Jacketing

f. Accessories

g. Duct Insulation Accessories

h. Duct Insulation Compounds

B. RELATED SECTIONS


section.



Requirements.

2. In addition, meet the following: Piping and duct insulation products to contain

less than 0.1% by weight PBDE in all insulating materials across the board.

D. SUBMITTALS



a. Installer qualifications.




b. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both

factory and field applied, if any) for each type of product indicated.

c. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results

for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets

with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests.

d. Installer Certificates: Signed by the Contractor certifying that installers

comply with requirements.

e. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.



Requirements.

2. In addition, meet the following: Installer to have minimum 5 years experience in

the business of installing insulation.

F. WARRANTY



G. FIRE HAZARD CLASSIFICATION

1. Maximum fire hazard classification of the composite insulation construction as

installed to be not more than a flame spread of 25, fuel contributed of 50 and smoke

developed of 50 as tested by ASTM E84 (NFPA 255) method.

2. Test pipe insulation in accordance with the requirements of UL "Pipe and

Equipment Coverings R5583 400 8.15."

3. Test duct insulation in accordance with ASTM E84, UL 723, NFPA 255, NFPA

90A and NFPA 90B.




15082-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Type A, Flexible Fiberglass Blanket:

a. Certainteed

b. Johns Manville

c. Knauf

d. Owens-Corning

e. PPG


2. Type B, Duct Liner:

a. Certainteed

b. Johns Manville

c. Knauf

d. Owens-Corning

e. PPG


3. Type 1, Fiberglass Pipe Insulation:

a. Certainteed

b. Johns Manville

c. Knauf

d. Owens-Corning

e. PPG





4. Type 2, Flexible Elastomeric Insulation:

a. Armacell LLC Armaflex.


B. TYPE A, FLEXIBLE FIBERGLASS BLANKET

1. ASTM C553, Type 1, Class B-2; flexible blanket.

2. 'K' Value: 0.27 BTU*in/(hr*sf*F) at 75 degrees F installed, maximum service

temperature: 250 degrees F.

3. Density: 0.75 lb./cu.ft.

4. Vapor Barrier Jacket: FSK aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass yarn and

laminated to fire resistant Kraft, secured with UL listed pressure sensitive tape or

outward clinched expanded staples and vapor barrier mastic as needed.

C. TYPE B, DUCT LINER

1. ASTM C1071; flexible blanket.

2. 'K' Value: ASTM C518, 0.25 BTU*in/(hr*sf*F) at 75 degrees F, maximum

service temperature: 250 degrees F.

3. Noise Reduction Coefficient: 0.65 or higher based on "Type A mounting."

4. Maximum Velocity on Mat or Coated Air Side: 5,000 FPM.

5. Adhesive: UL listed waterproof type.

6. Fasteners: Duct liner galvanized steel pins, welded or mechanically fastened.

7. Erosion-Resistant Surfaces: UL 181.

8. ASTM G21 and ASTM G22 Microbial Growth Resistance.

D. TYPE 1, FIBERGLASS PIPE INSULATION

1. Glass Fiber: ASTM C547; rigid molded, noncombustible.

a. Thermal Conductivity Value: 0.27 BTU-inch (hour/sf/degrees F) at 75

degrees F.





c. Vapor Retarder Jacket: White Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber and

bonded to aluminum foil, secure with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips

or vapor barrier mastic.

E. TYPE 2, FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

1. Elastomeric Foam: ASTM C534; flexible, cellular elastomeric, molded or sheet.


b. Maximum Service Temperature of 220 degrees F.

c. Maximum Flame Spread: 25.

d. Maximum Smoke Developed: 50 (1-inch thick and below).

e. Connection: Waterproof vapor retarder adhesive as needed.

f. UV Protection: UV outdoor protective coating per manufacturers

requirements.

2. Glue: Contact adhesive specifically manufactured for cementing flexible

elastomeric foam. Armacell LLC Armaflex Low VOC adhesive, Halstead, or


3. Paint: Nonhardening high elasticity type, specifically manufactured as protective

covering of flexible elastomeric foam insulation for prevention of degradation due to

exposure to sunlight and weather. Armacell LLC Armaflex, Halstead, or approved

equivalent.

F. JACKETING

1. Canvas Jacket: Ul listed fabric, 6 ounce/sq. yd., plain weave cotton treated with

dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive.

2. PVC preformed molded insulation covers. Zeston or approved equivalent.

3. Aluminum Jacket: 0.016-inch-thick sheet, (smooth/embossed) finish, with

longitudinal slip joints and 2-inch laps, die-shaped fitting covers with factory attached

protective liner.

4. Stainless Steel Jacket: Type 304 stainless steel, 0.010-inch, smooth finish.




G. ACCESSORIES

1. Equipment Insulation Jacketing: Presized glass cloth, not less than 7.8

ounces/sq.yd., except as otherwise indicated. Coat with gypsum based cement.

2. Equipment Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives, cement, sealers, mastics

and protective finishes as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications

indicated.

3. General: Provide staples, bands, wire, wire netting, tape corner angles, anchors,

stud pins and metal covers as recommended by insulation manufacturer for

applications indicated. Accessories, i.e., adhesives, mastics, cements and tape to have

the same flame and smoke component ratings as the insulation materials with which

they are used. Shipping cartons to bear a label indicating that flame and smoke

ratings do not exceed those listed above. Provide permanent treatment of jackets or

facings to impart flame and smoke safety. Provide nonwater soluble treatments.

Provide UV protection recommended by manufacturer for outdoor installation.

H. DUCT INSULATION ACCESSORIES

1. Staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner angles and similar accessories as

recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

I. DUCT INSULATION COMPOUNDS

1. Cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers, protective finishes and similar accessories

as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

15082-03 EXECUTION


1. Do not apply insulation until pressure testing of the ducts and piping has been

completed. Do not apply to pipe with heat tracing until system has been tested. Do

not apply insulation until the duct has been inspected.

2. Examine areas and conditions under which duct insulation will be installed. Do

not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. PREPARATION

1. Clean and dry surfaces to be insulated.




C. INSTALLATION

1. Insulation: Continuous through walls, floors, partitions except where noted

otherwise.

2. Piping and Equipment: Install insulation over clean, dry surfaces with adjoining

sections firmly butted together and covering surfaces. Fill voids and holes. Seal raw

edges. Install insulation in a manner such that insulation may be split, removed, and

reinstalled with vapor barrier tape on strainer caps and unions. Do not install

insulation until piping has been leak tested and has passed such tests. Do not insulate

manholes, equipment manufacturer's nameplates, handholes, and ASME stamps.

Provide beveled edge at such insulation interruptions. Repair voids or tears.

3. Ductwork:

a. Install insulation in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations to

completely cover duct.

b. Butt insulation joints firmly together and install jackets and tapes smoothly

and securely.

c. Apply duct insulation continuously through sleeves and prepared openings,

except as otherwise specified. Apply vapor barrier materials to form complete

unbroken vapor seal over insulation.

d. Coat staples and seals with vapor barrier coating.

e. Cover breaks in jacket materials with patches of same material as vapor

barrier. Extend patches not less than 2-inches beyond break or penetration on all

directions and secure with adhesive and staples. Seal staples and joints with vapor

barrier coating.

f. Fill jacket penetrations. i.e., hangers, thermometers and damper operating

rods, and other voids in insulation with vapor barrier coating. Seal penetration

with vapor barrier coating. Insulate Hangers and Supports for cold duct in un-

conditioned spaces to extent to prevent condensation on surfaces.

g. Seal and flash insulation terminations and pin punctures with reinforced vapor

barrier coating.

h. Continue insulation at fire dampers and fire/smoke dampers up to and

including those portions of damper frame visible at outside of the rated fire

barrier. Insulating terminations at fire dampers in accordance with this section.

i. Do not conceal duct access doors with insulation. Install insulation

terminations at access door in accordance with this section.




j. Duct Liners: Mat finish surface on air stream side. Secure insulation to

cleaned sheet metal duct with continuous (minimum 90) percent coat of adhesive.

For widths over 20-inches, additionally secure liner with mechanical fasteners 15-

inches on center or per manufacturer requirements. Accurately cut liner and

thoroughly coat ends with adhesive. Butt joints tightly. Top and bottom sections

of insulation overlap sides. Factory/field coat exposed edges. Metal nosing for

exposed lending edges and when velocity exceeds 3500 FPM or manufacturer

rating on exposed edges. Keep duct liner clean and free from dust. At completion

of project, vacuum duct liner if it is dirty or dusty. Cut studs off near washers. Do

not use small pieces. If insulation is installed without horizontal, longitudinal, and

end joints butted together, installation will be rejected and work removed and

replaced with work that conforms to this Specification.

k. Duct Wrap: Cover air ducts per insulation table except ducts internally lined

where internal duct lining is adequate to achieve adequate insulating values to

meet local Energy Codes (indicate on shop drawings, locations where duct wrap

is planned to be omitted and indicate internal duct lining insulating values to

confirm they will meet the Energy Code.) Wrap tightly with circumferential joints

butted and longitudinal joints overlapped minimum of 2-inches. Adhere insulation

with 4-inch strips of insulating bending adhesive at 8-inches on center. On ducts

over 24-inches wide, additionally secure insulation with suitable mechanical

fasteners at 18-inches on center. Circumferential and longitudinal joints stapled

with flare staples 6-inches on center and covered with 3-inch wide, foil reinforced

tape.

D. PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT

1. Installed insulation during construction. Replace damaged insulation which

cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and


E. FIBERGLASS INSULATION

1. Lap seal insulation with waterproof adhesive. Do not use staples or other methods

of attachment which would penetrate the vapor barrier. Apply fitting covers with

seated tacks and vapor barrier tape.


to seal butt joints. Insulate fittings, valves and unions with single or multiple layers of

insulation and cover to match pipe or use performed PVC molded insulation covers.




F. LABELING AND MARKING

1. Provide labels, arrows and color on piping and ductwork. Attach labels and flow

direction arrows to the jacketing per Section 15115.

G. PIPING SURFACES TO BE INSULATED

1. Oregon:

Item to be

Insulated

System Insulation

Type


Thickness

Heating Water 1 Runouts

<=1-inch and less

than 4-feet long

<=1-1/2-inch

>1-1/2-inch

None

1-1/2-inch

2-inch

Refrigeration

Suction Piping

2 All 1-1/2-inch

Air Separation

Tanks

2 N/A 1-1/2-inch

2. Note: Insulation thickness shown is a minimum. If state code requires additional

thickness, then provide insulation thickness per code requirements.

H. DUCTWORK SURFACES TO BE INSULATED

Item to be

Insulated

System Insulation

Type

Duct Size Insulation

Thickness

Supply ductwork

where duct is not

specified to be

lined.

A All 1-1/2-inch

Return ductwork

where duct is not

specified to be

lined.

-- All None

Supply ductwork

(exposed to

weather, in crawl

space and in

unheated attics)

A All 3-inch




Item to be

Insulated

System Insulation

Type

Duct Size Insulation

Thickness

Return ductwork

(exposed to

weather, in crawl

space and in

unheated attics)

A All 3-inch

Outside Air Ducts A All 3-inch

HVAC plenums

and unit housings

not preinsulated

B All 1-1/2-inch

Exhaust ducts

within 10-feet of

exterior

A All 3-inch

1. Note: Insulation thickness shown is a minimum. If state codes require additional

thickness, then provide insulation thickness per code requirements.

I. INSULATED PIPE EXPOSED TO WEATHER

1. Where piping is exposed to weather, cover insulation with aluminum jacket. Seal

watertight jacket per manufacturer's recommendations. Install with exposed lap

pointing down. Provide heat tracing on piping subject to freezing. See Section

15115.

J. FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC PLASTIC PIPE INSULATION

1. Slip insulation on pipe prior to connection. Butt joints sealed with manufacturer's

adhesive. Insulate fitting with miter-cut pieces. Cover insulation exposed to weather

and undergrade with two coats of finish as recommended by manufacturer.

K. FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC TUBING

1. Flexible Elastomeric Tubing: Slip insulation over piping or if piping is already

installed, it should be slit and snapped over piping. Joints and butt ends must be

adhered with 520 adhesive.

L. OUTDOOR DUCT EXPOSED TO WEATHER

1. Install jacket with brakes/slope to prevent standing water on duct.

2. Weatherproof seal at joints and seams. Minimum 2-inch overlap.




3. Label jacket every 6-feet and within 2-feet of building penetrations and

equipment connections: 'Do not stand or place equipment on duct".

M. INSULATION SHIELDS

1. Provide full size diameter hangers and shields (18 gauge minimum) for cold

piping. Hot water piping hangers may penetrate insulation to contact pipe directly.

Provide 18-inch long, noncompressible insulation section at insulation shields for

lines 2-inches and larger for steam and chilled water piping.

N. PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT

1. Protect installed insulation during construction. Replace damaged insulation

which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units with vapor barrier damage and


END OF SECTION



PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15100 - 1 of 20

SECTION 15100 - PLUMBING PIPING

15100-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Sanitary, Drainage (Rain/Stormwater) DWV Piping, Buried Within 5-feet of

Building

b. Sanitary DWV Piping, Above Grade

c. Water Piping, Buried Within 5-feet of Building

d. Hot and Cold Water Above Grade

e. Non Potable Cold Water Piping

f. Condensate Piping

g. Primer Piping

h. Flanges, Unions, and Couplings

i. Wall and Floor Sleeves

j. Water Hammer Arresters

B. RELATED SECTIONS


Section.



Requirements.


a. NSF 61 Appendix 'G' - Low Lead Products Used in Drinking Water Systems

(less than or equal to 25 percent lead)




D. SUBMITTALS




Requirements.

F. WARRANTY



15100-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Uponor

2. Cerro

3. Dodge Phelps

4. Tyler

5. Charlotte

6. Elkhart

7. Spears

8. Nibco

9. Aquatherm

10. Victaulic

11. Orion





B. GENERAL

1. Provide pipe, tube and fittings of the same type, fitting requirements, grade, class

and the size and weight indicated or required for each service, as indicated in other

Division 15 Specifications. Where type, grade, or class is not indicated, provide

proper selection as determined by installer for installation requirements, and comply

with governing regulations and industry standards.

2. Manufactured materials delivered, new to the project site and stored in their

original containers.

3. Product Marking: Each item to be furnished with legible markings indicating:

name brand and manufacturer, manufacturing process, heat number and markings as

required per ASTM and UL/FM Standards.

4. Applicable Standards

a. Steel pipe to conform to ASTM and ANSI Standards as specified in this

section.

b. Copper piping to conform to ASTM B88, B306 and B208 and the standards of

Copper Development Association (CDA), and American Welding Society,

(AWS).

c. Cast Iron Piping to conform to standards of ASTM A-74 and CISPI HS-74,

CISPI 301 and FM 1680.

d. Manufacturer's Standards Society (MSS) for valving and support reference

standard.

e. American Waters Association (AWWA) for Valving Assembly Standards.

f. American Society of Sanitation Engineers (ASSE) for Valving Standards.

g. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for Piping Standards.

h. NFPA Standard 51B - “Fire Prevention in Use of Cutting and Welding

Processes”.

i. Crosslinked polyethylene (PEX) pipe conforming to ASTM F876, F877 and

CSA B1375, or DIN 16892 and 16893.

j. CPVC ReUze pipe and fittings conforming to ASTM D 1784. Additionally,

all pipe and fittings to confirm with NSF 14 and 61 Standards, be listed by NSF

International for reclaimed water and bear the mark “NSF-RW.”




C. SANITARY, DRAINAGE (RAIN/STORM WATER) DWV PIPING, BURIED

WITHIN 5-FEET OF BUILDING

1. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 extra heavy weight hub and spigot.

a. Fittings: Cast iron.

b. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with astm C564

neoprene gaskets.

2. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A888/CISPI 301 hubless.


b. Coupling Assembly:

1. Heavy Duty: ASTM C1540/SED4000, clamp-all Hi-Torq 125 coupling.

2. Standard Duty: ASTM C1277 Anaco, Mission, Tyler.

3. Copper Tube: ASTM B 306, DWV

a. Fittings: ASME B16.29, wrought copper.

b. Joints: ASTM B32, ASTM B-828 and NSF61, alloy Sn50 solder.

c. Flux: ASTM B813-91, water soluble.

4. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K (A).


b. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn50 solder.

D. SANITARY DWV PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

1. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, extra heavy weight.


b. Joint Seals: ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets.

2. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A888/CISPI 301 hubless.





b. Coupling Assembly:

1. Heavy Duty: ASTM C1540/Husky SD4000, Clamp-all Hi-Torq 125

coupling.

2. Standard Duty: ASTM C1277 Anaco, Mission, Tyler.

3. Copper Tube: ASTM B 306, DWV



4. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A 53M Schedule 40, galvanized, using one of the

following joint types:

a. Flanged Joints: ASME B16.1 cast iron fittings.

b. Threaded Joints: ASME B16.4 cast iron fittings.

c. Threaded Joints: ASME B16.3 malleable iron fittings.

d. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASTM A 47/A 47M.

e. Grooved Joints: AWWA C606 grooved pipe, fittings of same material, and

mechanical couplings.

E. WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5-FEET OF BUILDING

1. Copper Pipe: ASTM B88, hard drawn, Type K (A).

a. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper

and bronze.

b. Joints: Brazed - BCuP2.

F. HOT AND COLD WATER ABOVE GRADE

1. Copper Tube: 3-inches and above. ASTM B88 (ASTM BA88m), Type K (A),

Drawn.

a. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper

and bronze.

b. Joints: Brazed BCuP2.




2. Copper Tube: 2-1/2-inches and smaller. ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type L (B),

Drawn.

a. Fittings: ASME B16018 copper.


3. Copper Tube: Water pressures up to 250 PSI gauge. ASTM B 88 (ASTM BA

88m), Type K (A), Drawn.

a. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper

and bronze.

b. Joints: Brazed BCuP2.

4. Cross-Linked Polyethylene Tubing, Fittings and Accessories (except exposed

locations. 1-inch and smaller.)

a. Tubing:

1. Cross-linked polyethylene (PEX) tubing complies with requirements of

ASTM F876 and F877, and cross-lining method must be Type A (hot)method.

2. PEX tubing to have minimum working pressure of not less than 160 PSI

for water at 73.4 degrees F, 100 PSI for water at 180 degrees F and 80 PSI for

water at 200 degrees F determined in accordance with Plastic Pipe Institute

Technical Report TR-3/92, and listed in Plastic Pipe Institute Technical

Report TR-4/95.

b. Fittings:

1. Fittings: Engineered Plastic Fittings above grade applications. Engineered

plastic fittings below grade applications. Reinforcement Rings: Manufactured

using "Engel Method" to ensure that viscoelastic stress regenerative properties

are sufficient to produce pressure tight seal.

2. Fitting Insert: Of such dimension in that tubing must be expanded in order

to facilitate insertion of fitting into tube.

3. Accomplish expansion of tubing and ring by an expansion tool designed

expressly for that purpose.

4. Fittings complies with requirements of ASTM F877.

c. Manifolds: Provide premanufactured copper manifolds of same manufacturer

as piping.




d. Stubout Ells and Stubout Brackets: Provide premanufactured Type L copper

stubout ells and copper stubout brackets.

5. CPVC ReUze Non-Potable Distribution Piping:

a. Fittings: One step solvent cement conforming to ASTM F-493. Pipe and

fittings to be manufactured by Charlotte Pipe Foundry and intended for non-

potable water distribution system.

b. Signage: Provide signage secured to wall at each fixture supplied by

non-potable water that reads, “Non-Potable Water Do Not Drink.” Refer to the

2011 OPSC for requirements. Provide signage at each valve that reads,

“Non-Potable Water Do Not Drink.” Refer to the 2011 OPSC for requirements.

G. CONDENSATE PIPING

1. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B898M), Type M (C)



2. Piping for drainage of condensate from combustion fuel sources (such as

condensing boilers and water heaters) is to be chemical resistant piping as noted in

this section for area of application.

H. PRIMER PIPING

1. Above Ground: Type L hard-drawn copper tubing with wrought sweat fittings and

soldered joints.

2. Belowgound: Type L soft annealed copper tubing with wrought sweat fittings and

brazed joints.

3. Belowgound: Cross-linked polyethylene (PEX) and engineered plastic fittings.

I. FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS

1. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3-inches and Under:

a. Ferrous Pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions.

b. Copper Tube and Pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints.




2. Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1-Inch:

a. Ferrous Pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on

flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets.

b. Copper Tube and Pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene

gaskets.

3. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end,

copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.

J. WALL AND FLOOR SLEEVES

1. Below Grade and High Water Table Areas:

a. "Link-Seal" Pipe Sleeves: Neoprene gasket links bolted together around an

interior sleeve forming a watertight seal. Provide Type C unless otherwise noted.

OS with S-316 stainless construction for continuous water/tank walls.

Thunderline Corporation or approved equivalent.

b. Sleeves under or through concrete foundations: Ductile iron pipe. Class 50 or

51 pipe conforming to ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51, cement lined. Pipe sleeve

will extend a minimum of 6-inches beyond outside perimeter of foundation. Final

placement of sleeve will be confirmed with project's structural engineer. In areas

with a high water table, provide AWWA C900, Class 235 plastic pipe in lieu of

ductile iron pipe.

2. Pre-Engineered Firestop Pipe Penetration Systems: UL listed assemblies for

maintaining fire rating of piping penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply

with ASTM E814.

3. Insulating Caulking: Eagle or Pitcher Super 66 high temperature cement.

4. Fabricated Accessories:

a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: Fabricate from Schedule 40 black or galvanized steel

pipe. Remove end burrs by grinding.

b. Sheet Metal Pipe Sleeves: Fabricate from G-90 galvanized sheets closed with

lock-seam joints. Provide following minimum gauges for sizes indicated:

1. Sleeve Size 4-inches in Diameter and Smaller: 18 gauge.

2. Sleeve Sizes 5-inches to 6-inches: 16 gauge.

3. Sleeve Sizes 7-inches and Larger: 14 gauge.




15100-03 EXECUTION

A. EXAMINATION

1. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.

B. INSTALLATION

1. Work performed by experienced journeyman plumbers.

2. Provide access panels for concealed valves, shock arrestors and trap primers.

3. Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices.

4. Align piping accurately at connections, within 3/32-inch misalignment tolerance.

Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping.

5. Locate piping runs, as indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) and

avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and

column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details, and notations

or, if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct

space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold piping close to

walls, overhead construction, and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements

of building. Limit clearance to 1/2-inch where furring is shown for enclosure or

concealment of piping, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible,

locate insulated piping for 1-inch clearance outside insulation. Whenever possible in

finished and occupied spaces, conceal piping from view by locating it in column

enclosures, hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase

horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as indicated.

a. Do not run piping through transformer vaults, telephone, elevator, electrical or

electronic equipment spaces or enclosures.

b. Concealed Piping Above Suspended Ceiling: Plan and coordinate to avoid

interferences; install to maintain suspended ceiling heights shown on

Architectural Drawings. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels

for panel removal. Locate piping so that valves are visible and accessible within

61cm horizontally and vertically from point of access to the ceiling space.

c. Exposed Work: Run pipes parallel to the closest wall unless otherwise shown

on Drawings; maintain maximum headroom; avoid light fixtures.

d. Insulation Space Allowance: In piping work, allow space for pipe insulation

and jackets. If interferences occur, move the piping to accommodate insulation

thickness specified.




e. Pipe Lengths: Do not use short lengths or nipples at locations where a full

length of pipe will fit.

f. Alignment Prior to Supporting and Anchoring: Place piping in proper

alignment and position prior to connection to anchors, expansion loops, and

equipment. Furnish jacking devices, temporary steel structural members, and

assembled structures as necessary. Remove temporary equipment and structures

supplied by contractor at completion; such items to remain Contractor property.

g. Valve and Equipment Connections: Piping not to place undue stress on

flanged valves and equipment connections. Mating flange faces to be true and

parallel to each other and not to require springing of piping for assembly. Pipe

hangers and supports to carry the full weight of the pipe and fluid.

h. Piping Leaks: Correct immediately; use new materials; leak-sealing

compounds or peening not permitted.

i. Pressure Ratings of Fittings, Valves, and Devices in Piping Systems: Pressure

rating to be equal to or greater than the maximum working pressure of the system.

j. Equipment Vents and Drains: Provide for coils and vessels which contain

water. Provide isolation valves and outlet valves at piping high and low points to

permit venting and draining of the vessel without venting and draining connected

piping. Provide hose connections and caps on drain lines.

k. Escutcheon Plates: Where exposed insulated and uninsulated piping passes

through walls, floors or ceilings; provide spring clip type. Provide plates on both

sides of wall or floor.

C. PIPE JOINTS

1. Piping to be cut squarely, free of rough edges and reamed to full bore. Piping to

be fully inserted into fittings.

2. Provide joints of type indicated in each piping system.

3. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1. Cut threads full and clean using

sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter.

Remove excess cutting oil from piping prior to assembly. Apply pipe joint

compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting

manufacturer, on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3

threads exposed.




4. Solder copper tube and fitting joints with lead free nickel/silver bearing solder

meeting ASTM std. B-32, in accordance with IAPMO Is 3-93, ASTM B-828 and

Copper Development Association recommended procedures. Joints to be cleaned by

other than chemical means prior to assembly. "Shock" cooling is prohibited. Fluxes

to be water soluble for copper and brass potable water applications, and meets CDA

standard test method 1.0 and ASTM B813-91. Solder to be applied until a full fillet is

present around the joint. Solder and flux not to be applied in such excessive

quantities as to run down interior of pipe. Lead solder or corrosion flux not to be

present at the jobsite.

5. Braze copper tube and fitting socket with BCUP series filler metal without flux.

Listed brazing flux to be used for joining of copper tube to brass or bronze fittings

and will meet AWS FB3A or FB3C. "Shock" cooling is prohibited. a continuous

fillet is to be visible around the completed joint. After cooling, flux residue to be

thoroughly removed with warm water and a brush prior to testing. Do not use BCUP

filler on copper alloys containing over 10 percent nickel. Piping is to be capped or

plugged during construction to prevent entry of foreign material.

6. Cast-Iron Joints: Comply with coupling manufacturer's Cast Iron Soil Pipe

Institute Standards and installation instructions.

7. Welders performing work under this Contract to be certified and qualified in

accordance with tests prescribed by the National Certified Welding Bureau (NCWB)

or by other approved test procedures using methodology and procedures covered in

the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Qualification Standard for

Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing

Operators". Installation to conform to ANSI 31.1 "Power Piping".

a. Submit for approval the names, identification, and welder's assigned number,

letter or symbol for welders assigned to this project.

b. The assigned identification symbol to be used to identify the work of each

welder and to be indelibly stamped immediately upon completion of each weld.

c. Welders to be tested and certified for all positions.

d. Submit identifying stenciled test coupons made by each operator.

e. Welders may be required to retake welding certification tests without

additional expense.

f. When so requested, a welder will not be permitted to work as a welder on this

project until he has been recertified in accordance with NCWB.

g. Recertification of the welder to be made after the welder has taken and passed

the required tests.




8. Weld pipe joints in accordance with recognized industry practice and as follows:

a. Weld pipe joints only when ambient temperature is above 0F.

b. Bevel pipe ends at a 37.5 degree angle where possible, smooth rough cuts, and

clean to remove slag, metal particles, and dirt.

c. Use pipe clamps or tack-weld joints with 1-inch long welds, 4 welds for pipe

sizes to 10-inches, 8 welds for pipe sizes 12-inches to 20-inches.

d. Build up welds with a stringer-bead pass, followed by a hot pass, followed by

a cover or filler pass. Eliminate valleys at center and at edges of each weld.

Weld by procedures which will ensure elimination of unsound or unfused metal,

cracks, oxidation, blow-holes, and non-metallic inclusions.

e. Do not weld out piping system imperfections by tack-welding procedures.

Re-fabricate to comply with requirements.

f. At Installer's option, install forged branch-connection fittings whenever

branch pipe is indicated, or install a regular T-fitting.

9. Flanges:

a. Provide flanges at steel or copper piping, valves and equipment, sizes 2-1/2-

inches or larger, unless specified otherwise; weld neck or slip-on pattern.

b. Bolts: Provide studs (both ends threaded) with hexagon nuts where necessary

to facilitate removal of valves or disassembly of flanged systems.

c. Dielectric Flanged Insulation: Provide on dissimilar metal flanged piping

connections.

D. SANITARY AND STORM SEWER

1. Piping to be graded at a uniform pitch of 1 percent per foot on building main and

2 percent per foot on branch lines unless otherwise noted on Drawings.

2. Indirect Waste or Drain Piping: Extend piping to discharge as shown on

Drawings. Maintain minimum air gap. Provide traps on direct waste or drain piping

exceeding 60-inches.

3. Fixture Carriers: Concealed fixture carriers for wall hung plumbing fixtures are

specified in Section 15410.




4. Drains:

a. Install drains to suit finished floor or roof surface. Install drains and

components per manufacturer's instructions. Arrange for flooring to be sloped to

floor drain or sink a minimum of 13mm below finished floor elevation.

b. Install P-traps for hub drains, floor drains and floor sinks P-traps to be of the

same materials as soil and waste piping. Provide trap primer assembly for each

drain or floor sink.

5. Wall Access Panel: Secure to wall framing and install so that flange forms a

close fitting joint with the finished wall surface.

6. Heat trace and insulate P-traps exposed to freezing conditions.

7. Insulate horizontal interior rainwater drain and storm drain lines.

8. Insulate horizontal branch lines from floor sinks, recepters and drains receiving

cold discharge from equipment and appliances.

E. DOMESTIC WATER

1. "Piping" to include pipes, fittings, nipples, valves and accessories connected

thereto.

2. Run piping generally parallel to the axis of the building, arranged to conform to

the building requirements and to suit the necessities of clearance for other mechanical

ducts, flues, conduits and work of other trades, and as close to ceiling or other

construction as practical, free of unnecessary traps or bends.

3. Grade water supply piping for complete drainage of the system. Install hose bibbs

at low points.

4. Piping connections to equipment to be made up with unions.

5. Provide sufficient elbows, swings and offsets to permit free expansion and

contraction.

6. Use reducers or increasers. Use no bushings.

7. Ream or file each pipe to remove burrs. Inspect each length of pipe and each

fitting for workmanship and clear passageways.

8. Cover, cap or otherwise protect open ends of piping during construction to

prevent damage to threads or flanges and prevent entry of foreign matter. Disinfect

and sterilize water supply piping as specified. Furnish written report on final water

quality results.




9. Exposed connections to equipment to be installed with special care, showing no

tool marks or threads at fittings and piping. No bowed or bent piping to be permitted.

10. Ferrous to non-ferrous connections to be made by means of dielectric fittings.

11. Use extra heavy pipe for nipples, where unthreaded portion is less than 1-1/2-

inches. Use no close nipples. Use only shoulder-type nipples.

12. Through-Wall Pipes: Type 'L' copper tubing for through-wall pipes which

connect to exposed stops at wall surface. Anchor the pipes in the wall; attach pipe

with U-bolts to steel back-up plates or steel angles anchored in the wall. Provide

wrought copper elbow which securely anchors ears in wall at through-wall pipes.

13. Provide drain valves at base of risers and at low points on the system.

14. Backflow Preventers: Pipe relief to nearest drain. Slope at 2 percent per foot.

F. SLEEVES

1. Pipe Sleeves:

a. Layout work in advance of pouring concrete, furnish, and set sleeves

necessary to complete work.

b. Floor Sleeves: Provide sleeves on pipes passing through concrete or masonry

construction. Extend sleeve 1-inch above finished floor. Caulk pipes passing

through floor with non-shrinking grout or approved caulking compound (Except

DWV Piping penetrating a concrete Slab set on Finish Grade), provide "Link-

Seal" sleeve sealing system for concrete/slab penetrations which are below grade.

Caulk/seal piping passing through fire rated building assembly with UL rated

assemblies. Provide fire-rated assemblies per local AHJ requirements

c. Wall Sleeves: Provide sleeves on pipes passing through concrete or masonry

construction. Provide sleeve flush with finished face of wall. Caulk pipes

passing through walls with non-shrinking caulking compound. Provide "Link-

Seal" sleeve sealing system for concrete penetrations which are below grade.

Caulk/seal piping passing through fire-rated assemblies per local AHJ

requirements.




d. Beam Sleeves: Coordinate with trades for locations of pipe sleeves in

reinforced concrete and steel beams. Indicate penetrations on structural shop

drawings. See Drawings and Specifications for specific sleeve location

limitations. Plumbing Drawings are diagrammatic. Offset piping as required to

meet these limitations. Pipe sleeve locations must be indicated on reinforced

concrete and steel beam shop drawings. Field cutting of beams not allowed

without written approval of structural engineer. No extra costs allowed for failure

to coordinate beam penetrations prior to reinforced concrete and steel beam shop

drawing submittal.





between piping or piping insulation and sleeve I.D.

c. Seal each end airtight with a resilient nonhardening seal per code.



UL listing and manufacturer's recommendation.

b. Reference Division 7.

c. Provide proper sizing when providing sleeves or core-drilled holes to

accommodate penetration. Firestop voids between sleeve or core-drilled hole and

pipe passing through to meet requirements of ASTM E84.

G. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

1. Trenching, bedding and backfill to meet the requirements of the Project

Geotechnical Report. The standards listed below are a minimum.

2. Native soils may not be used for bedding or pipe zone backfill without specific

approval of the Project Geotechnical Consultant.

3. General: Perform necessary excavation and backfill required for installation of

plumbing work. Repair piping or other work at no expense to Owner.

4. Water: Keep excavations free of standing water. Reexcavate and fill back

excavations damaged or softened by water or frost to original level with sand, crushed

rock or other approved material at no expense to Owner.




5. Tests: During progress of work for compacted fill, Owner reserves right to

request compaction tests made under direction of testing laboratory.

6. Trench Excavation: Excavate trenches to necessary depth and width, removing

rocks, unstable soil (muck, peat), roots and stumps. Excavation material is classified

as "base fill" and "native." Base fill excavation material consisting of placed crushed

rock may be used as backfill above "Pipe Zone." Remove and dispose off site native

excavation material. Adequate width of trench for proper installation of piping or

conduit.

7. Support Foundations:

a. Foundations: Excavate trenches located in unstable ground areas below

elevation required for installation of piping to depth which is determined by

Architect as appropriate for conditions encountered. Place and compact approved

foundation material in excavation up to "Bedding Zone." Dewatering, placement,

compaction and disposal of excavated materials to conform to requirements

contained in other sections of Specifications or Drawings.

b. Over-Excavations: Where trench excavation exceeds required depths,

provide, place and compact suitable bedding material to proper grade or elevation

at no additional cost to Owner.

c. Foundation Material: Where native material has been removed, place and

compact necessary foundation material to form base for replacement of required

thickness of bedding material.

Class A Class B

Material

Passing

Min. Max. Min. Max.

3/4-inch

Square

Opening

27 47 0 1

d. Bedding Material: Full bed piping on sand, pea gravel, or 3/4-inch minus

crushed rock. Place minimum 4-inch deep layer of sand, pea gravel, or crushed

rock on leveled trench bottom for this purpose. Remove bedding to necessary

depth for piping bells and couplings to maintain contact of pipe on bedding for its

entire length. Provide additional bedding in excessively wet, unstable, or solid

rock trench bottom conditions as required to provide firm foundation.




8. Backfilling:

a. Following installation and successful completion of required tests, backfill

piping in lifts.

1. In "Pipe Zone" place backfill material and compact in lifts not to exceed 6-

inches in depth to height of 12-inches above top of pipe. Place backfill

material to obtain contact with entire periphery of pipe, without disturbing or

displacing pipe.

2. Place and compact backfill above "Pipe Zone" in layers not to exceed 12-

inches in depth.

b. Backfill Material:

1. Backfill Material in "Pipe Zone": 3/4-inch minus crushed rock, sand or

pea gravel.

2. Crushed rock, fill sand or other backfill material approved elsewhere in

Specifications may be used above "Pipe Zone."

9. Compaction of Trench Backfill:

a. Where compaction of trench backfill material is required, use one of following

methods or combination thereof:

1. Mechanical tamper,

2. Vibratory compactor, or

3. Other approved methods appropriate to conditions encountered.

b. Architect to have right to change methods and limits to better accommodate

field conditions. Compaction sufficient to attain 95 percent of maximum density

at optimum moisture content unless noted otherwise on Drawings or elsewhere in

Specifications. Water "puddling" or "washing" is prohibited.




H. TESTING

1. General:

a. Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pumps, compressors,

tanks, and gauges, as required. Test piping systems before insulation (if any) is

installed and remove or disengage control devices before testing. Where

necessary, test sections of each piping system independently, but do not use

piping valves to isolate sections where test pressures exceed local valve operating

pressure rating. Fill each section with water, compressed air, or nitrogen and

pressurize for the indicated pressure and time.

b. Notify Architect and local Plumbing Inspector 2 days before tests.

c. Drainage, Waste and Vent Piping: Test in accordance with governing

plumbing code or as follows: Test drainage and venting systems, with necessary

openings plugged, to permit system to be filled with water and subjected to water

pressure of minimum of 5 PSI head. System to hold water without water level

drop greater than 1/2 pipe diameter of largest nominal pipe size within 24-hour

period. Test system in sections if minimum head cannot be maintained in each

section. 5 PSI head to be minimum pressure at highest joint.

d. Water Piping: Eliminate air from system. Fill and test at 125 PSIG or

minimum 1-1/2 times static pressure at connection to serving utility main for

period of two hours with no loss in pressure.

e. Send test results to Architect for review and approval.

2. Testing of Pressurized Systems:

a. Test each pressurized piping system at 150 percent of operating pressure

indicated, but not less than 125 PSIG test pressure.

b. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if

leakage is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 2 percent of test pressure.

3. Test hot and cold domestic water piping systems upon completion of rough-in and

before connection to fixtures at hydrostatic pressure of 125 PSIG.

I. STERILIZATION OF DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM

1. General: Upon completion of tests and necessary replacements, thoroughly flush

and disinfect domestic water piping.




2. Method: After thoroughly flushing system with water to remove sediment, fill

system with a solution containing 50 parts per million of chlorine for not less than 24

hours or 200 parts per million of chlorine for not less than 3 hours. After retention,

drain, reflush and return system to service.

3. Certification: Provide copy of domestic water chlorination certificate in each

operations and maintenance manual.

J. PROTECTION

1. Keep pipe openings closed by means of plugs or caps to prevent entrance of

foreign matter. Protect piping, ductwork, fixtures, equipment and apparatus against

dirty water, chemical or mechanical damage both before and after installation.

Restore to its original condition or replace fixtures, equipment or apparatus damaged

prior to final acceptance of work.

K. FIRESTOPPING PENETRATIONS IN FIRE-RATED WALL/FLOOR

ASSEMBLIES

1. Reference Division 7.

2. Provide proper sizing when providing sleeves or core-drilled holes to

accommodate penetration. Firestop voids between sleeve or core-drilled hole and pipe

passing through to meet requirements of ASTM E814.

3. Manufacturers: Hilti and Proset.

L. BURIED PREINSULATED PIPE INSTALLATION

1. Installation and Testing: Install and test products in accordance with

manufacturer’s installation instructions.

2. Manufacturer’s installation instructions shall describe the following:

a. Storage and handling of pipes.

b. Trench preparation.

c. Installing pipe.

d. Installing accessories.

e. Installing fittings.

f. Building penetrations.




g. Field insulation kits.

h. Testing.

END OF SECTION



VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 15110 - 1 of 15

SECTION 15110 - VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

15110-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY

1. Work Included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of valving.

a. Valves, General

b. Gate Valves

c. Balancing Valves

d. Ball Valves

e. Swing Check Valves

f. Lift Check Valves

g. Backflow Prevention Assemblies

h. Backwater Valves

i. Pressure Regulating Valve-Domestic Water

j. Thermostatic Mixing Valve

B. RELATED SECTIONS


section.



Requirements.

D. SUBMITTALS







Requirements.


a. NSF 61 Appendix 'G' compliant.

b. ISO 9001 Certified.

c. IAPMO Certified for Low Lead.

F. WARRANTY



15110-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Valves - General:

a. Apollo

b. Armstrong

c. ASCO

d. Cla-VAl

e. Conbraco

f. Crane

g. Glow

h. Griswold

i. Hammond

j. Hays

k. Jenkins




l. Josam

m. Kennedy

n. Milwaukee

o. Mueller

p. Nibco

q. Smith

r. Stockham

s. Tour Anderson

t. Wade

u. Watts

v. Wilkens

w. Victaulic

x. Zurn

y. Or approved equivalent.

2. Backflow Preventors:

a. Apollo

b. Cla-Val

c. Conbraco

d. Watts


3. Balancing Valves:

a. Griswold

b. Hays

c. Armstrong CBV

d. Tour Anderson





4. Backwater Valve:

a. Josam

b. Smith

c. Wade

d. Watts

e. Zurn


5. NSF Valves;

a. Clow

b. Kennedy

c. Nibco


6. Pressure Reducing Valves:

a. Cash Acme

b. Cla-Val

c. Watts

d. Wilkins


7. Thermostatic Mixing Valves:

a. Holby Tempering Valve

b. Lawler Series 66

c. Leonard Type TM

d. Powers LFMM430 (Lead Free)

e. Symmons Temp Control Series 5





8. Backflow Prevention Assemblies - Reduced Pressure Zone Backflow Preventer

(RPBP) for High Hazard Applications:

a. Febco 860-with 650A.

b. Conbraco 40-210-AGD.

c. Wilkins 375-XL-SAG.

d. Watts 919-QT-S valve with 919AGC.


9. Backflow Prevention Assemblies - Double Check Valve Assembly (DCVA) for

Low Hazard Applications - 2-inches and smaller:

a. Febco 850-650A

b. Conbraco Apollo 40-110-T2

c. Watts 007-QT-FDA-S

d. Wilkins 350-S-XL


10. Backflow Prevention Assemblies - Double Check Valve Assembly (DCVA) for

Low Hazard Applications - 2-1/2-inches and larger:

a. Conbraco Apollo 45-11-1

b. Watts 709-DCDA with 77F-01-FDA-12


11. Atmospheric Vacuum Breaker:

a. Conbraco Apollo 38-201

b. Watts 288 A-C

c. Wilkins 35VCH

d. Cash Acme V101C





B. VALVES - GENERAL

1. General:

a. Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream

pipe size.

b. Operators: Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than

quarter-turn. Provide lever handle for quarter-turn valves 6-inches and smaller.

Provide gear operators for quarter-turn valves 8-inches and larger and plug valves

installed over 5-feet above finished floor.

c. Valve Identification: Manufacturer's name (or trademark) and pressure rating

clearly marked on valve body.

2. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extension and following features:

a. Gate Valves: With rising stem.

b. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive

material, and protective sleeve that allows operation on valve without breaking

the vapor seal or disturbing insulation and memory stops that are fully adjustable

after insulation is applied.

c. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

3. Valve-End Connections:

a. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves, ASME

B16.5 for steel valves.

b. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606.

c. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

d. Threaded: With thread according to ASME B1.20.1.

4. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

5. Building Service:

a. Shutoff and Isolation Valves:

1. Pipe Sizes 3-inches and Smaller: Ball Valve.

2. Pipe Sizes 4-inches and Larger: Butterfly Valve.

b. Drain Service: Ball valves.




c. Strainer Blow-Off: Ball Valve.

d. Bypass Around Pressure-Reducing Valves: Ball Valve.

e. Check Valves: Swing.

C. GATE VALVES

1. Gate Valves - Class 125:

a. 2-inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Class 125, ASTM B62 cast bronze

composition body, bonnet and solid disc, copper-silicon non-rising stem, brass

packing gland, teflon impregnated packing and malleable iron hand-wheel.

b. 2-1/2-inches and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, ASTM A126 Grade B

Ductile iron body, bolted bonnet an disc, bronze trim, copper silicon non-rising

stem, bronze packing gland, teflon impregnated packing and malleable iron hand-

wheel.


a. 2-inches and Smaller: Class 150, MSS SP-80, ASTM B62 cast bronze body,

bronze bonnet, bronze wedge, non-rising stem, brass packing gland, non-asbestos

packing and aluminum or malleable iron hand-wheel.

b. 2 1/2-inches and Larger: Class 150, MSS SP-70, ASTM A126 Grade B,

IBBM, ductile iron body, bonnet and wedge, bronze trim, non-rising stem, brass

packing gland, non-asbestos packing and cast iron hand-wheel.


a. 2-inches and Smaller: Class 250, SWP, MSS SP-80, ASTM B61, cast bronzed

body, bronze bonnet, bronze wedge, non-rising stem, bronze packing gland, non-

asbestos packing and aluminum or malleable iron hand-wheel.

b. 2 1/2-inches and Larger: Class 250, SWP, MSS, SP-70, ASTM A126, Grade

B cast iron body, cast iron bonnet, cast iron wedge, bronze trim, non-rising stem,

brass packing gland, non-asbestos packing and cast iron hand-wheel.

D. BALANCING VALVES

1. Maximum 125 PSIG System Working Water Pressure.




2. Automatic Flow Control Valve:

a. 1/2-inches and Larger: Construction and attachment style as required by

piping system. Internal working parts and removable flow cartridge stainless steel.

Valves be factory set and automatically limit flow to specified capacities with 5

percent plus or minus accuracy over entire operating pressure differential.

b. Provide shut-off valve of supply side of valve and check valve on discharge

side of valve.

c. Minimum Flow Through Valve:

1. 1/2-inches size: 1 gpm.

2. 3/4-inches size: 1.5 gpm.

3. Manual Set Balancing Valves:

a. Valves are to be of the "Y" pattern, equal percentage globe-style and provide

three functions:

1. Precise flow measurement.

2. Precision flow balancing.

3. Positive drip-tight shut-off.

b. Valve to provide multi-turn, 360 degree adjustment with micrometer type

indicators located on the valve handwheel. Valves have a minimum of five full

360 degree handwheel turns. 90 degree circuit-setter style ball valves are not

acceptable. Valve handle to have hidden memory feature, which will provide a

means for locking the valve position after the system is balanced. Valves to be

furnished with precision machined venturi built into the valve body to provide

highly accurate flow measurement and flow balancing. The venturi to have two

1/4-inch threaded brass metering ports with check valves and gasketed caps

located on the inlet side of the valve. Valves to be furnished with flow smoothing

fins downstream of the valve seat and integral to the forged valve body to make

the flow more laminar. The valve body, stem and plug to be brass. The

handwheel to be high-strength resin.

c. 2-1/2-inch and Larger: Valves are to be of the "Y" pattern, equal percentage

globe-style and provide three functions:






3. Positive drip-tight shut off. Valve to provide multi-turn, 360 degree

adjustment with micrometer type indicators location on the valve handwheel.

Valves to have a minimum of five full 360 degree handwheel turns. 90 degree

circuit-setter style ball valves are not acceptable. Valve handle to have hidden

memory feature, which will provide a means for locking the valve position

after the system is balanced. Valve body to be either cast iron with integrated

cast iron flanges (2-1/2-inch to 12-inch) or ductile iron with industrial

standard grooved ends (2-1/2-inch to 12-inch). Valve stem and plug disc to be

bronze with handwheel that permits multi-turn adjustments. Sizes 2-1/2-inch

and 3-inch - five turns, sizes 4-inch to 6-inch - 6 turns, sizes 8-inch to 10-inch

- 12 turns and size 12-inch - 14 turns. Flange adapters to be provided to

prevent rotation.

E. BALL VALVES

1. 4-inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, 400-600 PSI, three-piece full port ball

configuration, bronze body, extended soldered ends for copper pipe and threaded

ends for iron pipe, brass or stainless steel ball, no chrome plated ball valves are

approved, teflon seat, or brass stem. Apollo 82-100/82A 140 Series three-piece.

F. SWING CHECK VALVES

1. 2-inches and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body, horizontal swing, regrinding type,

Y-pattern, renewable disc. Nibco 413. MSS SP-80, Type 4.

2. 2-1/2-inches and Larger: Class 125, iron body, bolted bonnet, horizontal swing,

renewable seat and disc, flanged ends. Nibco F918. MMS SP-71, Type 1.

3. Rubber Flapper Check Valve: Horizontal or vertical upward flow installation.

Working pressure to 175 PSI. Ductile iron or cast iron body. Steel reinforced Buna-

N rubber flapper epoxy coating on wetted parts. MSS SP-80, Type 4.

G. LIFT CHECK VALVES

1. 2-inches and Smaller: Bronze body, 125 PSI, spring loaded, Teflon seat. Steam

Service, Teflon Disc: Nibco 480Y. Water, Gas or Oil Service, Buna-N Disc: MSS

SP-80.

2. 2-1/2-inches and Larger: Iron body, 125 PSI, spring loaded, bronze seat and disc.

125 PSI Service: MSS SP-71, type 1.




H. BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLIES

1. General: Assemblies model numbers listed below are for general comparison.

Project specific model numbers to be verified contractor as approved by jurisdiction

where project is located.

2. Reduced Pressure Zone Backflow Preventer (RPBP) for High Hazard

Applications:

a. 2-inches and Smaller: Assembly consists of shutoff ball valves in inlet and

outlet, and strainer on inlet. Assemblies include test cocks and pressure-

differential relief valve located between two positive seating check valves and

comply with requirements of ASSE Standard 1013 and AWWA C511. Bronze

construction, threaded ends, stainless steel internal parts, FDA strainer, and air

gap fitting. Route pipe from air gap fitting to approved waste receptor.

3. 2-1/2-inches and Larger: Assembly consists of shutoff OS&Y gate valves in inlet

and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Assemblies include test cocks and pressure-

differential relief valve located between two positive seating check valves and

comply with requirements of ASSE Standard 1015 and AWWA C511. Epoxy coated

cast iron body construction, flanged ends, stainless steel internal parts, bronze seats,

and FDA strainer.

4. Double Check Valve Assembly (DCVA) for Low Hazard Applications:

a. 2-inches and Smaller: Assembly consists of shutoff ball valves in inlet and

outlet, and FDS strainer on inlet. Assemblies include test cocks and two positive

seating check valves and comply with requirements of ASSE Standard 1015 and

AWWA C510. Bronze construction, threaded ends, and stainless steel internal

parts.

b. 2-1/2-inches and Larger: Assembly consists of shutoff OS&Y gate valves in

inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Assemblies include test cocks and two

positive seating check valves and comply with requirements of ASSE Standard

1015 and AWWA C510. Epoxy coat cast iron body construction, strainer flanged

ends, and stainless steel internal parts.

5. Spill Resistant Pressure Vacuum Breaker: Watts Model 800MCQT with 777S

"Y" strainer.

6. Atmospheric Vacuum Breaker: Assembly consists of a bronze vacuum breaker

body with silicone disc, and full size orifice. Device to be IAPMO listed, meet ASE

standard 1001, and ANSI standard A113.1.1 rough chrome plate finish.




I. BACKWATER VALVES

1. In-line type, enamel coated, cast iron body with flapper, hub ends and gasketed

bolted cover.

2. In-line type with gate valve, enamel coated cast iron body with flapper hub ends.

3. Provide 36-inches x 36-inches masonry pit with traffic rated access cover (H20

loading).

J. PRESSURE REGULATING VALVE-DOMESTIC WATER

1. Water: Bronze body, diaphragm or piston type, spring actuated, with separate or

integral strainer, pressure range to suit conditions, approved for potable water use.

Provide shutoff valves, pressure relief valves, unions, drain valve and bypass.

2. Water: Automatic control pressure regulating valve, stainless steel seat, stem and

spring, diaphragm actuated with brass body, hydraulic control pilots with effluent

operating temperature range 32F to 180F, FDA and AWWA approved.

3. Water: Bronze body construction, stainless steel strainer screen, thermal

expansion bypass with renewable stainless steel seat and high temperature resisting

diaphragm.

K. THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE

1. Thermostatic type with liquid filled motor, bronze body construction, corrosion

resistant, materials, union end stops, check inlets with strainers, 0-200 degree

farenheit dial thermometer and discharge shut-off valve. Mixing valves to meet

ASSE 1017.

2. Install mixing valve per manufacturer's instruction manual.

3. Maximum required delta temperature differential between hot water supply

temperature and delivery temperature is 15 degrees F. Set valve outlet temperature

per drawing requirements..

4. Flow from the tempered water circulating pump to be split to mixing valve and

building hot water heating system.




15110-03 EXECUTION

A. INSTALLATION

1. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

a. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

b. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves and weld ends.

c. Set angle, gate and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.

d. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

e. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.

f. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

2. Use the following precautions during storage:

a. Maintain valve end protection.

b. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point

temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in

watertight enclosures.

3. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do

not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

4. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

5. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment,

including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate

valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when

necessary.

6. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no

case with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable. Install

valve drains with hose end adapter and cap on chain for each valve that must be

installed with stem below horizontal plane. Ensure installation provides full stem

movement.

7. Insulation: Where insulation is indicated, install extended stem valves, arranged

in proper manner to receive insulation.

8. Mechanical Actuators: Install with chain operators where indicated. Extend

chains to 5-feet above floor and hook to clips to clear aisle passage.




9. Stem Selection: Outside screw and yoke stems, except provide inside screw, non-

rising stem where space prevents full opening of OS&Y valves.

10. Seats: Renewable seats, except where otherwise indicated.

11. Installation of Check Valves:

a. Swing Check Valves: Install in horizontal position with hinge pin

horizontally perpendicular to centerline of pipe. Install for proper direction of

flow. Only install where there is 10 pipe diameters of straight pipe upstream of

valve.

b. Wafer Check Valves: Install between two flanges in horizontal or vertical

position, position for proper direction of flow.

c. Lift Check Valves: Install in piping line with stem vertically upward, position

for proper direction of flow.

12. Balancing Valves: Install with flow in the direction of the arrow on the valve

body and installed at least five pipe diameters downstream from any fitting, and at

least ten pie diameters downstream from any pump. Two pipe diameters downstream

from the balancing valve should be free of any fittings. When installed, easy and

unobstructed access to the valve handwheel and metering ports for adjustment and

measurement are to be provided. Mounting of valve in piping must prevent sediment

build-up inmetering ports.

B. VALVE ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

1. Inspect valves for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks. Replace valve if

leak persists.

2. Valve Identification. Tag valves per Section 15075, Identification for Plumbing

Piping and Equipment.

C. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

1. If valve applications are not indicated on Drawings, use the following:

a. Shutoff Service: Ball valves.

b. Throttling Service: Pressure reducing valves.

c. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

1. 2-inches and Smaller: Bronze swing or spring-loaded lift check valves

with bronze disc.




2. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same

types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

3. Valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections.

a. For Copper Tubing, 2-inches and Smaller. Threaded ends except where

solder-joint valve-end.

b. For Copper Tubing, 2-1/2-inches to NPS 4-inches. Flanged ends except where

threaded valve-end.

c. For Copper Tubing: 5-inches and Larger: Flanged ends.

d. For Steel Piping, 2-inches and Smaller: Threaded ends.

e. For Steel Piping, 2-1/2-inches to NPS 4-inches: Flanged ends except where

threaded valve-end.

f. For Steel Piping, 5-inches and Larger: Flanged ends.

D. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

1. Install where indicated, and where required by code. Where practical, locate in

same room as equipment being protected.

2. Submit product cut sheets to local AHJ for approval prior to purchase.

3. Install as close to wall as possible with clearances for access and maintenance as

required by AHJ.

4. Coordinate exact location of installation and type of backflow device serving a

particular piece of equipment with AHJ and Architect prior to purchase and

installation.

5. Provide wall/floor brackets that are of fully welded, hot dipped galvanized

construction, fabricated to meet field conditions. Mount backflow preventer to

brackets using cadmium plated "U" type bolts and nuts.

6. Contact: Contact local water district/backflow specialist and request backflow

installation literature. Install backflow devices per UPC and local water

district/backflow specialist requirements.

7. Route waste piping from air gap waste fitting concealed within walls to point of

air gap termination at indirect waste receptor.




E. PRESSURE REGULATING

1. Provide inlet and outlet ball valves, and globe valve bypass. Provide pressure

gauge on valve outlet.

2. Provide factory startup on automatic control valves.

END OF SECTION



VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING SECTION 15115- 1 of 8

SECTION 15115 - VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

15115-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Valves, General

b. Globe Valves

c. Balancing Valves

d. Ball Valves

e. Butterfly Valves

f. Swing Check Valves

B. RELATED SECTIONS


section.



Requirements.

D. SUBMITTALS




Requirements.




F. WARRANTY



15115-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Manufacturers as specified in specific articles below.

B. VALVES - GENERAL

1. General:

a. Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream

pipe size.

b. Operators: Provide handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than

quarter-turn. Provide lever handle for quarter-turn valves 6-inches and smaller.

c. Valve Identification: Manufacturer's name (or trademark) and pressure rating

clearly marked on valve body.

2. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extension and following features:

a. Ball Valves; With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive

material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve with out breaking

the vapor seal or disturbing insulation and memory stops that are fully adjustable

after insulation is applied.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements.

Provide NIBCO Nib-seal handle extension or comparable product by one of

the following. Conbraco Industries, Inc.: Apollo Div.

b. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

3. Valve-End Connections:

a. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves, ASME

B16.5 for steel valves.

b. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

c. Threaded: With thread according to ASME B1.20.1.




4. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

5. Building Service:

a. Shutoff and Isolation Valves:

1. Pipe Sizes 3-inches and Smaller: Ball valve.

2. Pipe Sizes 4-inches and Larger: Butterfly valve.

b. Drain Service; All Pipe Sizes: Ball valves.

c. Strainer Blow-Off: Ball valve.

d. Bypass Around Pressure-Reducing Valves: Globe valves.

e. Check Valves: Swing.

6. Manufacturers: Crane, Griswold, Hammond, Hays, Jenkins, Milwaukee, Mueller,

Nibco, Stockham, Tour Anderson,Watts. Note: See individual sections for specialty

valves (balancing valves, pressure regulators, relief valves, earthquake valves, gas

valves). NIBCO Numbers shown as Basis-of-Design.

C. GLOBE VALVES

1. 3-inches and Smaller: Class 200, 200 lb. SWP, MSS SP-80, ASTM B61, cast

bronze body, bronze bonnet, bronze disc, bronze packing gland, non-asbestos packing

and aluminum or malleable iron hand-wheel.

D. BALANCING VALVES

1. Maximum 125 PSIG System Working Water Pressure.

2. Manual Set Balancing Valves:

a. Valves are to be of the "Y" pattern, equal percentage globe-style and provide

three functions:



3. Positive drip-tight shut-off.




b. Valve to provide multi-turn, 360 degree adjustment with micrometer type

indicators located on the valve handwheel. Valves have a minimum of five full

360 degree handwheel turns. 90 degree circuit-setter style ball valves are not

acceptable. Valve handle to have hidden memory feature, which will provide a

means for locking the valve position after the system is balanced. Valves to be

furnished with precision machined venturi built into the valve body to provide

highly accurate flow measurement and flow balancing. The venturi to have two

1/4-inch threaded brass metering ports with check valves and gasketed caps

located on the inlet side of the valve. Valves to be furnished with flow smoothing

fins downstream of the valve seat and integral to the forged valve body to make

the flow more laminar. The valve body, stem and plug to be brass. The

handwheel to be high-strength resin.

c. 2-1/2-inch and Larger: Valves are to be of the "Y" pattern, equal percentage

globe-style and provide three functions:



3. Positive drip-tight shut off. Valve to provide multi-turn, 360 degree

adjustment with micrometer type indicators location on the valve handwheel.

Valves to have a minimum of five full 360 degree handwheel turns. 90 degree

circuit-setter style ball valves are not acceptable. Valve handle to have hidden

memory feature, which will provide a means for locking the valve position

after the system is balanced. Valve body to be either cast iron with integrated

cast iron flanges (2-1/2-inch to 12-inch) or ductile iron with industrial

standard grooved ends (2-1/2-inch to 12-inch). Valve stem and plug disc to be

bronze with handwheel that permits multi-turn adjustments. Sizes 2-1/2-inch

and 3-inch - five turns, sizes 4-inch to 6-inch - 6 turns, sizes 8-inch to 10-inch

- 12 turns and size 12-inch - 14 turns. Flange adapters to be provided to

prevent rotation.

d. Manufacturers: Armstrong CBV, Tour and Anderson, Griswold Flow Design

or approved equivalent

E. BALL VALVES

1. 2-1/2-inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110-80, 150 PSI, bronze body, threaded ends,

brass or stainless steel ball, teflon seat, bronze stem, extended steel handle, full port.

Nibco T-595-Y.

2. Full Port Ball Valve: 2- to 4- inch ductile iron, ASTM A536, micro finish steel

chrome plated or stainless steel ball and stem. TFE seats, 600 PSI.




F. BUTTERFLY VALVES

1. Select lug type valves.

2. 6-inches and Smaller: 200 PSI, ductile iron body, extended neck, stainless steel

disc and stem, reinforced resilient EDPM seat, memory stop control, lever handle

through 5-inches, size and worm gear operator for 6-inches and larger. Mount stem

in horizontal position. Manual lever and lock Nibco LD2000, for mechanical

coupling fittings. MSS SP-67, Type 1.

G. SWING CHECK VALVES

1. 2-inches and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body, horizontal swing, regrinding type,

Y-pattern, renewable disc. Nibco 413. MSS SP-80, Type 4.

2. 2-1/2-inches and Larger: Class 125, iron body, bolted bonnet, horizontal swing,

renewable seat and disc, flanged ends. Nibco F918. MSS SP-71, Type 1.

15115-03 EXECUTION

A. INSTALLATION

1. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

a. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

b. Protect threads, flange faces, and weld ends.

c. Set globe valves closed to prevent rattling.

d. Set ball open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

e. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.

f. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

2. Use the following precautions during storage:

a. Maintain valve end protection.

b. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point

temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in

watertight enclosures.




3. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do

not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

4. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

5. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment,

including valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate

valves so as to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when

necessary.

6. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no

case with stems pointed downward from horizontal plane unless unavoidable. Install

valve drains with hose end adapter and cap on chain for each valve that must be

installed with stem below horizontal plane. Ensure installation provides full stem

movement. Install valves so that handle operation is not restricted by other pipes or

building systems.

7. Insulation: Where insulation is indicated, install extended stem valves, arranged

in proper manner to receive insulation.

8. Stem Selection: Outside screw and yoke stems, except provide inside screw,

nonrising stem where space prevents full opening of OS&Y valves.

9. Seats: Renewable seats, except where otherwise indicated.

10. Installation of Check Valves:

a. Swing Check Valves: Install in horizontal position with hinge pin

horizontally perpendicular to centerline of pipe. Install for proper direction of

flow. Only install where there is ten pipe diameters of straight pipe upstream of

valve.

11. Balancing Valves: Install with flow in the direction of the arrow on the valve

body and installed at least five pipe diameters downstream from any fitting, and at

least ten pipe diameters downstream from any pump. Two pipe diameters

downstream from the balancing valve should be free of any fittings. When installed,

easy and unobstructed access to the valve handwheel and metering ports for

adjustment and measurement are to be provided. Mounting of valve in piping must

prevent sediment build-up in metering ports. Install devices in accordance with

manufacturer's recommendations to automatically balance water flow in piping loops

as indicated.

B. VALVE ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

1. Inspect valves for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks. Replace valve if

leak persists.




2. Valve Identification. Tag valves per Section 15115, Identification for HVAC

Piping and Equipment.

C. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

1. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

a. Shutoff Service: Ball or butterfly valves.

b. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) type.

c. Throttling Service: Balancing Valves.

d. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

1. 2-inches and Smaller: Swing check valves with bronze disc.

2. 2-1/2-inches and Larger: Swing check valves with lever and weight or

with spring or wafer - seat check valves.

e. Provide isolation valve, check valve, and balancing valve on discharge side of

base mounted centrifugal pumps where indicated. Combination triple duty valves

not allowed. Provide isolation valve and strainer on suction side of pump.

2. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same

types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

3. Valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections.

a. For Copper Tubing, 2-inches and Smaller. Threaded ends.

b. For Copper Tubing, 2 1/2-inches to NPS 4-inches. Flanged ends.

c. For Copper Tubing: 5-inches and Larger: Flanged ends.

d. For Steel Piping, 2-inches and Smaller: Threaded ends.

e. For Steel Piping, 2 1/2-inches to NPS 4-inches: Flanged ends.

f. For Steel Piping, 5-inches and Larger: Flanged ends.

D. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

1. Install where indicated, and where required by code. Where practical, locate in

same room as equipment being protected.

2. Submit product cut sheets to local AHJ for approval prior to purchase.




3. Install as close to wall as possible with clearances for access and maintenance as

required by AHJ.

4. Coordinate exact location of installation and type of backflow device serving a

particular piece of equipment with AHJ and Architect prior to purchase and

installation.

5. Provide wall/floor brackets that are of fully welded, hot dipped galvanized

construction, fabricated to meet field conditions. Mount backflow preventer to

brackets using cadmium plated "U" type bolts and nuts.

6. Contact: Contact local water district/backflow specialist and request backflow

installation literature. Install backflow devices per UPC and local water

district/backflow specialist requirements.

7. Route waste piping from air gap waste fitting concealed within walls to point of

air gap termination at indirect waste receptor.

E. PRESSURE REGULATING

1. Provide inlet and outlet ball valves, and globe valve bypass. Provide pressure

gauge on valve outlet.

2. Provide factory startup on automatic control valves.

END OF SECTION



ASSEMBLIES, DEVICES AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING SYSTEMS SECTION 15120- 1 of 8

SECTION 15120 - ASSEMBLIES, DEVICES AND GAUGES FOR

PLUMBING SYSTEMS

15120-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Pressure Gauges

b. Thermometers

c. Pressure-Gauge Fittings

d. Test Plugs

e. Flow Indicators

f. Water Hammer Arrestors (Shock Absorbers)

g. Trap Primers

h. Cleanouts

B. RELATED SECTIONS


section.



Requirements.

D. SUBMITTALS








F. WARRANTY



15120-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Pressure Gauges:

a. Dwyer Instruments, Inc.

b. Moeller Instrument Co., Inc.

c. Omega Engineering, Inc.

d. Trerice


2. Thermometers:

a. Ashcroft

b. Trerice

c. Weiss

d. Marshaltown

e. Weksler


3. Water Hammer Arrestors (Shock Absorbers), Bellows Type:

a. Amtrol

b. J.R. Smith

c. Wade

d. Zurn





4. Water Hammer Arrestors (Shock Absorbers), Piston Type:

a. PPP

b. Sioux Chief


5. Trap Primers:

a. Wade

b. Zurn

c. J.R. Smith

d. PPP


6. Cleanouts:

a. J.R. Smith

b. Zurn

c. Wade

d. Watts


B. PRESSURE GAUGES

1. Pressure Gauges: ASME B40.100, phosphor-bronze bourdon type, dry type.

a. Case: Cast aluminum, stem-mounted, flangeless.

b. Size: 4-1/2-inch diameter.

c. Window: Clear glass.

d. Connector: Brass.

e. Scale: White aluminum with black graduation and markings.

f. Pointer: Black, adjustable.




g. Mid-Scale Accuracy: 1/2 percent.

h. Scale: PSI.

i. Basis-of-Design: Trerice Model 600CB.

C. THERMOMETERS

1. Thermometers - Adjustable Angle: Red or blue appearing organic liquid in glass,

ASTM E 1; lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish, cast aluminum

adjustable joint with positive locking device; adjustable 360 degrees in horizontal

plane, 180 degrees in vertical plane.

a. Size: 9-inch scale.

b. Window: Acrylic.

c. Scale: Aluminum, white background, black graduations and markings.

d. Stem: 3/4-inch NPT brass (aluminum for installation in air ducts).

e. Accuracy: 2 percent, per ASTM E 77.

f. Calibration: 0-160 with 2 Degrees F graduations.

g. Basis-of-Design: Trerice BX9.

D. PRESSURE-GAUGE FITTINGS

1. Valves: NPS 1/4 (DN8) brass or stainless-steel needle type.

2. Syphons: NPS 1/4 (DN8) coil of brass turbine with threaded ends.

3. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 (DN8) brass bushing with corrosion-resistant

porous-metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.

E. TEST PLUGS

1. Test Plug: 1/4-inch brass fitting and cap for receiving 1/8-inch outside diameter

pressure or temperature probe with Viton core for temperatures up to 200 degrees F.

2. Description: Nickel-plated, brass-body test plug in NPS 1/2 (DN15) fitting.

3. Body: Length as required to extend beyond insulation.

4. Pressure Rating: 500 PSIG minimum.




5. Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing valves, suitable for inserting 1/8-inch OD

probe from dial-type thermometer or pressure gauge.

6. Core Material for Air, Water, Oil and Gas: 20 to 200 degrees F, chlorosulfonated

polyethylene synthetic rubber.

7. Test Plug Cap: Gasketed and threaded cap, with retention chain or strap.

8. Test Kit: Pressure gauge and adapter with probe, two bimetal dial thermometers,

and carrying case.

a. Pressure Gauge and Thermometer Ranges: Approximately two times the

system's operating conditions.

F. FLOW INDICATORS

1. Description: Instrument for visual verification of flow; made for installation in

piping systems.

a. Construction: Bronze or stainless steel body, with sight glass and plastic

pelton-wheel indicator.

b. Pressure Rating: 125 PSIG.

c. Temperature Rating: 200 degrees F.

G. WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS (SHOCK ABSORBERS)

1. Bellows-type, stainless steel casing and bellows, pressure rated, tested and

certified in accordance with PDI WH-201.

2. Piston-type, copper, brass or stainless steel with O-ring piston, pressure rated,

tested and certified in accordance with PDI WH-201.

H. TRAP PRIMERS

1. Trap seal primer valve with integral automatic antisiphon protection. Code

approval required.

2. Electronic trap seal primer valve with integral automatic antisiphon protection

tied to DDC system. Coordinate quantity, locations and voltage characteristics for

control points and with Section "Controls".




I. CLEANOUTS

1. General: Locate cleanouts as shown on Drawings and as required by local code.

Cleanouts same size as pipe except that greater than 4-inches will not be required.

Plastic components not allowed, except unless specifically noted.

2. Types:

a. Tile Floor Cleanouts: J. R. Smith 4020 with round heavy-duty nickel bronze

top, taper thread, ABS plug and standard screws.

b. Carpeted Floor Cleanout: J. R. Smith 4020-X with carpet clamping frame

4023-Y with carpet cleanout marker, round heavy-duty nickel bronze top, taper

thread, ABS plug, carpet clamping device and standards screws.

c. Concrete Floor Cleanout (General): J. R. Smith 4020 with round heavy-duty

nickel bronze top, taper thread and ABS plug with standard screws.

d. Concrete Floor Cleanout (Heavy Load): J. R. Smith 4100 with round heavy-

duty nickel bronze top, taper thread and ABS plug with standard screws.

e. Wall Cleanout: J. R. Smith 4472-U, countersunk bronze taper thread plug,

stainless steel shallow cover and vandalproof screws.

f. Outside Area Walks and Drives: J. R. Smith 4023-U with round heavy-duty

nickel bronze top, taper thread, ABS plug and top secured with vandalproof

screws. Install in 18- by 18- by 6-inch deep concrete pad flush with grade.

15120-03 EXECUTION

A. INSTALLATION

1. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge

pipes smaller than 2-1/2-inch for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure sockets

allow clearance from insulation.

2. Where adequate space is not available, use meters specifically designed for short

pipe lengths. Use bidirectional meters where indicated on piping diagrams.

3. Install meters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as shown on

Drawings. Provide recommended upstream and downstream straight pipe length for

accurate reading.

4. Temperature Gauges:

a. Install in vertical upright position, tilted so as to be easily read at floor.




b. Thermometer Wells: Install in piping in vertical upright position. Fill well

with oil or graphite, secure cup.

5. Pressure Gauges:

a. General: Install pressure gauges in piping tee with pressure gauge cock,

located on pipe at most readable position, visible from floor.

b. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. At each pump inlet and outlet.

2. At inlet and discharge of each pressure reducing valve.

3. At make up water service outlets.

6. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest

appropriate scale.

7. Install gauges and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from

normal operating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.

8. Adjust gauges and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and

calibrate to zero.

9. Locate test plugs adjacent to thermometers and thermometer sockets, adjacent to

pressure gauges and pressure gauge taps, adjacent to control device sockets, or where

indicated.

10. Thermometer Range/Graduations:

System Temperature (degrees F) Graduations (degrees F)

Cold Water 25-125 1

Hot Water 30-240 2

11. Pressure Gauge Range/Graduations:

System Pressure (PSI) Graduations (PSI)

Cold Water 0-100 1

Hot Water 0-100 1

Compressed Air 0-160 1




B. WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS (SHOCK ABSORBERS)

1. Locate shock absorbers in supply pipe in accordance with recommendations of

Plumbing and Drainage Institute PDI-WH201. Install ahead of solenoid operated

valves. Determine size of absorber by fixture unit value of fixture supplied, using

PDI symbols to designate sizes. Provide access panel for each shock absorber.

2. Water Hammer Arrestors: Install in upright position, in locations and of sizes in

accordance with PDI WH-201, and elsewhere as indicated

C. CLEANOUTS

1. Install in aboveground piping and building drain piping as indicated, as required

by code; at each change in direction of piping greater than 135 degrees; at minimum

intervals of 100-feet; and at base of each vertical soil or waste stack. Install floor and

wall cleanout covers for concealed piping. Select type to match adjacent building

finish. Provide shop drawings to Architect to coordinate locations and types of

cleanouts with Architect prior to installation.

END OF SECTION



ASSEMBLIES, DEVICES AND GAUGES FOR HVAC SYSTEMS SECTION 15125 - 1 of 8

SECTION 15125 - ASSEMBLIES, DEVICES AND GAUGES FOR

HVAC SYSTEMS

15125-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Pressure Gauges

b. Thermometers

c. Dial Thermometers

d. Thermometer Wells

e. Duct Thermometer Support Flanges

f. Differential and Filter Pressure Gauges

g. Pressure-Gauge Fittings

h. Test Plugs

i. Turbine Flowmeters

B. RELATED SECTIONS


Section.



Requirements.

D. SUBMITTALS







Requirements.

F. WARRANTY



15125-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Pressure Gauges:


b. Moeller Instrument Co., Inc.

c. Omega Engineering, Inc.

d. Trerice.


2. Thermometers:

a. Ashcroft.

b. Trerice.

c. Weiss.

d. Marshaltown.

e. Weksler.


3. Differential and Filter Pressure Gauges:

a. Dwyer.





4. Turbine Flowmeters:

a. Onicon


B. PRESSURE GAUGES

1. ASME B40.100, phosphor-bronze bourdon type, dry type.

a. Case: Cast aluminum, stem-mounted, flangeless.

b. Size: 3-1/2 inch (90 mm) diameter.

c. Window: Clear glass.

d. Connector: Brass.

e. Scale: White aluminum with black graduation and markings.

f. Pointer: Black, adjustable.

g. Mid-Scale Accuracy: Two percent.

h. Scale: Psi.

i. Basis-of-Design: Trerice Model 600CB.

C. THERMOMETERS

1. Thermometers - Adjustable Angle: Red-or blue-appearing organic liquid in glass:

ASTM E 1; lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish, cast aluminum

adjustable joint with positive locking device; adjustable 360 degrees in horizontal

plane, 180 degrees in vertical plane.

a. Size: 9-inch scale.

b. Window: Acrylic.

c. Scale: Aluminum, white background, black graduations and markings.

d. Stem: 3/4-inch NPT brass (aluminum for installation in air ducts).

e. Accuracy: 2 percent, per ASTM E 77.

f. Calibration: 0-160 with 2 Degrees F. graduations.




g. Basis-of-Design: Trerice BX9.

D. DIAL THERMOMETERS

1. Thermometers: ASTM E 1, cast aluminum case, vapor or liquid actuated with

brass or copper bulb, copper or bronze braided capillary, white with black markings

and black pointer, glass lens, adjustable 360 degrees in horizontal plane. 180 degrees

in vertical plane.

a. Size: 4-1/2-inch diameter dial.

b. Lens: Clear glass.

c. Length of Capillary: Minimum 6-feet (for remote reading if required).

d. Accuracy: 2 percent.

e. Calibration: 2 Degrees F. graduations.

f. Basis-of-Design: Trerice Model 80742.

E. THERMOMETER WELLS

1. Description: Fitting with protective well for installation in threaded pipe fitting to

hold test thermometer.

a. Material: Brass for use in copper piping.

b. Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping.

c. Extension Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 2-inches, but not less than

thickness of insulation. Omit extension neck for wells for piping not insulated.

d. Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.

e. Cap: Threaded, with chain permanently fastened to socket.

f. Heat Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.

F. DUCT THERMOMETER SUPPORT FLANGES

1. Description: Flanged fitting bracket for mounting in hole of duct, with threaded

end for attaching thermometer.

a. Extension Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 2-inches, but not less than

thickness of exterior insulation.




b. Insertion-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 2-inches, but not less than

thickness of insulation lining.

G. DIFFERENTIAL AND FILTER PRESSURE GAUGES

1. Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases (Natural Gas option

available.)

2. Wetted Materials: Consult factory.

3. Housing: Die cast aluminum case and bezel, with acrylic cover. Exterior finish is

coated gray to withstand 168 hour salt spray corrosion test.

4. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 percent of full scale throughout range at 70 degrees F.

5. Pressure Limits: Minus 20 Hg to 15 PSIG.

6. Overpressure: Relief plug opens at approximately 25 PSIG standard gauges only.

7. Temperature Limits: 20 to 140 degrees F.

8. Size: 4-inch diameter dial face.

9. Mounting Orientation: Diaphragm in vertical position. Consult factory for other

position orientation.

10. Process Connections: 1/8-inch female NPT duplicate high and low pressure taps,

one pair side and one pair back.

11. Standard Accessories: Two 1/8-inch NPT plugs for duplicate pressure taps, two

1/8-inch pipe thread to rubber tubing adapter and three flush mounting adapters with

screws.

H. PRESSURE-GAUGE FITTINGS

1. Valves: NPS 1/4 (DN8) brass or stainless-steel needle type.

2. Syphons: NPS 1/4 (DN8) coil of brass turbine with threaded ends.

3. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 (DN8) brass bushing with corrosion-resistant

porous-metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.

I. TEST PLUGS

1. Description: Nickel-plated, brass-body test plug in NPS 1/2 (DN15) fitting.




2. Body: Length as required to extend beyond insulation.

3. Pressure Rating: 500 PSIG (3450 kPa) minimum.

4. Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing valves, suitable for inserting 1/8-inch OD

probe from dial-type thermometer or pressure gauge.

5. Core Material for Air, Water, Oil and Gas: 20 to 200 degrees F (Minus 7 to plus

93 Degrees Celsius), chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.

6. Test Plug Cap: Gasketed and threaded cap, with retention chain or strap.

7. Test Kit: Pressure gauge and adapter with probe, two bimetal dial thermometers,

and carrying case.

a. Pressure Gauge and Thermometer Ranges: Approximately two times the

system's operating conditions.

J. TURBINE FLOWMETERS

1. Description: Insertion type, measures flow directly in gallons per minute (liters

per second).

a. Construction: Stainless steel body and plastic turbine or impeller, with integral

direct-reading scale.

b. Pressure Rating: 150 PSIG (1035) kPa minimum.

c. Temperature Rating: 180 degrees F minimum.

d. Display: Visual instantaneous rate of flow.

e. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 percent.

f. Basis-of-Design:

1. Onicon F-1300 - Small Pipe.

2. Onicon F-1100 - Standard.

3. Onicon F-1200 - Short Pipe Lengths.

4. Onicon F-1200B - Bi-Directional.




15125-03 EXECUTION

A. INSTALLATION

1. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge

pipes smaller than 2-1/2-inch for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure sockets

allow clearance from insulation.

2. Where adequate space is not available, use turbine flow meters specifically

designed for short pipe lengths. Use bi-directional turbine flow meters where

indicated on piping diagrams.

3. Install turbine and thermal energy meters in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions, and as shown on drawings. Provide recommended upstream and

downstream straight pipe length for accurate reading.

4. Temperature Gauges:

a. Install in vertical upright position, tilted so as to be easily read at floor.

b. Thermometer Wells: Install in piping in vertical upright position. Fill well

with oil or graphite, secure cup.

c. Install at inlet and outlet of heat exchangers.

5. Pressure Gauges:

a. General: Install pressure gauges in piping tee with pressure gauge cock,

located on pipe at most readable position, visible from floor.

b. Locations: Install in the following locations as a minimum, and elsewhere as

indicated.

1. At each pump inlet and outlet.

2. At inlet and discharge of each pressure reducing valve.

3. At make up water service outlets.

4. At inlet and discharge of each heat exchanger.

6. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest

appropriate scale.

7. Install gauges and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from

normal operating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.




8. Adjust gauges and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and

calibrate to zero.

9. Locate test plugs adjacent to thermometers and thermometer sockets, adjacent to

pressure gauges and pressure gauge taps, adjacent to control device sockets, or where

indicated.

10. Thermometer Range/Graduations:

System Temperature (degree F) Graduations (degrees F)

Heating Water 30-240 2

11. Pressure Gauge Range/Graduations:

System Pressure (PSI) Graduations (PSI)

Heating Water 0-100 1

END OF SECTION



HYDRONIC PIPING SECTION 15180 - 1 of 8

SECTION 15180 - HYDRONIC PIPING

15180-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Heating Water Piping, Buried

b. Heating Water Piping, Above Ground

c. Radiant Heating Piping

d. Equipment Drains and Overflows

e. Unions

B. RELATED SECTIONS


Section.



Requirements.

D. SUBMITTALS



a. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and

personnel.

b. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section.

Include the following:

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.




3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.

c. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality

available at project site.

d. Buried piping manufacturer to submit thrust block layout and details with all

anchorage and seismic calculations.



Requirements.


a. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type

specified in this section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience.

b. Welder Qualifications: Certify in accordance with ASME (BPV IX).

c. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping"

for materials, products, and installation. Provide safety valves and pressure

vessels with the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and

expansion tanks to comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,

Section VIII, Division 1.

F. WARRANTY



15180-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS


B. HEATING WATER PIPING, BURIED

1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Underground Heating Water Piping Systems:

1. Uponor




2. Rovanco

3. Perma-Pipe

4. Rehau

2. Preinsulated Underground PEX Pipe

a. Factory preinsulated piping system, consisting of an inner media carrier pipe,

insulation around the carrier pipe, and a water/vapor seal jacket over the

insulation. Rated for minimum 180F heating water at 85 PSI.

b. Carrier Pipe Material: PEX piping.

c. Insulation: Rigid closed cell polyurethane.

d. Outer Casing: Flexible HPDE.

e. Each factory prefabricated section provides complete sealing of insulation at

each end of conduit/casing. Provide permanent water and vapor seal.

f. Carry over outer casing and extend to carrier pipe or use prefabricated caps

specifically designed for end seal of prefabricated insulation systems. Fabricate

caps of the same material as the outer casing.

g. Manufacturers: Uponor Ecoflex or approved equivalent. .

C. HEATING WATER PIPING, ABOVE GROUND

1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black, Type E (electric resistance

welded), Grade A.

a. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A 234/A 234M, wrought

steel welding type.

b. Wrought Cast and Forged Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5

including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end

connections, and facings:

1. Material Group: 1.1.

2. End Connections: Butt welding.

3. Facings: Raised face.

c. Joints: Threaded or AWS D1.1 welded.




2. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type L (B), drawn.

a. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22, solder wrought copper.

b. Joints: Solder, lead free ASTM B32, HB alloy (95-5 tin antimony), or tin and

silver.

c. Joints: Brazed, AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (silver). Pipes 2-1/2-inches

or larger or piping routed over telecommunications rooms and electrical rooms.

D. RADIANT HEATING PIPING

1. Polyethylene Pipe: ASTM F 876 or ASTM F 877, cross-linked polyethylene, 100

PSIG operating pressure at 180 degrees F. Barrier type.

a. Fittings: Brass and copper, ASTM F1960.

b. Joints: Expansion-type equal to ProPEX.

E. EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS

1. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type L (B), drawn.

a. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22 solder wrought copper.

b. Joints: Solder, lead free, ASTM B 32, HB alloy (95-5 tin-antimony), or tin

and silver.

c. Joints: Brazed, AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (silver). (Pipes 2-1/2-inch or

larger or piping routed over recovery rooms, delivery rooms, cesarean rooms,

special procedure rooms, operating rooms, nurseries, intensive care units, food

preparation centers, food serving facilities, food storage areas, computer rooms,

telecommunications rooms, and electrical rooms.

F. UNIONS

1. Unions for Pipe 2-inches and Under:

a. Ferrous Piping: 150 PSIG malleable iron, threaded, ASME B16.39.

b. Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints, ASME B16.22.

2. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end,

copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.




15180-03 EXECUTION

A. PREPARATION

1. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.

2. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

3. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

4. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with

temporary plugs or caps.

B. BURIED PIPING INSTALLATION

1. Install in accordance with Drawings, specifications, and manufacturer's

installation instructions. Provide a field service instructor on site to train the

Contractor in all phases of installation.

2. Underground Systems: Buried in a trench of not less than 2-feet deeper than the

top of the pipe and not less than 18-inches wider than the combined O.D. of all piping

systems. A minimum thickness of 24-inches of compacted backfill over the top of

the pipe is required. System installation must meet H-20 highway loading.

3. Trench bottom to have a minimum of 6-inch of sand, pea gravel, or specified

backfill material, as approved by the engineer, as a cushion for the piping. Field

cutting of the pipe performed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation

instructions.

4. Pressure test buried piping per Field Quality Control article below.

5. Field Service: Provided by a certified manufacturer's representative or company

field service technician. The technician will be available at the job to check

unloading, storing, and handling of pipe, joint installation, pressure testing and

backfilling techniques.

C. INSTALLATION

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. Install heating water piping to ASME B31.9 requirements.

3. Route piping in orderly manner, parallel to building structure, and maintain

gradient.




4. Install piping to conserve building space and to avoid interference with use of

space.

5. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation

and servicing of valves.

6. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors allowing adequate space

for pipe insulation.

7. Slope piping at 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow and arrange to drain at low

points.

8. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints,

or connected equipment.

9. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4

threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as

required for system drainage.

10. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to mains using tee fittings

in main pipe, with the takeoff coming out the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed

risers, install the takeoff coming out the top of the main pipe.

11. Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction.

12. Inserts:

a. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.

b. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and

sides of reinforced concrete beams.

c. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe

over .

d. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab

surface.

e. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide

through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut flush with top of slab.

13. Pipe Hangers and Supports:

a. Install in accordance with Division 15, Hangers and Supports.

b. Install hangers to provide minimum1/2-inch space between finished covering

and adjacent work.




c. Place hangers within 12-inches of each horizontal elbow.

d. Use hangers with 1-1/2-inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers

for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.

e. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide

multiple or trapeze hangers.

f. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories, ready for finish

painting.

g. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

14. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for

installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

15. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.

16. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape,

brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds.

17. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories, ready for finish

painting.


1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during

test.

2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due

to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from

testing.

3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.

4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, provide

closure capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install

blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test

pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of

overpressure during test.




6. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

a. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of

damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible

with piping may be used.

b. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release

trapped air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of liquid.

c. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that

system is full of water.

d. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5

times the design pressure. Test pressure not-to-exceed maximum pressure for any

vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress

due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of

specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of

ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

e. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least four hours,

examine piping, joints and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by

tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until

there are no leaks.

f. Prepare written report of testing.

E. CLEANING

1. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace

strainer screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping systems, but before

balancing, remove disposable fine-mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers. Treat

systems with appropriate chemical treatment.

END OF SECTION



HYDRONIC PUMPS SECTION 15181 - 1 of 8

SECTION 15181 - HYDRONIC PUMPS

15181-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. General Pump Requirements

b. In-Line Circulators

c. Vertical In-Line Pumps

B. RELATED SECTIONS


Section.



Requirements.


a. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers

Association, current edition.

b. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box

Supports; National Electrical Manufacturers Association, current edition.

c. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association,

current edition.

d. UL 778 - Standard for Motor-Operated Water Pumps; Underwriters

Laboratories Inc., current edition.

D. SUBMITTALS






a. Product Data: Provide certified pump curves showing performance

characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH

curve when applicable. Include electrical characteristics and connection

requirements.

b. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support

requirements and recommendations.

c. Millwright's Certificate: Certify that base mounted pumps have been aligned.

d. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, assembly

views, lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list.



Requirement.

2. In addition, meet the following for Manufacturer Qualifications: Company

specializing in manufacture, assembly, and field performance of pumps, with

minimum three years of documented experience.

F. WARRANTY



G. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

1. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined

metal surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing.

Protect flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with

screwed-in plugs.

2. Store pumps in dry location.

3. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.

4. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign

matter.

5. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions.




H. COORDINATION

1. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into

bases.

I. EXTRA MATERIALS



contents.

2. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal for each pump.

J. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

1. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor

binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and

operate within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

15181-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Armstrong Pumps Inc.

2. ITT Bell & Gossett.

3. Taco Pumps

4. Paco Pumps

5. Wilo

6. Weil

7. Grundfos

B. GENERAL PUMP REQUIREMENTS

1. Pump Units: Factory assembled and tested.

2. Motors: Include built-in, thermal-overload protection and grease-lubricated ball

bearings. Select each motor to be nonoverloading over full range of pump

performance curve.




3. Motors Indicated to Be Energy Efficient: Minimum efficiency as indicated

according to IEEE 112, Test Method B. Provide premium efficiency motors

according to IEEE 112, Test Method.

C. IN-LINE CIRCULATORS

1. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected, with resiliently mounted

motor for in-line mounting, oil lubricated, for 125 PSI maximum working pressure.

2. Casing: Cast iron, with threaded companion flanges for piping connections, and

threaded gauge tappings at inlet and outlet connections.

3. Impeller: Cast bronze keyed to shaft, statically and dynamically balanced, closed,

overhung, single suction, and keyed to shaft.

4. Motor Bearings: Oil lubricated bronze sleeve.

5. Pump Bearings: Oil-lubricated, bronze journal and thrust type.

6. Shaft: Alloy steel with copper sleeve, integral thrust collar.

7. Seal: Mechanical seal maximum continuous operating temperature. Include

carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic seat, and flexible bellows

and gasket.

8. Drive: Flexible coupling, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft

misalignment.

9. Motor: Resiliently mounted to pump casing.

10. Performance Electrical Characteristics::

a. As Scheduled. 1750 RPM motors unless specified otherwise; Reference

Section 15056.

b. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit

conductor quantities, sizes and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in

terminal box sized to NFPA 70.

D. VERTICAL IN-LINE PUMPS

1. Type: Vertical in-line, centrifugal, single stage, flexible coupled, radially split

casing, for in-line mounting, for 125 psi (1200 kPa) working pressure.

2. Casing: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gauge port, casing wear ring, seal

flush connection, drain plug at low point of volute, flanged suction and discharge.




3. Impeller: ASTM B584 cast bronze, fully enclosed, keyed directly to motor shaft

or extension, statically and dynamically balanced, closed, overhung, single suction..

4. Shaft: Stainless steel with stainless steel impeller cap screw or nut.

5. Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze casing ring.

6. Seal: Mechanical seal, 212 degrees F (100 degrees C) maximum continuous

operating temperature, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic

seat, and flexible bellows and gasket.

7. Seal: Packing gland with minimum four rings graphite impregnated packing and

bronze lantern rings, 230 degrees F (110 degrees C) maximum continuous operating

temperature.

8. Motor: Directly mounted to pump casing and with lifting and supporting lugs in

top of motor enclosure.

9. Performance Electrical Characteristics:

a. As Scheduled. 1750 RPM motors unless specified otherwise; Reference

Section .

b. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit

conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in

terminal box sized to NFPA 70.

15181-03 EXECUTION

A. INSTALLATION

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions according to HI 1.1-1.5

"Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation.

2. Provide access space around pumps for service including removing motors,

impellers, couplings, and accessories. Provide no less than minimum space

recommended by manufacturer.

3. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Eccentric

reducers where necessary to prevent air entrapment. Support piping adjacent to pump

such that no weight is carried on pump casings. For close coupled or base mounted

pumps, provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 4-

inches and over. Provide vibration isolation to insure there is no short circuiting of

pump vibration isolator. Refer to Section 15072.




4. Unless indicated otherwise on drawings, provide line sized shut-off valve and

strainer on pump suction, and line sized soft seat check valve and balancing valve and

shut off valve on pump discharge. Triple duty valves not allowed.

5. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings.

6. Provide drains for bases and seals, piped to and discharging into floor drains.

7. Support pump baseplate on rectangular metal blocks and shims, or on metal

wedges with small taper, at points near foundation bolts to provide a gap of 3/4 to 1-

1/2-inches (19 to 38 mm) between pump base and foundation for grouting.

8. Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Check

coupling faces and suction and discharge flanges of pump to verify that they are level

and plumb.

9. Lubricate pumps before start-up.

10. Provide side-stream filtration system for closed loop systems. Install across pump

with flow from pump discharge to pump suction from pump tappings.

B. ALIGNMENT

1. Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting them on

foundations, after grout has been set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and

after piping connections have been made.

2. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.

3. Adjust pump and motor shafts for angular and offset alignment by methods

specified in HI 1.1-1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions,

Application and Operation."

4. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly.

Completely fill baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and

shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.

C. CONNECTIONS

1. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

2. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

3. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are the same size as piping

connected to pumps.




4. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump

nozzles.

5. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps

between pump casing and valves.

6. Install pressure gauges and temperature gauges on pump suction and discharge.

Install at integral pressure-gauge tappings where provided.

7. Install temperature and pressure-gauge connector plugs in suction and discharge

piping around each pump.

8. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.

9. Electrical power and control wiring and connections are specified in Division 16

Sections.

10. Ground equipment.

11. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those

specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

D. DEMONSTRATION

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps as specified below:

a. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for

starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining pumps.

b. Review data in maintenance manuals. Reference Division 01.

c. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days'

advance notice.

E. EXAMINATION

1. Examine equipment foundations and anchor -bolt locations for compliance with

requirements for installation.

a. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping

connections before pump installation.

b. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps

are to be installed.




2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

END OF SECTION



HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES SECTION 15182 - 1 of 8

SECTION 15182 - HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

15182-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Diaphragm Type Expansion Tanks

b. Air Vents

c. Centrifugal Air Separator

d. Pressure Reducing Valves

e. Liquid Flow Switches

f. Differential Pressure Regulator

g. Differential Pressure Switches

h. Instrument Probe Fittings

i. Strainers

j. Relief Valves

B. RELATED SECTIONS


Section.



Requirements.

2. In addition, meet the following: ASME (BPV VIII, 1) - Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 01 - Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels;

The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2004.




D. SUBMITTALS



a. Product Data: Provide product data for manufactured products and assemblies

required for this project. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service

sizes, and finishes. Include product description, model and dimensions.

b. Certificates: Inspection certificates for pressure vessels from ASME.

c. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support

methods, joining procedures.

d. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow controls.

Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication

instructions, and replacement parts list.



Requirements.


specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with


F. WARRANTY




1. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for

damage.

2. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

3. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place

until installation.

4. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers,

completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.




15182-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Diaphragm Type Expansion Tanks:

a. Amtrol Inc.

b. ITT Bell & Gossett

c. Taco, Inc.

d. Armstrong

e. Wessels

f. Aurora


2. Air Vents:

a. Armstrong International, Inc.

b. ITT Bell & Gossett.

c. Taco, Inc.

d. Hoffman.

e. Amtrol.

f. Metraflex.


3. Centrifugal Air Separator:

a. Armstrong

b. ITT Bell and Gossett

c. Taco, Inc.

d. Amtrol

e. Wheatly




f. Aurora


4. Pressure Reducing Valves:

a. Armstrong

b. ITT Bell and Gossett

c. Taco, Inc.

d. Amtrol

e. Kunkle


5. Liquid Flow Switches:

a. McDonnell & Miller

b. Dwyer


6. Differential Pressure Regulator:

a. Clayton

b. Jordan

c. Hoffman


7. Differential Pressure Switches:

a. Dwyer Instruments


8. Instrument Probe Fittings:

a. Pete's Plug





9. Strainers:

a. Armstrong International

b. Mueller

c. Keckley

d. Hoffman

e. Wheatly


10. Relief Valves:

a. Armstrong

b. ITT Bell & Gossett

c. Taco

d. Amtrol

e. Kunkle


B. DIAPHRAGM-TYPE EXPANSION TANKS

1. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME (BPV

VIII, 1); supplied with National Board Form U-1, rated for working pressure of 125

PSI, with flexible butyl diaphragm sealed into tank, and steel support stand.

2. Accessories: Pressure gauge and air-charging fitting, tank drain; precharge to 15

PSI.

C. AIR VENTS

1. Manual Type: Short vertical sections of pipe to form air chamber, with 1/8-inch

brass needle valve at top of chamber.

2. Automatic Float Type: Brass or semi-steel body, copper, polypropylene, or solid

non-metallic float, stainless steel valve and valve seat; suitable for system operating

temperature and pressure; with isolating valve.




D. CENTRIFUGAL AIR SEPARATOR

1. Description: Fabricated steel tank stamped in accordance with Section VIII of

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for Unfired Vessels, stamped for 150 PSI,

with tangential inlet and outlet connections, internal perforated stainless steel air

collector tube and blowdown connection.

E. PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES

1. Brass body, adjustable range, inlet check valves, removable inlet strainer,

noncorrosive valve seat and stem, ¾-inch size unless otherwise shown, factory set at

fill pressure as indicated on drawings.

F. LIQUID FLOW SWITCHES

1. Description: Brass for wetted parts with packless construction, paddle with

removable segments for pipe size and flow velocity, vapor proof electrical

compartment for switches mounted on cold hydronic piping systems, switches for

115V, 60 Hz, 1-phase with 7.4A rating.

G. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE REGULATOR

1. Description: Externally piloted differential pressure regulating valve. Ductile iron

construction, stainless steel and bronze trim and 316 SS seats.

H. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES

1. Sensing Range: 0- to 1.0-inch water column. Diaphragm operated with switching

accomplished by photocell controlled relays, adjustable switch setpoints that close

contacts on the relay if the differential pressure sensed raised above the setpoint,

incorporate a pointer type gauge with divisions of 0.02-inch W.C.

I. INSTRUMENT PROBE FITTINGS

1. Brass or stainless steel body and cap, high pressure rated, valve material

neoprene, Nordal or Viton to suit temperature range, 1/4-inch or 1/2-inch NPT

tailpiece.

J. STRAINERS

1. Size 2-inch and Under: Screwed brass or iron body for 175 PSI working pressure,

Y pattern with 1/16-inch stainless steel perforated screen.




2. Size 2-1/2-inch and Larger: Flanged or grooved and above: iron body for 175

working pressure, Y pattern with 1/16 stainless steel perforated screen.

3. Basket Pattern: Flanged iron body for 175 PSI working pressure, basket pattern

with 1/8-inch stainless steel perforated screen, clamped or bolted cover.

K. RELIEF VALVES

1. Size and capacity as selected by installer for proper relieving capacity, in

accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

2. Combined Pressure-Temperature Relief Valves: Bronze body, test lever,

thermostat, complying with ANSI Z21.22 listing requirements for temperature

discharge capacity. Provide temperature relief at 210F, and pressure relief at 125 PSI.

3. Pressure Relief Valves: Bronze body, test lever, ASME rated. Provide pressure

relief as indicated on drawings.

15182-03 EXECUTION

A. INSTALLATION

1. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. Where large air quantities can accumulate, provide enlarged air collection

standpipes.

3. Provide valved drain and hose connection on strainer blow down connection.

4. Support pump fittings with floor mounted pipe and flange supports. Provide

vibration isolation, same as pump, to avoid short circuiting.

5. Select system relief valve capacity so that it is greater than make-up pressure

reducing valve capacity. Select equipment relief valve capacity to exceed rating of

connected equipment.

6. Pipe relief valve outlet to nearest floor drain.

7. Where one line vents several relief valves, make cross sectional area equal to sum

of individual vent areas.

8. Air Separators: Install in pump suction lines and as indicated. Run piping to

expansion tank with 1/4-inch per foot (2 percent) upward slope towards tank. Install

drain valve on units 2-inches and over.




9. Expansion Tanks: Install tank in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Charge tank with air per manufacturer's instructions. Prior to making connection

from the tank to the system, check the air charge. Valve is to be opened to the system

when it is determined that the air pressure is equal to the minimum system pressure at

the tank location.

10. Liquid Flow Switches: Install on inlet to water chiller as indicated. Install in

horizontal pipe with switch mounted in tee on top of pipe with minimum of 24-inches

of straight pipe with no fitting both upstream and downstream of switch. Remove

segments of paddle to fit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

11. Water Relief Valves: Install as indicated, and on expansion tanks, hot water tanks

and pressure vessels. Pipe discharge to floor drain. Comply with ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code.

12. Pressure Reducing Valves: Install as indicated, and in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions with 3 valve bypass.

13. Test Plugs: Install where indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations.

14. Differential Pressure Regulating Valve: Install per manufacturer's

recommendations where shown on plans.

15. Modulating Temperature Control Valve: Install per manufacturer's instructions.

B. AIR VENTS

1. Automatic: Furnish and install automatic air vents in mechanical equipment

rooms and outdoors only. Install at high points of system piping, at heat transfer

coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. Vents: 3/4-inch with 1/2-

inch IPS drain piping to the nearest floor drain or other approved location. Provide a

ball valve and union ahead of all automatic air vents. Do not install above ceilings or

locations where discharge may occur and cause damage.

2. Manual Vents: Provide at high points of system piping, at heat transfer coils, and

elsewhere as required for system venting where automatic air vents are not to be

installed. Provide 10-inch length of 1/4-inch copper tube with 180 degree bend down

to discharge into hand-held bucket.

END OF SECTION



REFRIGERANT PIPING SECTION 15183 - 1 of 5

SECTION 15183 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

15183-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Piping

b. Refrigerant

B. RELATED SECTIONS


Section.



Requirements.

D. SUBMITTALS



a. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including

pipe, tube, and fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations,

slopes of horizontal runs, oil traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and

equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationship between

piping and equipment.

1. Refrigerant piping indicated is schematic only. Size piping and design the

actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe

and tube sizes, to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of

connected equipment.

b. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and

personnel.




c. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with

performance requirements.

d. Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in

maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.



Requirements.


a. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX "Welding and Brazing Qualifications.

b. ASHRAE Standard: Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical

Refrigeration.

c. ASME Standard: Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping."

d. UL Standard: Provide products complying with UL 207, "Refrigerant-

Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical"' or UL 429 "Electrically

Operated Valves."

F. WARRANTY



G. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1. Where more than one piping system material is specified ensure system

components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not

jeopardized. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings

for servicing are consistently provided.

2. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with Section 15065 unless

indicated otherwise.

3. Flexible Connectors: Utilize at or near compressors where piping configuration

does not absorb vibration.




15183-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS


B. PIPING

1. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR, drawn-temper tube, clean, dry and

capped. .

a. Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper.

b. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy (15 percent

Silver).

2. Copper Tube to 5/8-inch OD: ASTM B280. Tube ACR, annealed-temper copper

tube, clean, dry and capped.

a. Fittings: ASME B16.26 cast copper.

b. Joints: Flared.

C. REFRIGERANT

1. Refrigerant: Per manufacturer's recommendation.

15183-03 EXECUTION

A. PREPARATION

1. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.

2. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

3. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

B. INSTALLATION

1. Install systems in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15.

2. Install refrigeration specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.




3. Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure, and

maintain gradient.

4. Install piping to conserve building space and avoid interference with use of space.

5. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations. Slope

piping one percent in direction of oil return.

6. Provide non-conducting di-electric connection when joining dissimilar metals.

7. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints,

or connected equipment.

8. Arrange piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping, and

provide double risers as required. Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in direction of

flow.

9. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

10. Provide access to concealed valves and fittings.

11. Flood piping system with nitrogen when brazing.

12. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building frame, brush clean,

and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

13. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish

painting.

14. Follow ASHRAE Std 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for

disposal of refrigerant.

15. Install flexible connectors at right angles to axial movement of compressor,

parallel to crankshaft.

16. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing.

17. Provide electrical connection to solenoid valves.

C. APPLICATION


1. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5.




2. Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 200 PSI. Perform final tests at 27-inches

vacuum and 200 PSI using electronic leak detector. Test to no leakage.

END OF SECTION



HVAC WATER TREATMENT SECTION 15186 - 1 of 7

SECTION 15186 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT

15186-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Chemical Feed Description

b. Chemical Feeding Equipment

c. Chemicals

d. Supplemental Services/Components

B. RELATED SECTIONS


section.



Requirements.

D. SUBMITTALS




Requirements.


a. Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of components of

types and sizes required.

b. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized

representative of the chemical treatment manufacturer for both installation and

maintenance of chemical treatment equipment required for this Project.




c. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as

defined in NFPA by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

F. WARRANTY




1. Maintain water quality for HVAC systems that controls corrosion and build-up of

scale and biological growth for maximum efficiency of installed equipment without

posing a hazard to operating personnel or the environment.

2. Base chemical treatment performance requirements on quality of water available

at Project site, HVAC system equipment material characteristics and functional

performance characteristics, operating personnel capabilities, and requirements and

guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction. Consult equipment manufacturer prior

to acceptance of values noted below.

a. Closed System: Maintain system essentially free of scale, corrosion, and

fouling to sustain the following water characteristics:

1. pH: Maintain a value within 9.0 to 10.5.

2. "P" Alkalinity: Maintain a value within 100 to 500 ppm.

3. Boron: Maintain a value within 100 to 200 ppm.

4. Chemical Oxygen Demand: Maintain a maximum value of 100 ppm.

5. Soluble Copper: Maintain a maximum value of 0.20 ppm.

6. TDS: Maintain a maximum value of 10ppm.

7. Ammonia: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm.

8. Free Caustic Alkalinity: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm.

9. Microbiological Limits:

a) Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000

organisms/ml.




b) Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 100

organisms/ml.

c) Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/ml.

d) Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml.

e) Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml.

H. MAINTENANCE

1. Scope of Service: Provide chemicals and service program for maintaining

optimum conditions in the circulating water for inhibiting corrosion, scale, and

organic growths in the heating hot-water piping and equipment. Services and

chemicals provided for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion,

including the following:

a. Initial water analysis and recommendations.

b. Startup assistance.

c. Periodic field service and consultation.

d. Customer report charts and log sheets.

e. Laboratory technical assistance.

f. Analyses and reports of chemical items concerning safety and compliance

with government regulations.

15186-02 PRODUCTS

A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

1. Aqua-Chem, Inc.; Cleaver-Brooks Div.

2. Betz Dearborn, Inc.

3. Calgon Corp., ECC International

4. Nalco Chemical Co.

5. Mt. Hood Chemical

6. Chemcoa




7. Cleaver-Brooks

8. Sarco


B. CHEMICAL FEED DESCRIPTION

1. Closed-Loop System: One bypass feeder on each system with isolating and drain

valves downstream from circulating pumps, unless otherwise indicated.

a. Introduce chemical treatment through bypass feeder when required or

indicated by test.

b. Where a switch-over HVAC system is being utilized, coordinate treatment of

both closed loop systems (chilled water and heating water) to verify compatibility

of chemicals and longevity of piping distribution system. Dual hot/chilled water

systems treated with borax/nitrite to be treated with a biocide.

C. CHEMICAL FEEDING EQUIPMENT

1. Bypass Feeders: Cast iron or steel, for introducing chemicals into system; with

funnel shutoff valve on top, air-release valve on top, drain valve on bottom, and

recirculating shutoff valves on sides.

a. Capacity: 1.8 gallon for systems with less than 1,000 gallon volume.

b. Working Pressure: 125 PSIG.

D. CHEMICALS

1. Furnish chemicals recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are

compatible with piping system components and connected equipment.

2. System Cleaner: Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and

detergents to remove grease and petroleum products.

3. Biocide: Chlorine release agents or microbiocides.

4. Closed-Loop, Water Piping Chemicals: Sequestering agent to reduce deposits

and adjust pH, corrosion inhibitors, and conductivity enhancers.




E. SUPPLEMENTAL COMPONENTS/SERVICES

1. Drain and makeup water piping to comply with the requirements of Division 22.

Drains which connect to sanitary sewer systems to be connected by means of an

indirect waste.

15186-03 EXECUTION

A. WATER ANALYSIS

1. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine the type and quantities of

chemical treatment needed to maintain the water quality as specified in "Performance

Requirements" Article.

B. INSTALLATION

1. Install treatment equipment level and plumb. Provide power to all system

devices.

2. Add cleaning chemicals as recommended by manufacturer.

3. To prevent dirt and solids from lodging the coils, before adding cleaning chemical

to the closed system, air handling coils and fan coil units to be isolated by closing the

inlet and outlet valves and opening the bypass valves Do not valve in or operate

system pumps until after system has been cleaned.

4. After chemical cleaning is satisfactorily completed, open the inlet and outlet

valves to each coil and close the by-pass valves. Also, clean strainers.

C. CONNECTIONS



2. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.





1. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping

and electrical connections. Report results in writing.

a. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have

been cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before

introducing chemicals for water-treatment system.

b. Place HVAC water-treatment system into operation and calibrate controls

during the preliminary phase of HVAC systems' startup procedures.

E. ADJUSTING

1. Sample boiler water at one-week intervals after boiler startup for a period of five

weeks, and prepare certified test report for each required water performance

characteristic. Where applicable, comply with ASTM D 3370 and the following

standards:

a. Silica: ASTM D 859.

b. Steam System: ASTM D 1066.

c. Acidity and Alkalinity: ASTM D 1067.

d. Iron: ASTM D 1068.

e. Water Hardness: ASTM D 1126.

2. Occupancy Adjustments: Within 12 months of Substantial Completion, perform

two separate water analyses to prove that automatic chemical feed systems are

maintaining water quality within performance requirements specified in this Section.

Perform analyses at least 60 days apart. Submit written reports of water analysis.

F. GAUGE ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

1. Adjust faces of meters and gauges to proper angle for best visibility.

2. Clean windows of meters and gauges and factory finished surfaces. Replace

cracked or broken windows, repair scratched or marred surfaces with manufacturer's

touch-up paint.




G. DEMONSTRATION


personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC water-treatment systems and

equipment.

a. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for

starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and

schedules.

2. Review manufacturer's safety data sheets for handling of chemicals.

3. Review data in maintenance manuals, especially data on recommended parts

inventory and supply sources and on availability of parts and service.

4. Schedule at least two hours of training with Owner, through Architect, with at

least seven days' advance notice.

END OF SECTION



FACILITY FUEL - NATURAL GAS PIPING AND SYSTEMS SECTION 15191- 1 of 8

SECTION 15191 - FACILITY FUEL - NATURAL GAS PIPING AND

SYSTEMS

15191-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Fuel Pipe and Pipe Fittings

b. Natural Gas Valves

c. Natural Gas Pressure Regulators

d. Flexible Pipe Connectors – Gas Piping (CSA Listed)

B. RELATED SECTIONS


section.

2. In addition, reference the following: Division 16, Electrical requirements for

grounding fuel piping systems.



Requirements.

D. SUBMITTALS








F. WARRANTY



15191-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Natural Gas Valves:

a. Apollo

b. Jenkins Bros.

c. Lunkenheimer Co.

d. Nibco

e. Watts


2. Natural Gas Pressure Regulators:

a. Maxitrol

b. Equimeter



B. FUEL PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS

1. Steel Pipe (Above Grade Installation):

a. 2-inches and Smaller: Schedule 40, A53 black steel pipe and threaded black

malleable threaded fittings.

b. 2-1/2-inches and Larger: Schedule 40, A53 black pipe with Schedule 40 butt

weld fittings.

c. ASTM A53, electric-resistance welded seamless Type S Grade B, black,

Schedule 40 pipe, manufactured for threaded and welded pipe connections.




2. Fittings for Steel Pipe (Above Grade Installations):

a. General: Mark fittings, unions, and other products recognized as regularly

available products in accordance with MSS SP-25. Marking on products of small

size or shape may be omitted from sequence allowed by MSS SP-25, except for

manufacturer's name or trademark.

b. Threaded Fittings: Conforming to ANSI B2.1, ASTM A47, 150 PSI rating,

except where otherwise specified or prevailing codes or requirements dictate use

of 300 PSI ratings. Fittings to be fabricated from standard malleable iron with

dimensions conforming to ANSI B16.3.

c. Welded Fittings: Wrought carbon steel fittings, ASTM A234, ANSI B16.9,

B16.28. Butt-welding type unless otherwise indicated to be socket welding type.

d. Flanges: Carbon steel conforming to ASTM A105, ANSI B16.5, and factory

forged in USA. Flanges which have been machined, remade, painted, or are non-

domestic origin are not acceptable. Provide raised or full face ends wherever

indicated or required.

e. Flange Gaskets: Gaskets to be constructed from Buna-N (Nitrile) elastomeric

materials.

f. Flange Hardware: Bolting materials to be corrosion resistant carbon steel

bolts and hex nuts conforming to ASTM A307. Provide bolting materials used in

containment sumps below grade applications, stainless steel bolts and hex nuts

conforming to ASTM A453. Threads and dimensions to be in accordance with

ANSI B1.1 and B18.2.

g. Unions: Conform to ANSI B16.39, ASTM A47 and fabricated from

malleable iron with bronze-to-iron ground joints rated at 150 percent design

operating pressure. Threads to conform to ANSI B2.1.

h. Threaded Pipe Plugs: Conforming to ANSI B16.14.

i. Thread Lubricant: Meet or exceed CGA ratings and compliant with Federal

Specification TT-S-1732, manufactured compatible with fuel oil.

3. Steel Pipe (Exterior of Building Below grade Installations):

a. 2-inches and Smaller: Schedule 40, A53 black steel pipe and threaded black

malleable threaded fittings.

b. 2-1/2-inches and Larger: Schedule 40, A53 black pipe with butt weld fittings.

c. ASTM A53, electric-resistance welded seamless (Type S), Grade B, black,

Schedule 40 pipe, manufactured for threaded, or welded pipe connections.




4. Fittings for Steel Pipe (Exterior of Building Below grade Installations):

a. General: Mark fittings and other products recognized as regularly available

products in accordance with MSS SP-25. Marking on products of small size or

shape may be omitted from sequence allowed by MSS SP-25, except for

manufacturer's name or trademark.

b. Threaded Fittings: Conforming to ANSI B2.1, ASTM A47, 150 PSI rating,

except where otherwise specified, or prevailing codes or requirements dictate use

of 300 PSI ratings. Fittings fabricated from standard malleable iron with

dimensions conforming to ANSI B16.3.

c. Welded Fittings: Wrought carbon steel fittings, ASTM A234, ANSI B16.9,

B16.28. Butt-welding type unless otherwise indicated to be socket welding type.

d. Threaded Pipe Plugs: Conforming to ANSI B16.14.

e. Thread Lubricant: Meet or exceed CGA ratings and compliant with Federal

Specification TT-S-1732, manufactured compatible with fuel oil.

5. Corrosion Control:

a. Underground Steel Piping Corrosion Protection: Factory wrap uninsulated

underground steel piping systems with protective coating composed of a coal-tar

saturated wrapping tape over a 20 mil thick coal-tar epoxy coating, equivalent to

"Republic X-Tru-Coat." Wrap joints spirally with a minimum overlap of 1/2 tape

width. Extend wrap not less than 3-inches above grade. Provide tinker test to

check for holidays. Provide cathodic protection to meet requirements of NACE

Standard RP0169-2002.

b. 1/2-inch and Larger: Schedule 40, A53 black pipe with butt weld fittings.

6. Polyethylene Pipe Fittings (Below grade Exterior of Building Installations at 30

PSIG and Less Only):

a. Flexible Connectors: Flexible connectors used in LP and LPG piping systems

compliant with following:


2. Flexible connectors and hose used as flexible connectors not exceed 3-feet

in length where used with liquid or vapor piping on portable or stationary

tanks.

3. Hose permitted to be used if flexibility is required for liquid or vapor

transfer.




b. Marking:

1. Mark pipe and tubing in accordance with ASTM 02513. Marking: legible

and remain legible under normal handling and installation practices. Indent

marking may be utilized provided (1) marking does not reduce wall thickness

to less than minimum value for pipe or tubing, (2) it has been demonstrated

that these marks have no effect on long-term strength of pipe or tubing, and

(3) marking will not provide leakage channels when approved elastomeric

gasket compression fittings are used to make joints.

2. Mark fusion fittings on body or hub. Marking in accordance with ASTM

02513 or standard to which fitting is manufactured. Mark mechanical fittings

in accordance with fitting standard to which it is manufactured or Part 192 of

Minimum Federal Safety Standard Section 192.63.

c. Fusion Qualification: Manufacturer of pipe, tubing, or fittings supplied under

this Specification to establish and certify heat fusion procedures for joining of

materials supplied in accordance with applicable section of (CFR) Title 49, Part

192 "Transportation of Natural or Other Gases by Pipeline: Minimum Federal

Safety Standards," paragraph 192.283. Furnish qualified fusion procedures, with

appropriate supporting data, to purchaser upon request. Suitable generic fusion

procedures are included in PPI TR-33, Generic Butt Fusion Joining Procedure for

Polyethylene (PE) Gas Pipe.

C. NATURAL GAS VALVES

1. 2-inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110 ball valves constructed in compliance with

ASME B16.33. UL listed, FM approved, two-piece construction, threaded, bronze or

brass body, full port, chrome plated brass ball, blowout-proof stem design, 125 PSI

WOG working pressure. Watts FBV-3C, Nibco FP-600A, Apollo 64, or Jenkins

201J.

2. 2-1/2-inches and Larger: 100 to 125 PSI rated, all bronze or iron body/bronze

trimmed plug cock type, square head or tee/lever handle operation. CSA listed.

3. Manufacturers: Apollo, Nibco, Watts, or approved equivalent.

D. NATURAL GAS PRESSURE REGULATORS

1. Natural Gas: Diaphragm and spring actuated type, with ventless or vented relief

feature. Construction, pressure range and venting features suitable for intended

service. Regulator to meet code and serving utility requirements. Pipe vented type to

atmosphere in approved location. Manufacturers: Maxitrol, Equimeter, or approved

equivalent.




E. FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS - GAS PIPING (CSA LISTED)

1. Inner Hose: Type 304 stainless steel.

2. Exterior Sleeve: Braided, Type 304 stainless steel.

3. Pressure Rating: 175 PSI at 70 degrees F up to 4-inch pipe.

4. Joint: Threaded carbon steel.

5. Maximum Offset: 3/4-inch on each side of installed center line.

6. Basis-of-Design: Hyspan CSAMN.

15191-03 EXECUTION

A. INSPECTION

1. General: Examine areas and conditions under which fuel systems materials and

products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions

have been corrected.

B. IDENTIFICATION

1. Install mechanical identification in accordance with Section 15076, Identification

for HVAC Piping and Equipment.

C. FUEL PIPING INSTALLATION

1. General: Install pipe, tube and fittings in accordance with recognized industry

practices which will achieve permanently leakproof piping systems, capable of

performing each indicated service without piping failure. Install each route with a

minimum of joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions or flanges

for disassembly, maintenance, and replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce

sizes by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16-

inch misalignment tolerance. Comply with ANSI B31.9 Code for Pressure Piping.

Provide shutoff valves, pressure regulators and unions at connections to gas-fired

equipment. Provide dirt legs at low points.

2. Installed piping not to interfere with maintenance of equipment, opening of doors

or other moving parts nor be directly above or near any portion of electrical

equipment.

3. Support piping such that connected equipment does not bear weight of piping.




4. Adequately support vertical lines at their bases or by suitable hanger placed in

horizontal line near riser or, preferably, by base fitting set on a pedestal.

5. Piping Through Roof: Coordinate roof penetrations prior to installation of piping.

Coordinate location with roof structure and roof mounted equipment.

6. Ream steel pipes after cutting to full bore. Remove foreign matter from inside of

pipe before installing. Keep installed piping free from dirt and scale and protect open

ends from foreign matter. Use temporary plugs or other approved methods for

opening and closure.

7. Remake or replace defective, leaking, or otherwise unsatisfactory joints or

material. Peening, caulking, or doping of piping is not permitted.

8. Threading: Thread steel pipe in accordance with ANSI B21.1 with standard right

hand threads. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to

remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compound, or proper

pipe joint tape where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer on male threads at

each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than three threads exposed.

9. Sealants: Use sealants on metal fuel piping threads which are chemically resistant

to fuel. Use sealants sparingly and apply only to male threads of metal joints.

10. Maintain electrically continuous piping system; provide grounding jumper where

required to maintain continuity. Provide grounding connection; install per

requirements of Division 16.

11. Install dirt legs in gas piping where indicated and where required by code or

regulation. Do not rest dirt leg on surface of roof, floor or deck.

12. Support gas piping above roof on preformed pipe stands. Guide pipes with clamp

one size larger than pipe. Provide supports at intervals per code manufacturer, and

details and at each change in direction. Wood blocks are not approved supports.

13. Gas Regulator Vent Piping: Provide Schedule 40, A53 black steel pipe and

threaded black malleable threaded fittings for vent piping. Paint piping exposed to

weather with primer and one coat of Safety Yellow Rustoleum.

D. INSTALLATION OF VALVES

1. Gas Cocks: Provide at connection to gas train for each gas-fired equipment item,

and on risers and branches where indicated.

2. Locate gas valves where easily accessible and protected from possible damage.




3. Pressure Regulating Valves: Install as required at gas-fired appliances; comply

with utility/code requirements. Pipe atmospheric vent to outdoors, full size outlet

with 90 degree elbow downturn. Install gas shutoff valve upstream of each pressure

regulating valve. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to prevent

freezing.

4. Install earthquake valves per manufacturer's installation requirements. In a multi-

building campus setting, provide a gas earthquake valve at each building gas point of

entry whether shown on drawings or not.

E. EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

1. General: Connect gas piping to each gas-fired equipment item, with drip leg and

shutoff gas cock. Comply with equipment manufacturer's instructions. Flexible

connections where required per ASCE 7-05, Chapter 13 or shown on plans.

F. PIPING TESTS

1. Test natural gas piping in accordance with applicable mechanical code

requirements, ANSI B31.2, and local utility requirements.

END OF SECTION



GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR SYSTEMS SECTION 15210 - 1 of 4

SECTION 15210 - GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR

SYSTEMS

15210-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Piping

b. Valves

c. Air Pressure Gauges

2. Equipment and work indicated in this section are not intended or acceptable for

use in NFPA 1901 regulated breathing air systems, SCBA, or NFPA 99 medical air

systems.

B. RELATED SECTIONS


Section.



Requirements.

D. SUBMITTALS




Requirements.

F. WARRANTY


Division 1 General Requirements.




15210-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS


B. PIPING

1. Copper Tubing: Type "K", ASTM B819, or seamless, copper tube, hard drawn

temper, with wrought copper fittings conforming to ANSI B16.22 or brazing fittings

complying with MSS SP-73. Size designated reflecting nominal inside diameter.

Tubing and fittings labeled "ACR/OXY", "OXY", “OXY/MED”, “ACR/MED” or

“MED”.

2. Brazing Alloy: AWS A5.8, Classification BCuP, greater than 537 °C (1000 °F)

melting temperature. Flux is prohibited for copper-to-copper connections.

3. Screw Joints: Degreased polytetrafluoroethylene (teflon) tape.

4. Apply piping identification labels in accordance with NFPA 99. Supplementary

color identification in accordance with CGA pamphlet C-9.

C. VALVES

1. 2-1/2-inches and smaller: Bronze/ brass body, MSS SP72 & SP 110, Type II,

Class 150, Style 1 (which permits inspection and repair of seats and seals without

removing from the line), tubing extensions for brazed connections, full ported, three

piece, teflon seat seals, full flow, 600 PSI wgminimum working pressure with locking

type handle and cleaned for oxygen service.

2. 3-inches and smaller: Brass and Bronze body, straight through design for

minimum pressure drop, self-aligning, spring loaded ball type check with cone seat,

vibration free, fast acting for silent operation, supplied NPT female threads at each

end with flow direction arrow permanently cast into, cleaned for oxygen use, 400 PSI

wg.

D. AIR PRESSURE GAUGES

1. Includes gauges temporarily supplied for testing purposes.




2. For Line Pressure Use Adjacent to Source Equipment: ANSI B40.1, pressure

gauge, single, size 4-1/2-inches, for compressed air, accurate to within two percent,

with metal case. Range to be two times operating pressure. Dial graduations and

figures black on a white background, or white on a black background. Gauge cleaned

for oxygen use, labeled for appropriate service, and marked "USE NO OIL". Install

with gauge cock.

3. For services downstream of main shutoff valve: Manufactured expressly for

oxygen use but labeled for laboratory air service and marked "USE NO OIL", 1-1/2-

inch diameter gauge with dial range, 1-300 PSI.

15210-03 EXECUTION

A. INSTALLATION

1. Keep open ends of tube capped or plugged at all times or otherwise sealed until

final assembly.

2. Cut piping square and accurately with a tube cutter (sawing not permitted) to

measurements determined at place of installation. Ream tube to remove burrs, being

careful not to expand tube, and so no chips of copper remain in the tube. Work into

place without springing or forcing. Bottom tube in socket so there are no gaps

between tube and fitting. Exercise care in handling equipment and tools used in

cutting or reaming of tube to prevent oil or grease being introduced into tubing.

Where contamination has occurred, material is no longer suitable for dental air

service.

3. Spacing of Hangers: Current NFPA and state adopted Plumbing Code.

4. Rigidly support valves and other equipment to prevent strain on tube or joints.

5. While being brazed, joints to be continuously purged with oil-free dry nitrogen.

The flow of purge gas to be maintained until joint is cool to touch.

6. Do not bend tubing. Use fittings.

7. Install pressures and vacuum switches, transmitters and gauges to be easily

accessed, and provide access panel where installed above plaster ceiling. Install

pressure switches and sensors for gas specific demand check valves.

8. Apply pipe labeling during installation process and not after installation is

completed. Size of legend letters in accordance with ANSI A13.1.




9. Penetrations:

a. Fire Stopping: Where pipes pass through fire partitions, fire walls, smoke

partitions, or floors, install a fire stop that provides an effective barrier against the

spread of fire, smoke and gases. Completely fill and seal clearances between

raceways and openings with the fire stopping material.

b. Waterproofing: At floor penetrations, completely seal clearances around the

pipe and make watertight with sealant as specified.

B. TESTS

1. Initial Tests: Blowdown, piping purge, and high and low pressure leakage tests as

required by NFPA 99 for a level 3 compressed air system with documentation.

2. System Verification and Final Testing: Static pressure test, pressure relief test,

cross connection test, alarm tests and test of secondary equipment for a level 3

compressed air system as required by current NFPA.

END OF SECTION



PLUMBING EQUIPMENT SECTION 15400 - 1 of 5

SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

15400-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Domestic Expansion Tanks Non-ASME

b. Domestic Circulation Pumps

c. Elevator Simplex Sump Pump System

B. RELATED SECTIONS


section.



Requirements.

D. SUBMITTALS



a. Seismic anchor details and calculations signed and stamped by licensed

Oregon structural engineer with equipment data.



Requirements.


a. NSF 61 Compliant.

b. ISO 9001 Certified.




c. IAPMO Low Lead Certification

d. California Standard AB 1953

3. Products approved for installation by state authorizing agency, no exceptions.

F. WARRANTY



15400-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. See individual articles below for specific manufacturer information.

B. GENERAL

1. Reference drawings for capacities and specific model numbers.

C. DOMESTIC EXPANSION TANKS NON-ASME

1. Welded steel, constructed, tested and stamped in accordance with IAPMO

Standards for working pressure of 125 PSI. Support floor mounted tanks with steel

legs or base. Provide single flexible diaphragm securely sealed into tank to separate

air charge from system water, to maintain design expansion capacity. Provide

pressure gauge and air-charging fitting, and drain fitting. Diaphragm: Removable

and replaceable in line.

2. Manufacturers: Bell & Gossett Series PT, Amtrol, Armstrong, or Watts

D. DOMESTIC CIRCULATION PUMPS

1. System: Domestic water.

2. Location: Mechanical Room.

3. Provide in-line factory tested pumps, cleaned, and painted with enamel prior to

shipment. Pumps be rated for domestic water. Provide pumps of same type by same

manufacturer.




4. Type: Horizontal, oil-lubricated, designed for 150 PSI working pressure, 225F

continuous water temperature.

5. Body: bronze or stainless steel construction.

6. Shaft: stainless or carbon steel, ground and polished, integral thrust collar.

7. Bearings: Two horizontal sleeve sealed steel bearings permanently lubricated

designed to circulate oil.

8. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon seal face rotating against ceramic seat.

9. Face plate: Stainless steel.

10. Motor: Nonoverloading at any point on pump curve, open, drip-proof, sleeve

bearings, quiet operating, rubber mounted construction, built-in thermal overload

protection.

11. Elastomers: EPDM.

12. Provide Honeywell 115 volt immersion aquastat set at 115 degrees F.

13. Option. Pump maybe operated from Building Automation System. Coordinate

installation of additional devices with controls contractor.

14. Manufacturers: Bell & Gossett Series PL, Armstrong, Grundfos, Paco, or Taco.

E. ELEVATOR SIMPLEX SUMP PUMP SYSTEM

1. System: Sanitary Sewer.

2. Entire unit is to be delivered complete with operating controls and require only

plumbing and electrical service connections.

3. Provide submersible sump pump with 1-1/2 I.P.S. discharge, bronze fitter

construction with submersible sealed motor, stainless steel shaft, bronze impeller,

mechanical seal, waterproof 20 ft. power cord and fully submersible float switch for

mounting on pump discharge pipe.

4. Provide check valve and shut-off valve on discharge side of pump.

5. Provide perforated 24-inches x 24-inches steel basin cover for elevator pit.

6. Manufacturer: Bell & Gossett model SE 85 and model S -1BT128 pump switch.

7. Acceptable manufacturers: Weil, Liberty, or Zoeller.




15400-03 EXECUTION

A. GENERAL

1. Examine areas and conditions under which equipment is to be installed. Do not


2. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain


3. Orients so controls and devices needing service and maintenance have adequate

access.

4. Certificates: Submit appropriate Certificates of Shop Inspection and Data Report

as required by provisions of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

5. Connect water piping to units with shutoff valves and unions as indicated.

6. Equipment Rigging: Heavy duty rigging eye bolts for Crosby Group swivel hoist

rings installed over pump access covers for removal or maintenance.

B. EQUIPMENT START-UP

1. Start-up, test, and adjust equipment in accordance with manufacturer's start-up

instructions. Check and calibrate controls.

2. Start-up performed by authorized manufacturer's representative or agent. Provide

credentials of start-up personnel to Architect for approval.

3. Remove and replace filters when start-up testing is executed.

4. Manufacturer adjusts operating parameters of equipment to compensate to

elevation of 500-feet above sea level.

5. Architect will be notified 10 days prior to start-up and will be present at start-ups.

6. Provide written report from manufacturer's representative on results of start-up

within 48 hours.

7. Technical Training of maintenance staff includes four hours minimum per each

piece of equipment.




8. Seismic Verification:

a. Contractor will retain structural engineer who will submit stamped and signed

anchoring and restraint details on plumbing equipment with submittal data in

accordance with Division 15 requirements.

b. Contractor's Structural Engineer will test and verify in writing that seismic

restraints have been installed in accordance with their details.

END OF SECTION



COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES AND DRAINS SECTION 15410 - 1 of 6

SECTION 15410 - COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES AND

DRAINS

15410-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY

1. Work Included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of plumbing

fixtures and drains.

a. General Plumbing Fixtures

B. RELATED SECTIONS


section.



Requirements.

D. SUBMITTALS



a. Seismic anchor details and calculations signed and stamped by licensed

Oregon structural engineering with equipment data.



Requirements.


a. Comply with lead free (less than or equal to 0.25 percent) products in drinking

water systems.

1. NSF 61 Appendix 'G' Compliant.




2. ISO 9001 Certified.

3. IAPMO Low Lead Certification

F. WARRANTY




a. Faucets: Provide five year extended warranty.

b. Flush Valves: Provide three year extended warranty.

15410-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Manufacturers as specified in individual articles below or approved equivalent.

B. GENERAL PLUMBING FIXTURES

1. Architect will review any substitution request prior to bid submittal. Substitutions

after bid to be considered as a deductive alternative only.

2. Fixtures, faucets and accessories to meet barrier free requirements of governing

code.

3. Items approved for use by State of Oregon.

4. Reference architectural details for mounting heights of fixtures.

5. Provide factory fabricated fixtures of type, style and material indicated on the

plumbing fixture connection schedule on drawings. For each type fixture, provide

fixture manufacturer's standard trim, carrier, seats, and valves as indicated by their

published product information; either as designed and constructed, or as

recommended by manufacturer, and as required for complete installation. Where

more than one type is indicated, selection is installer's option; but, fixtures of same

type must be furnished by a single manufacturer. Where type is not otherwise

indicated, provide fixtures complying with governing regulations.

6. Fixtures provided complete with fittings, supports, fastening devices, bolt caps,

faucets, valves, traps, stops and appurtenances.




7. Plumbing Fixtures Flow Rates:

a. Water Closets: Single flush set at 1.28 GPF or dual flush at 1.6/1.1 GPF.

b. Lavatories in public core areas to be set for 0.5 GPM MAX. Other lavatories

to be 1.0 GPM flow.

c. Sinks to be set for 1.5 GPM flow max.

d. Showers factory set at a maximum of 1.8 - 2 GPM flow.

8. Vitreous China or Enameled Cast Iron Fixtures: White only by American

Standard, Commercial Enameling, Kohler, Toto or Zurn.

9. Stainless Steel Fixtures:

a. Sinks: Type 302, 18 gauge with "U" channel mounting systems by Elkay,

Just, Kohler, Kindred or Advanced TABCO.

b. Drinking Fountains: Type 304 14 gauge by Filtrine, Haws, Halsey Taylor or

Oasis.

c. Fixtures Subject to Corrosion: Type 316 stainless steel.

d. Foundary Items: Commercial grade, heavy duty, no plastic by Josam, J.R.

Smith, Neenah, Wade, Watts or Zurn.

e. Emergency Eye Wash/Showers: Encon, Bradley, Haws, Chicago, Guardian or

Speakman.

f. Molded Stone or Terrazzo Fixtures: Fiat, Mustee, Florestone, Acorn or Stern

Williams.

g. Service Boxes: Aqua Glass, Sioux Chief, Oatey, IPS or Guy Gray.

h. Showers: See Architectural specification section 10850-2.

i. Flushometers: Lead Free by Sloan, Zurn, Delaney or Toto.

j. Faucets: Lead Free by Chicago, Delta Commercial, KWC, Grohe, T & S

Brass, American Standard, Kohler or Wolverine Brass.

k. Fixture Trim: Lead Free by American Standard, Chicago, Kohler, McQuire

Elkay, Just or Zurn.

l. Garbage Disposers: I-S-E, Kindred, Whirlpool or Kitchenaid.




m. Hose Bibbs/Wall Hydrants: Lead Free by Arrowhead Brass, Chicago or

Woodford.

n. Water Closet Seats: Bemis, Beneake, Olsonite, Church or Sperzel.

o. Shower Valving: Lead Free by American Standard, Lawler, Leonard, Powers

or Symmons.

15410-03 EXECUTION


1. Examine roughing-in work of potable water and waste piping systems to verify

actual locations of piping connections prior to installing fixtures. Examine floors and

substrates, and conditions under which fixture work is to be accomplished. Correct

any incorrect locations of piping and other unsatisfactory conditions for installation of

plumbing fixtures.

2. Examine rough-in for potable water and waste piping systems to verify actual

locations of piping connections prior to installing fixtures.

3. Examine walls, floors and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be

installed.

4. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture

manufacturer's written instructions, rough-in drawings, and pertinent codes and

regulations, original design, and referenced standards.

5. Comply with barrier free installation requirements of governing code with respect

to plumbing fixtures provided for physically handicapped.

6. Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to supports or building structure. Secure

supplies behind or within wall construction to provide rigid installation.

7. Install a stop valve in an accessible location in water connection to each fixture.

8. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished

locations and within cabinets and millwork.

9. Seal fixtures to walls and floors using silicone sealant Dow Corning No. 780 or

approved equivalent. Match sealant color to fixture color.

10. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and

after units are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning units, then retest.

11. Inspect each installed unit for damage. Replace damaged fixtures.




12. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, faucets, shower valves, and flush

valves to provide proper flow stream.

13. Replace washers or cartridges of leaking or dripping faucets and stops.

14. Clean fixtures, trim and strainers using manufacturer's recommended cleaning

methods and materials.

15. During construction cover installed fixtures, drains, sinks, and water coolers with

cardboard boxes and wrap with Visqueen.

16. Provide trap primers for floor drains, floor sinks and hub drains.

17. Roof and overflow roof drains installed per architectural details. Drains covered

during roof construction to protect drain and off set supply piping.

18. Lead flashing not to be used.

B. OWNER-FURNISHED EQUIPMENT

1. Rough-in and make final connections to Owner furnished equipment. Provide

necessary items to complete installation.

2. Comply with requirements of this Section and Drawings for installation

procedures.

3. Reference Plumbing Fixture Connection Schedule on Drawings.

C. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

1. Clean plumbing fixtures, trim, and strainers of dirt and debris upon completion of

installation. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, faucets, shower valves and

flush valves to provide proper flow stream and specified GPM. Repair leaks at

faucets and stops.

D. EXTRA STOCK

1. Furnish special wrenches and other devices necessary for servicing plumbing

fixtures and trim to Owner.





1. Upon completion of installation of plumbing fixtures, test fixtures to demonstrate

capability and compliance with Specifications. Correct or replace malfunctioning

units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance.

F. PROTECTION

1. Protect fixtures and equipment from damage. Cover finished fixtures with

cardboard. Fixtures are not to be used during construction by workers. Replace

damaged items with new.

END OF SECTION



ELECTRIC FURNACES & HEATING EQUIPMENT SECTION 15530 - 1 of 3

SECTION 15530 - ELECTRIC FURNACES & HEATING

EQUIPMENT

15530-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY

1. Work included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of: Electric Wall

Heater

B. RELATED SECTIONS


section.



Requirements.

D. SUBMITTALS




Requirements.


specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with


F. WARRANTY



2. In addition: Provide three years manufactures warranty for solid state ignition

modules.




15530-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Electric Wall Heater

a. Indeeco

b. Q-Mark

c. Trane Inc.

d. Markel

e. Modine

f. Or approved equivalent

B. ELECTRIC WALL HEATER

1. Description: UL listed recessed or surface mount cabinet type electric wall heater.

2. Components:

a. Housing: 18 gauge steel with built-in grille and polyester white, brown, or

black powder coat paint finish.

b. Element: Steel finned tubular.

c. Fan: High volume, propeller type.

d. Fan Motor: Permanently lubricated, totally enclosed, fan cooled.

e. Mounting: Provide appurtenances for surface or recessed wall mount.

3. Controls: Built-in automatic reset thermal cutout, fan override and thermostat.

External thermostat adjustment knob.

15530-03 EXECUTION

A. EXAMINATION

1. Verify substrates are ready for installation of units and openings are as indicated

on shop drawings.




2. Verify proper power supply is available for connection.

B. INSTALLATION

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of

authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain clearances from combustible/limited

combustible materials and clear air flow path.

2. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B and local code.

3. Provide hangers and seismic bracing.

4. Provide installation boxes for recessed heaters and coordinate installation to

maintain fire and smoke ratings of walls.

5. Mount counterflow furnaces installed on combustible floors on additive base.

END OF SECTION



PACKAGED AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT COMPRESSOR SECTION 15670- 1 of 6

AND CONDENSOR UNITS

SECTION 15670 - PACKAGED AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT

COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSOR UNITS

15670-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Manufactured Units

b. Casing

c. Condenser Coils

d. Fans and Motors

e. Compressors

f. Refrigerant Circuit

g. Controls

B. RELATED SECTIONS


section.



Requirements.

D. SUBMITTALS




Requirements.




AND CONDENSOR UNITS

F. WARRANTY

1. Warranty of materials and workmanship as outlined in Section 15020 and


2. In addition, provide: Five year warranty on compressor(s).

15670-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. The Carrier Corporation

2. The Trane Company

3. York International Corporation

4. McQuay International Corporation

5. Aaon


B. MANUFACTURED UNITS

1. Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled and pre-wired units suitable

for outdoor use consisting of cabinet, compressors, condensing coil and fans, integral

sub-cooling coil, controls, liquid receiver, and screens.

2. Performance Ratings: Energy Efficiency Rating (EER) not less than prescribed

by state energy code.

C. CASING

1. House components ingalvanized steel panels with weather resistant, baked enamel

finish.

2. Mount starters, disconnects, and controls in weatherproof panel provided with full

opening access doors. Provide mechanical interlock to disconnect power when door

is opened.

3. Provide removable access doors or panels with quick fasteners.




AND CONDENSOR UNITS

D. CONDENSER COILS

1. Coils: Aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubing. Provide

sub-cooling circuits. Air test under water to 425 PSIG, and dehydrate. Sealwith

holding charge of nitrogen.

2. Coil Guard: Expanded metal, louvered, or PVC coat steel wire.

E. FANS AND MOTORS

1. Weatherproof motors suitable for outdoor use, single phase permanent split

capacitor or 3 phase, with permanent lubricated ball bearings and built in thermal

overload protection.

2. Vertical dischargedirect driven propeller type condenser fans with fan guard on

discharge.

F. COMPRESSORS

1. Compressor: Hermetic scroll type.

2. Mounting: Statically and dynamically balance rotating parts and mount onrubber-

in-shear vibration isolators.

3. Lubrication System: Reversible, positive displacement, or centrifugal oil pump

with oil charging valve, oil level sight glass, and magnetic plug or strainer.

4. Motor: Constant speed 1800 rpm suction gas cooled with electronic sensor and

winding over temperature protection, designed for across-the-line starting. Furnish

with starter.

5. Capacity Reduction Equipment: Suction valve unloaders, with lifting mechanism

operated by electrically actuated solenoid valve, with unloaded compressor start;

controlled from room thermostat.

6. Sump Oil Heater: Evaporates refrigerant returning to sump during shut down.

Energize heater thermostatically when compressor is not operating.

G. REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT

1. Provide each unit with one refrigerant circuit, factory supplied and piped.

Reference Section 15183.




AND CONDENSOR UNITS

2. For each refrigerant circuit, provide:

a. Filter dryer.

b. Liquid line sight glass and moisture indicator.

c. Thermal expansion valve for maximum operating pressure.

d. Insulated suction line.

e. Suction and liquid line service valves.

f. Liquid line solenoid valve.

g. Charging valve.

h. Discharge line check valve.

i. Compressor discharge service valve.

j. Condenser pressure relief valve.

3. For heat pump units, provide reversing valve, suction line accumulator, discharge

muffler; flow control check valve, and solid-state defrost control utilizing thermistors.

H. CONTROLS

1. On unit, mount weatherproof steel control panel, NEMA 250, containing power

and control wiring, factory wired with single point power connection.

2. For each compressor, provide part winding starter, non-recycling compressor

overload, starter relay, and control power transformer or terminal for controls power.

Provide manual reset current overload protection. For each condenser fan, provide

across-the-line starter with starter relay.

3. Provide safety controls arranged so any one will shut down machine:

a. High discharge pressure switch (manual reset).

b. Low suction pressure switch (automatic reset).

c. Oil Pressure switch (manual reset).

4. Provide for the following operating controls:

a. Single stage cooling input room cycles compressors activates solenoid valves

in refrigerant circuit.




AND CONDENSOR UNITS

b. Five minute off timer prevents compressor from short cycling.

c. Periodic pump-out timer to pump down on high evaporator refrigerant

pressure.

d. Low ambient temperature controls.

e. Lead-lag switch to alternate compressor operation.

f. Low ambient thermostat to lock out compressor at low ambient temperatures.

5. Provide controls to permit operation down to 20 degrees F ambient temperature.

a. Thermostat to cycle fan motors in response to outdoor ambient temperature.

b. Head pressure switch to cycle fan motors in response to refrigerant

condensing pressure.

c. Solid state control to vary speed of one condenser fan motor in response to

refrigerant condensing pressure.

d. Electronic control consisting of mixing damper assembly, controlled to

maintain constant refrigerant condensing pressure.

6. Gauges: Prepiped for suction and discharge refrigerant pressures.

7. For multiple units, provide remote mounted sequence panel to allow operation

with lead-lag switching and time delay timer.

15670-03 EXECUTION

A. INSTALLATION

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

2. Complete structural, mechanical, and electrical connections in accordance with

manufacturer's installation instructions.

3. Provide for connection to electrical service.

4. Provide connection to refrigeration piping system and evaporators. Comply with

ASHRAE Standards.




AND CONDENSOR UNITS

B. STARTING EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

1. Supply initial charge of refrigerant and oil for each refrigeration system. Replace

losses of oil or refrigerant prior to end of correction period.

2. Charge system with refrigerant and test entire system for leaks after completion of

installation. Repair leaks, put system into operation, and test equipment performance.

3. Shut-down system if initial start-up and testing takes place in winter and machines

are to remain inoperative. Repeat start-up and testing operation at beginning of first

cooling season.

4. Provide cooling season start-up, and winter season shut-down for first year of

operation.

5. Inspect and test for refrigerant leaks during first year of operation.

END OF SECTION



HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC SECTION 15710 - 1 of 4

SECTION 15710 - HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC

15710-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY

1. Work included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of: Plate and Frame

Type Heat Exchangers

B. RELATED SECTIONS


Section.



Requirements.


a. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label heat exchangers to comply with

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels,"

Division 1.

D. SUBMITTALS



a. Product Data: Provide data with dimensions, locations, and size of tappings

and performance data.

b. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, locations, and size of tappings and

performance data.

c. Design Data: Indicate in sufficient detail to verify that heat exchangers meet

or exceed specified requirements.

d. Test Reports: Indicate tube bundle pressure tests.




e. Certificates - Heat Exchangers: ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label heat

exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,

"Pressure Vessels," Division 1.

f. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation and support requirements.

g. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include start up and shut down instructions,

assembly drawings, and spare parts lists.

h. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been

completed in 's name and registered with manufacturer.

i. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in


j. See Section Division 1, Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

k. Extra Gaskets: One set of each type and size.

l. Plate Type Heat Exchanger Tools: One set of wrenches for disassembly.



Requirements.

F. WARRANTY



15710-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Plate and Frame Type Heat Exchanger:

a. Alfa Laval

b. Armstrong Pumps Inc.

c. ITT Bell and Gossett

d. Taco





B. PLATE AND FRAME TYPE HEAT EXCHANGER

1. General: Plate and frame heat exchanger to consist of frame, plates, piping

connections, compression bolts and gaskets. Provide heat exchanger rated in

accordance with ASME Section VIII, Division 1 for 150 PSIG working pressure.

2. Frames: Carbon steel with baked epoxy enamel paint, ASTM A666 Type 316

Stainless Steel side bolts and shroud. Provide frame sized for addition of 15 percent

more plates. Piping connections suitable for grooved plate piping fittings where

grooved piping is specified.

3. Plates: Corrugated thickness not less than 0.107-inches hung from top bar,

ASTM A666 stainless steel Type 316.

4. Gaskets: Niltrile rubber. Peroxide cured with receiving grooves to prevent

intermixing of fluids or cause leakage.

5. Nozzles: Rated for 150 percent of maximum system operating pressure, rated

lined flange type.

6. Piping connections to be flanged whole assembly to be rated to 150 PSIG

working pressure. Connections equal to or less than 2-inches to be stainless steel

NPT type.

7. Provide insulated closure panel complying with OSHA requirements.

8. Provide lifting lugs and ball bearing assemblies for tightening and untightening of

unit.

15710-03 EXECUTION

A. PLATE AND FRAME HEAT EXCHANGER

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and seismic requirements.

2. Install to permit removal of plates with minimum disturbance to installed

equipment and piping. Provide unions, pipe offsets, etc. to allow for isolation of unit

and repairs/replacement without cutting/welding of piping.

3. Support heat exchangers from structure.

4. Pipe drain valves to nearest floor drain.




5. Water Inlets and Outlets: Per piping diagram on plans. Thermometer and sensor

wells, pressure gauge tappings, strainer on inlet piping.

6. Heated Water Outlet: Thermometer well for temperature regulator sensor, ASME

rated pressure and temperature relief valve, valved drain.

7. Clean and flush heat exchanger before final fill. After completing system

installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect ex-posed finish. Remove

burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.

8. Make piping connections so that unit does not support pipe weight and piping

does not interfere with plate removal and maintenance.

END OF SECTION



ROOFTOP PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING UNITS SECTION 15730 - 1 of 13

SECTION 15730 - ROOFTOP PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING

UNITS

15730-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY

1. Work Included: Materials, installation and testing of roof-mounted, packaged

direct expansion air conditioning units in the following configurations: Rooftop

Packaged Air Conditioning Units Variable Volume.

B. RELATED SECTIONS


section.



Requirements.

2. In addition, meet the following: ARI 410 - Standard for Forced Circulation Air-

Heating and Air-Cooling Coils.

D. SUBMITTALS




Requirements.

2. In addition, meet the following

a. Interior surfaces of units to meet erosion and growth resistance requirements

as well as construction requirements for equipment of ASHRAE 62.1, latest

edition.

b. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as

defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.




c. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety

Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."

d. Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Meet minimum requirements shown on drawings.

e. Coefficient of Performance: Meet minimum requirements shown on

drawings.

f. Classified in accordance with ANSI Z 21.47.

g. ARI Certification: Provide ARI certified and listed units.

h. ARI Compliance for Units with Capacities Less Than 135,000 Btuh (39.6

kW): Rate rooftop air-conditioner capacity according to ARI 210/240, "Unitary

Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment."

i. ARI Compliance for Units with Capacities 135,000 Btuh (39.6 kW) and

More: Rate rooftop air-conditioner capacity according to ARI 340/360,

"Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump

Equipment."

j. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with ARI 270, "Sound Rating of

Outdoor Unitary Equipment."

F. WARRANTY




a. Provide total 5 years manufacturer's warranty for compressor(s), including

parts and labor.

b. Provide 5 year manufacturer warranty on heat exchanger.

G. EXTRA MATERIALS



contents.

a. Fan Belts: one set for each belt-drive fan.

b. Filters: two sets of filters for each unit.




15730-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Rooftop Package Air Conditioning Units, Variable Volume:

a. AAON, Inc.

b. Carrier Corporation

c. McQuay International

d. Trane Company North American Commercial Group

e. York/Johnson Controls


B. ROOFTOP PACKAGE AIR CONDITIONING UNITS, VARIABLE VOLUME

1. Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for exterior installation;

consisting of compressor, indoor and outside refrigerant coils, indoor fan and outside

coil fan, refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, gas furnace heat exchanger,

and dampers.

2. Casing: Manufacturer's standard galvanized sheet metal construction with

exterior enamel paint finish, hinged access doors with neoprene gaskets for inspection

and access to internal parts, minimum1-inch thick thermal insulation, knockouts for

electrical and piping connections, exterior condensate drain connection, and lifting

lugs. Finished panel surfaces to withstand a minimum 1000-hour salt spray test in

accordance with ASTM B117 standard for salt spray resistance. Unit base to

overhang the roof curb for positive water runoff and seat on the roof curb gasket to

provide a positive weather tight seal.

3. Indoor Fan: Forward curved or Airfoil, centrifugal, belt driven with Adjustable or

Fixed motor sheaves, grease-lubricated ball bearings, and motor with variable

frequency drive. Mount fan and motor assembly on base with spring isolators having

2-inch deflection.

a. Fan assembly to have adjustable pitched sheaves on the motor. Bushings to

be used on sheaves to allow for easy removal of the pulleys from the fan and

motor shaft. Fixed bore pulleys fastened to the shaft by setscrews will not be

allowed. Drives selected with a 1.2 service factor.




b. Fan assemblies statically and dynamically balanced at the factory, including a

final trim balance, prior to shipment. Fan assemblies to employ solid steel fan

shafts. Bearings sized to provide a L-50 life of 250,000 hours.

c. Provide fan motors heavy-duty, 1800 rpm, open drip-proof (ODP). Motors

efficiencies to meet EPAct premium efficiencies. Motors mounted on an

adjustable base that provides for proper alignment and belt tension adjustment.

d. Fan design to allow for the fan and motor assembly to slide out of the rooftop

unit for ease of servicing the equipment.

4. Exhaust Air Fan: Forward curved, Airfoil, or Airfoil plug, centrifugal, belt driven

with adjustable or fixed motor sheaves, grease-lubricated ball bearings, and motor

with variable frequency drive. Mount fan and motor assembly on base with spring

isolators having 2-inch deflection.

a. Fan assembly to have adjustable pitched sheaves on the motor. Bushings to

be used on sheaves to allow for easy removal of the pulleys from the fan and

motor shaft. Fixed bore pulleys fastened to the shaft by setscrews will not be

allowed. Drives selected with a 1.2 service factor.

b. Fan assemblies statically and dynamically balanced at the factory, including a

final trim balance, prior to shipment. Fan assemblies to employ solid steel fan

shafts. Bearings sized to provide a L-50 life of 250,000 hours.

c. Provide fan motors heavy-duty, 1800 rpm, open drip-proof (ODP). Motors

efficiencies to meet EPAct premium efficiencies. Motors mounted on an

adjustable base that provides for proper alignment and belt tension adjustment.

d. Fan design to allow for the fan and motor assembly to slide out of the rooftop

unit for ease of servicing the equipment.

5. Outside Coil Fan: Condenser fans to be direct drive, axial type designed for low

tip speed and vertical air discharge. Condenser fan rpm: 1140 rpm maximum. Fan

blades constructed of steel and riveted to a steel center hub. Condenser fan motors to

be heavy-duty, non-reversing type with permanently lubricated ball bearing and

thermal protection. Motor design to be totally enclosed air over (TEAO) to protect

the motors from rain and damage by water.

6. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum fin and seamless copper tube in galvanized-steel

casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor and thermal expansion valve; tested to

450 PSIG (3105 kPa) and leak tested to 300 PSIG (2070 kPa) with air under water.

Insulate coil section. Coils to be factory leak tested with high pressure air under

water. Condenser coils to be protected from incidental contact to coil fins by a coil

guard.




7. Compressor(s): Minimum two hermetic scroll compressors with integral vibration

isolators, internal overcurrent and over temperature protection, internal pressure

relief, and crankcase heater(s). Lead refrigeration circuit to be provided with hot gas

bypass.

8. Refrigeration System:

a. Compressor(s).

b. Outside coil and fan.

c. Indoor coil and fan.

d. Expansion valves with replaceable thermostatic elements.

e. Refrigerant dryers.

f. High-pressure switches.

g. Low-pressure switches.

h. Thermostats for coil freeze-up protection during low-ambient temperature

operation or loss of air.

i. Independent refrigerant circuits.

j. Brass service valves installed in discharge and liquid lines.

k. Charge of refrigerant.

l. Timed Off Control: Automatic-reset control shuts compressor off after five

minutes.

m. Refrigerant Circuits: Interlaced refrigerant-coil circuiting with circuit for each

compressor.

n. Capacity Control: Hot-gas bypass valve and piping on lead compressor.

o. Compressor Motor Overload Protection: Manual reset.

p. Antirecycling Timing Device: Prevents compressor restart for five minutes

after shutdown.

q. Adjustable, Low-Ambient, Head-Pressure Control: Designed to operate at

temperatures as low as 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C) by cycling outside coil fans and

controlling speed of last fan of each circuit.

r. Oil-Pressure Switch: Designed to shut down compressors on low oil pressure.




s. Drain Pan: Stainless steel, positively sloped drain pan provided with the

cooling coil. Drain pan to extend beyond the leaving side of the coil and

underneath the cooling coil connections. Drain pan to have a minimum slope of

1/8-inch per foot to provide positive draining. The slope of the drain pan to be in

two directions and comply with ASHRAE Standard 62.1. Drain pan to be

connected to a threaded drain connection extending through the unit base.

9. Filters: 2-inch thick, fiberglass, pleated throwaway filters in filter rack. Activated

carbon filters on outside air intake.

10. Water Heating Coils:

a. General: Extended surface type consisting of copper tubing mechanically

expanded to bond with plate fins. Design for serpentine flow with one or more

feeds from common supply and return headers. Arrange for counter flow

operation with supply connections at the bottom.

b. Performance: Provide capacity indicated at water flows no greater than

scheduled.

c. Factory Testing: Leak test coils under water at 300 PSIG minimum.

d. Working Pressure: 150 PSIG.

e. Construction:

1. Tubing: Seamless copper.

2. Fins: Aluminum die formed plates. Continuous within the coil casing.

3. Casing: 16 gauge galvanized steel.

4. Headers: Seamless copper tube brazed to heat transfer tubes. Provide

high point air vent fitting and low point drain fitting.

5. Connections: Same end for supply and return unless noted otherwise.

6. Intermediate Supports: Provide for coils with finned length greater than

44-inches, with maximum spacing of 42-inches.

11. Outdoor / Return Air Section: A return air plenum to be provided with an outdoor

air hood. Hood to allow outdoor air to enter at the back of the return air plenum.

Hood to include moisture eliminator filters to drain water away from the entering air

stream. Return air plenum to allow return air to enter from the bottom of the unit.

Upon unit shut down during unoccupied periods, the outdoor air damper to be power

driven closed.




12. Outside-Air Damper: Linked damper blades, for 0 to 30 percent outside air, with

fully modulating and spring-return damper motor. Damper blades to be gasketed

with side seals and jamb seals to provide an air leakage rate of no more than 4 cfm /

square foot of damper area at 1-inch differential pressure per ASHRAE 90.1 Energy

Standard. leakage rate to be tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500. Upon

unit shut down during unoccupied periods the outdoor air damper to be power driven

closed.

13. Economizer: Return- and outside-air dampers with neoprene seals, outside-air

filter, and hood. Damper blades to be gasketed with side seals and jamb seals to

provide an air leakage rate of no more than 4 cfm / square foot of damper area at 1-

inch differential pressure per ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Standard. leakage rate to be

tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500. Upon unit shut down during

unoccupied periods the outdoor air damper to be power driven closed.

a. Damper Motor: Fully modulating spring return with adjustable minimum

position.

b. Control: Electronic-control system uses outside-air temperature to adjust

mixing dampers.

c. Low-leakage dampers with 1 percent leakage.

14. Power Connection: Provide for single connection of power to unit with control-

circuit transformer with built-in circuit breaker.

15. Unit wiring to comply with NEC requirements and with applicable UL standards.

Electrical components to be UL recognized where applicable. Wiring and electrical

components provided with the unit to be number and color coded and labeled

according to the electrical diagram provided for easy identification. The unit to be

provided with a factory wired weatherproof control panel. Unit to have a single point

power connection for main power connection. A terminal board to be provided for

low voltage control wiring. Each compressor and condenser fan motor to be

furnished with contactors and thermal overload protection. Supply fan motors to

have a factory installed and wired control contactor. Knockouts to be provided in the

bottom of the main control panels for field wiring entrance.

16. Unit Controls: Solid-state control board and components contain at least the

following features:

a. Indoor fan on/off delay.

b. Default control to ensure proper operation after power interruption.

c. Service relay output.

d. Unit diagnostics and diagnostic code storage.




e. Field-adjustable control parameters.

f. Defrost control.

g. Economizer control.

h. Low-ambient control, allowing operation down to 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C).

i. Minimum run time.

j. Night setback mode.

k. Return-air temperature limit.

l. Low-refrigerant pressure control.

m. Variable-Air-Volume Control: Variable-frequency drive controls supply-air

static pressure. Supply-air, static-pressure limit shuts unit down on high pressure.

17. DDC Temperature Control: Install stand-alone control module providing link

between unit controls and DDC temperature-control system through BACnet

interface. Coordinate points to be passed and sequences of operation with Drawings

and Section 15900, Instrumentation and Control Performance Specifications.

18. Optional Accessories:

a. Service Outlets: One, 115-V, ground-fault, circuit-interrupter type.

b. Dirty-filter switch.

c. Power exhaust fan centrifugal type, forward curved, centrifugal or belt driven

with adjustable sheaves with variable frequency drives.

19. Roof Curb:

a. Steel with corrosion-protection coating, gasketing, and factory-installed wood

nailer; complying with NRCA standards; minimum height of 14-inches.

b. Insulate the interior of the curb with 2-inches of 1.5 pound neoprene coated

fiberglass insulation.

c. Provide seismic restraints to secure the unit to the curb in accordance with

code.




15730-03 EXECUTION

A. INSPECTION

1. Examine areas and conditions under which units are to be installed. Do not


B. INSTALLATION

1. Roof curb to be mounted level on roof in accordance to NRCA manuals and

details. Secure to structure per engineered/sealed seismic installation details.

2. Unit to be secured to curb per seismic installation details.

3. Seal openings between curb, roof opening, ducts, electrical conduits, piping, and

building interior.

4. Protect the roof from damage during installation. Secure factory touch-up paint to

repair scratches and minor damage to equipment prior to Start-up. Comb evaporator

and condenser coils to repair any minor fin damage.

5. Control wiring from roof-mounted equipment must be routed in conduit from

above roof to inside building or must be routed through roof curb inside unit. Control

wiring must not be exposed to weather.

C. CONNECTIONS




a. Hot-Water Heating Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division

15. Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff or balancing valve and

union or flange at each connection.

3. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.

Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific

connection requirements:

a. Install ducts to termination in roof curb.

b. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out

decking under entire roof curb.




c. Terminate return-air duct through roof structure.

d. Fill void between roof and bottom of unit with 3-pound density acoustic batt.

e. Install normal-weight, 3000 PSI (20.7 MPa), compressive strength (28-day)

concrete mix inside roof curb, 4-inches thick.

4. Electrical System Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division

16 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls.

5. Ground equipment according to Division 16.




D. WATER COIL INSTALLATION

1. General:

a. Comb damaged and bent fins.

b. Install coils to drain in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

c. Install filters upstream of supply and exhaust air handler coils prior to fan

operation.



to inspect[, test, and adjust] field-assembled components and equipment installation,

including connections[, and to assist in field testing]. Report results in writing.

2. Perform the following field quality-control tests and inspections and prepare test

reports:

a. After installing rooftop air conditioners and after electrical circuitry has been

energized, test units for compliance with requirements.

b. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.

c. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to

confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

d. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning





3. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified

above.

F. STARTUP SERVICE

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

2. Protect or remove energy recovery devices prior to starting the units to insure

damage does not occur to the devices or media. Replace at no cost to Owner if

devices/media get damaged or are no longer in "as-new" condition.

3. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions and do the following:

a. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing.

b. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, air-cooled outside coil, energy

recovery devices, internal coils, and fans.

c. Inspect internal insulation.

d. Verify that labels are clearly visible.

e. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.

f. Verify that controls are connected and operable.

g. Verify that filters are installed.

h. Clean outside coil and inspect for construction debris.

i. Adjust vibration isolators.

j. Lubricate bearings on fan.

k. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration

and binding.

l. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.

m. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Coordinate starting of refrigeration system during winter with

manufacturer.

2. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.




n. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify

sequences.

o. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by

manufacturer.

p. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits.

q. Inspect outside-air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return-air

dampers.

r. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following:

1. Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.

2. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.

3. Outside-air, dry-bulb temperature.

4. Outside-air-coil, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.

s. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers,

refrigeration, and normal and emergency shutdown.

t. Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following:

1. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures.

2. Short circuiting of air through outside coil or from outside coil to outside-

air intake.

u. After startup and performance testing, change filters, vacuum coils, lubricate

bearings, adjust belt tension, and inspect operation of power vents.

G. ADJUSTING

1. Adjust initial temperature, humidity, and CO2 set points.

2. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

3. Occupancy Adjustments: Within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions.

Provide up to two visits to site outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose,

without additional cost.




H. DEMONSTRATION


personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain rooftop air conditioners. Reference

Division 1.

END OF SECTION



HEAT RECOVERY VENTILATOR SECTION 15731 - 1 of 17

SECTION 15731 - HEAT RECOVERY VENTILATOR

15731-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. General Description

b. Cabinet, Casing and Frame

c. Supply and Return Fans

d. Variable Air Volume Control

e. Electrical

f. Energy Recovery, Enthalpy Wheel

g. Heating and Cooling Sections

h. Filters

i. Outdoor/Return Air Section

j. Air Cooled Condensing Section

k. Roof Curb

l. Controls

B. RELATED SECTIONS


section.



Requirements.

2. In addition, meet the following: ARI 410 - Standard for Forced Circulation Air-

Heating and Air-Cooling Coils.




D. SUBMITTALS




Requirements.


a. Interior surfaces of units meet erosion and growth resistance requirements of

ASHRAE 62.1, latest edition, as well as construction requirements for equipment.

b. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as



c. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety

Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."

d. Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Meet minimum requirements shown on drawings.

e. Classified in accordance with ANSI Z 21.47.

f. ARI Certification: Provide ARI certified and listed Units.

g. ARI Compliance for Units with Capacities Less Than 135,000 Btuh (39.6

kW): Rate rooftop air-conditioner capacity according to ARI 210/240, "Unitary

Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment."

1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with ARI 270, "Sound Rating of


h. ARI Compliance for Units with Capacities 135,000 Btuh (39.6 kW) and

More: Rate rooftop air-conditioner capacity according to ARI 340/360,

"Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump

Equipment."

i. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with ARI 270, "Sound Rating of


j. Provide coils performing to ARI-410 Standards.




F. WARRANTY




a. Provide total 5 years manufacturer's warranty for compressor(s), including

parts and labor.

b. Provide 5 year manufacturer warranty on heat exchanger.

G. EXTRA MATERIALS



contents.

a. Fan Belts: One Set for each belt-drive fan.

b. Filters: Two Sets of filters for each unit.

15731-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. The following manufacturers will be considered provided they comply with

Contract Documents.

a. Valent

b. Trane

c. Aaon

B. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1. Configuration: Fabricate as detailed on prints and drawings:

a. Return fan / economizer section.

b. Filter section.

c. Heating coil section.




d. Cooling coil section.

e. Draw-through supply fan section.

f. Final filters.

g. Discharge plenum.

h. Condensing unit section.

i. Energy recovery section.

2. Provide complete unit ETL/MEA or ETL-Canada listed.

3. Provide specifically designed for outdoor rooftop application and include a

weatherproof cabinet. Provide each unit completely factory assembled and shipped in

one piece. Ship packaged units fully charged with refrigerant.

4. The unit to undergo a complete factory run test prior to shipment and factory test

sheets to be available upon request. The factory test to include final balancing of

thesupply and return fan assemblies, a refrigeration circuit run test, a unit control

system operations checkout, a unit refrigerant leak test and a final unit inspection.

5. Units to have decals and tags to indicate caution areas and aid unit service.

Provide unit nameplates fixed to the main control panel door. Provide electrical

wiring diagrams attached to the control panels. Installation, operating and

maintenance bulletins and start-up forms supplied with each unit.

6. Performance: Scheduled capacities and face areas are minimum accepted values.

Scheduled amps, kW, and HP are maximum accepted values that allow scheduled

capacity to be met.

C. CABINET, CASING AND FRAME

1. Standard double-wall construction for side wall access doors and floor areas to be

provided with 22 gauge solid galvanized steel inner liners to protect insulation during

service and maintenance. Provide a minimum of 1-inch thick, 3/4-pound density

Insulation, neoprene coated glass fiber. Design unit cabinet to operate at total static

pressures up to 6.5-inches wg Insulation on ceiling and end panels secured with

adhesive and mechanical fasteners.

2. Floor panels to include double wall construction and include a nominal 2-inch

thick, 1-1/2 pound density or R6.5 glass fiber insulation.




3. Exterior surfaces constructed of pre-painted galvanized steel for aesthetics and

long term durability. Paint finish to include a base primer with a high quality,

polyester resin topcoat. Finished surface to withstand a minimum 750-hour salt spray

test in accordance with ASTM B117 standard for salt spray resistance. Service doors

provided on both sides of each section in order to provide user access to unit

components. Service doors constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel with a

galvanized steel interior liner. Service doors mounted on multiple, stainless steel

hinges and secured by a latch system that is operated by a single, flush mounted

handle. The latch system to feature a staggered engagement. Removable panels, or

doors secured by multiple, mechanical fasteners are not acceptable.

4. Provide unit base frame constructed of 16-gauge pre-painted galvanized steel.

Unit base to overhang the roof curb for positive water runoff and have a formed

recess that seats on the roof curb gasket to provide a positive, weathertight seal.

Provide lifting brackets on the unit base with lifting holes to accept cable or chain

hooks.

D. SUPPLY AND RETURN FANS

1. Provide fan assemblies statically and dynamically balanced at the factory,

including a final trim balance, prior to shipment. Provide fan assemblies to employ

solid steel fan shafts. Heavy-duty pillow block type, self-aligning, grease lubricated

ball bearings to be used. Provide bearings sized to provide an L-50 life at 200,000

hours. Entire fan assembly to be isolated from the fan bulkhead and mounted on

spring isolators. Fixed or Adjustable pitch V-belt drives with matching belts to be

provided. V-belt drives to be selected at the manufacturer's standard service factor.

2. Provide heavy-duty fan motors, 1800 rpm open drip-proof (ODP) type with

grease lubricated ball bearings. Motors to be premium efficiency. Provide motors

mounted on an adjustable base that provides for proper alignment and belt tension

adjustment.

3. Airfoil Supply Fans: Provide double width supply fan, double inlet (DWDI)

airfoil centrifugal fan. Provide fans mounted using shafts and hubs with mating

keyways. Provide Class II type fans and fabricated from heavy-gauge aluminum. Fan

blades to be continuously welded to the back plate and end rim.

4. Airfoil Return Fans: Provide a single width, single inlet (SWSI) airfoil centrifugal

return air fan. Provide fan of Class II construction. Provide fan wheel of Class II

construction and fabricated from heavy-gauge aluminum with fan blades

continuously welded to the back plate and end rim. Provide fan mounted using shafts

and hubs with mating keyways. Exhaust fans are not acceptable.

5. Provide supply and return air fan sections with an expanded metal belt guard.




E. ELECTRICAL

1. Unit wiring to comply with NEC requirements and with applicable UL standards.

Electrical components to be UL recognized where applicable. Wiring and electrical

components provided with unit to be number and color-coded and labeled according

to the electrical diagram provided for easy identification. Provide unit with a factory

wired weatherproof control panel. Unit to have a single point power terminal block

for main power connection. Provide terminal board for low voltage control wiring.

Branch short circuit protection, 115-volt control circuit transformer and fuse, system

switches, high temperature sensor, and a 115-volt receptacle with a separate electrical

connection to also be provided with unit. Provide each compressor and condenser fan

motor furnished with contactors and inherent thermal overload protection. Supply and

return fan motors to have contactors and external overload protection. Provide

knockouts in the bottom of the main control panels for field wiring entrance. Protect

115-600 voltage wire from damage by raceways or conduit.

2. Provide part winding start for the unit compressors to reduce inrush current at

start-up.

3. Provide ground fault protection to protect against arcing ground faults.

F. ENERGY RECOVERY, ENTHALPY WHEEL

1. Energy recovery to be an integral part of unit from the manufacturer.

2. No field assembly, ducting, or electrical wiring to be required with energy

recovery.

3. Energy recovery to be provided through a total enthalpy wheel providing sensible

and latent energy transfer.

4. Construction:

a. Energy recovery wheel constructed of lightweight polymer substrate with

permanently bonded silica gel dessicant.

b. Individual pie-shaped wheel sections removable from wheel cassette for

maintenance.

c. Wheel bearings selected to provide an L-10 life in excess of 400,000 hours.

d. Rim to be continuous rolled stainless steel and the wheel connected to the

shaft by means of taper locks.

e. Energy wheel cassette to include seals, drive motor and drive belt.

5. Latent energy transferred entirely in the vapor phase.




6. Provide energy recovery cassette Underwriters Laboratories Recognized

Component for electrical and fire safety.

7. The wheel drive motor to be an Underwriters Laboratory Recognized Component

and mounted in the cassette frame and factory wired to main ventilator disconnect.

8. Thermal performance to be certified by the wheel manufacturer in accordance

with ASHRAE Standard 84, Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers and ARI

Standard 1060, Rating Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment.

9. Energy recovery wheel cassette to be accessible through a 2-inch thick, foam-

injected, double-wall, hinged access door with quarter-turn latches.

G. HEATING AND COOLING SECTIONS

1. Cooling:

a. Coil section to be complete with factory piped cooling coil and sloped drain

pan. Hinged access doors on both sides of the section to provide access to the

cooling coil and drain pan for inspection and cleaning.

b. General: Extended surface type consisting of copper tubing mechanically



operation.


d. Working Pressure: 50 percent greater than refrigerant suction pressure.

e. Construction:

1. Tubing: seamless copper.

2. Fins: aluminum die formed plates. Continuous within the coil casing.


4. Headers: Seamless copper tube brazed to heat transfer tubes.


Provide refrigerant distributor with equal length feeds to each tube. Provide

hot gas bypass connection at distributor where scheduled.

6. Circuiting: Provide interlaced configuration with suction header for each

circuit.






2. Provide stainless steel, positively sloped drain pan provided with the cooling coil.

Drain pan to extend beyond the leaving side of the coil and underneath the cooling

coil connections. Drain pan to have a minimum slope of 1/8-inch per foot to provide

positive draining. Provide drain pan connected to a threaded drain connection

extending through the unit base. Provide units with stacked cooling coils with a

secondary drain pan piped to the primary drain pan.

3. Hot Water Heating Coil:

a. General: Extended surface type consisting of copper tubing mechanically



operation with supply connections at the bottom.

b. Performance: Provide capacity indicated at water flows no greater than

scheduled.


d. Working Pressure: 150 PSIG.

e. Construction:

1. Tubing: Seamless copper.

2. Fins: aluminum die formed plates. Continuous within the coil casing.


4. Headers: Seamless copper tube brazed to heat transfer tubes. Provide

high point air vent fitting and low point drain fitting.




f. Install hot water heat section upstream of the supply air fan. Hinged access

doors to provide convenient access to the coil and valve for inspection and

cleaning.

g. Factory leak test coils with high pressure air under water.




H. FILTERS

1. Draw-through Filters:

a. Provide unit with a draw-through filter section. Supply filter section complete

with the filter rack as an integral part of the unit. Provide draw-through filter

section with panel filters.

b. Provide 2-inch thick pleated panel filters with efficiency/Merv rating

scheduled at both sides of heat wheel. Provide filters frame mounted and to slide

into galvanized steel racks contained within the unit. Install filters in an angular

arrangement to maximize filter area and minimize filter face velocity. Provide

filters accessible from both sides of the filter section.

c. Provide 12-inch deep with efficiency/Merv rating scheduled, UL Std. 900,

Class 1, cartridge filters. Include 2” panel, with efficiency/Merv rating scheduled

pre-filters. Provide cartridge filters consisting of filter media permanently

attached to a metal frame and slide into a gasketed, extruded aluminum rack

contained within the unit. Filter rack to have secondary gasketed, hinged end

panels to insure proper sealing. Provide filters accessible from both sides of the

filter section.

2. Provide filters with antimicrobial treatment.

I. OUTDOOR / RETURN AIR SECTION

1. 0 percent - 100 percent Outdoor Air Economizer:

a. Provide unit with an outdoor air economizer section. The 0 to 100 percent

outside air economizer section to include outdoor, return, and exhaust air

dampers. Outdoor air to enter from one side or both sides of the economizer

section through horizontal, louvered intake panels complete with rain lip and bird

screen. The floor of the outdoor air intakes to provide for water drainage. The

economizer section to allow return air to enter from the bottom of the unit.

b. Provide outside and return air dampers sized to handle 100 percent of the

supply air volume. Provide dampers with opposed sets of parallel blades,

arranged vertically to converge the return air and outdoor air streams in multiple,

circular mixing patterns. Provide low leak dampers. Provide damper blades fully

gasketed and side sealed. Damper leakage to be less than 0.2 percent at 1.5-inches

static pressure differential. Leakage rate to be tested in accordance with AMCA

Standard 500. Provide damper blades operated from multiple sets of linkages

mounted on the leaving face of the dampers.

c. Provide activated carbon filter at outside air inlet.




2. 100 percent OA Hood:

a. Provide unit with a 100 percent outdoor air hood. Factory install outdoor air

hood and construct from galvanized steel finished with the same durable paint

finish as the main unit. Hood to include a bird screen to prevent infiltration of

foreign materials and a rain lip to drain water away from the entering air stream.

b. Provide low leak dampers. Damper blades to be fully gasketed and side sealed

and arranged vertically in the hood. Damper leakage to be less than 0.2 percent at

1.5-inches static pressure differential.

c. Leakage rate to be tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500. Damper

blades operated from multiple sets of linkages mounted on the leaving face of the

dampers.

J. AIR COOLED CONDENSING SECTION

1. Condensing section open on the sides and bottom to provide access and to allow

airflow through the coils. Condenser coils to be multi-row and fabricated from 3/8-

inch high efficiency rifled copper tubing mechanically bonded to high efficiency

aluminum fins. Each condenser coil to be factory leak tested with high-pressure air

under water. Condenser coil guards to provide protection from incidental contact to

coil fins. Coil guards to be constructed of cross wire welded steel with PVC coating.

2. Provide condenser coils multi-row and fabricated from 5/8-inch high efficiency

rifled copper tubing mechanically bonded to polymer, corrosion resistant, tube sheet

support. Provide removable condenser coil for service without disassembling the unit.

3. Condenser fans to be direct drive, axial type designed for low tip speed and

vertical air discharge. condenser fan rpm to be 1140 rpm maximum. Fan blades to be

constructed of steel and riveted to a steel center hub. Condenser fan motors to be

heavy-duty, non reversing type with permanently lubricated ball bearing and thermal

protection. Motor design to be totally enclosed air over (TEAO) to protect the motors

from rain and damage by water.

4. Condenser fan capacity controlled to allow compressor operation down to 45

degrees F ambient.

5. A walk-in service vestibule contains the electrical components for the condensing

unit. It also includes hinged access doors on both sides of the unit, two fully wired

marine lights, a ventilation fan, electrical outlet, and manual shutter such that

conditioned air can be used to cool the vestibule. The marine lights, ventilation fan

and electrical outlets are powered from a field-supplied 115-volt service.




6. Fully wired 1.5 kW unit heater, installed and wired complete with thermostat, on-

off control. The service vestibule unit heater will be powered from a second field-

supplied 115-volt service.

7. Provide heavy-duty compressors scroll semi-hermetic with reversible, positive

displacement oil pump, suction and discharge line service valves, crankcase heater,

high efficiency blocked suction unloading, and three leg inherent motor overload

protection. Compressors isolated with resilient rubber isolators.

8. Unit to have two independent refrigeration circuits. Provide each circuit complete

with a liquid line solenoid valve, low pressure control, filter-drier, liquid moisture

indicator/sight-glass, thermal expansion valve, liquid line shutoff valve with charging

port, a manual reset high pressure safety switch, high pressure relief device and pump

down switch. Provide thermal expansion valve capable of modulation from 100

percent to 25 percent of its rated capacity. Provide sight-glasses accessible for

viewing without disrupting unit operation. Each refrigerant circuit to include a

subcooling circuit to provide 15 degrees of liquid subcooling. Provide each circuit

dehydrated and factory charged with refrigerant and oil.

9. Refrigeration capacity control accomplished with a combination of compressor

cycling and high efficiency blocked suction unloading.

10. Constant air volume, zone temperature control, to maintain desired temperature

control, the unit to have a minimum of 2 steps of capacity control.

11. Compressor capacity control staging to be controlled by the factory installed main

unit control system.

12. Hot Gas Bypass: Provide hot gas bypass control factory installed on one

refrigerant circuits. Hot gas bypass control to include a fully modulating hot gas

bypass control valve, solenoid valve, associated piping and be automatically operated

by the units microprocessor control. Modulate valve for capacity control. Partial

modulation for freeze protection will not be acceptable.

K. ROOF CURB

1. A prefabricated 12-gauge galvanized steel, mounting curb, designed and

manufactured by the unit manufacturer, provided for field assembly on the roof

decking prior to unit shipment. Roof curb to be a full perimeter type with complete

perimeter support of the air handling section and rail support of the condensing

section. Provide supply and return opening duct frames as part of the curb structure

allowing duct connections to be made directly to the curb prior to unit arrival. Curb to

be a minimum of 16-inch high and include a nominal 2-inch x 4-inch wood nailing

strip. Provide gasket for field mounting between the unit base and roof curb.




L. CONTROLS

1. Equip each unit with a complete microprocessor based control system. Unit

control system to include required temperature and pressure sensors, input/output

boards, main microprocessor and operator interface. Unit control system to perform

unit control functions including scheduling, unit diagnostics and safeties. Control

sequences to include constant air volume or zone temperature control and building

static pressure control. Boards to be individually replaceable for ease of service.

Microprocessors, boards, and sensors to be factory mounted, wired and tested.

2. Microprocessor to be a stand-alone DDC controller not dependent on

communications with any on-site or remote PC or master control panel.

Microprocessor to maintain existing set points and operate stand alone if the unit

loses either direct connect or network communications. Provide microprocessor

memory protected from voltage fluctuations as well as any extended power failures.

Factory and user set schedules and control points maintained in nonvolatile memory.

No settings to be lost, even during extended power shutdowns.

3. Main microprocessor to support an RS-232 direct connection to a product service

tool or a modem. A BACnet ethernet communications port to be provided for direct

communication into the BMS network.

4. Provide digital inputs and outputs protected against damage from transients or

wrong voltages. Each digital input and digital output equipped with an LED for ease

of service. Terminate field wiring at a separate, clearly marked terminal strip.

5. Provide microprocessor memory protected from voltage fluctuations as well as

any extended power failures. Microprocessor to support an RS-232 direct connect

from a PC. The microprocessor to maintain existing set points and operate stand

alone if the rooftop loses either direct connect or network communications.

6. Open Communications Protocol-The unit control system to have the ability to

communicate to an independent Building Management System (BMS) through a

direct BACnet ethernet communication connection. The independent BMS system to

have access to “read only' variables and “read & and write” variables.

Communications does not require field mounting of any additional sensors or devices

at the unit.

a. Provide BMS system capable of interacting with the individual rooftop

controllers in the following ways:

1. Monitor controller inputs, outputs, set points, parameters and alarms

2. Set controller set points and parameters

3. Clear alarms




4. Reset the cooling and heating discharge air temperature set point.

5. Reset the duct static pressure set point.

6. Set the heat/cool changeover temperature.

7. Set the representative zone temperature.

8. It will be the responsibility of the Systems Integrating Contractor to

integrate the rooftop data into the BMS control logic and interface stations.

15731-03 EXECUTION

A. INSTALLATION


2. Roof curb to be mounted level on roof in accordance to NRCA manuals and

details. Secure to structure per engineered/sealed seismic installation details.

3. Unit to be secured to curb per seismic installation details.

4. Provide flexible connections for electrical power, hot water piping.

5. Seal openings between curb and building interior.

6. Protect the roof from damage during installation. Secure factory touch-up paint to

repair scratches and minor damage to equipment prior to Start-up. Comb evaporator

and condenser coils to repair any minor fin damage.

7. Control wiring from roof-mounted equipment must be routed in conduit from

above roof to inside building or must be routed through roof curb inside unit. Control

wiring must not be exposed to weather.

B. INSPECTION

1. Examine areas and conditions under which units are to be installed. Do not


C. CONNECTIONS







a. Hot-Water Heating Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division

15. Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff or balancing valve and

union or flange at each connection.

3. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.

Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific

connection requirements:

a. Install ducts to termination in roof curb.

b. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out

decking under entire roof curb.

c. Terminate return-air duct through roof structure.

d. Fill void between roof and bottom of unit with 3-pound density acoustic batt.

e. Install normal-weight, 3000 PSI (20.7 MPa), compressive strength (28-day)

concrete mix inside roof curb, 4-inches thick.

4. Electrical System Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division

16 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls.

5. Ground equipment according to Division 16.




D. WATER COIL INSTALLATION

1. General:



c. Install filters upstream of coils and wheel prior to fan operation.



to inspect[, test, and adjust] field-assembled components and equipment installation,

including connections[, and to assist in field testing]. Report results in writing.




2. Perform the following field quality-control tests and inspections and prepare test

reports:

a. After installing rooftop air conditioners and after electrical circuitry has been

energized, test units for compliance with requirements.

b. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.

c. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to

confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

d. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning


3. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified

above.

F. STARTUP SERVICE

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

2. Protect or remove energy recovery devices prior to starting the units to insure

damage does not occur to the devices or media. Replace at no cost to Owner if

devices/media get damaged.

3. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions and do the following:

a. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing.

b. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber.

c. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, air-cooled outside coil, energy

recovery devices, internal coils, and fans.

d. Inspect internal insulation.

e. Verify that labels are clearly visible.

f. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.

g. Verify that controls are connected and operable.

h. Verify that filters are installed.

i. Clean outside coil and inspect for construction debris.




j. Adjust vibration isolators.

k. Lubricate bearings on fan.

l. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration

and binding.

m. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.

n. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Start refrigeration system in summer only.

2. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.

o. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify

sequences.

p. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by

manufacturer.

q. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits.

r. Inspect outside-air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return-air

dampers.

s. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following:

1. Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.

2. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.

3. Outside-air, dry-bulb temperature.

4. Outside-air-coil, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.

t. Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following:

1. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures.

2. Short circuiting of air through outside coil or from outside coil to outside-

air intake.

u. After startup and performance testing, change filters, vacuum coils, lubricate

bearings, adjust belt tension, and inspect operation of power vents.




G. ADJUSTING

1. Adjust initial temperature, humidity, and CO2 set points.

2. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

3. Occupancy Adjustments: Within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions.

Provide up to two visits to site outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose,

without additional cost.

H. DEMONSTRATION


personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain rooftop air conditioners. Reference

Division 1.

END OF SECTION



SMALL SPLIT SYSTEM & UNITARY HVAC EQUIPMENT SECTION 15732 - 1 of 4

SECTION 15732 - SMALL SPLIT SYSTEM & UNITARY HVAC

EQUIPMENT

15732-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY

1. Work Included: Materials, installation and testing of:

a. Ductless Split Systems Cooling Only

b. Accessory Equipment

B. RELATED SECTIONS

1. Contents of Section 15020 and Division 1, General Requirements apply to this

section.



Requirements.

2. In addition, meet the following: ARI 610.

D. SUBMITTALS




Requirements.

2. In addition, meet the following: Efficiency ratings, cooling/heating performance,

fan performance, sound performance to meet or exceed basis-of-design as scheduled

on plans.

F. WARRANTY







a. Refrigeration compressor(s): 5-year warranty.

15732-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Ductless Split Systems:

a. Mitsubishi

b. Sanyo

c. Daikin

d. Carrier

B. DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEMS - COOLING ONLY

1. Description: Self-contained, matched factory-engineered and assembled. Pre-

wired indoor and outdoor units. UL/ETL listed.

2. Outdoor Unit:

a. Self contained, consisting of cabinet, compressor system, condenser fan

matched to indoor unit.

1. Cabinet: Fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized, and finished with

powder coated baked enamel.

b. Refrigerant System:

1. HFC refrigerant or other refrigerant with zero ozone depletion potential

(ODP)

2. Compressor: To be inverter driven, hermetic rotary type.

c. Air System:

1. Fan: Propeller Type with one direct drive, inverter driven, variable speed

motor.

2. Motor: Premium efficiency with inherent protection, permanently

lubricated bearings and variable speed drive compatible.




3. Coil: Copper tubes and aluminum fins.

d. Condensate Drain:

1. Provide drain pan sloped to drain away from unit. Drain pan with a single

drain connection.

2. Condensate pump kit provided with unit.

3. Secondary drain pan; Condensate overflow shut-off float switch and

external alarm.

e. Controls: Single source for both indoor and outdoor units, with low/high

pressure switch.

3. Indoor Unit(s):

a. Self contained wall mounted evaporator unit(s) matched to outdoor unit.

b. Cabinet:

1. Non-flammable, high impact polymer with a white finish.

2. Power Source: To be a single point power connection or sub-fed from

outdoor condensing unit.

c. Refrigeration System: HFC refrigerant or other refrigerant with zero ozone

depletion potential (ODP).

d. Condenser Air System:

1. Fan: An assembly with one or two inline fan(s) with a single direct drive

motor.

2. Filter: Polypropylene, furnished with the unit, removable and washable.

3. Coil: Direct expansion type with copper tubes mechanically bonded into

aluminum fins.

e. Controls: Wireless thermostat. Control to be integral with unit.

15732-03 EXECUTION

A. INSTALLATION

1. Provide Seismic restraint.




2. Install with required clearances and access for maintenance.

3. Shut-off/hose kits for all hydronic connections.

4. Condensate piped to indirect waste connection; cleanouts at changes of direction;

sized and sloped to drain per Code.

5. Install factory furnished devices for field installation.

B. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

1. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks and tie-down straps.

2. After energizing units: Test units for proper fan rotation. Test and adjust controls

and internal safeties. Replace malfunctioning units and retest.

3. Thoroughly clean exposed portions of equipment. Install new filters prior to final

test and balance and again prior to final acceptance.

END OF SECTION



TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER EQUIPMENT SECTION 15745 - 1 of 5

SECTION 15745 - TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER EQUIPMENT

15745-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY

1. Work Included: Materials, installation and testing of:

a. Hot Water Cabinet Unit Heaters

b. Hot Water Finned Tube Radiation

c. Flat Tube Radiant Panels

B. RELATED SECTIONS


section.



Requirements.

D. SUBMITTALS




Requirements.

F. WARRANTY

1. Warranty of materials and workmanship as outlined in Section 15020 and





15745-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS


B. HOT WATER CABINET UNIT HEATERS

1. Manufacturers:

a. Trane

b. Carrier

c. McQuay

d. Air Therm

2. Description: Horizontal cabinet unit heater with cabinet, hot water heating coil,

fan and motor assembly, filter and controls. UL listed and wired per NEC.

3. Cabinet: 18-gauge removable panels for access, 1/2-inch closed cell interior

insulation.

4. Heating Coil: Seamless copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to

tubes, 250 PSI working pressure with manual air vent.

5. Fan and Motor: Forward curved centrifugal fan or fans, steel or aluminum

construction, direct drive, multi-speed permanent split capacitor motor with thermal

overload protection, permanently lubricated bearings.

6. Filter: 1-inch thick, disposable panel filters.

7. Configuration: As scheduled on drawings.

8. Piping Package: 300 PSI working pressure, unions at coil connection, 20 mesh

strainer on supply, ball valve on supply and return, flow control valve with two P/T

plugs on return, two-position control valve or two-position three-way valve as shown

on drawings.

9. Electrical:

a. Junction box: Pre-wire control components to junction box.

b. Disconnect: Unit mounted disconnect switch on interior of unit.




c. Speed Controller: Three speed switch mounted in unit.

10. Control: Control specified in Section 15900 Instrumentation and Controls for

HVAC. Provide factory supplied controls wired to terminal strip including:

a. Heating valve actuators

b. Fan relay

C. HOT WATER FINNED TUBE RADIATION

1. Manufacturers:

a. Trane

b. Vulcan

c. Sterling

d. Standard

2. Description: Finned tube radiation with enclosure, heating elements and hangers.

3. Heating Element: 1-1/4-inch copper pipe with 4-1/4 x 4-1/4-inch mechanically

bonded aluminum fins.

4. Enclosure: 16-gauge cover with top grille, dirt guard gasket, enclosure extensions,

corner sections, sill extensions, mullion channels, end panels, access doors and

painted prime coat with baked enamel finish. Enclosures to extend from wall to wall,

covering elements and piping. Front panel hinge mounted with each individually

removable.

5. Hanger: Hanger assemblies include wall mounting channels, pipe brackets and

slide cradles with nylon or non-ferrous rubbing surface.

D. FLAT TUBE RADIANT PANEL

1. Manufacturers:

a. Runtal

b. Myson




2. General: Provide steel panel radiators of the lengths and in locations as indicated

on the drawings and of capacities, style and having accessories as scheduled. The

heating panel radiation to be of one-piece all-welded steel construction, consisting of

a pair of flattened water tube panels welded to headers at each end. Welded to the

inside of each panel to be steel corrugated fins to increase the convective output of

the radiator. The fins to start at no less than 3-inches from the end of the radiator, and

have no less than 32 fins per foot. The radiators to include an integral heavy gauge

(0.09-inch minimum) all-welded perforated top grille, which will cover the top of the

finned areas.

3. The headers to include inlet, outlet and vent connections. Standard connection

sizes are 1/2-inch NPT tapered thread for supply and return piping, and 1/8-inch for

the vent connection. Internal baffling to be provided for proper water flow.

4. The radiant heating panels to be available in lengths from 2'-0” to 29'-6” in 2-inch

even increments without the need for splicing. The panel radiation to be capable of

being mounted to typical stud wall construction without additional blocking or

strapping. Appropriate wall mounting brackets to be provided with the radiator.

Where wall mounting brackets are not suitable, the double panel radiators (up to four

tubes tall) are to be provided with cantilever wall brackets in lieu of the wall

mounting brackets.

5. Pressure Ratings: Pressure ratings for the panels to be as follows, based on

manufacturer's selection specific to the project conditions:

a. Standard: Working Pressure 56 PSI maximum, test pressure 74 PSI maximum.

b. Medium: Working Pressure 85 PSI maximum, Test Pressure 110 PSI

maximum.

c. High: Working Pressure 128 PSI maximum, Test Pressure 184 PSI maximum.

6. Panel radiation expansion to not exceed 1/64” per foot of radiation at 215ºF. The

installer to provide adequate expansion compensation for each radiator.

7. Finishes: The panel radiation to be cleaned and phosphatized in preparation for

the powder coat finish. The radiation to be finish painted with a gloss powder coat

finish, for a total paint thickness of 2-3 mils (0.002” - 0.003”).

8. Ribbed pipe cover trims, finished to match the radiators to be provided with the

radiation.

9. Provide combination shutoff valve/union fitting of less than 2-inches in width for

the supply and return to each panel radiator.

10. Provide flex connectors to provide expansion compensation for the radiators.




15745-03 EXECUTION

A. INSTALLATION

1. Avoid interference with structure and with work of other trades, preserving

adequate headroom and clearing doors and passageways. Check each piece of

equipment for defects, verifying that items function properly and that adjustments

have been made.

2. Finned Tube Radiation and Radiant Panels: Mount on wall using wall mounting

channels or on floor using pedestals.

3. Convectors: Install per manufacturer's instructions. Provide shut-off valve,

balance valve, drain valve, control valve, manual air vent.

4. Cabinet Unit Heaters: Install per manufacturer's instructions. Comply with

National Electric Code and UL listing. Provide shut-off valve, balance valve, drain

valve, control valve, manual air vent.

5. Damaged Coils: Make every effort to prevent damage to both built-up coils and

coils of packaged equipment. Comb damaged coil fins to be straight.

B. EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION

1. Provide for expansion of heating water lines with suitable anchors and swing

joints or expansion bends made up with pipe fittings.

C. CLEANING

1. Prior to acceptance, thoroughly clean exposed portions of terminal heat transfer

equipment, remove shipping labels and traces of foreign substance. Touch up

scratched surfaces of radiant panels with factory matching paint.

END OF SECTION



AIR COILS SECTION 15760 - 1 of 3

SECTION 15760 - AIR COILS

15760-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY

1. Work included: Materials, installation and testing of: Water Coils

B. RELATED SECTIONS


Section.



Requirements.


a. ARI 410 - Standard for Forced Circulation Air-Heating and Air-Cooling

Coils.

b. ASTM B117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray Apparatus.

D. SUBMITTALS

1. Submittals as required by Section 15020 and Division 1, General Requirements


a. Product data for each coil including performance, dimensions, operating

weights, pressure ratings.

b. Computer selection sheet indicating performance including hot and cold side

entering and leaving fluid/air conditions, flows, pressure drops, square feet of

heating surface, fouling factor, and heat transfer surface dimensions and

configuration.

c. Refrigerant Coils: Provide capacity plot of suction pressure versus total load.






Requirements.

2. In addition, meet the following: Coil capacity certified in accordance with ARI

410, latest edition.

F. WARRANTY



2. In addition: Provide extended three year warranty for coils with corrosion

protection coating.

15760-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Water Coils:

a. Pace

b. Trane

c. McQuay

d. Carrier

e. Colmac

f. York

g. Heatcraft

h. USA Coil

i. Temtrol





B. WATER COILS

1. General: Extended surface type consisting of copper tubing mechanically

expanded to bond with plate fins. Design for serpentine flow with one or more feeds

from common supply and return headers. Arrange for counter flow operation with

supply connections at the bottom.

2. Performance: Provide capacity indicated at water flows no greater than scheduled.

3. Factory Testing: Leak test coils under water at 300 PSIG minimum.

4. Working Pressure: 150 PSIG.

5. Construction:

a. Tubing: Seamless copper.

b. Fins: aluminum die formed plates. Continuous within the coil casing.

c. Casing: 16 gauge galvanized steel.

d. Headers: Seamless copper tube brazed to heat transfer tubes. Provide high

point air vent fitting and low point drain fitting.

e. Connections: Same end for supply and return unless noted otherwise.

f. Intermediate Supports: Provide for coils with finned length greater than 44-

inches, with maximum spacing of 42-inches.

15760-03 EXECUTION

A. WATER COIL INSTALLATION

1. General:



c. Install filters upstream of supply and exhaust air handler coils prior to fan

operation.

d. Pipe drain connection to floor drain.

e. For duct mounted cooling coils, provide drain pan.

END OF SECTION



HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS SECTION 15810 - 1 of 13

SECTION 15810 - HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS

15810-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Rectangular Ductwork Fabrication

b. Insulated Flexible Duct

c. Single Wall Round Ductwork Fabrication

B. RELATED SECTIONS


Section.



Requirements.

D. SUBMITTALS




Requirements..


a. NFPA Compliance:

1. NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

2. NFPA 90B, Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning

Systems.




b. Comply with SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction

methods, unless otherwise indicated. Provide sheet metal materials free of pitting,

seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

F. WARRANTY




1. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-

moving and distribution equipment and other air system components. Duct design is

generally diagrammatic and is not meant to be scaled. Major changes to layout or

configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect.

Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that

proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total

pressure.

15810-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Transverse Joints:

a. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

b. Nexus Inc.

c. Ward Industries, Inc.


2. Formed-On Flanges:

a. Ductmate Industries

b. Lockformer





3. Insulated Flexible Duct:

a. J.P. Lamborn Co.

b. ATCO

c. Flexmaster


B. MATERIALS

1. Galvanized Steel Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality,

ASTM A 653/A 653M FS Type B, with G90/Z275 coating. Ducts to have mill

phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view.

2. Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non-hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold

resistant.

a. Water Based Sealant for Brush-On Application: Flexible, adhesive sealant,

resistant to UV light when cured, UL 723 listed, and complying with NFPA

requirements for Class 1 ducts. Min. 69 percent solids, nonflammable. Durodyne

Duroseal, Hardcast Versa-Grip 181, McGill United Duct Sealer.

b. Solvent Based Sealant for Brush-On Application: One-part, nonsag, solvent-

release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant with a minimum of 75 percent solids,

nonflammable. McGill Uni-Coat, Hardcast Sure-Grip, 404.

3. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant

complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.

4. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

5. Two-Part Tape and Adhesive System: Hardcast FTD 20/DT, McGill Air Seal

Uni-Cast.

6. Silicon Sealant: Hardcast PT-302 or equal.

7. Polyurethane Sealant: General-purpose non-brittle sealant for gunned application.

Vulkem 616 or equal.




C. RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK FABRICATION

1. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other

construction according to SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible and complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types

and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and intervals.

a. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement

and rigidity class required for pressure class.

b. Deflection: Duct systems not-to-exceed deflection limits according to

SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

2. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using

manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size and spacing, and

joint reinforcement.

a. Formed-On Flanges: construct according to SMACNA's HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, Figure 1-4, suing corner, bolt, cleat,

and gasket details.

1. Duct Size: Maximum 30-inches wide and up to 2-inch wg pressure class.

2. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer

sealant.

b. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 19-

inches and larger and 0.0359-inch thick or less, with more than 10 SF of

nonbraced panel area unless ducts are lined.

D. INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCT

1. General: Comply with OMSC latest edition, Class 1.

2. Construction: Standard factory fabricated product. Inner wall: Impervious vinyl or

chlorinated polyethylene, permanently bonded to a vinyl or zinc-coated spring steel

helix.

3. Insulation: Fiberglass blanket insulation covered by an outer wall of vinyl or

fiberglass-reinforced metalized vapor barrier.

4. Listing: UL 181 listed Class 1 flexible air duct material. Overall thermal

transmission: No more than 0.25 BTU/in or hr/sq. deg. Fat 75F differential, per

ASTM C335.

5. Vapor transmission value no more than 0.10 perm, per ASTM E96




6. Pressure rating: 4-inch wg positive pressure and 1-inch wg negative pressure.

7. Performance Air friction correction factor: 1.3 maximum at 95 percent extension.

Working air velocity: Minimum 2000 FPM.

8. Flame spread rating: No more than 25.

9. Smoke development rating: No more than 50 as tested per ASTM E84.

10. Insertion loss: Minimum attenuation of 29 DB for 10-foot straight length at 8-inch

diameter at 500 Hz.

E. SINGLE WALL ROUND DUCTWORK FABRICATION

1. Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of a round

duct with a circumference equal to the perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct.

2. Round, Spiral Lock-Seam Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of material specified in

this section according to SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible.

3. Duct Joints:

a. Ducts up to 20-inches in Diameter: Interior, center-beaded slip coupling,

sealed before and after fastening, attached with sheet metal screws.

b. Ducts 21- to 72-inches in Diameter: Three-piece, gasketed, flanged joint

consisting of two internal flanges with sealant and one external closure band with

gasket.

c. Ducts Larger than 72-inches in Diameter: Companion angle flanged joints per

SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible, Figure 3-2.

d. Round Ducts: Prefabricated connection system consisting of double-lipped,

EPDM rubber gasket. Manufacture ducts according to connection system

manufacturer's tolerances.

1. Manufacturers: Lindab Inc. or approved equivalent.

e. 90-Degree Tees and laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with

SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible, with metal

thicknesses specified for longitudinal-seam straight ducts.

f. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with reduced entrance to branch taps and

with no excess material projecting from fitting onto branch tap entrance.




g. Fabricate elbows using die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction.

Bend radius of die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows to be 1.5 times duct

diameter. Unless elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as

follows:

1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction

complying with SMACNA's HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and

flexible, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal

thickness for pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg (minus 500 to

plus 500 Pa):

a) Ducts 3 to 36-inches in Diameter: 0.034-inch .

b) Ducts 37 to 50-inches in Diameter: 0.040-inch.

c) Ducts 52 to 60-inches in Diameter5: 0.052-inch.

d) Ducts 62 to 84-inches in diameter: 0.064-inch.

3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal

thickness for pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg:

a) Ducts 3 to 26-inches in Diameter: 0.034-inch.

b) Ducts 27 to 50-inches in Diameter: 0.040-inch.

c) Ducts 52 to 60-inches in Diameter: 0.052-inch.

d) Ducts 62 to 84-inches in Diameter: 0.064-inch.

4. 90-Degree, 2-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems or for

material-handling Class A or B exhaust systems and only where space

restrictions do not permit using radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness

turning vanes.

5. Round Elbows 8-inches and Less in Diameter: Fabricate die-formed

elbows for 45- and 90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60 and 90

degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or non-

standard diameter elbows with gored construction.

6. Round Elbows 9 through 14-inches in Diameter: Fabricate gored or

pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60 and 90 degrees unless space restrictions require

mitered elbows. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configurations or

nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction.




7. Round Elbows Larger than 14-inches in Diameter and All Flat-Oval

Elbows: Fabricate gored elbows unless space restrictions require mitered

elbows.

8. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8-inches in Diameter and Pressures

0.040-inch thick with 2-piece welded construction.

9. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings

specified above.

10. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14-inches in Diameter and Pressures

through 10-inch wg (2500 Pa): 0.022-inch .

15810-03 EXECUTION

A. DUCTWORK CONSTRUCTION

1. General: The following pressure class(es) be used in design of ductwork specified

in this section unless otherwise noted on drawings:

SYSTEM PRESSURE IP (inches of

water)

CLASS METRIC

Medium pressure supply (Fan

to Terminal Unit (TU))

0.5-inch higher than air

handlers discharge pressure

(min. 4-inch pressure class).

996.4 PA

Low pressure supply

(downstream of TU)

+ 1-inch 249 PA

Return main (>24-inch) 0.5-inch more negative than

return/exhaust fan pressure or

-2-inch pressure class,

whichever is more negative.

-498.2 PA

Return branch (<24-inch) 0.5-inch more negative than




-249 PA

General exhaust 0.5-inch more negative than




-498.2 PA

2. Duct Materials - Applied Locations

a. General: Following pressure class(es) used in design of ductwork specified in

this section unless otherwise noted on the drawings:




b. Fabricate ductwork from materials as follows.

1. Supply, Return and General Exhaust Air Ductwork and Plenums:

Galvanized steel unless specified or noted otherwise.

2. Supply Duct Branch Connection to Terminal Unit Inlet: Galvanized Steel.

3. Supply, Return and General Exhaust Duct Branch to Ceiling Outlet:

Flexible ductwork.

4. Transfer Grilles Mounted in Walls: Galvanized sheet metal in wall cavity.

3. Ductwork Installation:

a. General: Install entire duct system in accordance with drawings,

Specifications, and latest issues of local Mechanical Code, NFPA 90A, and

SMACNA Duct Construction Manual. At Contractor's option, rectangular

ductwork may be resized to maintain an equivalent air velocity and friction rate,

while maintaining a maximum aspect ratio of 3. Remove markings and tagging

from ductwork exterior surface in mechanical rooms and other locations where

ductwork is exposed.

b. The duct layout shown on the Contract Drawings is diagrammatic in nature.

Coordinate the ductwork routing and layout, and make alterations to the ductwork

routing and layout to eliminate physical interferences. Where deviations in the

ductwork routing as shown in the Contract Drawings are required, alterations may

be made so as not to compromise the air flow, pressure drop, and sound

characteristics of the duct fitting or duct run as shown on the Contract Drawings.

In the event Architect determines that the installed ductwork is inconsistent with

the above mentioned criteria, remove and replace at no additional cost to the

Owner.

c. Install round ducts in lengths not less than 12-feet (3.7 m) unless interrupted

by fittings.

d. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

e. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, shape, and for

connections.

f. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into

duct. Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12-

inches, with a minimum of 3 screws in each coupling.

g. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and

parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.




h. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other

structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

i. Install ducts with a clearance of 1-inch, plus allowance for insulation

thickness. allow for easy removal of ceiling tile.

j. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in

solid partitions unless specifically indicated.

k. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, air duct accessories, lighting

layouts, and similar finish work.

l. Electrical and IT Equipment Spaces: route ducts to avoid passing through

transformer vaults, electrical equipment spaces, IDF/MPOE rooms, and

enclosures.

m. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior

partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between

construction openings and ducts or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of

same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2-

inches.

n. Fire- and Smoke-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through

interior partitions and exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire, smoke or

combination fire and smoke dampers as governed by Building Code and AHJ,

including sleeves, and firestopping sealant.

o. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to withstand, without damage

to equipment, seismic force required by applicable building codes. Reference

SMACNA's Seismic Restraint manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems.

p. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is

enclosed. Follow SMACNA's Duct Cleanliness for New Construction.

q. Paint interiors of metal ducts, that do not have duct liner, for 24 -inches

upstream of registers and grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex finish coat

over a compatible duct material.

r. Install ductwork in the location and manner shown and detailed. Review

deviations required by job conditions with Architect prior to any fabrication.

Provide fittings for construction per SMACNA.

s. Fabricate radius elbows with centerline radius not less than 1-1/2 duct

diameters.




t. Do not install duct size transition pitch angles which exceed 30 degrees for

reductions in duct size in the direction of airflow, and 15 degrees for expansions

in duct size in the direction of airflow.

u. Install fixed turning vanes in square throat rectangular elbows and in tees.

v. Fabricate duct turns with the inside (smallest) radius at least equal to the duct

width (supply ducts) and 1.5 times radius (return and exhaust ducts). Where

necessary, square elbows may be used, with maximum available inside radius and

with fixed turning vanes.

w. Joints and Seam Joint Sealing:

1. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible for duct pressure class indicated.

2. For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg (500 Pa), seal transverse joints.

3. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.

4. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct size 8-inch

and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow.

5. Fasteners such as sheet-metal screws, machine screws or rivets to be

cadmium plated.

6. Rectangular Ductwork: Where intermediate joint reinforcement is required

for duct of negative pressure class, pre-drill stiffening flange and provide

fastener maximum 8-inches on center. Where retaining flanges are welded to

duct wall, paint welds with zinc coating.

7. Single Wall Round Ductwork: Joint to incorporate beaded slip collar with

minimum #8 sheet metal screws 8-inches on center. Seal ductwork as

specified in this section.

8. Seal joints and seams. Apply sealant to make end connectors before

insertion, and afterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.

4. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes

inside lining.

5. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and

control devices. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems,

complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage.

Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside

a metal ring.




6. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating

and maintenance activities as well as Code required clearances.

B. HANGING AND SUPPORTING

1. Support horizontal ducts within 24-inches of each elbow and within 48-inches of

each branch intersection.

2. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16-feet (5 m) and at each floor.

3. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-

fourth of failure (proof-test) load.

4. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

5. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely

cured.

6. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight aggregate

concretes or for slabs less than 4-inches thick.

7. Floor supports in mechanical rooms to be elevated 1-inch above finish floor and

void space filled with masonry grout.

8. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.

9. Hang rectangular sheet-metal ducts with a cross sectional area of less than 7 SF

with galvanized strips of No. 16 USS gauge steel 1-inch wide, and larger ducts with

steel angles and adjustable hanger rods similar to piping hangers. Support at a

maximum of 8-feet on center.

10. Anchor ducts securely to building in such a manner as to prevent transmission of

vibration to structure. Do not connect duct hanger straps to roof deck. Do not

support ducts from other ducts, piping or equipment.

11. Attach strap hangers installed flush with end of sheet-metal duct run to duct with

sheet-metal screws.

12. Construct exterior ductwork or ductwork which is otherwise exposed to weather

watertight and slope 1/4-inch per foot to avoid standing water.




C. CLEANING

1. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove

accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half system at a time. Protect

equipment that could be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass

during cleaning.

2. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment that

could be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide

adequate access into ductwork for cleaning purposes.

3. Grille and Exposed Duct Cleaning:

a. After completion of ductwork installation, operate each fan system (excluding

exhaust fans) for a minimum of 30 minutes prior to installation of ceiling grilles

and diffusers. After grilles and diffusers are installed, clean out accumulation of

particles from grilles and diffusers prior to acceptance.

b. Clean exterior surface of ducts exposed to public view of chalk, pencil and

pen marks, labels, sizing tags, dirt, dust, etc., so that upon completion of

installation, ducts are left in clean and unblemished manufactured conditions.

c. Exposed duct and grilles to remain free of dust entrained streaks due to

leakage at joints and grille connections during warranty period. Clean leaks, seal

and refinish to match existing if visible streaks develop.

D. FLEXIBLE DUCT

1. Install flexible duct with bend radius equal to 1.5 times the diameter. Minimum

length 2-feet. Maximum length 5-feet, unless noted otherwise.

a. Provide round neck grilles/diffusers or square-to-round transitions. Flex duct

connections directly to square neck not allowed.

b. Flex duct allowed in concealed spaces above lay-in ceilings only.

E. SPIN-IN FITTINGS AND FLANGED TAKE-OFFS

1. Install at branch takeoffs to outlets using round or flex duct.

2. Flanged take-offs secured with minimum 8-inch screw spacing (3 screws

minimum).

3. All ductwork taps and branches off of main ducts are to be at forty-five (45)

degrees whether shown on drawings or not (drawings are diagrammatic).




F. MOUNTING FOR SIDEWALL GRILLES AND REGISTERS

1. Mounting heights indicated on Drawings from finish floor to lower edge of grille

or register. Exception: If mounting height is not shown on drawings, use "Down 6-

inches". This indicates measurement from ceiling to top edge of grille or register.

2. Install sidewall return air grilles for "sight-tight" visibility at eye level (position

blades to obscure visibility from floor level).

END OF SECTION



AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES SECTION 15820 - 1 of 18

SECTION 15820 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Sheet Metal Materials

b. Backdraft Dampers

c. Dampers

d. Access Doors

e. Duct Test Holes

f. Dynamic Fire Dampers

g. Combination Fire and Smoke Dampers

h. Control Dampers

i. Turning Vanes

j. Flexible Connectors

k. Flexible Exhaust Extractor Arms

B. RELATED SECTIONS


Section.



Requirements.

D. SUBMITTALS






a. Manufacturer's catalog data and fabrication/installation drawings for each

factory fabricated duct accessory. Include leakage, pressure drop and maximum

back pressure data.

b. Shop Drawings: Indicate air duct accessories.

c. Manufacturer's installation instructions: Provide instructions for each factory

fabricated duct accessory.

d. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance

of project. See Section Division 1 Product Requirements, for additional

provisions.



Requirements.


a. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the

type of products specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented

experience.

b. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by

Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

c. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.

d. AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices.

e. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

f. UL 555 - Standard for Safety; Fire Dampers.

g. UL 555S - Standard for Safety; Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke

Control Systems.

F. WARRANTY






15820-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Backdraft Dampers:

a. Ruskin CB D6

b. Air Balance

c. Cesco

d. Greenheck

e. Nailor


2. Dampers:

a. Ruskin

b. Air Balance

c. Cesco

d. Greenheck

e. Nailor


3. Concealed Damper Hardware, Cable System:

a. Young Regulator Company


4. Access Doors:

a. Ductmate

b. Cesco

c. Ruskin

d. Nailor





5. Dynamic Fire Dampers:

a. Ruskin

b. Greenheck

c. CESCO

d. Air Balance

e. Nailor


6. Combination Fire and Smoke Dampers:

a. Ruskin

b. Greenheck

c. CESCO

d. Air Balance

e. Nailor


7. Control Dampers:

a. Ruskin

b. Greenheck

c. CESCO

d. Air Balance

e. Nailor


8. Turning Vanes:

a. Aerodyne

b. Ductmate Industries




c. Duro Dyne Corp

d. Metalaire Inc.

e. Ward Industries


9. Flexible Connectors:

a. Duro Dyne Corp.

b. Ventfabrics Inc.

c. Ward Industries


10. Flexible Exhaust Extractor Arms:

a. Nederman

b. Plymovent


B. SHEET METAL MATERIALS

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and

Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction

methods, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A

653M. Galvanizing: 1-1/4 ounces per square foot total both sides; ducts to have mill-

phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view.

3. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063, temper T6.

4. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where

installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and

stainless-steel ducts.

5. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36-inches or

less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36-inches.




C. BACKDRAFT DAMPERS

1. Basis-of-Design: Ruskin CB D6.

2. Description: Multiple-blade gravity balanced with center pivoted blades with

sealed edges, assembled in rattle free manner with 90-degree stop, adjustment device

to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

3. Frame: 0.125-inch thick 6063-T5 extruded aluminum channel with galvanized

steel braces at mitered corners. Provide mounting flange.

4. Blades: Single piece, overlap frame, parallel action, horizontal orientation,

minimum .070-inch 6063-T5 extruded aluminum material, maximum 6-inch width.

5. Bearings: Corrosion-resistant synthetic, formed as single piece with axles.

6. Blade Seals: Extruded vinyl, mechanically attached to blade edge.

7. Blade Axles: Corrosion-resistant, synthetic formed as single piece with bearings,

locked to blade.

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

9. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

10. Damper Capacity:

a. Closed Position: Maximum back pressure of 16-inches water gauge.

b. Open Position: Maximum air velocity of 2,500-feet per minute.

11. Counterbalances: Adjustable zinc plated steel weights mechanically attached to

blade. Must be capable of operating over wide range of pressures.

12. Finish: Mill aluminum.

13. Temperature Rating: -40 degrees F to 200 degrees F.

14. Operation of Blade:

a. Start to Open: 0.01-inch wg

b. Fully Open: 0.05-inch.

15. Pressure Drop: Maximum 0.15-inch wg at 1,500-feet per minute through 24-inch

by 24-inch damper.

16. Factory Sleeve: Minimum 20 gauge thickness, 12-inches in length.




17. Screen: At outdoor intake or discharge. 1/4-inch aluminum.

D. DAMPERS

1. Basis-of-Design: Ruskin MD35 (rectangular).

2. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories.

Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade

dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper

components to seal duct consistent with pressure class.

a. Pressure Classes of 3-Inch wg (750 Pa) or Higher: End bearings or other seals

for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of

operating shaft.

3. Rectangular Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-

blade design with linkage concealed in frame and suitable for horizontal or vertical

applications.

a. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum 16

gauge thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where

indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for

installing in ducts.

1. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 16 gauge thick, galvanized sheet steel.

2. Aluminum Frames: Hat-shaped, 10 gauge thick, aluminum sheet

channels; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and

flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.

3. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 10 gauge thick aluminum sheet.

4. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 16 gauge thick extruded aluminum.

5. Blade Axles: Minimum 1/2-inch diameter, plated steel, hex shaped,

mechanically attached to blade.

6. Bearings: Molded synthetic sleeve, turning in extruded hole in frame.

7. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

8. Mill galvanized.

9. Capacity:

a) Closed Position: Maximum pressure of 3-inches wg




b) Open Position: Maximum air velocity of 1,500-feet per minute across

24-inch by 24-inch damper.

4. Round Volume Dampers: Single-blade suitable for horizontal or vertical

applications.

a. Steel Frames: Galvanized, roll formed, minimum of 20 gauge thick with beads

at each end.

b. Blades: Minimum 20 gauge thick, galvanized sheet steel, round, single-piece.

c. Aluminum Frames: Minimum 10 gauge thick aluminum sheet.

d. Aluminum Blades: Minimum 10 gauge thick aluminum sheet.

e. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: Minimum 16-gauge thick extruded aluminum.

f. Blade Axles: Minimum 3/8-inch square, plated steel, mechanically attached to

blade.

g. Bearings: Molded synthetic sleeve, turning in hole in frame.

h. Finish: Mill galvanized.

i. Capacity:

1. Closed Position: Maximum pressure of 3-inches wg

2. Open Position: Maximum air velocity of 1,500-feet per minute.

j. Leakage: Maximum 40 cfm at 1-inch wg for 20-inches diameter damper.

k. Pressure Drop: Maximum 0.02-inch wg at 1,500-feet per minute through 20-

inch diameter dampers.

5. Jackshaft: 1-inch diameter, galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing

assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper

assemblies.

a. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each

damper in multiple-damper assembly.

b. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of

3/32-inch thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Include

center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include 2” elevated platform for

insulated duct mounting.




6. Concealed Damper Hardware: For dampers above non-removable ceilings (gyp,

plaster, decorative, etc.) where access panels have not been shown on Architectural

drawings or in locations where dampers are more than 2-feet above the ceiling,

provide:

a. Concealed Damper Regulator: Young Regulator Company Model 315 or


b. Cable System: Young Regulator Company or approved equivalent.

c. Controller: Young Regulator Company 270-275 or approved equivalent.

d. Control wrenches, wire stops, casing nuts, and stainless steel wire.

e. Paint cover plate to match ceiling color or as directed by Architect.

E. ACCESS DOORS

1. Duct Pressure Class 2-inch WC and Greater: Sandwich-type design with threaded

locking bolt assembly. Closed cell neoprene gasket permanently bonded to inside

panel. Zinc-coated steel wing nuts or polypropylene molded knobs with threaded

metal inserts - zinc coated bolts sealed to inner panel.

2. Duct Pressure Class 1-½-inch WC and Less: Galvanized steel assembly

incorporating frame, door, hinges, and latch(es). Frame tabbed for attachment to duct

panel. Double wall door panel with 1-inch insulation. Open cell neoprene gasket

attached to frame. Cam latches for tight closure.

3. Plenum Doors: Extruded aluminum frames with extruded santoprene seals.

Double-wall 20 gauge galvanized steel door panel with fiberglass insulation.

4. Size: Maximum size available to fit rectangular duct panel dimension or round

duct diameter. Plenum doors minimum 2-feet wide x 4-feet high.

F. DUCT TEST HOLES

1. Temporary Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material,

including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing

instruments and of length to suit duct insulation thickness.

G. DYNAMIC FIRE DAMPERS

1. Basis-of-Design: Ruskin Model DIBD2 (1-1/2 hour rated), Ruskin Model

DIBD23 (3-hour rated),




2. Ratings:

a. Fire Resistance: UL 555 classified and provide fire dampers with UL label

for fire rating as appropriate for wall rating and in conformance with NFPA 90A.

b. Dynamic Closure Rating: Dampers classified for dynamic closure to 2000-feet

per minute and 4-inches wg (1 kPa) static pressure.

3. Construction:

a. Frame: Roll formed, galvanized steel channel.

b. Sleeves: Damper to be supplied as a single assembly with an integral factory

sleeve.

c. Retaining Angles: Damper to be supplied with factory retaining angles sized

to provide installation overlap in accordance with manufacturer's UL listing.

d. Blades: Galvanized curtain type.

e. Closure Springs: Type 301 stainless steel, constant force or spring clip type.

f. Temperature Release Device: 165 degrees F.

g. Mounting: Vertical or Horizontal.

h. Finish: Mill galvanized.

4. Factory mounting angles and breakaway connections

5. Factory Tests: Factory cycle damper to assure proper operation.

H. COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS

1. Basis-of-Design: Ruskin Models FSD36 (leakage class II, 1-1/2 hour rated, for

use downstream of terminal units), FSD25R (leakage class I, 1-1/2 hour rated, for use

downstream of terminal units in round ductwork), FSD60 (leakage class I, 1-1/2 hour

rated, for use upstream of terminal units), FSD60-3 (leakage class I, 3 hour rated, for

use upstream of terminal units), -C (for use in tunnel corridor applications), -FA

(Front Access models), -SS (stainless steel models for use in stainless steel

ductwork), -M (modulating), -VALR (for use in validated systems), XP (for use in

explosion proof applications).




2. Ratings:

a. Fire Resistance: UL 555 classified and provide combination fire and smoke

dampers with UL label for fire rating as appropriate for construction rating and in

conformance with NFPA 90A.

b. Smoke Rating: Leakage Class Smoke Damper in accordance with UL555S.

Leakage class at 4 in. wg

c. Elevated Temperature Rating: 250 degrees F.

d. Air Flow Rating: 2000-feet per minute.

e. Differential Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg.

3. Construction:

a. Frame: 16 gauge roll formed, galvanized steel hat-shaped channel, reinforced

at corners. Structurally equivalent to 13 gauge U-channel type frame.

b. Blades (Ruskin Model FSD36):

1. Style: Single skin with 3 longitudinal grooves.

2. Action: Opposed.

3. Material: Minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel.

4. Width: Maximum 6-inches (152 mm).

c. Blades (Ruskin Model FSD60, FSD60-3, and FSD60FA):

1. Style: True airfoil-shaped, single piece, double skin.

2. Action: Opposed.

3. Material: Minimum 14 gauge equivalent thickness, galvanized steel.

4. Width: Maximum 6-inches.

d. Bearings: Self-lubricating stainless steel sleeve type, turning in extruded hole

in frame.




e. Seals:

1. Blade: Inflatable silicone fiberglass material to maintain smoke leakage

rating to a minimum of 450 degrees F and galvanized steel for flame seal to

1,900 degrees F. Mechanically attached to blade edge (glue-on or grip type

seals are not acceptable).

2. Jamb: Stainless steel, flexible metal compression type.

f. Linkage: Concealed in frame.

g. Axles: Minimum ½-inch diameter plated steel, hex-shaped, mechanically

attached to blade.

h. Mounting: Vertical and/or Horizontal.

i. Temperature Release Device: heat actuated, Quick Detect.

1. Close (in a controlled manner) and lock damper during test, smoke

detection, power failure, or fire conditions through actuator closure spring.

Actuator, at no time, to disengage from damper blades.

2. Allow damper to be automatically and remotely reset after test or power

failure conditions. After exposure to high temperature or fire, inspect damper

before reset to ensure proper operation.

3. Controlled closing and locking of damper in 7 to 15 seconds to allow duct

pressure to equalize. Instantaneous closure is not acceptable.

j. Release Temperature: 165 degrees F.

k. Actuator: Electric 120 V, 60 Hz, two-position, fail close.

l. Finish: Mill galvanized.

m. Fire Stat:

1. UL classified dual temperature device allows the damper to be re-opened

after initial closure from high heat.

2. Electrically and mechanically locks damper in closed position when duct

temperatures exceed 165 degrees F.

3. Allow damper to remain operable through a high limit temperature sensor

for smoke management purposes while temperature is below 250 degrees F.

4. Replaces EFL or PFL Ruskinâ Controlled Closure heat actuated

temperature release devices on standard dampers.




5. Blade position indicator switches: Two position indicator switches linked

directly to damper blade in order to allow remote indication of damper blade

position.

4. Factory mounting angles.

5. Factory Sleeve:

a. Minimum 20 gauge thickness.

1. Silicone caulk factory applied to sleeve at damper frame to comply with

leakage rating

2. requirements.

3. Factory breakaway connections.

4. Factory Tests: Factory cycle damper and actuator assembly to assure

proper operation.

I. CONTROL DAMPERS

1. Basis-of-Design: Ruskin Models CD36 (low leakage, for use in low pressure

ductwork), CDR25 (low leakage, for use in low pressure round ductwork), CDO25

(low leakage, for use in low pressure oval ductwork), CD60 (ultra low leakage, for

use in medium pressure ductwork).

2. Fabrication:

a. Frame: 16 gauge roll formed, galvanized steel hat-shaped channel, reinforced

at corners. Structurally equivalent to 13 gauge U-channel.

b. Blades (low leakage dampers):

1. Style: Single skin with 3 longitudinal grooves.

2. Action: Opposed blade for modulating applications, parallel blade for two

position application..

3. Orientation: Horizontal or vertical with thrust washers.


5. Width: Nominal 6-inches.




c. Blades (ultra low leakage dampers):

1. Style: Airfoil-shaped, single-piece.

2. Action: Opposed blade for modulating applications, parallel blade for two

position applications. .

3. Orientation: Horizontal or vertical with thrust washers. .


5. Width: Nominal 6-inches.

d. Bearings: Molded synthetic sleeve, turning in extruded hole in frame.

e. Seals:

1. Blade: Inflatable PVC coated fiberglass material and galvanized steel.

Mechanically attached to blade edge.

2. Jamb: Flexible metal compression type.

f. Linkage: Concealed in frame.

g. Axles: Minimum 1/2-inch diameter plated steel, hex-shaped, mechanically

attached to blade.

h. Mounting: Vertical or horizontal.

i. Finish: Mill galvanized for installation in galvanized sheetmetal and stainless

steel for installation in stainless steel ductwork.

3. Performance Data (low leakage dampers):

a. Capacity: Demonstrate capacity of damper to withstand HVAC system

operating conditions.

1. Closed Position: Maximum pressure of 5-inches wg (1.2 kPa) at a 12-inch

(305) blade length.

2. Open Position: Maximum air velocity of 2,000-feet per minute (610

m/min).

b. Leakage: Maximum 3.7 cubic-feet per minute per square foot (1.1

m3/min/m2) at 1-inch wg (0.25 kPa) for sizes 36-inches wide and above.

c. Pressure Drop: Maximum 0.07-inch wg (0.02 kPa) at 1,500-feet per minute

(457 m/min) across 24-inch x 24-inch damper.




4. Performance Data (ultra low leakage dampers):

a. Leakage: Damper to have a maximum leakage of 3 cfm/SF at 1-inch wg and

be AMCA licensed as Class 1A.

b. Differential Pressure:

1. Damper to have a maximum differential pressure rating of 13-inch wg

(3.2kPa) for a 12-inch blade.

c. Velocity: Damper to have a maximum velocity rating of 6,000-feet per minute

(1,829 m/min).

d. Temperature: Damper rated for -72 to 275 degrees F (-58 to 135 degrees C).

e. Pressure Drop: Maximum 0.1-inch wg (0.02 kPa) at 2,000-feet per minute

(457 m/min) across 24-inch x 24-inch damper.

5. Actuator: See specification Section 15900 Instrumentation and Control for

HVAC

6. Factory Flange Frame

7. Factory Sleeve: Minimum 20 gauge thickness.

8. Duct Transition Connection: As needed.

9. Factory Tests: Factory cycle damper assembly to assure proper operation.

J. FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

1. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and

adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1.

2. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2-inches wide

attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch wide, 0.028-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel or

0.032-inch thick aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts.

3. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with

weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.

a. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd. (810 g/sq. m).

b. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch (93 N/mm) in the warp and 440 lbf/inch (77

N/mm) in the filling.




c. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 degrees F (Minus 45 to plus 121

degrees C).

15820-03 EXECUTION

A. PREPARATION

1. Verify that electric power is available and of correct characteristics.

2. Coordinate smoke dampers and combination fire and smoke dampers with fire

alarm system.

3. Inspect areas to receive air duct accessories. Notify Engineer of conditions that

would adversely affect the installation of the dampers. Do not proceed until

conditions are corrected.

4. Coordinate location in RCP and color of concealed damper hardware with

Architects prior to installation.

B. INSTALLATION

1. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts.

2. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel

accessories in galvanized-steel, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and

aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

3. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and

where indicated.

4. Where installing volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and

erosion of duct liner.

5. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where

branches lead from larger ducts for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct

widths from each branch takeoff. Provide balancing dampers for all air inlets and

outlets.

6. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and where required for air testing and

balancing.

7. Install fire and combination fire and smoke dampers, with fusible links, and in

accordance with manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions.




8. Install all dampers square and free from racking with blade running horizontally.

9. Do not compress or stretch damper frames into duct or opening.

10. Handle dampers using sleeve or frame. Do not lift dampers using blades,

actuators, or jack shafts.

11. Install bracing for multiple sections to support assembly weights and hold against

system pressure. Install bracing as needed.

12. Turning Vanes:

a. Vanes must be installed, eliminating every other vane is not allowed.

b. Single thickness vanes cannot be over 36-inches long without intermediate

vane runner.

c. Install per SMACNA and fasten/support to prevent vibration, noise, and to

maintain proper alignment at design velocity

13. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining

accessories and terminal units as follows:

a. Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers, providing access to reset or reinstall

fusible links.

b. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8-inches by 5-inches.

2. Two-Hand Access: 12-inches by 6-inches.

3. Head and Hand Access: 18-inches by 10-inches.

4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21-inches by 14-inches.

5. Body Access: 25-inches by 14-inches.

6. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25-inches by 17-inches.

c. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, round access doors:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8-inches in diameter.

2. Two-Hand Access: 10-inches in diameter.

3. Head and Hand Access: 12-inches in diameter.




4. Head and Shoulders Access: 18-inches in diameter.

5. Body Access: 24-inches in diameter.

d. Label access doors.

14. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated

with fans and motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators. Provide sheet

metal weather cover over flexible connections located outdoors. Attach sheet metal

to either equipment side or ductwork side, but not both.

15. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg (1250 Pa) and higher, cover

flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

16. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing

purposes.

17. Flexible Exhaust Extractor Arms: Mount swivel mounting bracket on wall.

Provide structural support in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. Balance

exhaust fan system in accordance with Section 15950, Testing, Adjusting and

Balancing. Provide measurement showing appropriate capture velocity is achieved at

extractor hood.

C. ADJUSTING

1. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.

2. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.

END OF SECTION



HVAC FANS SECTION 15830 - 1 of 12

SECTION 15830 - HVAC FANS

15830-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY

1. Work Included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of HVAC fans,

fans integral to packaged equipment covered under this section:

a. Centrifugal Fans

b. Roof Exhaust Fans

c. Cabinet Fans

d. Ceiling Exhaust Fans

e. Dryer Vent Exhaust Fans

B. RELATED SECTIONS


section.



Requirements.

D. SUBMITTALS



a. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

b. Certified fan sound-power ratings.

c. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical

accessories.

d. Material gauges and finishes, including color charts.




e. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.



Requirements.


a. Motors: Premium efficiency per Section 15056. Electrically Commutated

Motors (ECM) where scheduled on drawings.

b. Sound power levels as scheduled on plans. If not scheduled, within 5 percent

of Basis-of-Design at design flow.

c. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on sea-level conditions.

d. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

e. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as



f. AMCA Compliance: Products are to comply with performance requirements

and are to be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

g. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories are to comply with

NEMA standards.

h. UL Standard: HVAC Fans are to comply with UL 705. Fans used in grease

exhaust applications are to be UL 762 listed for grease exhaust.

F. WARRANTY




1. Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping

limitations, with protective crating and covering.

2. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location,

according to manufacturer's written instructions.




3. Life and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

H. COORDINATION

1. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

2. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into

bases.

3. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

I. EXTRA MATERIALS



contents. Belts: one set for each belt-driven unit.

15830-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS


B. CENTRIFUGAL FANS

1. Manufacturers:

a. Greenheck.

b. Twin City.

c. Loren Cook Company.

d. PennBarry.

e. American Fan.

2. Description: Centrifugal or utility type centrifugal fans, as indicated, standard

factory finish, AMCA rated, single width, single inlet, double width, double inlet,

forward curved, backward inclined, or airfoil blades as scheduled.




3. Wheel and Inlet:

a. Forward Curved: Black enameled or galvanized steel construction with inlet

flange, back plate, shallow blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of

airflow, mechanically secured to flange and back plate; steel hub swgd to back

plate and keyed to shaft with set screw.

b. Statically and dynamically balance wheel within its own bearings with

maximum balance quality grade at bearings of G16 (0.20 in/sec peak velocity,

filter-in as measured at fan RPM) for 5 hp and below and G6.3 (0.15 in/sec peak

velocity, filter-in as measured at fan RPM) for 7.5 hp and above per ANSI S2.19.

AMCA 210 rated.

4. Housing:

a. Heavy gauge steel, spot welded for AMCA 99 Class I and II fans, and

continuously welded for Class III, adequately braced, designed to minimize

turbulence with spun inlet bell and shaped cut.

b. Finish:Factory finish to manufacturer's standard (Permatector). Prime

coating of aluminum parts is not allowed.

c. Removable angles and bolts for attaching flexible connections and discharge

dampers on fan outlet.

d. Housing Discharge Arrangement: Adjustable to eight standard positions.

5. Bearings and Drives

a. Bearings: Heavy duty pillow block type, self-greasing ball bearings or with

ABMA 9 L-10 life at 50,000 hours.

b. Shafts: Hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with keyway, protectively

coated with lubricating oil, and shaft guard. Provide anti-corrosive coating.

c. Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, keyed. Variable and

adjustable pitch sheaves for motors 5 hp and under, selected so required rpm is

obtained with sheaves set at mid-position fixed sheave for 7.5 hp and over,

matched belts, and drive rated as recommended by manufacturer or minimum 1.5

times nameplate rating of motor.

d. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt

drives.




e. Belt Guard: Fabricate to SMACNA Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible; 0.106-inch thick, 3/4-inch diamond mesh wire screen welded to steel

angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without

short circuiting vibration isolation, with provision for adjustment of belt tension,

lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place.

6. Motor: Integrally mounted, 1800 RPM maximum, with pre-lubricated sealed ball

bearings. ODP for motors located indoors and TEFC for motors exposed to moisture.

7. Accessories:

a. Discharge Dampers: Parallel blade heavy duty steel or aluminum, where

scheduled damper assembly with blades constructed of two plates formed around

and welded to shaft, channel frame, sealed ball bearings, with blades linked out of

air stream to single control lever. Motorized where indicated and gravity actuated

with counterweight, where motorized is not indicated.

b. Inlet/Outlet Screens: Galvanized steel welded grid, removable.

c. Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick opening latch type

handles and gaskets.

d. Scroll Drain: 1/2-inch steel pipe coupling welded to low point of fan scroll.

e. Weather Hoods: Heavy gauge protective covers over bearings and shaft

assembly for fans exposed to weather.

f. Vibration isolation as scheduled and specified. Reference Section 15072

Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.

g. Provide Class H insulation on motors used for smoke control.

C. ROOF EXHAUST FANS

1. Manufacturers:

a. Greenheck.

b. Cook.

c. Carnes.

d. PennBarry.

2. Description: Belt-driven or direct-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing,

wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base,

and accessories.




3. Wheel:

a. Single width, single inlet, backward inclined/airfoil blades

b. Aluminum hub and wheel with steel inlet bell.

c. Statically and dynamically balanced with its own bearings.

4. Housing to match scheduled basis-of-design: One piece heavy gauge spun

aluminum dome, hinged for service.

5. Bearings and Drives:

a. Bearings: Heavy duty pillow block type, self greasing ball bearings with

ABMA 9 L-10 life at 100,000 hours.


coated with lubricating oil.

6. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.

7. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.

8. Curb: Prefabricated insulated roof curb, galvanized steel, mitered ad welded

corners; 1-1/2-inch thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-

1/2-inch wood nailer, hinged with curb seal. Provide curb for flat, pitched or ridged

roof as indicated.



10. Accessories:

a. Inlet/Outlet Screens: Galvanized steel welded grid, removable.

b. Backdraft Damper: Parallel blade heavy duty steel or aluminum, where

scheduled, damper assembly with blades constructed of two plates formed around

and welded to shaft, channel frame, sealed ball bearings, with blades linked out of

air stream to single control lever. Motorized where indicated and gravity actuated

with counterweight, where motorized is not indicated.

c. Variable-Speed Controller: Where scheduled on drawings for direct drive

fans, provide solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 percent to less than 50

percent.

d. Disconnect Switch: Where not shown on Division 16 drawings, provide

nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan housing

factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.




e. Vibration Isolation: Wheel and motor mounted on integral double deflection

neoprene isolators.

D. CABINET FANS

1. Manufacturers:

a. Cook.

b. Greenheck.

c. Carnes.

d. PennBarry.

2. Description: Belt-driven or direct-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing,

wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and

accessories.

3. Wheel:

a. Double width, double inlet, forward curved blades.

b. Spun inlet cones.

c. Statically and dynamically balanced within its own bearings.

4. Housing: Acoustically insulated steel casing, factory standard finish, bottom

access, ducted inlet and outlet, backdraft damper.

5. Bearings and Drives

a. Bearings: Heavy duty pillow block type, self greasing ball bearings with

ABMA 9 life at 50,000 hours.


coated with lubricating oil.

c. Drive: Direct drive matched to fan loads with speed controller.

6. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt

drives.






8. Accessories:

a. Variable-Speed Controller: Where scheduled on drawings, provide solid-state

control to reduce speed from 100 percent to less than 50 percent.

b. Disconnect Switch: Where not shown on Division 16 drawings, provide



E. CEILING EXHAUST FANS

1. Manufacturers:

a. Cook.

b. Greenheck.

c. Carnes.

d. Broan.

e. PennBarry.

2. Description: Centrifugal fan, direct drive, cabinet and exhaust grille. AMCA

rated. Sound level as scheduled. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel are to be

removable for service.

3. Wheel: Double width, double inlet, forward curved blades:

4. Housing: Acoustically insulated steel casing, factory standard finish, bottom

access through grille, ducted outlet, egg crate inlet grille. Provide stainless steel grille

where scheduled.

5. Drives: Direct drive.

6. Back draft damper.

7. Motor: Integrally mounted with pre-lubricated sealed ball bearings.

a. Variable-Speed Controller: Where scheduled on drawings, provide solid-state

control to reduce speed from 100 percent to less than 50 percent.

b. Disconnect Switch: Where not shown on Division 16 drawings, provide






c. Manual Starter Switch: Single-pole rocker switch assembly with cover and

pilot light.

d. Time-Delay Switch: Assembly with single-pole rocker switch, timer, and

cover plate.

e. Motion Sensor: Motion detector with adjustable shutoff timer.

8. Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators.

9. Motor: Integrally mounted with pre-lubricated sealed ball bearings.

F. DRYER VENT EXHAUST FANS

1. Manufacturers:

a. Fantech Inc.

b. Tjernlund.

2. Accessories:

3. Description: UL-Listed in-line dryer vent exhaust for suitable for high moisture,

dust, and lint loadings. Suitable for temperatures up to 140 degrees F.

4. Housing constructed of UV resistant ABS-PC Blend thermoplastic.

5. Wheel: Backward curved impellers with venture inlet.

6. Accessories:

a. Secondary lint trap installed upstream of fan. Fantech DBLT4 or approved

equivalent.

b. Automatic switch to turn on/off fan set at 0.05-inches WG. with delay-on-

break timer to maintain fan operation for up to 10 minutes after dryer is off.

c. Integral external electrical terminal box with class B wiring and terminal strip.

d. Internally mounted capacitor.

15830-03 EXECUTION

A. INSTALLATION





2. Install power ventilators level and plumb.

3. Fans used for exhaust of kitchen grease hoods are to be UL 762 listed for grease

exhaust. Provide fans with grease terminator. Pipe from grease terminator to Code

approved location.

4. Fans used for exhaust of moist air is to be constructed of aluminum construction

and be warranted for their application in moist conditions.

5. Fans used in welding, chemical, and/or fume exhaust applications are to be of

spark-proof construction and are to be protected with coatings as required to protect

parts in the air stream from the chemicals and materials the fan will be exposed to.

6. Secure roof exhaust fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware.

7. Ceiling Exhaust Fans: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.

8. Units using vibration isolation devices are scheduled on drawings.

9. Support suspended units from structure threaded steel rods and vibration isolation

device scheduled on drawings.

10. In seismic zones, restrain support units.

11. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

12. Provide fixed sheaves required for final air balance.

13. Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.

14. Provide backdraft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated on

drawings.

15. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15

Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make

final duct connections with flexible connectors per 15820, Air Duct Accessories.

16. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.

17. Ground equipment.







B. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

1. Equipment Startup Checks:

a. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

b. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that

connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper

thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect

switches.

c. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.

d. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and

verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive

system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

e. Verify lubrication from bearings and other moving parts.

f. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers

in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.

g. Disable automatic temperature-control operators.

2. Starting Procedures:

a. Energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm.

b. Measure and record voltage and amperage.

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to

confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units,

replace with new units, and retest.

4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning


5. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.

6. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

7. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or

replacements are made.

C. ADJUSTING

1. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.




2. Adjust belt tension.

3. Lubricate bearings.

D. CLEANING

1. On completion of installation, internally clean fans according to manufacturer's

written instructions. Remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum fan

wheel and cabinet.

2. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect

exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged

finishes.

E. DEMONSTRATION


personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC fans. Train Owner's maintenance

personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting,

servicing, and maintaining equipment and schedules.

END OF SECTION



AIR TERMINAL UNITS SECTION 15840 - 1 of 5

SECTION 15840 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS

15840-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Single Duct Variable Volume and Constant Volume Units

b. Fan Powered Variable Volume Units

B. RELATED SECTIONS


section.



Requirements.

D. SUBMITTALS




Requirements.

F. WARRANTY






15840-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. Titus

2. Price

3. Krueger

4. Trane

5. Nailor

B. SINGLE DUCT VARIABLE VOLUME AND CONSTANT VOLUME UNITS

1. Casings: Minimum 22 gauge galvanized steel.

2. 1/2-inch dual density insulation which complies with UL 181 and NFPA 90A.

Exposed insulation edges to be coated with NFPA 90A approved sealant to prevent

entrainment of fibers in the airstream.

3. Plenum Air Outlets: S slip and drive connections.

4. Casing Leakage: Maximum casing leakage not to exceed 10 cfm at 1.0-inches

static pressure for inlet size larger than 12-inch and not to exceed 7 cfm at 1.0-inches

static pressure for inlet size 12-inch and smaller.

a. Configuration: Air volume damper assembly inside unit casing. Locate

control components inside protective metal shroud.

b. Volume Damper: Construct of galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and

self lubricating bearings; maximum damper leakage: 7 cfm maximum at inlet

static pressure. Shaft to be clearly marked on the end to indicate damper position.

Stickers or other removable markings are not acceptable. Damper to incorporate

a mechanical stop to prevent overstroking and a synthetic seal to limit close off

leakage to the maximum values shown in the damper leakage table.

c. Flow Sensor: Integral averaging type flow sensor utilizing multiple sensing

points with unit mounted calibration chart.


a. Construction: 1/2-inch copper tube mechanically expanded into aluminum

plate fins, leak tested under water to 200 PSIG pressure, factory installed.




6. DDC Controls: Damper operator, sensor, and other devices compatible with

temperature controls specified in Section 15900, Instrumentation and Control for

HVAC.

C. FAN POWERED VARIABLE VOLUME UNITS

1. Basic Assembly:

a. Casings: Minimum 22 gauge galvanized steel.

b. 1/2-inch dual density insulation which complies with UL 181 and NFPA 90A.

Exposed insulation edges to be coated with NFPA 90A approved sealant to

prevent entrainment of fibers in the airstream.

c. Plenum Air Outlets: S slip and drive connections.

d. Casing Leakage: Maximum casing leakage not to exceed 10 cfm at 1.0-inches

static pressure for inlet size larger than 12-inch and not to exceed 7 cfm at 1.0-

inches static pressure for inlet size 12-inch and smaller.

2. Basic Unit:

a. Configuration: Air volume damper assembly and fan in parallel arrangement

inside unit casing. Locate control components inside protective metal shroud.

b. Volume Dampers: Construct of galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and

self lubricating bearings; maximum damper leakage: 7 cfm maximum at 3-inches

inlet static pressure. Shaft to be clearly marked on the end to indicate damper

position. Stickers or other removable markings are not acceptable. the damper to

incorporate a mechanical stoop to prevent overstroking and a synthetic seal to

limit close off leakage to the maximum values shown in the damper leakage table.

c. Removable insulated access panel with quarter turn latches.

d. Flow Sensor: Integral averaging type flow sensor utilizing multiple sensing

points with unit mounted calibration chart.

e. Gasketed backdraft damper at fan discharge for parallel fan configuration.

f. Factory mounted filter rack on plenum inlet with 1-inch thick panel filters.

3. Fan Assembly:

a. Fan: Forward curved centrifugal type with direct drive ECM type, thermally

protected motor.

b. Speed Control: Infinitely adjustable with SCR controls.




c. Isolation: Fan/motor assembly on rubber isolators.

d. Electrical Characteristics: Reference Drawings.

4. Maximum primary inlet duct velocity not to exceed 2200 FPM.


a. Construction: 1/2-inch copper tube mechanically expanded into aluminum

plate fins, leak tested under water to 200 PSIG pressure, factory installed.

6. Wiring Terminations: Wire fan and controls to terminal strip. Provide terminal

lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials. Enclose

terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70. Incorporate single-point electrical

connection to power source.

a. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount fused disconnect switch on equipment

under provisions of Division 16.

7. DDC Controls: Damper operator, thermostat, and other devices compatible with

temperature controls specified in Section 15900, Instrumentation and Control for

HVAC.

15840-03 EXECUTION

A. INSTALLATION

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install level and plumb.

2. Provide ceiling access doors or locate units above easily removable ceiling

components.

3. Coordinate coil piping with controller to provide adequate access to the controller.

4. Support units individually from structure. Do not support from adjacent

ductwork.

5. Provide minimum five duct diameters minimum straight duct run upstream of

terminal unit.

6. Minimum of 3-feet straight duct downstream of terminal unit prior to first outlet

or first branch duct.

7. Branch inlet duct size to match unit inlet connection. For branch inlet ducts over

five feet long, increase branch duct size one size and provide transition immediately

upstream of minimum straight duct run.




8. Connect to ductwork in accordance with Division Section 15810, HVAC Ducts

and Casings.

9. Provide minimum of 5-ft of 1-inch (25 mm) thick lined ductwork downstream of

units. Lining to match terminal unit lining type.

10. Install heating coils in accordance with Section 15760, Air Coils. .

11. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

12. Replace filters with new filters immediately prior to occupancy.

B. ADJUSTING

1. Reset volume with damper operator attached to assembly allowing flow range

modulation from 100 percent of design flow to scheduled minimum percent full flow.

C. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

1. Upon completion of installation and prior to initial operation, test and demonstrate

that air terminals and duct connection to air terminals are leak tight. Repair or replace

air terminals and duct connections as required to eliminate leaks and retest to

demonstrate compliance.

D. START UP

1. Verify that installation of each air terminal is according to the Contract

Documents.

2. Check that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal

manufacturer to achieve proper performance.

3. Check that controls and control enclosure are accessible.

4. Verify that control connections are complete.

5. Check that nameplate and identification tag are visible.

6. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.

END OF SECTION



AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS SECTION 15850 - 1 of 5

SECTION 15850 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

15850-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Grilles, Registers, Diffusers

b. Louvers

c. Gravity Intake and Relief Penthouses

B. RELATED SECTIONS


section.



Requirements.

D. SUBMITTALS



a. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished;

indicate construction, finish, and mounting details.

b. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise

ratings for each type of air outlet and inlet.

c. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation,

room location, quantity, model number, size and accessories furnished.



Requirements.





a. Air distribution Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule lists basis-of-design,

with any specialty accessories, construction, finish or other criteria noted on

schedule. Submitted air distribution must match criteria of basis-of-design:

1. Construction materials and appearance.

2. Frame/installation method.

3. Isothermal throw plus or minus 5 percent at design flows shown on

drawings.

4. Noise Criteria: NC value plus or minus 1 at design flows shown on

drawings.

5. Accessories: Equal to Basis-of-Design.

F. WARRANTY



15850-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS


B. GRILLES, REGISTERS, DIFFUSERS

1. Diffuser, Register and Grille Schedule lists basis-of-design, with specialty

accessories, construction, finish or other criteria noted on schedule. Submitted air

distribution must match criteria of basis-of-design, including accessories and finish:

a. Matching construction materials and appearance. Equal installation

method/frame.

b. Pressure drop equal to or less than basis-of-design at CFM on plans.

c. Throw: Isothermal jet throw plus or minus 5 percent of basis-of-design at

CFM listed on plans.




d. Noise Criteria: Plus or minus 1 NC of basis-of-design at CFM listed on plans.

If basis-of-design NC is below registered level, submitted must match. NC rating

with 10 dB room factor or less.

2. Provide 1-, 2-, 3-, or 4-way deflection as indicated on plans.

3. Register Dampers: Dampers utilized with grilles. Opposed blade dampers

utilizing a side operated worm drive which provides external duct operation. Slot the

end of the shaft to receive a screwdriver. Factory assembled side operator. Construct

of the same material as the grille. Manufacturer same as grilles/diffuser.

4. Coordinate mounting frames with ceiling construction type. Verify per reflected

ceiling plans.

5. Manufacturers: Anemostat, Carnes, Environmental Air Products, Krueger,

Metalaire, Nailor, Price Co, Titus, Tuttle & Bailey, Seiho.

C. LOUVERS

1. General: Frame and sill styles compatible with adjacent substrate, specifically

manufactured to fit into construction openings with accurate fit and adequate support

for weatherproof installation. Reference Drawings and Specifications for types of

substrate which will contain each type of louver. Construct of aluminum extrusions,

ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5. Weld units or use stainless steel fasteners. On inside

face of exterior louvers, provide anodized aluminum wire insect screen mounted in

removable extruded aluminum frames. AMCA licensed performance ratings.

2. Blades set 3 to 5-inches on center, 37.5 degree angle with rain hook on blade,

minimum blade thickness 0.080-inch, drainable blade style. Minimum 57 percent

free area for 48-by 48-inch unit. Maximum water penetration 0.01 ounce water psf

free area at 1000 FPM. Maximum intake pressure drop of 0.10-inch wg at 750 FPM

free velocity. Provide downspouts in jambs, designed to drain water from louver for

minimum water cascade from blade to blade. Provide drain gutter in head frame and

each blade.

3. Reference Drawings for free area required.

4. Provide access door in duct to clean birdscreen.

5. Finish: factory Kynar 500 fluoropolymer spray finish color to be selected by

Architect. Conform to AAMA 605.2. Apply coating following cleaning, and

pretreatment. Dry louvers before final finish application. 1.2 mils total dry film

thickness when baked at 450 degrees F for ten minutes.

6. Manufacturers: Ruskin Manufacturing Model ELF6375DX, Pottorff, Carnes,

Cesco, Greenheck or approved equivalent.




D. GRAVITY INTAKE AND RELIEF PENTHOUSES

1. Stormproof, gravity type. Penthouse: Aluminum or fiberglass. Cover:

Removable and lined with fiberglass insulation to prevent condensation. Provide

aluminum insect screen, roof curb, and anti-condensation coating.

2. Finish: factory prime coat finish color to be selected.

3. Manufacturers: Acme, Breidert, Carnes, Greenheck, JencoFan, ILG, Cook, Penn.

15850-03 EXECUTION

A. INSTALLATION

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide seismic supports,

clips, and bracing per local code.Coordinate installation of framing. Provide complete

coverage of rough openings by integral device flanges or auxiliary frames. Where

above ceiling location is unconditioned space, caulk rough openings; repair and re-

paint locations where dust entrainment streaks develop due to unsealed openings.

2. Damp locations, such as lockers, restrooms, showers, natatoriums, whirlpool/spas,

to have aluminum construction even if scheduled otherwise; mounting hardware to be

stainless steel.

3. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to

conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. Coordinate

with architectural reflected ceiling plan(s).

4. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. 18-inch straight duct

section or acoustic plenum at connection. Provide square to round adapters where

required for connection to round ducts.

5. Provide integral balancing dampers for diffusers, and grilles and registers where

duct manual balancing dampers are not shown or specified.

6. Adjust discharge direction and spread per plans. Adjust throws of air outlets to

eliminate drafts and to distribute air during heating and cooling operation.

7. Exterior color of grilles per Architect. White finish if not otherwise scheduled or

noted by Architect. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black.

8. Ceiling membrane: Protect ceiling membrane per code. Fire caulk around

openings. Provide listed radiation damper in rated roof/ceiling or floor/ceiling

assemblies as required per code.




B. LINEAR SLOT DIFFUSERS

1. Coordinate connection plenum dimensions with linear slot final dimensions to

conform with manufacturer's recommendations, or as indicated. Total and active

lengths as noted on drawings. Blank off unused sections. Coordinate frame type with

Architect.

2. Paint surfaces visible behind air outlets and inlets, including blank-off sections,

matte black unless otherwise called for on drawings.

C. CLEANING

1. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean

exposed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers,

and grilles that have damaged finishes.

END OF SECTION



HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES SECTION 15860 - 1 of 6

SECTION 15860 - HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES

15860-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Activated Carbon Filters

b. Disposable Panel Filters

c. Odor Control Filters

d. Filter Frames and Housings

e. Filter Gauges

B. RELATED SECTIONS


section.

2. In addition, reference the following:

a. Division 1, Temporary Facilities and Controls: Filters for temporary heating

and ventilating.

b. Division 16, Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring

connections.



Requirements.


a. ARI 850 - Commercial and Industrial Air Filter Equipment; Air-Conditioning

and Refrigeration Institute.

b. ASHRAE Std 52.1 - Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air

Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter;

American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.




c. ASHRAE Std 52.2 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning

Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size; American Society of Heating,

Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.

d. Standard 52.2 - Method of testing general ventilation air-cleaning devices for

removal efficiency by particle size.

e. UL 900 - Standard for Air Filter Units; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

D. SUBMITTALS



a. Product Data: Provide data on filter media, filter performance data, filter

assembly and filter frames, dimensions, motor locations and electrical

characteristics and connection requirements.

b. Shop Drawings: Indicate filter assembly and filter frames, dimensions, motor

locations, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

c. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and change-out

procedures.

d. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include instructions for operation,

changing, and periodic cleaning.

e. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in


1. See Division 1, Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

2. Extra Filters: Two sets of each type and size.



Requirements.

F. WARRANTY







1. Conform to ARI 850 Section 7.4. Dust Spot Efficiency: Plus or minus 5 percent.

15860-02 PRODUCTS

A. FILTER MANUFACTURERS

1. American Filtration Inc

2. AAF International/American Air Filter

3. AAF International/American Air Filter.

4. Camfil Farr Company

5. Eco-Air Products

6. Filtration Group.

7. Flanders Corp.

8. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. ACTIVATED CARBON FILTERS

1. Assembly: Galvanized steel unit incorporating extruded aluminum tracks to

accommodate filter servicing trays in deep V arrangement arranged for upstream

servicing with disposable panel pre-filter. Nominal Size: 12 x 24 x 29-inches or 24 x

24 x 29-inches.

2. Media:

a. Activated Carbon Density: 34 lb./cu. ft., pelletized or granular.

b. Carbon Tetrachloride Activity: Minimum 60 percent; in thin bed.

c. Trays: Nominal size 24-inch by 24-inch by 5/8-inches thick.

d. Carbon: 1.42 cu. ft. per 1000 CFM nominal air flow capacity.

3. Rating: 500 FPM face velocity, 0.45-inch WG resistance.




C. DISPOSABLE PANEL FILTERS

1. Media: UL 900 Class 2, fiber blanket, factory sprayed with flameproof, non-drip,

non-volatile adhesive.

a. Nominal Size: 12 x 24-inches or 24 x 24-inches.

b. Thickness: 2-inch.

2. Performance Rating:

a. Face Velocity: 500 FPM.

b. Face Velocity: 350 FPM (2.54 m/sec).

c. Initial Resistance: 0.10-inch WG.

d. Initial Resistance: 0.23-inch WG (37 Pa).

e. Recommended Final Resistance: 0.50-inches WG.

f. MERV Rating: 8.

3. Casing: Cardboard frame.

4. Holding Frames: 20 gauge minimum galvanized steel frame with expanded metal

grid on outlet side and steel rod grid on inlet side, hinged with pull and retaining

handles.

D. ODOR CONTROL FILTERS

1. Assembly: Galvanized steel unit with absorber panel mounting tracks, universal

holding frame for high efficiency pleated pre-filter and medium efficiency pleated

final filter, arranged for upstream or side servicing.

2. Media:

a. Each 24 by 24 module contains 12 adsorber trays with 3.0 cubic feet of

granular sorbent material rechargeable through service cap.

b. Sorbent Media: 50/50 blend of activated coconut shell carbon and potassium

permangante.

c. Sorbent Media: Activated coconut shell carbon with minimum carbon

tetrachloride activity rating of 60 percent, 40 percent absorptivity by weight and

retentivity of 29 percent when evaluated with toluene.




d. Rating: 500 FPM face velocity, 0.50 WG resistance.

E. FILTER FRAMES AND HOUSINGS

1. General: Fabricate filter frames and supporting structures of 16 gauge galvanized

steel or extruded aluminum T-section construction with necessary gasketing between

frames and walls.

2. Standard Sizes: Provide for interchangeability of filter media of other

manufacturers; for panel filters, size for 12 x 24-inches or 24 x 24-inches filter media,

minimum 2-inches thick; for extended surface and high efficiency particulate air

filters, provide for upstream mounting of panel filters.

F. FILTER GAUGES

1. Manufacturers:


b. H.O. Trerice Co

c. Weiss Instruments.

2. Direct Reading Dial: 3-1/2-inch diameter diaphragm actuated dial in metal case,

vent valves, black figures on white background, front recalibration adjustment, range

0-4.0-inch WG, 2 percent of full scale accuracy.

15860-03 EXECUTION

A. INSTALLATION

1. Install air cleaning devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. Prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters with felt, rubber, or neoprene

gaskets.

3. Install filter gauge static pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters. Mount

filter gauges on outside of filter housing or filter plenum, in accessible position.

Adjust and level.

4. Operation During Construction: If air handlers are operated during construction,

provide treated 2-inch media construction filter in front of pre-filters and replace

periodically to prevent dirt carryover. Install clean prefilters prior to air balancing.




5. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place.

Replace temporary filters used during construction and testing, with clean set.

6. Provide filter gauges on filter banks, installed with separate static pressure tips

upstream and downstream of filters.

END OF SECTION



INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PERFORMANCE SECTION 15900 - 1 of 54

SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 15900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS

15900-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY

1. Work Included: Design (including detailed sequence of operations), materials,

installation and testing of:

a. Communications

b. Operator Interface

c. Controller Software

d. Web Based Access

e. BAS Graphics

f. Building Controllers

g. Application Specific Controllers

h. Advanced Application Controllers

i. Application Specific Controller - Terminal Unit Controllers

j. Input/Output Interface

k. Power Supplies and Line Filtering

l. Control Panels

m. Auxiliary Control Devices

n. Wiring and Raceways

2. This is a performance specification and Contractor is responsible for design tasks

and engineering.

B. RELATED SECTIONS


section.




SPECIFICATIONS



Requirements.


a. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135 and addendum, BACnet.

b. UL 916 Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Energy Management

Equipment, Canada and the US.

c. FCC Part 15, Subpart J, Class A.

d. BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL).

D. SUBMITTALS



a. Prepare and submit a detailed schedule of work. Schedule to identify

milestones such as equipment submittals, control panel diagrams, color graphic

panel displays, Interlock.

b. Wiring diagrams, control program sequence software flow chart diagrams,

conduit layout diagrams, device location diagrams, equipment and component

deliveries, installation sequencing, controller startup, point to point startup,

control programming, sequence testing, commissioning/acceptance testing and

training.

c. Submit design drawings, sequences of operation, program listings, software

flow charts and details for each typical piece of equipment and system being

controlled. No work to be initiated or fabrication of any equipment started prior

to the Owner's Representatives return of REVIEWED submittals.




SPECIFICATIONS

1. Sequence of Operation - Please note that the sequence of operation

included in the design documents is intended only to communicate the

Engineers’ general control intent and is not to be used as a direct reference for

programming of the EMS system. Verbatim duplication of the Engineer’s

Sequence of Operation on the submittals is discouraged and may result in non-

approval of the submittal. Sequence of operation on submittals shall

accurately detail the system’s intended programming, and shall include details

of all enhancements, adjustments, or deviations from the Engineer’s sequence

of operation. Submitted sequence of operation shall be written with a logical

and organized format and flow. Sequence of operation language shall be

detailed, clear, and unambiguous. Point descriptors and point nomenclature

referenced in the submitted sequence of operation shall match those (to be)

actually programmed. As-built submittal Sequence of Operation shall include

all modifications to the programming made as a result of any addendum,

bulletins, RFI’s, change orders, and commissioning.

d. Format: Make each submittal in one complete and contiguous package.

partial or unmarked submittals will be rejected without review.

e. Submit Manufacturers Data as follows:

1. Complete materials list of items proposed to be furnished and installed. A

complete Bill of Materials, listing materials, components, devices, wire and

equipment are required for this work. The Bill of Materials to be separate for

each controller on its own page(s) and to contain the following information for

each item listed:

a) Manufacturer's Name and Model number with furnished options

highlighted.

b) Quantity of each by controller location.

c) Description of product (generic).

d) Specified item.

e) Operating range or span.

f) Operating point or setpoint.

2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required demonstrating

compliance with the specified requirements, including but not limited to:

Catalog cuts, technical data and descriptive literature on hardware, software,

and system components to be furnished.




SPECIFICATIONS

3. The data to be clearly marked and noted to identify specific ranges, model

numbers, sizes, and other pertinent data. Submit printed manufacturer's

technical product data for each control device furnished, indicating

dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics,

finishes of materials and including printed installation instructions and start-

up instructions.

4. Unless specifically called for otherwise, provide bound copies of catalog

cuts for standard products, not requiring specifically prepared Shop Drawings,

for the following:

a) Wire and cable, Class II.

b) Face plates for devices.

c) Disconnect switches for power control.

5. Where more than one item, size, rating or other variations appear on a

catalog cut sheet, clearly identify items to be provided. These items to be

properly indexed and referenced to identification numbers, designations

and/or details on the Drawings.

f. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings for each controlled system, depicting

the following information:

1. Schematic flow diagram of system showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers,

valves and other control/monitoring devices.

2. Label each control device with initial setting or adjustable range of

control. Label points in schematic diagrams with termination at

corresponding controller.

3. Electrical Wiring: Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that

are factory installed and portions of be field-installed.

4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and

labeling.

5. Interfaces to equipment furnished under other Sections identifying

numbers of wires, termination location, voltages and pertinent details.

Responsibility for each end of the interfaces to be noted on these drawings

whether or not they are a part of this Section.




SPECIFICATIONS

g. Equipment locations, wiring and piping schematics, details, panel

configurations, sizes, damper motor mounting details, valve schedules, and a

point list keyed to specific hardware SUBMITTALS. Control wiring depicted as

fully annotated ladder diagrams with terminations identified, completely

configured as to the exact panel, wiring, relay, switch, and component

configuration.

h. Tag number lists: Develop instruments tag number system and submit list for

approval. Coordinate methods and number block with the Owner Representative.

i. Format the Shop and Field Drawings to include:

1. A Title Sheet containing a drawing list, abbreviations list, symbols list,

site and vicinity maps for project location and schedules.

2. Floor Plans showing proposed device locations and device nomenclatures.

3. A Riser Diagram illustrating conduit relationships between devices shown

on the Floor Plans. Show device nomenclatures.

4. A Single-Line Diagram for each system showing signal relationships of

devices within the system. Show device nomenclatures.

5. A Wiring Diagram for each assembly, enclosure or free standing device,

showing:

a) The devices within

b) Wiring connections

c) Wire identification

d) Voltage levels

e) Fuse ratings

6. Operations and Maintenance Manuals:

a) Following approval of Shop Drawings of control equipment and prior

to acceptance of control work, prepare Operating and Maintenance

manuals describing operating, servicing, and maintenance requirements of

control systems and equipment installed under this Section, in accordance

the General and Special Conditions of these Specifications.

b) Information contained in the manual for the above equipment to

include the following:

(1) Manufacturer's catalog cuts and printed descriptive bulletins.




SPECIFICATIONS

(2) Manufacturer's installation, operating, and maintenance instruction

booklets. Complete instructions regarding the operation and

maintenance of equipment involved.

(3) Instrument calibration certificates.

(4) Parts list and costs.

(5) Complete nomenclature of replaceable parts, list of recommended

spare parts for 12 months operation, their part numbers, current cost

and name and address of the nearest vendor of replacement parts.

(6) Name, address and telephone number for closest source of spare

parts.

(7) Wiring and schematic diagrams.

(8) Include final record copies of shop drawings.

(9) Copy of guarantees and warranties issued for the various items of

equipment, showing dates of expiration.

(10) Reduced plans, diagrams, and control schematics.

(11) Copies of test results.

(12) Control System Operating Manual including: point of

summary and point data base; complete printout of program listings;

magnetic tape CD or DVD backup of Field Control Cabinet programs;

cabinet layout; hard copy of graphic screens; hard copy of specified

reports.

7. A final Bill of Quantities including a separate schedule for portable

equipment, if delivered as part of this work.

8. Performance, Test and Adjustment Data: Comprehensive documentation

of performance verification according to parameters specified in these

specifications.

9. Record Drawings: Comply with Division 1 requirements and Section

15020, Basic HVAC Requirements. Provide complete as-built submittals

including "as-programmed" sequence of operation as well as final occupancy

schedules.




SPECIFICATIONS



Requirements.

F. WARRANTY

1. Warranty of materials and workmanship as required by in Section 15020 and



1. Control system referenced throughout specifications and drawings as Building

Automation System (BAS), Building Management System (BMS), or Energy

Management System (EMS) interchangeably consists of high-speed, peer-to-peer

network of DDC controllers, control system server, and operator workstation.

2. System software based on server/thin-client architecture, designed around open

standards of web technology. Control system server accessed using a web browser

over control system network, Owner's local area network, and remotely over Internet

(through Owner's LAN).

3. Intent of thin-client architecture is to provide operators complete access to control

system via web browser. No special software other than web browser required to

access graphics, point displays, and trends, configure trends, configure points and

controllers, or to edit programming.

4. Local Area Network (LAN) either 10 or 100 Mpbs Ethernet network.

5. System will consist of open architecture that is capable of:

a. High speed Ethernet communication using TCP/IP protocol

b. Native BACnet communications according to ANSI / ASHRAE™ Standard

135, latest edition. Provide necessary BACnet-compliant hardware and software

to meet the system's functional specifications. Controller devices must be BTL

tested and listed by an official BACnet Testing Laboratory and have the BTL

mark issued.

c. LonTalk protocol

d. Modbus (RTU/TCP) protocol

6. Complete temperature control system to be DDC with electronic sensors and

electronic/electric actuation valves and dampers.




SPECIFICATIONS

7. Prepare individual hardware layouts, interconnection drawings, building

riser/architecture diagram and sequence of control from the project design data. Any

architecture diagrams on design drawings have been included as schematics only and

are not meant to portray quantity of devices or power/data requirements.

8. Design, provide, and install equipment cabinets, panels, data communication

network infrastructure (including cables, conduits, outlets, connections, etc.) needed,

and associated hardware.

9. Provide complete manufacturer's specifications for items that are supplied.

Include vendor name and model number of every item supplied.

10. Provide a comprehensive operator and technician training program as described in

these specifications.

11. Provide as-built documentation, operator's terminal software, diagrams, and other

associated project operational documentation (such as technical manuals) on

approved media, the sum total of which accurately represents the final system.

12. Provide 120V power, low voltage power, transformers, etc. for control panels,

transformer panels, and BAS devices. Install per Division 16 specifications. Power

for devices within this specification section are solely the responsibility of the BAS

Contractor.

13. Conduit and raceway systems. Install per Division 16 specifications.

14. All devices, components, controllers, and software to be manufacturer's most

current version at the time of installation.

H. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

1. Performance Standards. System conforms to following minimum standards over

network connections:

a. Graphic Display. Graphic with 20 dynamic points display with current data

within 10 seconds.

b. Graphic Refresh. Graphic with 20 dynamic points update with current data

within 8 seconds.

c. Object Command. Devices react to command of binary object within 2

seconds. Devices begin reacting to command of analog object within 2 seconds.

d. Object Scan. Data used or displayed at controller or workstation have been

current within previous 6 seconds.




SPECIFICATIONS

e. Alarm Response Time. Object that goes into alarm be annunciated at

workstation within 45 seconds.

f. Program Execution Frequency. Custom and standard applications be capable

of running as often as once every 5 seconds. Select execution times consistent

with mechanical process under control.

g. Performance. Programmable controllers be able to completely execute DDC

PID control loops at frequency adjustable down to once per second. Select

execution times consistent with mechanical process under control.

h. Multiple Alarm Annunciation. Each workstation on network receive alarms

within 5 seconds of other workstations.

2. Reporting Accuracy. System reports values with minimum end-to-end accuracy

listed in Table Number 1.

a. TABLE 1: Reporting Accuracy

Measure Variable Reported

Accuracy

Space Temperature ±1ºF

Ducted Air ±1ºF

Outside Air ±2ºF

Dew Point ±3ºF

Water Temperature ±1ºF

Delta-T ±0.25ºF

Relative Humidity ±5 percent RH

Water Flow ±2 percent of full

scale

b. Note 1: Accuracy applies to 10 percent-100 percent of scale

c. Note 2: For both absolute and differential pressure

d. Note 3: Not including utility-supplied meters

3. Control Stability and Accuracy. Control loops maintain measured variable at

setpoint within tolerances listed in Table 2.




SPECIFICATIONS

4. TABLE Number 2: Control Stability and Accuracy

Controlled Variable Control Accuracy Range of Medium

Air Pressure +0.2 in wg 0-6 inc. wg

+0.01 in wg -0.1 to 0.1 in wg

Airflow +10 percent of full scale

Space Temperature ±0.5F

Duct Temperature ±0.5F

Fluid Pressure +1.5 PSI 1-150 PSI

+1.0 in wg 0-50 in wg differential

15900-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS/INSTALLERS

1. Reliable Controls by Essential Building Technologies

B. COMMUNICATIONS

1. Each controller to have communication port for connection to operator interface.

a. Internetwork operator interface and value passing to be transparent to

internetwork architecture.

b. Operator interface connected to controller to allow operator to interface with

each internetwork controller as if directly connected. Controller information such

as data, status, reports, system software, and custom programs to be viewable and

editable from each internetwork controller.

2. Inputs, outputs, and control variables used to integrate control strategies across

multiple controllers to be readable by each controller on internetwork.

3. Operator Workstation to be capable of simultaneous direct connection and

communication with BACnet/IP, OPC and TCP/IP networks without use of

interposing devices such as PC or gateway with hard drive.

4. Workstations, Building Control Panels and Controllers with real-time clocks use

time synchronization service. System automatically synchronize system clocks daily

from operator-designated device via internetwork. System automatically adjust for

daylight savings and standard time as applicable.




SPECIFICATIONS

C. OPERATOR INTERFACE

1. Operator Interface. PC-based workstations reside on high-speed network with

building controllers. Each workstation or each standard browser connected to server

be able to access system information.

2. System Software

a. Operating System. Furnish concurrent multi-tasking operating system.

Operating system also supports use of and includes other common software

applications such as Microsoft Excel, Word, Microsoft Access and Adobe

Acrobat. Acceptable operating systems are Windows XP and Windows 7.

b. Dynamic Color Graphics:

1. Real-time color graphic displays dynamic and able to update displays.

2. Provide operator ability to change values (setpoints) and states in system

controlled equipment directly from graphic display.

3. Custom Graphics. Provide custom graphics generation package.

4. Graphics Library. Furnish library of standard HVAC equipment graphics

and include standard symbols for fans, pumps, coils, valves, piping, dampers,

and ductwork.

c. All software to be manufacturer's most current version at the time of

installation.

3. System Applications. Each workstation provides operator interface and off-line

storage of system information. Provide following applications at each workstation:

a. Automatic System Database Save and Restore. Each workstation stores on

hard disk copy of current database of each Building Controller. This database

automatically updated whenever change is made in any system panel.

b. Manual Database Save and Restore. System operator able to manually save or

clear database and initiate download of specified database from/to any panel.

c. System Configuration. Workstation software provides method of configuring

system to allow for changes or additions by users and performs following tasks:

1. Create, delete or modify control strategies.

2. Add/delete objects to system.

3. Tune control loops through adjustment of control loop parameters.




SPECIFICATIONS

4. Enable or disable control strategies.

5. Generate hard copy records of control strategies on printer.

6. Select points to be alarmed and define alarm state.

7. Select points to be trended and initiate automatic recording of values.

8. Start/Stop binary objects and adjust analog objects.

d. Security: Operator required to log on to system with user name and password

in order to view, edit, add, or delete data. System security selectable for each

operator.

e. System Diagnostics: System automatically monitor operation of workstations,

printers, modems, network connections, building management panels, and

controllers. Failure of any device to be annunciated.

f. Alarm Indication and Handling:

1. Workstation provides visual means of alarm indication. Alarm indication

becomes highest priority regardless of application(s) running.

2. System provides and archive log of alarm messages to hard drive. Alarm

messages to include description of event-initiating object, source, location and

time/date of alarm.

g. Trend Logs: Operator able to define custom trend log for any data object and

include interval, start time, and stop time. Trend data sampled and stored on

building controller panel, be archived on hard disk, and be retrievable for use in

spreadsheets and standard database programs.

1. System server to periodically gather historically recorded data stored in

the building controllers and archive the information. Archived files to be

appended with new sample data, allowing samples to be accumulated.

2. Software to be included that is capable of graphing the trend logged object

data. Software capable of creating two-axis (x,y) graphs that display object

values relative to time.

3. Operator able to change trend log setup information. This includes the

information to be logged as well as the interval at which it is to be logged.

Input, output, and value object types in the system may be logged. Provide

operations password protected. Setup and viewing may be accessed directly

from any and all graphics on which object is displayed.




SPECIFICATIONS

h. Standard Reports: Standard system reports provided for this project. Provide

ability for Owner to readily customize these reports for this project:

1. Objects: System (or subsystem) objects and their current values.

2. Logs:

a) Alarm History

b) System Messages

c) System Events

d) Trends

4. Interfaces to Third Party Systems: BAS connects to third party systems (VFDs,

emergency generators, rooftop AC units, etc.). Communication protocol specified for

third party system, and BAS provides compatible protocol to assure proper two way

communication. Points, alarms, and commands displayed on BAS as indicated.

5. Workstation Applications Editors: Each PC workstation supports editing of

system applications, which downloaded and executed at one or more controller

panels.

D. CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

1. Furnish following applications software for building and energy management.

Software applications reside and operate in system controllers. All software to be

manufacturer's most current version at the time of installation. All software and

associated functions (scheduling, optimum start/stop, etc.) noted in this specification

are to be configured and enabled for this project. Incorporate into sequence of

operation submittals for review prior to installation.

2. System Security:

a. User access secured using individual security passwords and user names.

b. Restrict user passwords to objects, applications, and system functions as

assigned by system manager. Provide monitoring only access to Engineer of

Record and Commissioning Authority for period of one year for trouble shooting

purposes.

c. Record user Log On/Log Off attempts.




SPECIFICATIONS

d. Provide passwords, user names, and access assignments adjustable at the

operator's terminal. Each user to have a set security level, which defines access to

displays and individual objects the user may control. System to include 10

separate and distinct security levels for assignment to users.

e. System to include an Auto Logout Feature that will automatically logout user

when there has been no keyboard or mouse activity for a set period of time. Time

period to be adjustable by system administrator. Auto Logout may be enabled

and disabled by system administrator. Operator terminal to display message on

screen that user is logged out after Auto Logout occurs.

3. Scheduling: Provide capability to schedule each object or group of objects in

system. Coordinate schedule with Owner and program accordingly. Each schedule

consists of:

a. Operator's workstation to show information in easy-to-read daily format.

Priority for scheduling: Events, holidays and daily with events being the highest.

b. Holiday and special event schedules to display data in calendar format.

Operator able to schedule holidays and special events directly from these

calendars.

c. Operator able to change information for a given weekly or exception schedule

if logged on with the appropriate security access.

4. Optimum Start/Stop: Provide software and program system to start equipment on

sliding schedule based upon indoor and outdoor conditions. Determine minimum

time of HVAC system operation needed to satisfy space environmental requirements

and also determine earliest possible time to stop mechanical systems (i.e. hut down

cooling/heating and only provide ventilation one hour prior to scheduled unoccupied

period.) Optimum start/stop program operates in conjunction with scheduled

start/stop and night setback programs.

5. Alarms:

a. Operator's workstation to provide visual means of alarm indication. The alarm

dialog box to always become the top dialog box regardless of the application(s),

currently running.

b. System to provide log of alarm messages. Alarm log to be archived to the

hard disk of the system operator's terminal. Each entry to include a description of

the event-initiating object generating the alarm. Entry to include time and date of

alarm occurrence.

c. Alarm messages in user-definable text and entered either at the operator's

terminal or via remote communication.




SPECIFICATIONS

d. Each binary object set to alarm based on operator-specified state.

e. Each analog object have both high and low alarm limits.

f. Alarms must be able to be automatically and manually disabled.

g. Alarms be routed to appropriate workstations based on time and other

conditions. An alarm able to start programs, print, be logged in event log,

generate custom messages, and display graphics.

h. System have ability to dial out in event of alarm.

6. Maintenance Management: System monitors equipment status and generate

maintenance messages based upon user-designated run-time, starts, and/or calendar

date limits. Coordinate settings with Owner.

7. Sequencing: Provide application software based upon sequences of operation

specified to properly sequence designated systems. Provide all points to achieve

specified sequences.

8. Staggered Start: This application prevents controlled equipment from

simultaneously restarting after a power outage. Order in which equipment (or groups

of equipment) is started, along with time delay between starts to be user-selectable.

9. Energy Calculations: Provide software to allow instantaneous power (9e.g. kW)

or flow rates (e.g. L/s (gpm)) to be accumulated and converted to energy usage data.

10. Anti-Short Cycling: Binary output objects protected from short cycling by

allowing minimum on-time and off-time to be selected.

11. On/Off Control with Differential: Provide algorithm that allows binary output to

be cycled based on controlled variable and set point. Algorithm direct-acting or

reverse-acting and incorporate adjustable differential.

12. Run-Time Totalization: Provide software to totalize run-times for binary input

objects.

E. WEB BASED ACCESS

1. General Description: BAS supplier to provide web-based access to the system as

part of standard installation. Provide access to user of displays of real-time data that

are part of the BAS via a standard Web browser. Web browser to tie into the network

via Ethernet network connection. Provide web-page host as a separate device that

resides on the BAS network, but is not the BAS server for the control system. BAS

server must be a separate computer from the Web-page host device to ensure data and

system integrity. Web-page software not to require a per user licensing fee or annual

fees. The web-page host must be able to support on average 50 simultaneous users




SPECIFICATIONS

with the ability to expand the system to accommodate an unlimited number of users.

Software to be manufacturer's most current version at time of installation.

2. Browser Technology: Browser to be standard version of Microsoft Internet

Explorer (latest edition). No special vendor-supplied software needed on computers

running browser. Displays viewable and the Web-page host to directly access real-

time data from the BAS network. Data displayed in real time and update

automatically without user interaction. User able to change data on displays if logged

in with the appropriate user name and password.

3. Communications: Web-page host to include two Ethernet network connections.

One network connection dedicated to BAS network and used to gather real-time data

from the devices that form the BAS. This network to communicate via specified

protocol, allowing the Web-page host to gather data directly from units on the local

LAN or from other projects connected over a WAN. This network to also provide the

connection to the BAS server for Web page generation. The second Ethernet

connection to provide the physical connection to the Internet or an IP -based WAN. It

is to be the port that is used for the browser to receive Web pages and data from the

Web-page host. Web-page host to act as a physical barrier between the BAS network

and the WAN or Internet connection that allows the browser to receive web pages and

data. The two separate network connections provide for a physical barrier to prevent

raw communications traffic being exposed on the IP network. The Web-page host to

provide for complete isolation of the IP and BAS networks by not routing networking

packets between the two networks. BAS Ethernet network provided and installed by

the BAS supplier.

4. Display of Data: Web page graphics shown on browser to be replicas of the BAS

displays. User to need no additional training to understand information presented on

Web pages when compared to what is shown on BAS displays. Web page displays to

include animation just as BAS displays. Fans to turn, pilot lights to blink, and coils to

change colors, and so on. Real-time data shown on browser Web pages. This data

must be directly gathered via the BACnet network and automatically updated on

browser Web page displays without any user action. Data on the browser to

automatically refresh as changes are detected without re-drawing the complete

display. User to be able to change data from browser Web page to if the user is

logged on with the appropriate password. Clicking on a button or typing in a new

value to change digital data. Using pull-down menus or typing in a new value to

change analog data. Data displays navigated using pushbuttons on the displays that

are simply clicked on with the mouse to select a new display. Alternatively, the

standard back and forward buttons of the browser can be used for display navigation.




SPECIFICATIONS

5. Web Page Generation: Web pages generated automatically from the BAS

displays that reside on the BAS server. User to access Web-page host via the network

and initiate a web page generation utility that automatically takes the BAS displays

and turns them into Web pages. The Web pages generated are automatically installed

on the Web page host for access via any computer's standard browser. Any system

that requires use of an HTML editor for generation of Web pages will not be

considered.

6. Password Security and Activity Log: Access via Web browser to utilize the same

hierarchical security scheme as BAS system. User asked to log in once the browser

makes connection to Web-page host. Once the user logs in, any and all changes that

are made to be tracked by the BAS system. User able to change only those items that

the user has authority to change. A user activity report to show any and all activity of

the users that have logged in to the system regardless of whether those changes were

made using a browser or via the BAS workstation.

7. Communication: Web-page host to communicate using the specified protocol

standard to devices on the BAS network.

F. BAS GRAPHICS

1. Develop customized graphics showing the project building(s) and their floor

plans, mechanical, and electrical equipment, flow and control diagrams, and other

relevant features on Workstation graphic screens. Associated input, output, and

virtual objects (e.g., temperature & pressure set points) listed in the Sequence of

Operation, and shown on the Input/Output Objects List included in the graphic

screens and bound to the database. Real-time value of objects updated on the display

of each graphic automatically. Graphics to match Clean Water Services Durham

facility.

2. Graphics to have links to the Print function and to display a Standard Legend in

the corner of the graphic. Graphics, except pop-ups, to have the date and time

displayed in the upper corner of the graphic. Each graphic titled.

3. Weather: Graphics, except pop-ups, to have the outdoor temperature and

humidity in the upper corner of the graphic.

4. Alarms - System and component summary alarms located near the top of each

relevant graphic screen. Provide links to the associated system/component as part of

these tags to assist trouble shooting. Other alarms placed near the associated

system/device as depicted in the graphic. Provide text and color of information tags

that describe each object and alarm value consistent with a graphics color legend.




SPECIFICATIONS

5. The following graphics provided as a minimum:

a. A building graphic, typically a photograph of the building, with links to each

floor plan and other links as defined below.

b. A central plant graphic with equipment (chillers, boilers, pumps, heat

exchangers, storage tanks, etc.), temperature sensors, pressure sensors, flow

sensors and refrigeration leak detectors. The central plant graphic to have links to

each building on the campus.

c. Central equipment such as air handler, package rooftop equipment, supply

fans, exhaust fans, and smoke control systems.

d. Floor plans of each floor, with temperature sensors, pressure sensors,

temperature control zones, heating/cooling zones, ventilation zones, and supply

air zones identified. Rooms grouped on a graphic only to the extent that detailed

and complete sensing information can be comfortably viewed by an operator and

the bound points updated in less than 10 seconds. Each zone to have a

temperature symbol that changes color over the range from low (blue) through

normal (green) to high (red) and indicate an alarm (flashing red). The zone

temperature and or pressure symbol(s) to be a link to a zone control pop-up

graphic. Individual floor plan graphics to provide links to related mechanical

systems. The mechanical room plan graphics to show the relative location of, and

provide links to, either the equipment pop-up or flow & control graphic for

mechanical equipment monitored or controlled by the BAS.

e. Pop-up graphics provided for each zone control system showing a flow

diagram and related monitoring & control points and system parameters. Pop-up

graphics provided for each piece of equipment that is not shown on a flow and

control graphic.

f. Flow and control diagrams for each system including but not limited to

packaged equipment, heating hot water systems, heat exchangers, pumps, zone

terminal units, smoke damper status and combination fire and smoke dampers

status, and ventilation systems. The flow and control graphics to have parameters

grouped in the lower portion of the graphics. Standard equipment graphics used.

Pumps, fans, dampers and other elements to dynamically indicate their state (i.e.

pumps and fans to rotate when on and damper positions to dynamically adjust and

be shown in their current position, etc.). System flow and control graphics

displayed in a general left to right flow or loop arrangement. Return and exhaust

air flow shown on top and return water shown on the bottom of the graphic.

g. Individual equipment/component screens showing sensing and control

information available for each device provided.




SPECIFICATIONS

6. Penetration - The graphic interface to consistently apply a convention whereby a

left-click to always penetrate to more detailed information. The text windows to

represent the deepest level of penetration. A right-click to always produce a menu of

options that are specific to the item selected.

7. Navigation - Graphics organized to provide a "branching structure" that allows an

operator to move from a "macro view" to a "micro view" and return. These links to

other associated graphics, or allow a return to a previous macro view, provided and

arranged horizontally along the bottom of each graphic screen. From left to right, the

graphic links as follows: site/building map, building/trailer floor plans, and major

mechanical systems at each building. Pop-up right click menus provided as needed on

the lower button bar to allow for uncluttered navigation.

8. Clutter Minimization - Each graphic to have separate check boxes in the lower

right corner that show/hide setpoints, alarms/safeties, and Devices/Equipment.

9. Templates - To the maximum extent possible, use standard graphics as templates

to provide a consistent look throughout the interface.

10. Color Scheme - The graphics to use dynamic color changes to communicate

equipment type, or object status consistent with the graphics color legend.

11. Symbols and Animations: Fans, pumps, dampers, coils, and generation

equipment to be dynamic symbols indicating rotation, state, or position, movement,

flow, etc.

12. Macros - When macros are used to add functionality to the graphics, detailed

documentation provided.

13. Configure Mode - Access to “Configure Mode” for editing of the graphics

password protected to prevent unauthorized changes to the graphics. This password

supplied to the appropriate personnel.

14. Graphics Version: Graphics provided in the most current format available at time

of control system programming.

15. Points and graphics checked for the proper binding and graphic programming,

settings to ensure that the correct system, location, point values and dynamics are

shown in the proper location and rotate in the proper directions.

16. After graphics have been accepted, provide, on a CD ROM in an agreed upon file

structure. If the graphics have active-x controls or other files that must be placed

outside the graphics folder structure a set-up program provided on the disk to place

the files in the correct locations.




SPECIFICATIONS

G. BUILDING CONTROLLERS

1. General. Provide adequate number of building controllers to achieve performance

specified. Panels to meet the following requirements.

a. Building Automation System (BAS) to be composed of one or more

independent, stand-alone, microprocessor-based building controllers to manage

global strategies described in Controller Software section.

b. Provide sufficient memory to support operating system, database, and

programming requirements.

c. Share data between networked building controllers.

d. Distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow

for central monitoring and alarms.

e. Controllers that perform scheduling have real-time clock.

f. Continually check status of its processor and memory circuits and if abnormal

operation is detected, controller:

1. Assume predetermined failure mode.

2. Generate alarm notification.

g. Building Controller communicates with other devices on internetwork

including BACnet communications according to specified protocol.

2. Communication:

a. Each building controller resides on network using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data

Link/Physical layer protocol and performs routing to network of custom

application and application specific controllers.

b. Controller provides a service communication port for connection to a portable

operator's terminal.

3. Environment:

a. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient conditions mounted within

NEMA waterproof enclosures and rated for operation at 0 degrees F to 150

degrees F.

b. Controllers used in conditioned space be mounted in NEMA dust-proof

enclosures and rated for operation at 32 degrees F to 120 degrees F.




SPECIFICATIONS

4. Serviceability: Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and

processor. Wiring connections be made to modular terminal strips or to termination

card connected by ribbon cable.

5. Memory: Building controller maintains BIOS and programming information in

event of power loss for at least 72 hours.

6. Immunity to power and noise. Controller able to operate at 90 percent to 110

percent of nominal voltage rating and performs an orderly shutdown below 80

percent nominal voltage. Operation be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120

Hz and from keyed radios up to 5 W at 1 m (3 ft).

7. Controller to have a battery to provide power for orderly shutdown of controller

and storage of data in nonvolatile flash memory. Battery back up to maintain real-

time clock functions for a minimum of 10 days.

H. APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS

1. Application specific controllers (ASCs) are microprocessor-based DDC

controllers, which through hardware or firmware design are dedicated to control a

specific piece of equipment. Controllers to be fully programmable using graphical

programming blocks.

a. ASC controllers communicates with other devices on internetwork.

b. Each ASC capable of stand-alone operation without being connected to

network.

c. Each ASC will contain sufficient I/O capacity to control target system.

d. Application controllers to include universal inputs with minimum 10-bit

resolution that accept thermistors, 0-10VDC, 0-5 VDC, 4-20 mA and dry contact

signals. Any input on a controller may be either analog or digital with at least 1

input that accepts pulses. Controller to also include support and modifiable

programming for interface to intelligent room sensor with digital display.

Controller to include binary and analog outputs on board. Provide analog outputs

switch selectable as either 0-10VDC or 0-20mA. Software to include scaling

features for analog outputs. Application controller to include 24VDC voltage

supply for use as power supply to external sensors.




SPECIFICATIONS

e. Program sequences stored on board application controller in EEPROM. No

batteries needed to retain logic program. Program sequences executed by

controller 10 times per second and capable of multiple PI and PID loops for

control of multiple devices. Calculations completed using floating-point math

and system to support display of information in floating-point nomenclature at

operator's terminal. Programming of application controller completely modifiable

in the field over installed BAS LANs or remotely via modem interface. Operator

to program logic sequences by graphically moving function blocks on screen and

tying blocks together on screen.

f. Application controller to include support for room sensor. Display on room

sensor programmable at application controller and include an operating mode and

a field service mode. Provide button functions and display data programmable to

show specific controller data in each mode based on which button is pressed on

the sensor. See sequence of operation for specific display requirements at

intelligent room sensor.

2. Communication

a. Controller resides on network using MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol.

b. Each controller connected to building controller.

c. Each controller capable of connection to laptop computer or portable

operator's tool.

3. Environment

a. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient conditions mounted within

NEMA waterproof enclosures and rated for operation at 0 degrees F to 150

degrees F.

b. Controllers used in conditioned space mounted in NEMA dust-proof

enclosures and rated for operation at 32 degrees F to 120 degrees F.

4. Serviceability: Provide diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and

processor.

5. Memory. ASC use nonvolatile memory and maintains BIOS and programming

information in event of power loss.




SPECIFICATIONS

I. ADVANCED APPLICATION CONTROLLERS

1. General:

a. Expandable application controller capable of providing control strategies for

the system based on information from any or all connected inputs. Provide

program implementing these strategies completely flexible and user definable.

Provide program execution of controller a minimum of once per second.

b. Programming: Object-oriented using control program blocks. Controller to

support a minimum of 500 Analog Values and 500 Binary Values. Each and every

analog and binary value to support standard specified protocol priority arrays.

c. Provide means to graphically view inputs and outputs to each program block

in real-time as program is executing. This function may be performed via the

operator's terminal or field computer.

d. Controller to have adequate data storage to ensure high performance and data

reliability. Battery to retain static RAM memory and real-time clock functions for

a minimum of 1.5 years (cumulative). Provide field-replaceable battery (non-

rechargeable) lithium type. Unused battery life: 10 years.

e. The onboard, battery-backed real time clock must support schedule operations

and trend logs.

f. Global control algorithms and automated control functions should execute via

32-bit processor.

g. Controller to include both on-board Ethernet specified protocol

communication over twisted pair cable (UTP) and to include specified protocol IP

communication. In addition, controller to include specified protocol PTP

connection port.

h. The base unit of the controller to host up to 8 expansion modules with various

I/O combinations. These inputs and outputs to include universal 12-bit inputs,

binary triac outputs, and 8-bit switch selectable analog outputs (0-10V or 0-20

mA). Inputs to support thermistors, 0-5VDC, 0-10VDC, 4-20mA, dry contacts

and pulse inputs directly.

i. Outputs must have onboard Hand-Off-Auto switches and a status indicator

light. HOA switch position to be monitored. Each analog output to include a

potentiometer for manually adjusting the output when the HOA switch is in the

Hand position.

j. The position of each and every HOA switch to be available system wide as a

specified protocol object. Expandable Controller to provide up to 176 discreet

inputs/outputs per base unit.




SPECIFICATIONS

2. Schedules: Each controller to support a minimum of 50 Schedule Objects.

3. Logging Capabilities: Each controller to support a minimum of 200 trend logs.

Any object in the system (real or calculated) may be logged. Sample time interval

adjustable at the operator's workstation.

4. Alarm Generation:

a. Alarms may be generated within the system for any object change of value or

state either real or calculated. This includes things such as analog object value

changes, binary object state changes, and various controller communication

failures.

b. Alarm log provided for alarm viewing. Log may be viewed on-site at the

operator's terminal or off-site via remote communications.

c. Controller must be able to handle up to 200 alarm setups stored as event

enrollment objects - system destination and actions individually configurable.

J. APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLER - TERMINAL UNIT CONTROLLERS

1. Provide one application controller for each terminal unit that adequately covers

objects listed in object list for unit. Controllers to interface to building controller via

LAN using specified protocol. Controllers to include on board flow sensor, inputs,

outputs and programmable, self-contained logic program as needed for control of

units.

2. Application controllers to include universal inputs with 10-bit resolution that can

accept thermistors, 0-5 VDC, and dry contact signals. Inputs on controller may be

either analog or digital. Controller to also include support and modifiable

programming for interface to intelligent room sensor with digital display (digital

display to indicate setpoint only). Controller to also include binary outputs on board.

For applications using variable speed parallel fans, provide a single analog output

selectable for 0-10 V or 0-20 mA control signals. Application controller to include

microprocessor driven flow sensor for use in pressure independent control logic.

Terminal units controlled using pressure independent control algorithms and flow

readings to be in CFM.




SPECIFICATIONS

3. Program sequences stored on board application controller in EEPROM. No

batteries needed to retain logic program. Program sequences executed by controller

10 times per second and capable of multiple PI loops for control of multiple devices.

Provide programming of application controller completely modifiable in the field

over installed specified protocol LANs or remotely via modem interface. Operator to

program logic sequences by graphically moving function blocks on screen and tying

blocks together on screen. Application controller programmed using the same

programming tool as Building Controller and as described in operator workstation

section.

4. Application controller to include support for intelligent room sensor. Display on

room sensor programmable at application controller and include an operating mode

and a field service mode. Button functions and display data programmable to show

specific controller data in each mode based on which button is pressed on the sensor.

See sequence for specific display requirements for intelligent room sensor.

5. Provide duct temperature sensor at discharge of each terminal unit that is

connected to controller for reporting back to operator workstation. Provide analog

inputs for the duct temperatures.

K. INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE

1. Input/output points protected such that shorting of point to itself, to another point,

or to ground will cause no damage to controller. Input and output points protected

from voltage up to 24 V.

2. Binary inputs (BI or DI) allow monitoring of On/Off signals from remote devices.

Binary inputs sense “dry contact” closure without external power (other than that

provided by controller) being applied.

3. Pulse accumulation input objects accept up to 10 pulses per second for pulse

accumulation.

4. Analog inputs (AI) allow monitoring of low-voltage (0 to 10 VDC), current (4 to

20 mA), or resistance signals (thermistor, RTD).

5. Binary outputs (BO or DO) provide for On/Off operation or pulsed low-voltage

signal for pulse width modulation control. Binary outputs on building and custom

application controllers have three-position (On/Off/Auto) override switches and status

lights. Outputs selectable for either normally open or normally closed operation.




SPECIFICATIONS

6. Analog outputs (AO)provide a modulating signal for control of end devices.

Outputs provide either a 0 to 10 VDC or a 4 to 20 mA signal as required to provide

proper control of the output device. Analog outputs on building controllers have

status lights and two-position (AUTO/MANUAL) switch and adjustable

potentiometer for manual override. Analog outputs not exhibit drift of greater than 0.4

percent of range per year.

7. Tri-State Outputs. Provide tri-state outputs (two coordinated binary outputs) for

control of three-point floating type electronic actuators without feedback. Use of

three-point floating devices limited to zone control and terminal unit control

applications (VAV terminal units, duct-mounted heating coils, zone dampers,

radiation, etc.). Control algorithms run zone actuator to one end of its stroke once

every 24 hours for verification of operator tracking.

L. POWER SUPPLIES AND LINE FILTERING

1. Control transformers UL listed. Furnish Class 2 current-limiting type or furnish

over-current protection in both primary and secondary circuits. Limit connected loads

to 80 percent of rated capacity.

2. DC power supply output match output current and voltage requirements. Unit

operates between 32 degrees F and 120 degrees F.

3. Line voltage units UL listed and CSA approved.

4. Power line filtering. Provide transient voltage and surge suppression for

workstations and controllers.

M. CONTROL PANELS

1. Control Panels:

a. Enclosures may be NEMA 1 when located in a clean, dry, indoor

environment. Indoor enclosures to be NEMA 12 when installed in other than a

clean environment. Outdoor enclosures must be NEMA 3R. Provide (hinged

door) key-lock latch and removable subpanels. Single key common to field panels

and subpanels.

b. Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices prewired with

color-coded stranded conductors neatly installed in plastic troughs and/or tie-

wrapped. Terminals for field connections UL listed for 600 volt service,

individually identified per control/ interlock drawings, with adequate clearance

for field wiring. Control terminations for field connection individually identified

per control drawings.




SPECIFICATIONS

c. Provide ON/OFF power switch with overcurrent protection for control power

sources to each local panel.

d. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for enclosures in any mechanical room

or electrical room labeled with TCP number. Laminated plastic to be 1/8-inch

thick sized appropriately to make label easy to read.

N. AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES

1. Temperature Instruments:

a. Low-voltage or Line-voltage Thermostats: Bimetal-actuated, snap acting

SPDT contact, enclosed, UL listed for electrical rating, exposed set point

adjustment on cover with heat anticipator. Thermostat operates within 55 degrees

F to 85 degrees F setpoint range, with 2 degrees F maximum differential.

b. Room Temperature Sensors: Thermistor or platinum RTD type with accuracy

of ±0.5 degrees F at 70 degrees F; operating range 30-120 degrees F; linear

signal; single point sensing element in wall-mounted ventilated enclosure with

insulating back plate if mounted on exterior wall; plug-in portable operators

terminal port.

c. Averaging Duct Temperature Sensors: Thermistor or platinum RTD element

with accuracy of ±0.5 degrees F at 32 degrees F, consisting of array of single

point sensing elements, securely mounted in duct or plenum; operating range 20-

120 degrees F; linear signal; 1-foot element per 2 SF of duct cross sectional area.

Use when duct is 9 SF or larger or where air is subject to temperature

stratification.

d. Probe Duct Temperature Sensors: Thermistor or platinum RTD element with

accuracy of ±0.5 degrees F at 32 degrees F, consisting of single point sensing

elements, securely mounted in duct or plenum; operating range 20-120 degrees F;

linear signal; 24-inch rigid probe. Use where duct is less than 9 SF cross sectional

area.

e. Outside Air Temperature Sensor: Thermistor or platinum RTD element with

accuracy of ±0.5 degrees F at 32 degrees F; Range -58-120 degrees F, single

element, linear, with weather and sun shield for exterior mounting.

f. Low Temperature Limit Thermostat: Minimum 20 foot capillary sensing

element, triggering on low temperature as sensed by any 12-inch segment; snap

acting, normally open contacts, manual reset, line voltage.

g. Liquid Immersion Temperature Sensor: Thermistor or platinum RTD

element, with accuracy of ±0.5 degrees F at 32 degrees F, stainless steel well and

assembly, range 30-250 degrees F.




SPECIFICATIONS

2. Pressure Transmitters and Transducers:

a. Transducer have linear output signal; field adjustable zero and span. Sensing

elements withstand continuous operating conditions of positive or negative

pressure 50 percent greater than calibrated span without damage.

b. Differential Pressure Switch: Setpoint adjustable with operating range of 0.5

to 12-inches WG for fans, and 5 to 30-feet WC for pumps. Switches UL listed;

SPDT snap-acting; pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum); NEMA 1 enclosure;

scale range and differential suitable for intended application.

c. Filter Differential Pressure Switch: Setpoint adjustable with operating range

of 0.1 to 5-inches WG; auto reset. Contactor to close when pressure differential

setting is met or exceeded. Provide mounting bracket, metallic tubing and

appropriate fittings for connection to duct or air-handling unit.

d. Duct Static Differential Pressure Transducer: Operating range 0 to 5-inches

WC for duct mounted transmitter; ceramic capacitive sensing element with probe

securely mounted in duct; digital input terminal and push button to zero output.

Accuracy ±1 percent of full scale; maximum response time 2 seconds.

e. Building Static Pressure Transducer: Operating range of -0.1 to 0.1-inches

WC, linear signal. Sensing tubes located inside and outside building use shielding

and/or surge tanks to minimize effects of wind. Accuracy ±1 percent of full scale.

f. Piping Pressure Transmitter: Operating range 0 to 50 PSIG, linear signal;

stainless steel diaphragm; digital input terminal and push button to zero output.

Accuracy ±1 percent of full scale.

3. Motorized Control Valves:

a. Body pressure rating and connection type construction conforms to pipe,

fitting and valve schedules.

b. Fluid valve close-off ratings and spring ranges operates at maximum flows

and maximum available pump heads scheduled without leakage.

c. Screwed ends except 2-1/2-inch and larger valves with flanged ends.

d. Fluid two-way modulating valves:

1. 2-inches and smaller fail-in-place characterized ball valves; ANSI 250

body rating; bronze body and stainless steel trim.

2. 2-1/2-inch and larger cast iron ANSI Class 125, Other with guided equal

percentage plug; PTFE packing.




SPECIFICATIONS

e. Fluid three-way valves globe valves with linear plug with composition disc

for tight shutoff.

f. Pressure drop equal to twice pressure drop through heat exchanger (load), 50

percent of pressure difference between supply and return mains, or 5 PSI,

whichever is greater, except two-position valves be line size.

g. Bubble-tight line size butterfly valves acceptable on 2-1/2-inch lines and

above for two-position action only; cast iron body; aluminum bronze disc; EPDM

seat, 200 PSI wg

4. Electric Damper/Valve Actuators.

a. Provide mechanical or electronic stall protection for each actuator.

b. Where indicated provide internal mechanical, spring-return mechanism or

provide uninterruptible power supply (UPS). Non-spring-return actuators have

external manual gear release to position damper/valve when actuator is not

powered.

c. Proportional actuators accepts 0 to 10 VDC or 0 to 20 mA control signal and

provide 2 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA operating range.

d. Actuator sized for torque required plus 25 percent; UL or CSA listed;

electronic current overload protection.

e. VAV Actuators: Actuators proportional 24 VAC actuators using a 4 to 20

mA range of control signals; stops automatically at end of travel; include

permanently lubricated gear train.

5. Duct Mounted Carbon Dioxide Sensor:

a. Duct mounted CO2 sensor consists of infrared sensing element with heated

stannic dioxide semiconductor. Operating range 0-2000 ppm + 50 ppm + 2

percent of measured value; maximum duct velocity of 1500 fpm; duct mounting

kit.

6. Wall Mounted Space Carbon Dioxide Sensor:

a. Sensor to employ non-dispersive infrared technology. (N.D.I.R.)

b. Sensor repeatability: +/- 20 ppm. 0-2000.

c. Sensor accuracy: <= 75 ppm over 0-1500 ppm range.

d. Sensor response time: less than 1 minute.

e. Sensor to employ reference channel design for long-term stability.




SPECIFICATIONS

f. Sensor to have field selectable 0-10VDC, or 4-20mA outputs.

g. Sensor power requirement less than 3W.

h. Sensor input voltage: 20 to 30VAC/DC.

i. Sensor operating temperature range: 0 ºC to 50 ºC.

j. Sensor to have models for wall mounting or duct mounting.

k. Sensor to provide at least a 1-year factory warranty from date of purchase.

l. Sensor to match cover in color and look to temperature sensor.

m. Manufacturers:

1. Telaire.

2. Vaisala.

3. Veris.

7. Paddle Type Flow Switches: Paddle type switches (water service only) UL listed,

SPDT snap-acting with pilot duty rating (125 VA minimum) and have adjustable

sensitivity with NEMA 1 enclosure.

8. Relays

a. Control relays UL listed plug-in type with dust cover and LED “energized”

indicator. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage be suitable for

application.

b. Time delay relays UL listed solid-state plug-in type with adjustable time

delay. Delay adjustable ±200 percent (minimum) from set point or as indicated.

Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage be suitable for application. Provide

NEMA 1 enclosure when not installed in local control panel.

9. Current transmitters:

a. AC current transmitters be self-powered, combination split-core current

transformer type with built-in rectifier and high-gain servo amplifier with 4 to 20

mA two-wire output. Unit ranges 50 A full scale, with internal zero and span

adjustment and ±1 percent full-scale accuracy at 500 ohm maximum burden.

b. Transmitter meets or exceeds ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and UL/CSA

recognized.

c. Unit split-core type for clamp-on installation on existing wiring.




SPECIFICATIONS

10. Current Transformers: AC current transformers UL/CSA recognized and

completely encased (except for terminals) in approved plastic material; ±1 percent

accuracy at 5 A full-scale.

11. End Switches: Turret head type SPDT. Square D Class 9007, Type C54B2, or

equal.

O. WIRING AND RACEWAYS

1. General: Provide copper wiring, plenum cable, and raceways as specified in

applicable sections of Division 16.

2. Insulated wire to be copper conductors, UL labeled for 90 degrees C minimum

service.

3. Field panels and controllers to be supplied by building emergency power system

where systems being monitored or controlled are on emergency power. Run control

wiring as follows:

a. Mechanical Rooms: In conduit

b. Exposed in building spaces: In conduit

c. Concealed in building walls and ceilings: Plenum rated cable

d. Concealed in building ceilings: Plenum rated cable in cable tray

4. Field and Subfield Panels: Voltage in panels not exceed 120 volts.

5. Wiring for BAS systems communications buses two conductor minimum 18

gauge foil-shielded, stranded twisted pair cable rated at 300 VDC or more than 80

degrees C.

P. ENERGY MANAGEMENT DASHBOARD (EMD)

1. Hardware: 42-Inch Touch Screen Monitor

2. Software, Energy Management Dashboard to include the following features:

a. Sustainable features map.

b. Virtual tour.

c. Electricity, Water, Process Heating Water, Photovoltaic Array: Live gauges

(up to 4), historical graphs and environmental equivalencies.




SPECIFICATIONS

d. Screen saver.

e. Basic content page (text and pictures only).

f. Additional Live Data Integration: BACnet/IP, LON/IP, Modbus/IP or OPC.

g. Live Data Page Gauge, Graph, Equivalent: Display current value gauge,

historical value graph, and equivalent.

h. Live Data Weather: Current temperature, wind speed, wind direction, relative

humidity, barometric pressure.

i. Additional system features (simulated data): Solar electric - photovoltaics,.

j. News Messaging Basic Package: Display unlimited news or info about the

building/organization, to show announcements, and to include a dedicated page

for announcements. Integrated to Screen Saver.

3. Functional Description of EMD System Software

a. Web Based Software: Internet Explorer (or equivalent) and mode to prevent

access to other internet sites.

b. Host and maintain software on software manufacturer’s data servers enabling

software to be browsed from anywhere on the web.

c. Software: In Java format utilizing animation, motion and screen activity.

d. Provide integration to an automation system which enables live data from

BAS be displayed on sustainable touch screen system.

1. Capable of receiving data from BAS representing 15-minute interval trend

data for selected meters (electric, water, process heating water, PV, other).

2. Convert BAS data received and display the building’s high performance

features and other energy and environmental systems.

4. EMD Software Features:

a. Sustainable Features Map:

1. Show sustainable features such as solar panel, low-flow fixtures,

insulation, etc.

2. Show features on a client supplied 2D floor directory or rendering that will

be provided.

3. Show hot spot areas in which “Sustainable Features” are located.




SPECIFICATIONS

4. Selecting an area or an icon displays more info about features (thumbnail

image, title and brief description).

5. Display building features.

b. Virtual Tour:

1. Use existing client provided digital map, AutoCAD or rendering. Static

Top-down view of site map or building.

2. Buildings, rooms, or floors are selectable.

3. Selecting a building, room or floor displays more info about the space

(thumbnail image, title and brief description).

c. Electricity, Water, Process Heating Water, PV – Live Gauges, Historical

Graphs and Environmental Equivalencies

1. Display current value gauge, historical value graph, and related

equivalencies for each meter type (i.e. water, gas, electricity).

2. Show following data points: PV panel production, building electricity use,

water usage, process heating water usage

3. Displays data points in interactive graphs.

4. Display following graphs:

a) Daily.

b) Weekly.

c) Monthly.

d) Yearly.

d. Screen Saver

1. Includes rotating images to prevent image burn in.

2. May display up to 20 images.

e. Basic content page

1. This is an individual page containing static text and images.

2. Inform users about programs, goals, and objectives.




SPECIFICATIONS

3. Showcase the history of the building/facility/organization.

f. Additional live data integration – choose quantity for each: BACnet/IP,

LON/IP, Modbus/IP or OPC.

g. Live Data Page Gauge, Graph, Equivalent: This adds additional tab on live

data in standard package show additional real-time data page. Display current

value gauge, historical value graph, and equivalent.

h. Live Data Weather - Current, Historical: Current temp, wind speed, wind

direction, relative humidity, barometric pressure. Historical charts of data. Data

from BAS or locally installed weather station. If data from BAS or Local

Weather Station then additional live data integration is required.

1. Display current outdoor conditions as an icon on main page.

2. Display current temp, humidity, wind speed, wind direction, and

conditions.

3. Show a history of weather data points using up to two line graphs per data

point.

4. Graphs can be daily, monthly or yearly.

i. Additional System Features (Simulated Data): Solar electric - photovoltaics,

process heating water, process water for building usage

j. Pre-Configured Calculators Calculators accept user input and display a

results page:

1. Individual carbon footprint (included in standard package).

k. News Messaging Basic Package:

1. Display unlimited news or info about your building/organization.

2. Option to show announcements on the home page.

3. Option to include a dedicated page for announcements.

4. Easily editable system news.

5. Functional Description of EMD Hardware

a. EMD system hardware components and features.

1. 42-Inch Mounted on Wall:




SPECIFICATIONS

2. Large format with touchscreen, monitor, WiFi and computer integrated all

as one unit.

3. Landscape.

4. Include wall bracket.

5. Include standard ground shipping.

6. Minimum standard 1-year warranty.

15900-03 EXECUTION

A. EXAMINATION

1. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify

that such work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly

commence.

2. Notify the Owners' representative in writing of conditions detrimental to the

proper and timely completion of the work.

3. Do not begin work until unsatisfactory conditions are resolved.

B. CONTROL SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND TESTING

1. Testing completed before Owner's representative is notified of system

demonstration.

2. Calibrate and prepare for service of instruments, controls, and accessory

equipment furnished under this specification.

3. Verify that control wiring is properly connected and free of shorts and ground

faults.

4. Enable control systems and verify calibration and operation of input and output

devices.

5. Verify that system operation adheres to sequences of operation.




SPECIFICATIONS

6. Commissioning and verification: In addition to commissioning requirements

specified elsewhere, provide the following commissioning on the HVAC

instrumentation and controls system:

a. Control systems completely commissioned to ensure aspects of the system are

operating as intended and at optimum tuning.

b. Wiring connections verified and traced from field device to panel to ensure

proper connections.

c. Measured values verified by a hand held calibrated device to validate that

value indicated by the control system is in fact the actual measured value.

d. Loops properly tuned to obtain the desired control value. Each loop to be

"upset" and put back in control to demonstrate its ability to stabilize quickly.

e. Provide a final point-by-point report submitted that indicates the date of each

verification, the results, and initialed on each page by the person performing the

reading.

C. ACCEPTANCE TESTING AND TRAINING

1. Site Testing:

a. Contractor provides personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies

necessary to perform testing. Owner or Owner's representative will witness and

sign off on acceptance testing.

b. Contractor demonstrates compliance of completed control system with

Contract Documents. Using approved test plan, physical and functional

requirements of project demonstrated.

2. Training:

a. General: Contractor conducts training courses for up to 3 other designated

personnel in operation and maintenance of system. Training manuals provided

for each trainee, with two additional copies provided for archival at project site.

Manuals include detailed description of subject matter for each lesson. Copies of

audiovisuals delivered to Owner. Training day is defined as 8 hours of classroom

instruction, including two 15-minute breaks and excluding lunch time, Monday

through Friday, during normal first shift in effect at training facility. Notification

of any planned training given to Owner's representative at least 15 days prior to

training.




SPECIFICATIONS

b. Operator's Training I: First course taught onsite for period of one consecutive

training days. Upon completion, each student should be able to perform

elementary operations with guidance and describe general hardware architecture

and functionality of system.

c. Operator's Training II: Second course taught at project site for a period of one

training day after completion of contractor's field testing. Course includes

instruction on specific hardware configuration of installed system and specific

instructions for operating installed system. Upon completion, each student should

be able to start system, operate the system, recover system after failure, and

describe specific hardware architecture and operation of system.

d. Operator's Training III: Third course taught at project site for period of one

training day no later than six months after completion of the acceptance test.

Course will be structured to address specific topics that students need to discuss

and to answer questions concerning operation of system. Upon completion,

students should be fully proficient in system operation and have no unanswered

questions regarding operation of installed system.

D. WIRING

1. Provide electrical wiring required to control systems specified in this section.

Control and interlock wiring complies with national, state and local electrical codes

and Division 16 of this specification.

2. Power wiring required for building control panel(s) to be dedicated circuit(s).

3. Verify location of operator work station with Owner prior to installation.

4. NEC Class 1 (line voltage) wiring UL Listed in approved raceway according to

NEC and Division 16 requirements.

5. Low-voltage wiring meets NEC Class 2 requirements. (Low-voltage power

circuits subfused when required to meet Class 2 current limit.)

6. Where NEC Class 2 (current-limited) wires are in concealed and accessible

locations, including ceiling return air plenums, approved cables not in raceway may

be used provided that cables are UL Listed for intended application.

7. Do not install Class 2 wiring in raceway containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and

panels containing high-voltage wiring and equipment may not be used for low-

voltage wiring except for purpose of interfacing (e.g., relays and transformers).

8. Where Class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring is to be run parallel along surface or

perpendicular to it and tied at 10 ft intervals.




SPECIFICATIONS

9. Where plenum cables are used without raceway, supported from structural

members. Cables not to be supported by ductwork, electrical raceways, piping, or

ceiling suspension systems.

10. Wire-to-device connections made at terminal block or terminal strip. Wire-to-wire

connections at terminal block.

11. Maximum allowable voltage for control wiring 24 V. If only higher voltages are

available, provide step-down transformers.

12. Wiring installed as continuous lengths, with no splices permitted between

termination points.

13. Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors.

Maintain fire rating at penetrations.

14. Include one pull string in each raceway 1 in. or larger.

15. Control and status relays are to be located in designated enclosures. Enclosures

include packaged equipment control panels unless they also contain Class 1 starters.

16. Install raceway to maintain a minimum clearance of 6 in. from high-temperature

equipment (e.g., steam pipes or flues).

17. Secure raceways with raceway clamps fastened to structure and spaced according

to code requirements. Raceways and pull boxes may not be hung on flexible duct

strap or tie rods. Raceways may not be run on or attached to ductwork.

18. Install insulated bushings on raceway ends and openings to enclosures. Seal top

end of vertical raceways.

19. Flexible metal raceways and liquid-tight, flexible metal raceways not-to-exceed 3-

feet in length and be supported at each end. In areas exposed to moisture, including

chiller and boiler rooms, liquid-tight, flexible metal raceways to be used.

20. Raceway must be rigidly installed, adequately supported, properly reamed at both

ends, and left clean and free of obstructions. Raceway sections joined with couplings.

Terminations made with fittings at boxes.

21. Input and output terminations to be labeled at the controller to identify if they are

AI, DI, AD, DO, and function (i.e. pump start, OM Sensor.)

E. COMMUNICATION WIRING

1. Follow manufacturer's installation recommendations for communication cabling.

2. Verify integrity of network following cable installation.




SPECIFICATIONS

3. Communication wiring unspliced length when that length is commercially

available; labeled to indicate origination and destination data.

4. Grounding of coaxial cable in accordance with NEC regulations article on

“Communications Circuits, Cable, and Protector Grounding.”

F. INSTALLATION OF AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES

1. General:

a. Install sensors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

b. Room sensors installed on concealed junction boxes properly supported by

wall framing.

c. Low-limit sensors used in mixing plenums installed in a serpentine manner

horizontally across duct.

d. Pipe-mounted temperature sensors installed in wells with heat-conducting

fluid in thermal wells.

e. Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north facing wall or screen,

complete with sun shield at designated location.

2. Flow Switch: Use correct paddle for pipe diameter. Adjust flow switch in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3. Actuators:

a. General:

1. Mount and link control damper actuators according to manufacturer's

instructions.

2. Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm that actuator

modulates damper smoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed

positions.

b. Actuator Mounting for Damper and Valve arrangements to comply to the

following:

1. Damper Actuators: Do not install in the air stream

2. Use a weather proof enclosure (clear and see through) if actuators are

located outside.




SPECIFICATIONS

3. Damper or valve actuator ambient temperature not-to-exceed 122 degrees

F through any combination of medium temperature or surrounding air.

Provide appropriate air gaps, thermal isolation washers or spacers, standoff

legs, or insulation as necessary. Mount per manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Actuator cords or conduit to incorporate a drip leg if condensation is

possible. Do not allow water to contact actuator or internal parts. Location of

conduits in temperatures dropping below dew point to be avoided to prevent

water from condensing in conduit and running into actuator.

5. Damper mounting arrangements to comply to the following:

a) Furnish and install damper channel supports and sheet metal collars.

b) Jack shafting of damper sections not allowed.

c) Multi-section dampers arranged so that each damper section operates

individually. Provide one electronic actuator direct shaft mounted per

section.

6. Size damper sections based on actuator manufacturers specific

recommendations for face velocity, differential pressure and damper type. In

general: Damper section not-to-exceed 24 ft-sq. with face velocity 1500

FPM.

7. Multiple section dampers of two or more arranged to allow actuators to be

direct shaft mounted on the outside of the duct.

8. Multiple section dampers of three or more sections wide arranged with a

3-sided vertical channel (8-inch wide by 6-inch deep) within the duct or fan

housing and between adjacent damper sections. Vertical channel anchored at

the top and bottom to the fan housing or building structure for support.

Connect sides of each damper frame to the channels. Holes in the channel to

allow damper drive blade shafts to pass through channel for direct shaft

mounting of actuators. Face open side of channel down stream of the airflow,

except for exhaust air dampers.

9. Multiple section dampers to be mounted flush within a wall or housing

opening to receive either vertical channel supports as described above or sheet

metal standout collars. Sheet metal collars (12-inch minimum) to bring each

damper section out of the wall to allow direct shaft mounting of the actuator

on the side of the collar.

4. Control Valve:

a. Valves installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.




SPECIFICATIONS

b. Slip-stem control valves installed so that stem position is not more than 60

degrees from vertical up position. Ball type control valves installed with stem in

horizontal position.

c. Control valves accessible and serviceable.

d. Install isolation valves so that control valve may be serviced without draining

supply/return side piping system. Install unions at connections to screw-type

control valves.

e. Valve Sizing for Water Coil:

1. On/Off Control Valves: Line size.

2. Modulating Control Valve Body Size may be reduced at most two pipe

sizes from the line size or not less than 1/2 the pipe size. BAS contractor to

size all water coil control valves for the application as follows:

a) Re-heat valves sized not-to-exceed 4-9PSI differential pressure. Size

valve for 50 percent Valve Authority. Valve design pressure drop is equal

to the sum of coil drop plus the balance valve drop.

b) Primary valves sized not-to-exceed 5-15PSI differential pressure. Size

valve for 50 percent Valve Authority. Valve design pressure drop is equal

to the sum of coil drop plus the balance valve drop.

c) Butterfly valves sized for modulating service at 60-70 degree rotation.

Design velocity 12-feet per second or less when used with standard EPDM

seats.

3. Valve Mounting arrangements to comply to the following:

a) Provide unions on all ports of two-way and three-way valves.

b) Install three-way equal percentage Characterized Control valves in a

mixing configuration with the “A” port piped to the coil.

c) Install 2½-inch and above, Three-Way globe valves, as manufactured

for mixing or diverting service to the coil.

5. Control Damper:

a. Dampers installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Unless

specifically designed for vertical blade application, dampers must be mounted

with blade axis horizontal.

b. After installation of low-leakage dampers with seals, caulk between frame and

duct or opening to prevent leakage around perimeter of damper.




SPECIFICATIONS

G. SEQUENCES OF OPERATION

1. Where local energy code dictates certain sequences (such as night setback, night

flush, pressure and temperature reset, terminal unit sequences, etc.), the sequences are

not repeated in the documents. It is not the intent of this specification or

documentation to reiterate the energy code. Provide all energy code mandated

sequences and document in sequence of operations submittals at no additional cost to

the Owner. Provide all required points to achieve the appropriate sequences.

2. Variable Speed Drives: Variable speed drives monitored by controller though

LAN communications port on each drive. Reference Section 15905. As minimum

following points be monitored:

a. Frequency output - Hz

b. Speed - RPM

c. Current - Amps

d. Power - percentage

e. Runtime - Hours

f. System Fault

g. Input speed setpoint - RPM

3. Unit Heaters (UH): Room temperature sensor signals controller which cycle

normally open two-position, two-way hot water coil valve and fan to maintain space

temperature setpoint.

4. Hot Water-to-Hot Water Heat Exchangers (HX-1, HX-2):

a. Control valve on plant side of lead heat exchanger modulates open when

HRV-1 or VAV-1 heating control valve is greater than 20-percent open or three

TU heating control valves are greater than 30-percent open and outside air

temperature is less than 65 degrees F and flow in heating water system is proven.

b. Modulate lead heat exchanger control valve to maintain HWS temperature

setpoint.

c. If HWS temperature setpoint is not met within 15 minutes and control valve

on lead heat exchanger is greater than 95-percent open, modulate control valve on

lag heat exchanger to meet HWS temperature serpoint.




SPECIFICATIONS

d. HWS temperature setpoint be reset as function of outside air temperature per

following:

Outdoor Air

Temperature - °F

Hot Water Supply

Temperature - °F

40 and below 170

41 to 60 Varies

60 and above 130

e. Lead and lag heat exchangers be designated by operators terminal software

command and be alternated weekly.

f. Heat exchanger controller receives global signal from central controller which

resets HWS to 170°F during warm-up operation.

g. Alarm BAS if HWS setpoint is not exceeded for 30 minutes or HWS

temperature exceeds 200 degrees F.

h. Constant Volume, Redundant, Heating Water Pumps (HWP-1 and HWP-2):

1. Start lead HW pump upon HW system being enabled.

2. On lead HW pump alarm or failure of flow, start lag HW pump. Register

alarm on graphic interface. Leave lead HW pump commanded on. Stop lag

HW pump when lead HW pump alarm status returns to normal.

3. Automatically rotate operation for each HW pump on a weekly basis.

i. Differential Pressure Regulating Valve:

1. Modulate valve to maintain differential pressure setpoint, as set by

balancer to maintain flow to furthest hydraulic load, while satisfying all other

flows in system.

5. VAV Multiple-Zone Air Conditioning Systems (VAV-1):

a. Occupied Mode:

1. Start and stop supply fan based on Optimized Start Time.

2. Stop fans and close the outside air damper if the temperature downstream

of the heating coil is below 35°F (hardware adjustable). An alarm will be

registered in the graphic interface and the unit will remain locked out until the

Freeze Protection reset command is manually issued through the graphic

interface.




SPECIFICATIONS

3. Stop fans and close outside air damper upon alarm from Fire Alarm

Control Panel (FACP). Fans will re-start in occupied mode when alarm is

cleared at FACP.

4. Stop fans and close outside air damper upon duct smoke detector alarm,

and register a Warning at the FACP. Fans will automatically re-start in

occupied mode when alarms clear.

5. Supply Fan Speed Control:

a) Modulate supply fan variable frequency drive (VFD) to maintain duct

static pressure, as sensed by a static pressure transmitter, at setpoint.

b) Set duct static pressure setpoint initially at 1.5" W.C. and re-adjust in

cooperation with Air Balance Contractor by this procedure:

(1) Set all terminal units downstream of the duct static pressure sensor

to operate at maximum airflow setpoints.

(2) Set all terminal units upstream of the duct static pressure sensor to

full shut-off (zero air flow).

(3) Manually lower supply fan speed slowly while observing terminal

unit airflow rates downstream of the duct static pressure sensor. Stop

lowering speed when one or more terminal unit airflow rate drops 10%

below its maximum airflow rate setpoint.

(4) Once flow condition in previous step is achieved, note the BAS

duct static pressure value. This value becomes the duct static pressure

setpoint.

(5) If there are multiple duct static pressure sensors, repeat above steps

for each sensor. Each sensor should have its own static pressure

setpoint and control loop. Supply fan speed will be based on the

largest control loop output.

6. Modulate exhaust fan VFD to maintain a building positive pressure of

0.03", ±0.02" (both values adjustable in program). Exhaust fan off when

building static pressure is less than setpoint minus 0.02", and will be

commanded on when building static pressure is greater than setpoint plus

0.02".

7. Stop supply and exhaust fans if the discharge static pressure exceeds

setpoint (4.0" WC, hardware adjustable). Fans off even if their VFDs are in

Manual or Bypass modes. Fans locked out until the High Discharge Static

Pressure reset command is manually issued through the graphic interface.




SPECIFICATIONS

8. Heating:

a) Lock-out heating at outside air temperatures above the Heating OSAT

Lock-Out setpoint (65°F, adjustable in program).

b) Modulate heating water valve in sequence with economizer dampers to

maintain discharge air temperature setpoint.

9. Reset Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint linearly between 55°F and

65°F based on the DAT Reset Schedule (adjustable in program):

Average Zone Temperature Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint

69.5°F and lower 65°F

69.5°F to 74.5°F Linear reset from 65 to 55°F

74.5°F and higher 55°F

10. Minimum Outside Air Control

a) Minimum outside air control linearly proportional between a low

command when all terminal units are at maximum CFM setpoint and a

high command when all terminal units are at minimum CFM setpoint.

b) Set dual minimum outside air damper commands initially at 5% low

command and 15% high command. Re-adjust in cooperation with Air

Balance Contractor by this procedure:

(1) If outside air and return air dampers are not linked, override return

damper 100% open.

(2) Set all terminal units to maximum CFM setpoints.

(3) Set outside air damper command to 5%.

(4) Determine outside air volume using the temperature method if

outside air temperature is at least 20 F degrees less than return air

temperature. If this is not the case, measure an array of outside air

intake air velocities with a vane anemometer. Calculate outside air

volume.

(5) If calculated outside air volume is not within 10% of required

design CFM, adjust outside air damper command and repeat step 4.

(6) When calculate outside air volume is within 10% of required

design CFM, set the respective outside air damper command as the

low minimum command.

(7) Set all terminal units to minimum heating CFM setpoints.




SPECIFICATIONS

(8) Set outside air damper command to 15%.

(9) Determine outside air volume using the temperature method if

outside air temperature is at least 20 F degrees less than return air

temperature. If this is not the case, measure an array of outside air

intake air velocities with a vane anemometer. Calculate outside air

volume.

(10) If calculated outside air volume is not within 10% of

required design CFM, adjust outside air damper command and repeat

step 9.

(11) When calculate outside air volume is within 10% of

required design CFM, set the respective outside air damper command

as the high minimum command.

11. Economizer:

a) Outside air will be used as the first stage of cooling. Lock out

mechanical cooling until the outside air damper is commanded fully open,

whenever the economizer is enabled.

b) Enable economizer when outside air temperature is less than unit

return air temperature, and DAT is greater than setpoint.

c) Damper Control, economizer enabled:

(1) Outside air and return air dampers are not linked. Control outside

air and return air dampers by their own control signal. Open outside air

damper as the first stage of cooling while return air damper remains

open.

(2) Once outside air damper is commanded 100% open, modulate

return air damper closed to maintain ACU discharge air temperature at

setpoint.

(3) Once return air damper is modulated fully closed, enable

mechanical cooling (subject to other lock-outs).

12. Direct Expansion (DX, or compressor) Cooling:

a) Lock out DX cooling when unit supply fan is off.

b) Lock-out DX cooling at outside air temperatures below the Cooling

OSAT Lock-Out setpoint (55°F, adjustable in program).

c) When DX cooling is on, switch loop control input from the discharge

air sensor to the mixed air sensor.




SPECIFICATIONS

d) If DX cooling is enabled and the discharge air temperature drops

below 45°F (adjustable in program), disable DX cooling. If after a time

delay (5 minutes) the discharge air temperature is above 49°F, enable DX

cooling.

e) Lock out DX cooling for a period of 30 minutes after unit starts.

f) Stage DX cooling based on average zone temperature deviation from

stage setpoints, and also as a function of the number of DX stages

available. DX is staged on at setpoint deviation intervals equal to 2 / #

stages. Split differential in all cases is 1.0.

(1) Example: unit has 4 stages of DX. Setpoint deviation interval = 2 /

4 = 0.5. Average Zone Temperature (AZT) setpoint = 72°F.

(2) DX Stage 1 on at AZT = 72°F + 0.5 interval + 1.0/2 differential =

73.0°F. Stage 2 off at AZT = 72°F + 0.5 - 1.0/2 differential = 72.0°F.

(3) DX Stage 2 on at AZT = 72.0°F + 1.0 interval + 1.0/2 differential

= 73.5°F. Stage 2 off at AZT = 72°F + 1.0 - ½ = 72.5°F.





13. Mixed Air Low Limit Mode:

a) If the mixed air temperature drops below setpoint (38°F, differential

=4 F degrees, adjustable in program) for 5 minutes, close OSA damper

and register alarm at graphic interface.

b) If the mixed air temperature remains below setpoint for an additional 5

minutes, stop the unit fans and register additional alarm at graphic

interface.

c) If the mixed air temperature rises above setpoint before the end of the

second 5 minute delay, clear the alarm and return unit to normal occupied

operation.

d) Lock out fans and close OSA damper until the MAT Low Limit reset

command is manually issued through the graphic interface.




SPECIFICATIONS

b. Warm-Up / Cool-Down Mode:

1. Start supply fan based on the optimized start routine to bring the Average

Zone Temperature up / down to the target temperature (target temperature =

68°F, heating; 74°F, cooling) at start of Occupancy.

2. Optimized start routine is an adaptive program module that uses current

and prior outside air temperature and average zone temperature to calculate

the time required to raise / decrease average zone temperature to setpoints by

the start of occupancy.

3. Modulate supply fan VFD to maintain duct static pressure setpoint.

4. When outside air temperature is below 50°F, optimized start routine

enables Warm-Up (up to 3 hours prior to Occupancy, adjustable in program).

In Warm-Up, start supply fan, unit exhaust fan is off, close outside air

damper. Modulate HW control valve to maintain 85 degrees F.

5. When outside air temperature is greater than 60°F, optimized start routine

enables Cool-Down (up to 3 hours prior to Occupancy, adjustable in

program). In Cool-Down, start unit in occupied mode, except DX cooling is

locked out until 30 minutes after unit start.

c. Night Low Limit Mode:

1. When the average zone temperature of all zones served by the unit falls

below the Night Low Limit setpoint (62°F, split differential = 4 F degrees,

i.e., disabled at setpoint +2 degrees F, enabled at setpoint -2 degrees F,

adjustable in program), start Night Low Limit Mode.

2. Unit off if AZT of all zones is above Night Low Limit setpoint and only

average zone temperature of zones served by fan-powered terminal units is

below NLL setpoint.

3. Modulate supply fan VFD to maintain duct static pressure setpoint.

4. Close outside air damper.

5. Exhaust fan(s) off.

d. Unoccupied Mode: Unit fans off; DX cooling off; outside air damper, unit

heating valve, terminal unit dampers, and terminal unit reheat valves are closed.

e. Fan Operation in Hand Mode: If fan is in Hand Operation and High Duct

Static alarm, Fire/Smoke alarm, Mixed Air Temperature Low Limit alarm, or

Freeze alarm occurs, the fan system will be shut down.




SPECIFICATIONS

6. Unit Heaters: Room temperature sensor signals controller which cycle normally

open modulating, two-way hot water coil valve and fan to maintain space temperature

setpoint.

7. Variable Speed Drives: Variable speed drives monitored by controller though

LAN communications port on each drive. Refer to Section 15905. As minimum

following points be monitored:

a. Frequency output - Hz

b. Speed - RPM

c. Current - Amps

d. Power - percentage

e. Runtime - Hours

f. System Fault

g. Input speed setpoint - RPM

8. Electric Wall Heaters: Operate on standalone thermostat control.

9. Packaged Rooftop Heat Recovery Unit (HRV-1):

a. General: Unit to operate under following modes: Occupied, Shutdown, and

Unoccupied. H-O-A switches on graphics screen or text dialog boxes may

override equipment.

b. Occupied Mode:

1. Occupied mode initiated from controller-based on time of day or operator

input. During occupied mode supply and exhaust fans run continuously.

2. Exhaust and outside air dampers open.

3. Heat wheel motor runs continuously unless outside air being used to meet

space temperature setpoint. Stop heat wheel when outside air temperature is 4

degrees F less than space temperature setpoint and there is a call for cooling.

4. Stage mechanical cooling if there is a call for cooling. Mechanical cooling

to be used as second stage of cooling if outside air is being used to cool space.

Lock out mechanical cooling below 60 degrees F outside air temperature.

5. Modulating heating control valve if there is a call for heating. Lock out

heating above 65 degrees F outside air temperature.




SPECIFICATIONS

6. Initial space temperature setpoints of 70 degrees F for heating and 72

degrees F for cooling. Call for heat at 2 degrees F below heating setpoint. Call

for cooling at 2 degrees F above cooling setpoint.

c. Unoccupied Mode:

1. Supply and exhaust fans off.

2. Exhaust and outside air dampers closed.

3. Heat wheel motor stopped.

4. If unoccupied space temperature setpoints are exceeded, open exhaust and

outside air dampers and start supply and exhaust fans. Control heating and

cooling to unoccupied setpoints. When setpoints are exceeded by 2 degrees F,

revert to standard unoccupied mode. Unoccupied heating setpoint initially set

at 65 degrees F. Unoccupied cooling setpoint initially set at 88 degrees F.

d. Shutdown Mode: During fire alarm, shutdown unit.

10. Recirculating Domestic Hot Water Pump (CP-1):

a. Pump will operate continuously when building is in occupied mode and in

warm-up mode.

b. Current transformer located in pump power circuit signals pump or controller

failure to central controller.

11. Domestic Hot Water System (CP-2)

a. When storage tank (ST-1) temperature drops 2 deg F below setpoint (130 deg

F,adj), modulate open process heating water control valve on hot side of domestic

hot water heat exchanger.

b. Initiate circulation pump (CP-2) upon process heating water control valve

opening

c. When temperature of storage tank (ST-1) is 2 deg F above setpoint (130 deg

F, adj), close process heating water control valve and continue to operate

circulation pump (CP-2) for five minutes. Disable pump after five minutes of

operation.

12. General Exhaust Fan (EF-1):

a. Fan controller receives signal from building controller, which initiates

occupied or unoccupied mode. During occupied mode open isolation damper and

run fan continuously. During unoccupied mode close isolation damper and fan

off.




SPECIFICATIONS

b. Current transformer signals controller which generates alarm when

fan/controller fails to operate.

13. Ductless Split System: Control from standalone wireless thermostat. Start/stop

fan and stage cooling based on thermostat setpoint.

14. Variable Volume Reheat Terminal Units (VVR):

a. Variable volume terminal unit controller receive signal from building

controller, which initiates occupied or unoccupied mode. Manual switch on room

temperature sensor overrides unoccupied mode for predetermined time period.

During unoccupied mode space temperature reset to night setback set points and

during occupied mode space temperature reset to occupied set points.

b. Unoccupied Mode:

1. Normally closed terminal unit damper closed and normally open heating

coil valve closed.

2. Only when central air handling unit is running, space temperature sensor

signals terminal unit controller which modulates normally open air damper

between its maximum and minimum airflow setting to maintain unoccupied

space temperature.

3. Only when central air handling unit is running, space temperature sensor

signals terminal unit controller which positions air damper to heating airflow

setting and modulate normally open two-way hot water coil valve to maintain

unoccupied space temperature.

c. Occupied Mode:

1. Room temperature sensor signals terminal unit controller which modulates

normally open air damper between its maximum and low minimum setpoints

to maintain space temperature.

2. When airflow has reached its scheduled low minimum and space

temperature remains below setpoint, controller modulates airflow to heating

airflow position and modulate normally open two-way hot water coil valve to

maintain occupied space temperature setpoint.

d. Warm-up Mode: Terminal units receive global signal from building controller

to initiate warm-up mode. During warm-up mode modulate damper between

maximum and minimum airflow and close hot-water valve to maintain space

temperature.




SPECIFICATIONS

H. POINTS LISTS

1. Exhaust Fans:

SYSTEM:

EF-1

ANALOG DIGITAL ALARMS

IN OUT IN OUT

Fan on/off. X Fail

Failure. X Fail

2. VAV Terminal Units:

SYSTEM: ANALOG DIGITAL ALARMS

IN OUT IN OUT

Zone temperature. X

Occupied heating and cooling setpoints. X Fail

Occupied setup/setback heating/cooling

setpoint/damper control.

X

Zone airflow. X

Timed override request from space. X

Discharge air temperature. X

Heating valve position. X

Damper control. X

3. Pumps:

SYSTEM:

CP-1, CP-2, HWP-1, HWP-2


IN OUT IN OUT

Start/stop. X

Status. X

Differential pressure (HW system). X

Differential pressure setpoint. X

4. VAV Air Conditioning Units:

SYSTEM:

VAV-1


IN OUT IN OUT

Discharge air temperature. X X High, Low

Supply duct static pressure. X High

Return air temperature. X

Supply fan start/stop. X

Supply fan status. X Fail

Exhaust fan start/stop. X

Exhaust fan status. X Fail

Cooling stages. X Fail

Exhaust fan start/stop. X Fail

Heating valve. X

Unit status. X

Filter status. X

Fire alarm input. X




SPECIFICATIONS

SYSTEM:

VAV-1


IN OUT IN OUT

Position of outside air dampers. X

Outside air temperature. X

Mixed air temperature. X High, Low

Supply fan VFD speed. X

Exhaust fan VFD speed. X

Building pressure. X High, Low

FA/fan drive shut-down. X

Freezestat. X Alarm,

Normal

5. Heat Exchangers:

SYSTEM:

HX-1, HX-2, DHX-1


IN OUT IN OUT

Plant fluid inlet temperature (T-4). X

Plant fluid outlet temperature (T-3). X

Building inlet temperature (T-2). X

Building outlet temperature (T-1). X

HW supply temperature (at HX) (2). X

HW return temperature (at HX) (2). X

HW control valve (2). X

Plant water flow. X

Domestic hot water storage tank. X

6. Unit Heaters (UH-1 through UH-18):

SYSTEM ANALOG DIGITAL ALARMS

IN OUT IN OUT

Zone temperature. X

Fan start/stop. X Fail

Status. X

Heating control valve. X

Zone temperature setpoint. X

7. Heat Recovery Units (HRV-1):


IN OUT IN OUT

Discharge air temperature. X High, Low

Return air temperature. X

Supply fan on/off. X

Supply fan status. X Fail

Exhaust fan on/off. X

Exhaust fan status. X Fail

Heating control valve. X

Staged cooling. X




SPECIFICATIONS


IN OUT IN OUT

Fire alarm input. X

Position of outside air dampers. X

Outside air temperature. X

Exhaust air temperature. X High, Low

FA/fan drive shutdown. X

Heat wheel motor. X Fail

8. Miscellaneous:


IN OUT IN OUT

Elevator alarm (EA-1). X

Process cold water meter (PWM). X

END OF SECTION



VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES SECTION 15905 - 1 of 8

SECTION 15905 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

15905-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY

1. Work included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of: Variable

Frequency Drives (VFD)

B. RELATED SECTIONS


Section.



Requirements.


a. UL 508, Industrial Control Equipment.

b. NEMA ICS 7, Industrial Control and Systems: Adjustable-Speed Drives;

National Electrical Manufacturers Association, latest edition.

c. IEC 16800 parts 1, 2 and 3

d. NEC 430.120, Adjustable-Speed Drive Systems.

D. SUBMITTALS



a. Product Data: Indicate voltage, controller size, ratings and size of switching

and overcurrent protection devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, weights and

enclosure detains.

b. Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall

dimensions and weights shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; and

name plate legends.




c. Test Reports: Subject VFD to preliminary functional test, and final test at 104

degrees F (40 degrees C), at full rated load. Indicate field test and inspection

procedures and test results.

d. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include installation instructions for starting and

operating controllers, and describe operating limits that may result in hazardous or

unsafe conditions.

e. Maintenance Data: Include routine preventive maintenance schedule.

f. Rated input: Maximum electric load rating in amperes.



Requirements.

2. In addition, meet following for Qualifications: Provide VFDs and options UL

listed as a complete assembly. Base VFD UL listed for 100 KAIC without the need

for input fuses.

F. WARRANTY



15905-02 PRODUCTS

A. MANUFACTURERS

1. ABB

2. Allen Bradley

3. Danfoss

4. General Electric

5. Siemens

6. Square D

7. Toshiba

8. Yaskawa





B. DESCRIPTION

1. Variable Frequency Drive: Solid state, with Pulse Width Modulated (PWM)

output waveform in a UL listed enclosure (enclosures with only NEMA ratings are

not acceptable), completely assembled and tested by manufacturer. Employ full wave

rectifier, AC or DC Line Reactor, capacitors, and Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors

(IGBTs) as output switching device.

2. Enclosure: UL rated and UL listed as a plenum rated VFD with NEMA 1

enclosure (indoors), NEMA 3R (outdoors), NEMA 12 (for indoor dusty locations),

NEMA 8 (hazardous, Class I, Div I) and NEMA 9 (Class II, Div I). Manufacturers

standard enamel.

3. Drive manufacturer to supply the drive and necessary options specified. VFD's

that are manufactured by a third party and "brand labeled" are not acceptable.

Provide VFD's installed on this project from the same manufacturer.

C. OPERATING REQUIREMENTS

1. Rated Input Voltage: VAC as scheduled on drawings, plus or minus 10 percent, 3

phase, 48 to 63 Hz.

2. Rated Output Voltage: 0 to input voltage, 3 phase, 0 to 120 Hz.

3. Fundamental Power Factor: Between 1.0 and 0.97, lagging, over entire range of

operating speed and load.

4. Minimum Efficiency at Full Speed and Full Load: 97 percent or better.

5. Volts Per Hertz Adjustment: Plus or minus 10 percent.

6. Current Adjustment: 60 to 110 percent or rated.

7. Acceleration Rate Adjustment: 0.5 to 30 seconds.

8. Deceleration Rate Adjustment: 1 to 30 seconds.

9. Transient protection against normal transients and surges in incoming power line.

10. Environmental Conditions: 32 degrees F to 104 degrees F (0 degrees C to 40

degrees C) at 4kHz switching frequency, 0 to 3000-feet above sea level, less than 95

percent RH, noncondensing. Circuit boards to have conformal coating.

11. Seismic Testing: Tested to ICC AS-156. Submit certificate of compliance.




D. STANDARD FEATURES

1. VFD's to have the same customer interface, including digital display, and keypad,

regardless of horsepower rating. Provide removable keypad, capable of remote

mounting and allow for uploading and downloading of parameter settings as an aid

for start-up of multiple VFD's.

2. Fault Mode on Loss of Input:

a. Display fault.

b. Run at programmable preset speed as selected by user.

3. Utilize English digital display (code numbers are not acceptable). Digital

Display: Three configurable lines of LCD display, backlit, adjustable contrast. Setup

parameters, indications, faults, warnings, status indicators and other information in

words without use of manual or cross reference table.

4. Automatic restart after overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage, or loss of input

signal protective trip. Programmable number of restart attempts, trial time, and time

between reset attempts.

5. Capable of starting into rotating load (forward or reverse) and accelerate or

decelerate to setpoint without safety tripping or component damage (flying start).

6. Automatic extended power loss ride-through circuit.

7. Customer terminal strip isolated from line and ground.

8. Keypad Hand-Off-Auto switch. When in "Off" VFD will be stopped. When in

"Auto" VFD will start via external contact closure and its speed will be controlled via

external speed reference. When in “Hand” VFD will be controlled via keypad up and

down arrows.

9. Safety Interlocks: Furnish terminals for remote contact to inhibit starting under

both manual and automatic mode.

10. Input Line Reactor: Five percent impedance AC or DC, to reduce harmonics to

power line and to add protection from AC line transients.

11. Output filters for VFD's located more than 350 conductor feet from motor served.

12. Optimized for 4 kHz carrier frequency to reduce motor noise.

13. Disconnecting Means: Include door interlocked, UL 508C listed circuit breaker or

fused disconnect switch.

14. Control circuit transformer with fused primary and secondary circuits.




15. Motor overload protection: Fused disconnects for each motor when serving

multiple motors from one drive.

16. Input current rating of the VFD to be no more than 3 percent greater than the

output current rating. VFD's with higher input current ratings require the upstream

wiring, protection devices, and source transformers to be oversized per NEC 430.120.

17. VFD to provide a programmable loss-of-load (broken belt/broken coupling)

Form-C relay output. Provide programmable drive to signal the loss-of-load

condition via a keypad warning, Form-C relay output, and / or over the serial

communications bus.

E. PROTECTION CIRCUITS

1. Overload Rating: 110 percent of its variable torque current rating for 1 minute

every 10 minutes at 104 degrees F (40 degrees C), and 140 percent of its H torque

current rating for 2 seconds every 15 seconds.

2. 350 percent instantaneous overcurrent trip.

3. 130 percent to 65 percent over and under voltage trip.

4. Over temperature trip at 115 degrees F.

5. Short circuit protection, either running or at start, for phase to phase and phase to

ground faults, phase rotation insensitive.

6. Adaptable Electronic Motor Overload (I2t).

7. EMI/RFI Filters: VFD's to include EMI/RFI filters. Onboard filters to allow the

entire VFD assembly to be CE Marked and the VFD to meet product standard EN

61800-3 for the First Environment restricted. No Exceptions.

8. Orderly Shutdown: In event of any of above conditions, shutdown drive safely

without component failure.

F. DISPLAY AND CONTROL INTERFACE

1. Serial Communications:

a. VFD to have an EIA-485 port as standard. Standard protocols: Modbus,

Johnson Controls N2, Siemens Building Technologies FLN, and BACnet MS/TP.

The use of third party gateways and multiplexers is not acceptable. Protocols

“certified” by the governing authority (i.e. BTL Listing for BACnet).




2. Display operating information at VFD and provide separate interface signal for

Building Automation System (BAS) via communications port to display and control

following:

a. Frequency Output - Hz

b. Output voltage - Volts

c. Current - Amps

d. Speed - RPM

e. Runtime - Hours

f. System Fault

g. Input Speed Setpoint - RPM

h. On/Off Control Signal

i. Calculated Motor Power - percentage or kW

j. kWh meter

G. ADJUSTMENTS

1. Three programmable critical frequency lockout ranges.

2. Two programmable analog inputs. Analog inputs to include filters programmable

from 0.01 to 10 seconds to remove any oscillation in input signal.

3. Six programmable digital inputs for maximum flexibility in interfacing with

external devices.

4. Three remote contacts for fault including on/off status, fault and future

configuration.

5. Two programmable analog outputs proportional to frequency, motor speed, output

voltage, output current, or scalable parameter selected by Owner.




6. Run permissive circuit: Provide a run permissive circuit for damper or valve

control. Regardless of the source of a run command (keypad command, input contact

closure, time-clock control, or serial communications), the VFD to provide a dry

contact closure that will signal the damper to open (VFD motor does not operate).

When the damper is fully open, a normally open dry contact (end-switch) to close.

The closed end-switch is wired to a VFD digital input and allows VFD motor

operation. Provide a minimum of two separate safety interlock inputs. When any

safety is opened, the motor commanded to coast to stop and the damper commanded

to close.

7. The VFD control to include a programmable time delay for VFD start and a

keypad indication that this time delay is active. A Form C relay output provides a

contact closure to signal the VAV boxes open. This will allow VAV boxes to be

driven open before the motor operates.

8. The VFD to include a fireman's override input. Mode to override other inputs

(analog/digital, serial communication, and keypad commands), except customer

defined safety run interlocks, and force the motor to run at a preset speed or in a

separate PID mode.

15905-03 EXECUTION

A. INSTALLATION

1. Install in accordance with manufacturers installation instructions. Maintain

manufacturer's and NEC service clearances.

2. Install on strut support stand and brace for seismic.



4. Power wiring completed by the contractor, to NEC code 430.122 wiring

requirements based on the VFD input current.

B. START-UP

1. Factory certified service representative to supervise start-up in accordance with


2. Make final adjustments to assure proper operation of load system. Demonstrate

final set-up and programming to Owner.




3. Test unit in modes of operation and demonstrate compliance with requirements.

Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.

END OF SECTION



COMMISSIONING OF HVAC AND PLUMBING SECTION 15945 - 1 of 14

SECTION 15945 – COMMISSIONING OF HVAC AND PLUMBING

15945-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY

1. Work included: Provision of materials, installation and testing of: Definitions,

warranties, test equipment requirements, and mechanical commissioning

requirements.

B. RELATED SECTIONS


Section.

2. In addition, reference the following: Section 01810, General Commissioning

Requirements.



Requirements.

2. In addition, meet the following: ASHRAE Guideline 0, The Commissioning

Process.

D. SUBMITTALS



a. Certificates of readiness.

b. Certificates of completion of installation, prestart, and startup activities.

c. O&M Manuals.

d. Test reports.

e. Control Drawings Submittal

1. Provide a key to abbreviations.




2. Provide graphic schematic depictions of the systems and each component.

3. Include the system and component layout of any equipment that the

control system monitors, enables or controls, even if the equipment is

primarily controlled by packaged or integral controls.

4. Provide a full points list with at least the following included for each

point:

a) Controlled system

b) Point abbreviation

c) Point description

d) Display unit

e) Control point or set point (Yes / No)

f) Monitoring point (Yes / No)

g) Intermediate point (Yes / No)

h) Calculated point (Yes / No)

f. Architect forwards one set of submittals for systems to be commissioned to

Commissioning Agent at same time as design team.

g. Design team sends consolidated response to submittals and copies to

Commissioning Agent.



Requirements.

2. In addition, meet the following for Test Equipment Calibration Requirements:

Contractors will comply with test manufacturer's calibration procedures and intervals.

Recalibrate test instruments immediately after instruments have been repaired

resulting from being dropped or damaged. Affix calibration tags to test instruments.

Furnish calibration records to CxA upon request.

F. WARRANTY







a. Commissioning, inspecting, and testing will not modify terms or time periods

of mechanical equipment, systems, and controls warranties including related

equipment and systems, and adjacent work.

b. Control system warranty period starts from date of Commissioning Agent

acceptance.

G. COORDINATION

1. Reference Section 01810 for requirements pertaining to coordination during the

commissioning process.

15945-02 PRODUCTS

A. TEST EQUIPMENT

1. Provide standard testing equipment required to perform startup, initial checkout

and functional performance testing for the equipment being tested. For example, the

mechanical contractor of Division 15 will ultimately be responsible for standard

testing equipment for the HVAC&R system and controls system in Division 15,

except for the equipment specific to and used by TAB in their commissioning

responsibilities. Provide a sufficient quantity of two-way radios by each

subcontractor.

2. Include special equipment, tools and instruments (specific to a piece of equipment

and only available from vendor) required for testing in the base bid price to the

Owner and leave on site, except for stand-alone data logging equipment that may be

used by the CxA.

3. Manufacturer of equipment to provide proprietary test equipment and software

required for programming and/or start-up, whether specified or not. Manufacturer

provides the test equipment, demonstrates its use, and assists in the commissioning

process as needed. Proprietary test equipment (and software)become the property of

the Owner upon completion of the commissioning process.

4. Data logging equipment and software required to test equipment will be provided

by the CxA, and will not become the property of the Owner.




5. Use only testing equipment of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or

measure system performance with the tolerances specified in the specifications. If

not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply: Temperature

sensors and digital thermometers have a certified calibration within the past year to an

accuracy of 0.5 degrees F and a resolution of plus or minus 0.1 degrees F. Pressure

sensors have an accuracy of plus or minus 2.0 percent of the value range being

measured (not full range of meter) and have been calibrated within the last year.

15945-03 EXECUTION

A. GENERAL DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS

1. With assistance from the installing contractors, the CxA will prepare Pre-

Functional Checklists for commissioned components, equipment, and systems

2. Red-lined Drawings:

a. Verify equipment, systems, instrumentation, wiring and components are

shown correctly on red-lined drawings.

b. Preliminary red-lined drawings must be made available to the Commissioning

Team for use prior to the start of Functional Performance Testing.

c. Changes, as a result of Functional Testing, must be incorporated into the final

as-built drawings, which will be created from the red-lined drawings.

d. The contracted party, as defined in the Contract Documents will create the as-

built drawings.

3. Operation and Maintenance Data:

a. Contractor will provide a copy of O&M literature within 45 days of each

submittal acceptance for use during the commissioning process for commissioned

equipment and systems.

b. The CxA will review the O&M literature once for conformance to project

requirements.

c. The CxA will receive a copy of the final approved O&M literature once

corrections have been made by the Contractor.

4. Demonstration and Training:

a. Contractor will provide demonstration and training as required by the

specifications.




b. A complete training plan and schedule must be submitted by the contractor to

the CxA four weeks prior to any training.

c. A training agenda for each training session must be submitted to the CxA one

week prior the training session.

d. Notify the CxA at least 72 hours in advance of scheduled tests so that testing

may be observed by the CxA and Owner's representative. Provide a copy of the

test record to the CxA, Owner, and Architect.

e. Engage a Factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specific equipment.

f. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for

starting and stopping, trouble shooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.

g. Review data in O&M Manuals.

B. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

1. Mechanical, Controls and TAB Contractors. The commissioning responsibilities

applicable to each of the mechanical, controls and TAB contractors of Division 15 are

as follows (references apply to commissioned equipment only):

2. Perform commissioning tests at the direction of the CxA.

3. Attend construction phase controls coordination meetings.

4. Attend testing, adjusting, and balancing review and coordination meetings.

5. Participate in HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and component

maintenance orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA.

6. Provide information requested by the CxA for final commissioning

documentation.

7. Include requirements for submittal data, operation and maintenance data, and

training in each purchase order or sub-contract written.

8. Prepare preliminary schedule for Mechanical system orientations and inspections,

operation and maintenance manual submissions, training sessions, pipe and duct

system testing, flushing and cleaning, equipment start-up, testing and balancing and

task completion for owner. Distribute preliminary schedule to commissioning team

members.

9. Update schedule as required throughout the construction period.




10. During the startup and initial checkout process, execute the related portions of the

prefunctional checklists for commissioned equipment.

11. Assist the CxA in verification and functional performance tests.

12. Gather operation and maintenance literature on equipment, and assemble in

binders as required by the specifications. Submit to CxA (45) days after submittal

acceptance.

13. Coordinate with the CxA to provide (48) hour advance notice so that the

witnessing of equipment and system start-up and testing can begin.

14. Notify the CxA a minimum of (2) weeks in advance of the time for start of the

testing and balancing work. Attend the initial testing and balancing meeting for

review of the official testing and balancing procedures.

15. Participate in, and schedule vendors and contractors to participate in the training

sessions.

16. Provide written notification to the CM/GC and CxA Authority that the following

work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that the

equipment, systems, and sub-system are operating as required.

a. HVAC&R equipment including fans, air handling units, ductwork, dampers,

terminals, and other equipment furnished under this Division.

b. Fire stopping in the fire rated construction, including fire and smoke damper

installation, caulking, gasketing and sealing of smoke barriers.

c. Fire detection and smoke detection devices furnished under other divisions of

the specification.

17. Equipment supplier to document the performance of his equipment.

18. Test, Adjust and Balance Contractor

a. Attend initial commissioning coordination meeting scheduled by the

Commissioning Authority.

b. Participate in verification of the testing and balancing report, which will

consist of repeating measurements contained in the testing and balancing reports.

Assist in diagnostic purposes when directed.

19. Provide training of the Owner's operating staff using expert qualified personnel,

as specified.




20. Equipment Suppliers

a. Provide requested submittal data, including detailed start-up procedures and

specific responsibilities of the Owner, to keep warranties in force.

b. Assist in equipment testing per agreements with contractors.

c. Provide information requested by CxA regarding equipment sequence of

operation and testing procedures.

21. Reference Division 1 Section “General Commissioning Requirements” for

additional contractor responsibilities.

C. OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES

1. Reference Division 1 Section “General Commissioning Requirements” for

Owner's Responsibilities.

D. DESIGN PROFESSIONAL'S RESPONSIBILITIES

1. Reference Division 1 Section “General Commissioning Requirements” for Design

Professional's Responsibilities.

E. COMMISSIONING AUTHORITIES RESPONSIBILITIES

1. Reference Division 1 Section “General Commissioning Requirements” for CxA's

Responsibilities.

F. TESTING PREPARATION

1. Certify in writing to the CxA that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment

have been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating according to the

Contract Documents.

2. Certify in writing to the CxA that HVAC&R instrumentation and control systems

have been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract

Documents, and that pretest set points have been recorded.

3. Certify in writing that testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures have been

completed and that testing, adjusting, and balancing reports have been submitted,

discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved.




4. Place systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g.,

normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle,

emergency power, and alarm conditions).

5. Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on

checklists.

6. Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life-safety

systems during each mode of operation.

7. Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to

record test data as directed by the CxA.

G. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING VERIFICATION

1. Prior to performance of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing work, provide copies of

reports, sample forms, checklists, and certificates to the CxA.

2. Notify the CxA at least ten (10) days in advance of testing and balancing Work,

and provide access for the CxA to witness testing and balancing Work.

3. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to verify testing and balancing of

HVAC&R systems at the direction of the CxA.

a. The CxA will notify testing and balancing subcontractor ten (10) days in

advance of the date of field verification. Notice will not include data points to be

verified.

b. Testing and balancing subcontractor to use the same instruments (by model

and serial number) that were used when original data were collected.

c. Failure of an item includes, other than sound, a deviation of more than 10

percent. Failure of more than 10 percent of selected items to result in rejection of

final testing, adjusting, and balancing report. For sound pressure readings, a

deviation of 3 dB to result in rejection of final testing. Variations in background

noise must be considered.

d. Remedy the deficiency and notify the CxA so verification of failed portions

can be performed.

H. GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS

1. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to perform commissioning test at

the direction of the CxA.




2. Scope of HVAC&R testing to include entire HVAC&R installation, from central

equipment for heat generation and refrigeration through distribution systems to each

conditioned space. Testing to include measuring capacities and effectiveness of

operational and control functions.

3. Test operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal or

emergency conditions, and verify proper response of building automation system

controllers and sensors.

4. The CxA along with the HVAC&R contractor, testing and balancing

Subcontractor, and HVAC&R Instrumentation and Control Subcontractor to prepare

detailed testing plans, procedures, and checklists for HVAC&R systems, subsystems,

and equipment.

5. Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible.

6. Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it is

not practical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate

testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions

as directed by the CxA and document simulated conditions and methods of

simulation. After tests, return settings to normal operating conditions.

7. The CxA may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is not

practical.

8. The CxA may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when

design or simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical.

9. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the

HVAC&R system, document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After

deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests.

10. If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, complete appropriate initial

performance tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests.

I. HVAC&R SYSTEMS, SUBSYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT TESTING

PROCEDURES

1. Equipment Testing and Acceptance Procedures: Testing requirements are

specified in individual Division 15 sections. Provide submittals, test data, inspector

record, and certifications to the CxA.

2. HVAC&R Instrumentation and Control System Testing: Field testing plans and

testing requirements are specified in Division 15 Sections "Instrumentation and

Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls." Assist the

CxA with preparation of testing plans.




3. Pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic tests, and chemical treatment: Test

requirements are specified in Division 15 piping Sections. HVAC&R Contractor to

prepare a pipe system cleaning, flushing, and hydrostatic testing plan. Provide

cleaning, flushing, testing, and treating plan and final reports to the CxA. Plan to


a. Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each section of pipe to be

tested, identified by pipe zone or sector identification marker. Markers keyed to

Drawings for each pipe sector, showing the physical location of each designated

pipe test section. Provide drawings keyed to pipe zones or sectors formatted to

allow each section of piping to be physically located and identified when referred

to in pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic testing, and chemical treatment

plan.

b. Description of equipment for flushing operations.

c. Minimum flushing water velocity.

d. Tracking checklist for managing and ensuring that pipe sections have been

cleaned, flushed, hydrostatically tested, and chemically treated.

4. HVAC&R Distribution System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation,

tools, and equipment to test performance of air, steam, and hydronic distribution

systems; special exhaust; and other distribution systems, including HVAC&R

terminal equipment and unitary equipment.

5. Vibration and Sound Tests: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and

equipment to test performance of vibration isolation and seismic controls.

6. The work included in the commissioning process involves a complete and

thorough evaluation of the operation and performance of components, systems and

sub-systems. Evaluate the following equipment and systems:

a. HVAC Equipment and Systems (all)

b. Lighting Controls

c. Building Automation System

d. Domestic Hot Water Systems

e. Pumps

f. VFDs




J. DEFICIENCIES/NON-CONFORMANCE, COST OF RETESTING, FAILURE DUE

TO MANUFACTURER DEFECT

1. Reference Division 1 for requirements pertaining to deficiencies/non-

conformance, cost of retesting, or failure due to manufacturer defect.

K. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

1. The Operation and Maintenance Manuals to conform to Contract Documents

requirements as stated in Division 15.

2. Provide an updated as-built version of the control drawings and sequences of

operation in the final controls O&M manual submittal.

L. TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL

1. Mechanical contractor's training responsibilities:

a. Provide the CxA with a training plan two weeks before the planned training.

b. Provide designated Owner personnel with comprehensive orientation and

training in the understanding of the systems and the operation and maintenance of

each piece of HVAC equipment including, but not limited to, HVAC equipment

(ex. pumps, heat exchangers, heat rejection equipment, air conditioning units, air

handling units, fans, terminal units, controls and water treatment systems, etc.)

c. Training starts with classroom sessions followed by hands-on training on each

piece of equipment to illustrate the various modes of operation, including startup,

shutdown, fire/smoke alarm, power failure, etc.

d. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance

with the requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of operations, the system

will be repaired or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated.

e. The appropriate trade or manufacturer's representative provides the

instructions on each major piece of equipment. This person may be the start-up

technician for the piece of equipment, the installing contractor or manufacturer's

representative. Practical building operating expertise as well as in-depth

knowledge of modes of operation of the specific piece of equipment are required.

More than one party may be required to execute the training.

f. Controls contractor to attend sessions other than the controls training, as

requested, to discuss the interaction of the controls system as it relates to the

equipment being discussed.




g. The training sessions follow the outline in the Table of Contents of the

operation and maintenance manual and illustrate whenever possible the use of the

O&M manuals for reference.

h. Training includes:

1. Use of the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction

material included in the O&M manuals.

2. A review of the written O&M instructions emphasizing safe and proper

operating requirements, preventative maintenance, special tools needed and

spare parts inventory suggestions. Training to include start-up, operation in

all modes possible, shut-down, seasonal changeover and any emergency

procedures.

3. Discussion of relevant health and safety issues and concerns.

4. Discussion of warranties and guarantees.

5. Common troubleshooting problems and solutions.

6. Explanatory information included in the O&M manuals and the location of

plans and manuals in the facility.

7. Discussion of any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation.

i. Schedule training after functional testing is complete, unless approved

otherwise by the Owner.

2. Controls Contractor's training responsibilities:

a. Provide the CxA and AE with a training plan four weeks before the planned

training.

b. Provide designated Owner personnel training on the control system in this

facility. The intent is to clearly and completely instruct the Owner on the

capabilities of the control system.

c. Training manuals. The standard operating manual for the system and any

special training manuals will be provided for each trainee, with three extra copies

left for the O&M manuals. In addition, copies of the system technical manual

will be demonstrated during training and three copies submitted with the O&M

manuals. Manuals include detailed description of the subject matter for each

session. Manuals to cover control sequences and have a definitions section that

fully describes relevant words used in the manuals and in software displays.

Manuals will be approved by the CxA and AE. Deliver copies of audiovisuals to

the Owner.




d. The trainings will be tailored to the needs and skill-level of the trainees.

e. The trainers will be knowledgeable on the system and its use in buildings. For

the on-site sessions, the most qualified trainer(s) will be used. Owner to approve

the instructor prior to scheduling the training.

f. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance

with the requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of operations, the system

will be repaired or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated.

g. Attend sessions other than the controls training, as requested, to discuss the

interaction of the controls system as it relates to the equipment being discussed.

h. Two training sessions, as follows:

1. Training I. Control System. The first training consists of 3 hours of actual

training. This training may be held on-site or in the supplier's facility. If held

off-site, the training may occur prior to final completion of the system

installation. Upon completion, each student, using appropriate

documentation, should be able to perform elementary operations and describe

general hardware architecture and functionality of the system.

2. Training II. Building Systems. The second session held on-site for a

period of 5 hours of actual hands-on training after the completion of system

commissioning. The session includes instruction on:

a) Specific hardware configuration of installed systems in this building

and specific instruction for operating the installed system, including

HVAC systems, lighting controls and any interface with security and

communication systems.

b) Security levels, alarms, system start-up, shut-down, power outage and

restart routines, changing set points and alarms and other typical changed

parameters, overrides, freeze protection, manual operation of equipment,

optional control strategies that can be considered, energy savings

strategies and set points that if changed will adversely affect energy

consumption, energy accounting, procedures for obtaining vendor

assistance, etc.

c) Trending and monitoring features (values, change of state, totalization,

etc.), including setting up, executing, downloading, viewing both tabular

and graphically and printing trends. Trainees will actually set-up trends in

the presence of the trainer.

d) Completely discuss every screen, allowing time for questions.

e) Use of keypad or plug-in laptop computer at the zone level.




f) Use of remote access to the system via phone lines or networks.

g) Setting up and changing an air terminal unit controller.

h) Graphics generation

i) Point database entry and modifications

j) Understanding DDC field panel operating programming (when

applicable)

END OF SECTION



TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC SECTION 15950 - 1 of 28

SECTION 15950 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR

HVAC

15950-01 GENERAL

A. SUMMARY


a. Taking pre-tests of existing systems as identified on drawings.

b. Balancing airflow and water flow within distribution systems, including sub-

mains, branches, and terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified

tolerances.

c. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities.

d. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC equipment.

e. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC equipment.

f. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.

g. Measuring sound and vibration.

h. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.

B. RELATED SECTIONS


section.



Requirements.

D. SUBMITTALS






a. Quality-Assurance Submittals: Submit two copies of evidence that the

testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent and this Project's testing, adjusting, and

balancing team members meet the qualifications specified in the "Quality

Assurance" Article below.

b. Pre-Construction Phase Report:

1. Provide a pre-construction phase TAB Plan at least two weeks prior to the

commencement of TAB work. This report is to include:

2. A complete set of report forms intended for use on the project, with all

data filled in except for the field readings. Forms to be project specific.

3. Marked up shop drawings identifying all HVAC equipment to be

balanced, and associated outlets and terminal devices.

4. Identification of the type, manufacturer, and model of the actual

instruments to be used, and clear indication of which instrument will be used

to take each type of reading. Calibration certifications are to be included.

5. A narrative of any project specific and/or non-standard TAB procedures to

be used, and the equipment or systems they apply to.

c. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the

Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit two copies of the Contract Documents

review report as specified in Part 3 of this Section.

d. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Submit two copies of the testing, adjusting,

and balancing strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 below.

Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project.

e. Specify reports required because of editing procedures in Part 3 of this

Section.

f. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit two copies of

reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by the

testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.

g. Sample Report Forms: Submit two sets of sample testing, adjusting, and

balancing report forms.

h. Test Instrument Calibration: Submit proof of calibration within the last 6

months.

i. Final Report.




j. Provide additional submittals to commissioning authority as dictated in

commissioning specifications.



Requirements.


a. Acceptable Balance Firm:

1. `General: Procure services of independent balance and testing agency,

approved by Architect, which specializes in balancing and testing of

plumbing, heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems, to balance, adjust

and test water circulating and air moving equipment and air distribution or

exhaust systems. Minimum Experience: 5 years.

2. Industry Standards: Testing and Balancing will conform to NEBB,

American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers

(ASHRAE), and American National Standards Institute (ANSI) as follows:

a) NEBB: Comply with Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting

Balancing of Environmental Systems.

b) ASHRAE: Comply with recommendations pertaining to

measurements, instruments, and testing, adjusting and balancing.

c) ANSI:

d) S1.4 Specifications for sound level meters.

e) S1.11 Specifications for Octave-Band and Fractional-Octave-Band

analog and digital filters.

f) ANSI S1.13 Methods for the Measurement of Sound Pressure Levels.

3. Test Observation: If requested, conduct tests in the presence of the

Architect or the Architect's representative.




b. Noise Criteria:

1. Noise levels in all 8 octave bands due to equipment and duct systems not-

to-exceed the following NC levels:

TYPE OF ROOM NC LEVEL

Bathrooms and Toilet Rooms 35-40

Conference Room 30-35

Corridors (Public) 35-40

Lobbies, Waiting Areas 35-40

Offices, Large Open (3 or more

occupants)

35-40

Offices, Small Private (2 or fewer

occupants)

30-35

Dining 35-40

All Others 35-40

2. For equipment which has no sound power ratings scheduled on the plans,

select equipment that the foregoing noise criteria, local ordinance noise levels,

and OSHA requirements are not exceeded. Selection procedure in accordance

with ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook, Chapter 7, Sound and Vibration.

3. An allowance, not-to-exceed 5db, may be added to the measured value to

compensate for the variation of the room attenuating effect between room test

condition prior to occupancy and design condition after occupancy which may

include the addition of sound absorbing material, such as furniture. This

allowance may not be taken after occupancy. The room attenuating effect is

defined as the difference between sound power level emitted to room and

sound pressure level in room.

4. In absence of specified measurement requirements, measure equipment

noise levels three feet from equipment and at an elevation of maximum noise

generation.

c. Provide proof of testing agency having successfully completed at least five

projects of similar size and scope.

d. Code Compliance: Perform tests in the presence of the Authority Having

Jurisdiction (AHJ) where required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

e. Owner Witness: Perform tests in the presence of the Owners representative.

f. Engineer Witness: The engineer or engineer's representative reserves the right

to observe tests or selected tests to assure compliance with the specifications.




g. Simultaneous Testing: Test observations by the Authority Having Jurisdiction

(AHJ), the Owner's representative and the engineer's representative need not

occur simultaneously.

h. Do not perform testing, adjusting, and balancing work until heating,

ventilating, and air conditioning equipment has been completely installed and is

operating continuously as required.

i. Conduct air testing and balancing with clean filters in place. Clean strainers

prior to performing hydronic testing and balancing.

j. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent

certified by AABC or NEBB.

k. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Owner's and

the Architect's representatives on approval of the testing, adjusting, and balancing

strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details.

Ensure the participation of testing, adjusting, and balancing team members,

equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives, HVAC controls

Installer, and other support personnel. Provide 7 days' advance notice of

scheduled meeting time and location.

1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:

a) Submittal distribution requirements.

b) Contract Documents examination report.

c) Testing, adjusting, and balancing plan.

d) Work schedule and Project site access requirements.

e) Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.

f) Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

l. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the

testing, adjusting, and balancing field data reports. This certification includes the

following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare

certified testing, adjusting, and balancing reports.

2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balancing team complied with the

approved testing, adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified

and referenced in this Specification.




m. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from AABC's

"National Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."

n. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use standard forms from NEBB's

"Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental

Systems."

o. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC

national standards.

p. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in NEBB's

"Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental

Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."

q. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or

more frequently if required by the instrument manufacturer.

F. WARRANTY



G. DEFINITIONS

1. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment,

such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.

2. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains,

branches, and terminals, according to design quantities.

3. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more

factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby

more heat is withdrawn from a persons skin than is normally dissipated.

4. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to

yield repeatable results.

5. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.

6. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of

measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.

7. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the

suction side.




8. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted

conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

9. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the

performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those

presented when the fan was performance tested.

10. TAB: Testing and Balancing.

11. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters

or leaves the distribution system.

12. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or

equipment.

13. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible for performing

and reporting the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

14. Retain acronyms and abbreviations that remain after this Section has been edited

for Project.

15. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

16. AMCA: Air Movement and Control Association.

17. CTI: Cooling Tower Institute.

18. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

19. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.

H. COORDINATION

1. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems

and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC

systems and equipment to support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing

activities.

2. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates

and times.

3. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air

and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.




15950-02 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

15950-03 EXECUTION

A. PROJECT CONDITIONS

1. Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the site and existing building

during the entire testing, adjusting, and balancing period. Cooperate with the Owner

during testing, adjusting, and balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the

Owner's operations.

2. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner may occupy completed areas of the

building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with the Owner during testing,

adjusting, and balancing operations to minimize conflicts with the Owner's

operations.

B. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1. Where HVAC systems and/or components interface with life safety systems,

including fire and smoke detection, alarm, and controls, coordinate scheduling and

testing and inspection procedures with authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Perform TAB work with doors, closed windows, and ceilings installed etc., to

obtain simulated or project operating conditions. Do not proceed until systems

scheduled for testing, adjusting and balancing are clean and free from debris, dirt and

discarded building materials.

3. Where Owner occupies building during the testing period, cooperate with Owner

to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.

C. EXAMINATION

1. Examine Contract Documents to become familiar with project requirements and

to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper testing, adjusting,

and balancing of systems and equipment.

a. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary

Conditions of the Contract.

b. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gauge cocks, thermometer

wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume

dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and

locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective

balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.




2. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.

3. Examine project record documents described in Division 1.

4. Examine Architect's and Engineer's design data, including Basis-of-Design,

HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental

conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about

HVAC system and equipment controls.

5. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate

performance data to project conditions and requirements, including system effects

that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all

or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce the performance ratings

of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented

when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system

effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and

Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design,"

Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.

6. Coordinate requirements in system and equipment with this Section.

7. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and

that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual

Specification Sections have been performed.

8. Examine system and equipment test reports.

9. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated

balancing devices, such as test ports, gauge cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control

devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly

installed, and their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing

and for efficient system and equipment operation.

10. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting

and balancing.

11. Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed,

bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning

controls is ready for operation.

12. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes and mixing boxes, to

verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.

13. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.

14. Examine 3-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of

diverting or mixing fluid flows.




15. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and

straight fins.

16. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks

and controls.

17. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing,

adjusting, and balancing procedures.

18. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

D. PREPARATION

1. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step-

by-step procedures.

2. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify

the following:

a. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.

b. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.

c. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.

d. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.

e. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.

f. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.

g. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are

required and access to balancing devices is provided.

h. Windows, doors and other portions of the building envelope can be closed so

design conditions for system operations can be met.

3. Hold a pre-balancing meeting at least one week prior to starting TAB work.

Attendance is required by installers whose work will be tested, adjusted, or balanced.

4. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations.

Make instruments available to Architect to facilitate spot checks during testing.




E. GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES

1. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the

procedures contained in AABC national standards or NEBB's "Procedural Standards

for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and this Section.

2. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes

to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After

testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials

identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the

insulation Specifications for this Project.

3. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification

material, including damper-control positions, valve indicators, fan-speed-control

levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.

F. ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES

1. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for

supply systems and plus or minus 5 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent

of design. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of

design.

3. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design at coils

and plus or minus 5 percent at system pumps and equipment.

4. Adjust supply, return, and exhaust air quantities to maintain pressurization in

spaces indicated on plans. Note and document room-to-room pressurization and

maintain these relationships. Adjust pressure controlled spaces to within plus or

minus 0.01 in WC.

G. RECORDING AND ADJUSTING

1. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.

2. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices

allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.

3. Mark on drawings locations where traverse and other critical measurements were

taken and cross reference location in final report.

4. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or

that such disruption has been rectified.




5. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access

doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified

settings.

H. FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS BALANCING PROCEDURES

1. Prepare test reports for both fans and inlets and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's

outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Cross check the summation of

required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

2. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

3. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow

measurements.

4. Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the

return- and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing

dampers.

5. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

6. Verify that motor starters are equipped with thermal protection, sized for the

connected load.

7. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

8. Check for airflow blockages.

9. Check that condensate drains are installed, trapped and primed and routed to

drain.

10. Check for readily observable leaks in air-handling unit components and ductwork.

I. CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS BALANCING PROCEDURES

1. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm

listed by the fan manufacturer. Adjust fans to deliver design airflow at the lowest

possible speed.

a. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:

1. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as

practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and

transitions.




2. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible

connection.

3. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near

the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from

duct restrictions.

4. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the

plenum that houses the fan.

b. Measure static pressure across each air-handling unit component under final

balanced condition.

c. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in

design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Recommend corrective

action to align design and actual conditions.

d. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical

connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.

e. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor loading greater than

full load amps. Do not increase fan speed beyond fan class rating. Modulate

dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure no overload will occur.

Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, and economizer modes to

determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

f. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts

to design airflows within specified tolerances.

J. VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES

1. Compensating for Diversity:

a. When the total airflow of terminal units is more than the fan design airflow

volume, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum set-point airflow

condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the design airflow of

the fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly

among the branch ducts.

b. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems:

1. After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume

systems as follows:

2. Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return- and exhaust-air dampers

at a position that simulates full-cooling load.




3. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and

static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure to

deliver design airflow at the terminal unit.

4. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within 10 percent of design

airflow.

5. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to

deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use the terminal unit manufacturer's

written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct,

balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for

constant-volume air systems.

6. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to

deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional

reduction in airflow as described for constant-volume air systems.

7. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition

but leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow.

8. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum

return airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the

return-air ducts and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems.

9. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the

static-pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure

adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit. Balance

system to achieve the lowest required differential pressure for the system to

minimize fan brake horsepower.

10. Balance terminal units in variable volume systems for maximum cooling,

maximum heating, and minimum ventilation (demand based ventilation

systems) airflow rates.

11. Record the final fan performance data.

12. Additional Requirements: Provide all additional procedures to compensate

for diversity as prescribed in ASHRAE and/or NEBB Standards.

K. PARALLEL FAN POWERED TERMINAL UNIT ADDITIONAL PROCEDURES

1. Set primary air valve maximum volume per variable air volume system

procedures with heating fan off.

2. Set minimum primary air per schedule.

3. Adjust thermostat to operate heating fan.




4. Set fan speed to lowest speed that delivers design heating flow.

L. FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

1. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at

pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved

pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

2. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

3. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in

addition to the general preparation procedures specified above:

a. Open manual valves for maximum flow.

b. Check expansion tank liquid level, or air charge if bladder type.

c. Check makeup-water-station pressure gauge for adequate pressure for highest

vent.

d. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at

design flow.

e. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure.

f. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers and

coils.

g. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing

device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.

h. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually

operated.

M. HYDRONIC SYSTEMS BALANCING PROCEDURES

1. Determine water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures:

a. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed.

Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct

for differences in gauge heights. Note the point on the manufacturer's pump

curve at zero flow and confirm that the pump has the intended impeller size.




b. Check system resistance. With valves open, read pressure differential across

the pump and mark the pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump

discharge valve until design water flow is achieved. Report flow rates that are not

within plus or minus 5 percent of design.

c. Verify pump-motor amperage. Report conditions where actual amperage

exceeds motor nameplate amperage.

d. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.

e. Measure flow at stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.

System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-

drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.

f. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device or

adjust pump speed to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than design flow.

g. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of design flow rate as

follows:

1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over design

flow.

2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest

percentage over design flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest

percentage over design flow.

3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.

h. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage,

voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures, including

outdoor-air temperature.

i. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the

conclusions of balancing.

N. HEAT EXCHANGERS

1. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances.

2. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures.

3. Check the setting and operation of automatic temperature-control valves.

4. Measure hot and cold side pressure drops.

5. Record safety valve settings.




O. REPORTING

1. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract

Documents as specified in "Examination" Article above, prepare a report on the

adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and

additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring

and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general

construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.

2. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed

procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of

deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced.

P. FINAL REPORT

1. General: Computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in 3-

ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.

2. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified

testing and balancing engineer. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures,

along with proof of calibration.

3. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the

following:

a. Pump curves.

b. Fan curves.

c. Manufacturers' test data.

d. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.

e. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include

approved Shop Drawings and Product Data.

4. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the

following data in the final report, as applicable:

a. Title page.

b. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.

c. Project name.

d. Project location.




e. Architect's name and address.

f. Engineer's name and address.

g. Contractor's name and address.

h. Report date.

i. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report.

j. Summary of contents, including the following:

1. Design versus final performance.

2. Notable characteristics of systems.

3. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

k. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

l. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.

m. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design

values.

n. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the

following:

1. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

2. Conditions of filters.

3. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.

4. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.

5. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum pitch

diameter.

6. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.

7. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.

8. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.




5. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units, packaged rooftop unit air

tunnels, split systems, fan coils, heat pumps, and evaporator units with coils, include

the following:

a. Unit Data: Include the following:

1. Unit identification.

2. Location.

3. Make and type.

4. Model number and unit size.

5. Manufacturer's serial number.

6. Unit arrangement and class.

7. Discharge arrangement.

8. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

9. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches.

10. Number of belts, make, and size.

11. Number of filters, type, and size.

b. Motor Data: Include the following:

1. Make and frame type and size.

2. Horsepower and rpm.

3. Volts, phase, and hertz.

4. Full-load amperage and service factor.



c. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

1. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

2. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

3. Fan rpm.




4. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

5. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).

6. Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).

7. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).

8. Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa).

9. Outside airflow in cfm (L/s).

10. Return airflow in cfm (L/s).

11. Outside-air damper position.

12. Return-air damper position.

13. Vortex damper position.

6. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: For apparatus coils in all equipment with coils,


a. Coil Data: Include the following:

1. System identification.

2. Location.

3. Coil type.

4. Number of rows.

5. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.

6. Make and model number.

7. Face area in SF.

8. Tube size in NPS (DN).

9. Tube and fin materials.

10. Circuiting arrangement.

b. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

1. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s).




2. Average face velocity in fpm (m/s).

3. Air pressure drop in inches wg (Pa).

4. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).

5. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).

6. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).

7. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F (deg C).

8. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s).

9. Water pressure differential in feet of head or PSIG (kPa).

10. Entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C).

11. Leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C).

12. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.

13. Refrigerant suction pressure in PSIG (kPa).

14. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F (deg C).

15. Inlet steam pressure in PSIG (kPa).

7. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

a. Fan Data: Include the following:

1. System identification.

2. Location.

3. Make and type.

4. Model number and size.

5. Manufacturer's serial number.

6. Arrangement and class.






b. Motor Data: Include the following:

1. Make and frame type and size.

2. Horsepower and rpm.

3. Volts, phase, and hertz.




7. Number of belts, make, and size.

c. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:

1. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

2. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

3. Fan rpm.

4. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

5. Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

8. Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-

section and record the following:

a. Report Data: Include the following:

1. System and air-handling unit number.

2. Location and zone.

3. Traverse air temperature in deg F (deg C).

4. Duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

5. Duct size in inches.

6. Duct area in SF.

7. Design airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

8. Design velocity in fpm (m/s).




9. Actual airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

10. Actual average velocity in fpm (m/s).

11. Barometric pressure in PSIG (Pa).

9. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: For terminal units, include the following:


1. System and air-handling unit identification.


3. Test apparatus used.

4. Area served.

5. Air-terminal-device make.

6. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram.

7. Air-terminal-device type and model number.

8. Air-terminal-device size.

9. Air-terminal-device effective area in SF.



2. Air velocity in fpm (m/s).

3. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm (L/s).

4. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm (m/s).

5. Final airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

6. Final velocity in fpm (m/s).

7. Space temperature in deg F (deg C).




10. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include

the following:


1. System and air-handling unit identification.


3. Room or riser served.

4. Coil make and size.

5. Flowmeter type.





4. Water pressure drop in feet of head or PSIG (kPa).

5. Entering-air temperature in deg F (deg C).

6. Leaving-air temperature in deg F (deg C).

11. Compressor and Condenser Reports: For refrigerant side of unitary systems,

stand-alone refrigerant compressors, air-cooled condensing units, or water-cooled

condensing units, include the following:



2. Location.

3. Unit make and model number.

4. Manufacturer's compressor serial numbers.

5. Compressor make.

6. Compressor model and serial numbers.

7. Refrigerant weight in lb (kg).




8. Low ambient temperature cutoff in deg F (deg C).


1. Inlet-duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

2. Outlet-duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

3. Entering-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F (deg C).

4. Leaving-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F (deg C).

5. Condenser entering-water temperature in deg F (deg C).

6. Condenser leaving-water temperature in deg F (deg C).

7. Condenser water temperature differential in deg F (deg C).

8. Condenser entering-water pressure in feet of head or PSIG (kPa).

9. Condenser leaving-water pressure in feet of head or PSIG (kPa).

10. Condenser water pressure differential in feet of head or PSIG (kPa).

11. Control settings.

12. Unloader set points.

13. Low-pressure-cutout set point in PSIG (kPa).

14. High-pressure-cutout set point in PSIG (kPa).

15. Suction pressure in PSIG (kPa).

16. Suction temperature in deg F (deg C).

17. Condenser refrigerant pressure in PSIG (kPa).

18. Condenser refrigerant temperature in deg F (deg C).

19. Oil pressure in PSIG (kPa).

20. Oil temperature in deg F (deg C).

21. Voltage at each connection.

22. Amperage for each phase.

23. The kW input.




24. Crankcase heater kW.

25. Number of fans.

26. Condenser fan rpm.

27. Condenser fan airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

28. Condenser fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower.

29. Condenser fan motor voltage at each connection.

30. Condenser fan motor amperage for each phase.

12. Heat-Exchanger Test Reports: For hot-water heat exchangers, include the

following:



2. Location.

3. Service.

4. Make and type.

5. Model and serial numbers.

6. Ratings.

b. Primary Water Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:



3. Entering-water pressure in feet of head or PSIG (kPa).



c. Secondary Water Test Data: Include design and actual values for the

following:






3. Entering-water pressure in feet of head or PSIG (kPa).



13. Pump Test Reports: For pumps, include the following data. Calculate impeller

size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves.



2. Location.

3. Service.

4. Make and size.

5. Model and serial numbers.



8. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or PSIG (kPa).

9. Pump rpm.

10. Impeller diameter in inches.

11. Motor make and frame size.

12. Motor horsepower and rpm.




16. Seal type.


1. Static head in feet of head or PSIG (kPa).

2. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or PSIG (kPa).




3. Actual impeller size in inches.

4. Full-open flow rate in gpm (L/s).

5. Full-open pressure in feet of head or PSIG (kPa).

6. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or PSIG (kPa).

7. Final suction pressure in feet of head or PSIG (kPa).

8. Final total pressure in feet of head or PSIG (kPa).

9. Final water flow rate in gpm (L/s).



12. Flue-gas analysis is normally not part of testing, adjusting, and balancing

procedures but could be added.

14. Instrument Calibration Reports: For instrument calibration, include the following:

a. Report Data: Include the following:

1. Instrument type and make.

2. Serial number.

3. Application.

4. Dates of use.

5. Dates of calibration.

Q. ADDITIONAL TESTS

1. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform

additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being

maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

2. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not

performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional

inspections, testing, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.

END OF SECTION

Date post:	14-Jun-2020
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	0 times
Download:	0 times